Home

1096883-21 - heidenhain

1. sessssissrrsrrerrerrrerrerrerrerrrerrerrerrerrrrre 228 Example Full circle with Cart esian Coordinate Seciirasaisririrscirirnrnsi nini E anri AEE 229 TNC 620 User s Manual 28 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 6 5 6 6 Path contours Polar coordinates 2n ana na a reece tec eee ee ee ea ree ae eee 230 OEE E NEE N cists A EE A A E E E EEN aie A A EEE E E E 230 Zero point for polar coordinates Pole CU eicisisirerinr nei weiet niiae e EEUE eE Ea A a iea 231 SIUS A MT a A E EE E E a dhe se O EA A 23A Circular pani CP arnund Poe COren tiennie AE E EE AEN E ETE 232 Ciele GTP with tangental COMMe CMON issnaawtisuedeedatonebatda wastes ia E iaia a ai 232 aE EENE EA EE pee ee E N E cite aoc E A A EN N E E T EA EE 233 Example Linear movement with polar coordinatesS s sssssiesierusrrsrerrerrsrrrrerierrrrrerirrerrerrerrererrrrno 235 Example MEI oiin i iiaa e ai Oa T e 236 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 cccccssseceesssseeeeeesseeeeeeaseeeesasseeees 237 IEEE e en ene nn eae ee nee ee ce E ne E eee ee eee 237 BI PF OC MeN a eC EEE a ascitic cena envenomed tava E EEEE esearch ee 239 miiatng IVE FR CGO Clic aeeiioaaoe Eie NEEE ENE EEEE E RETE EREEREER 240 OVS TO FREDO ATN aenea E S EE TE A EE set EAEE EN EEE TE 240 Free SiGe line OL OE cI mile INV areeiro a a aa a aa Tda ean E aR 241 Fee circular patni Prograini N Ocene a N sa eustententa 242 PUA OOTY Th tea EA EEEE E
2. Incremental values O parameter programming Q parameter status Save actual position or values from calculator to Skip dialog questions delete mz ZO words m Z J Confirm entry and resume dialog END Conclude block and exit entry Clear numerical entry or TNC error message Abort dialog delete program section Controls of the TNC TNC 620 User s Manual 4 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Fundamentals About this manual About this manual The symbols used in this manual are described below This symbol indicates that important information about the function described must be considered This symbol indicates that there is one or more of the following risks when using the described function m Danger to workpiece Danger to fixtures Danger to tool Danger to machine Danger to operator This symbol indicates a possibly dangerous situation that may cause injuries if not avoided This symbol indicates that the described function must be adapted by the machine tool builder The function described may therefore vary depending on the machine This symbol indicates that you can find detailed information about a function in another manual Would you like any changes or have you found any errors We are continuously striving to improve our documentation for you Please help us by sending your requests to the following e mail address tnce userdoc heidenhain d
3. X option 44 m Expanded M128 FUNCTION TCPM X a Status displays Positions spindle speed feed rate X E X Larger depiction of position display Manual operation m X E X Additional status display form view E X E X m Display of handwheel traverse when machining with E X m X handwheel superimposition m Display of distance to go in a tilted system E E X TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 631 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 ITNC 530 Dynamic display of O parameter contents definable X number ranges OEM specitic additional status display via Python X mE X Graphic display of residual run time a X Individual color settings of user interface X Comparator Cycles Cycle TNC 620 ITNC 530 1 Pecking gt X lt 2 lapping 3 Slot milling 4 Pocket milling X XJ K X X 5 Circular pocket 6 Rough out SL recommended SL II Cycle 22 7 Datum shift 8 Mirror image 9 Dwell time 10 Rotation 11 Scaling 12 Program call 13 Spindle orientation X X XI XIXI X X X 14 Contour definition 15 Pilot drilling SL I recommended SL II Cycle 21 16 Contour milling SL I recommended SL II Cycle 24 17 tapping controlled spindle 18 Thread cutting 19 Working plane 20 Contour data 21 Pilot drilling 22 Rough out option 8 Option 8 option 1
4. First steps with the TNC 620 1 5 Setting up tools The tool table TOOL T In the tool table TOOL T permanently saved under TNC table save the tool data such as length and radius but also further tool specific information that the TNC needs to perform its functions EJ too table editing Best run Gi Program run full seq t uence Tool table editing E E z y hy A To enter tool data in the tool table TOOL T proceed as follows F TOOL gt Display the tool table The TNC shows the tool T vq table gt Edit the tool table Set the EDITING soft key to ON gt With the upward or downward arrow keys you can select the tool number that you want to edit gt With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can p select the tool data that you want to edit tT t oN ae gt To exit the tool table press the END key _ _ _ _ _ _ Ko A o Y i PAGE Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of operation page 73 m Working with the tool table see Enter tool data into the table page 1 0 TNC 620 User s Manual 64 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The pocket table TOOL_PTCH The function of the pocket table depends on the machine Refer to your machine manual In the pocket table TOOL_PTCH permanently saved under TNC table you specify which tools your tool magazine contai
5. 8 L 10 11 12 13 Programmin g 4 3 BEGIN PGM EX11 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 135 Y 40 Z 5 BLK FORM 0 2 X 30 Y 40 Z 0 f TOOL CALL 3 Z 81500 L Z 20 RO FMAX M3 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 Q201 Q206 Q202 Q210 Q203 Q204 Q211 2 15 150 50 0 SET UP CLEARANCE DEPTH FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG PLUNGING DEPTH DWELL TIME AT TOP SURFACE COORDINATE 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE DWELL TIME AT DEPTH L X 0 Y 0 RO FMAX M99 X 30 Y 0 RO FMAX M99 TOOL CALL 6 Z 83000 F2222 L Z 20 RO FMAX M3 CYCL DEF 14 0 CONTOUR CYCL DEF 14 1 CONTOUR LABEL1 2 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA Q1 30 Q2 1 Q3 0 MILLING DEPTH TOOL PATH OVERLAP ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE BEGIN END MOVE INSERT gt WORD lt d OVERWRITE 141 Programming Programming aids 4 4 Structuring programs 4 4 Structuring programs Definition and applications This TNC function enables you to comment part programs In structuring blocks Structuring blocks are short texts with up to 252 characters and are used as comments or headlines for the subsequent program lines With the aid of appropriate structuring blocks you can organize long and complex programs In a clear and comprehensible manner This function is particularly convenient if you want to change the program later Structuring blocks can be inserted into the part program at any point They can also be displayed in a separate wi
6. File name Bytes Status Date Time m Workspace 1 Active mode of operation EHB PGM EX16 H 997 09 01 2014 12 28 55 O PGM2 EX16_ SL H 1792 09 01 2014 12 28 55 EHD PGM3 EX18 H 833 09 01 2014 12 28 55 m Workspace 2 Active programming mode Workspace 3 Manufacturer s applications optionally available PL1 H 2700 14 01 2014 12 00 46 Ra Pl n 6920 09 01 2014 12 28 55 RADG t 4 1 i In the task bar you can also select other applications that you have started together with the TNC switch for example to the PDF viewer or TNCguide RAD 400 0 lt 2014 05 52 318 Rastplatte h 4837 09 01 2014 12 28 55 Reset H 380 09 01 2014 12 28 55 Schulter h 3599 09 01 2014 12 28 55 STAT H 479 09 01 2014 12 28 55 STAT1 H 623 09 01 2014 12 28 55 TCH h 1275 09 01 2014 12 28 55 turbine 2065 09 01 2014 12 28 55 RE E Bildschirmschoner 1127 09 01 2014 12 28 55 r i 195 09 01 2014 12 28 55 Firewall 2671K 09 01 2014 12 28 57 Click the green HEIDENHAIN symbol to open a menu in which you can get information make settings or start applications The following functions are available Shares 2 IB VNC A eS eE FILES END Too a Ze l Edit BO se wens E TNCouide 7 NC Contol Panel 09 42 26 5 1 WindowManagerContg 9 gui ed About HEROS Information about the operating system of the TNC NC Control Start and stop the TNC software Only permitted for diagnostic purposes Web Browser Start Mozilla Firefox
7. TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 371 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate F in mm min Behavior with M136 In inch oprograms M136 Is not permitted In combination with the new alternate feed rate FU The spindle is not permitted to be controlled when M136 Is active With M136 the TNC does not move the tool in mm min but rather at the programmed feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution If you change the spindle speed by using the spindle override the TNC changes the feed rate accordingly Effect M136 becomes effective at the start of block You can cancel M136 by programming M137 TNC 620 User s Manual 372 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior 10 4 Feed rate for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 Standard behavior The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool center Behavior at circular arcs with M109 The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside contours so that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant Caution Danger to the workpiece and tool On very small outside corners the TNC may increase the feed rate so much that the tool or workpiece can be damaged Avoid M109 with small ou
8. gt Show grid lines Press the SHOW GRID LINES soft key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 151 Programming Programming aids 4 7 Programming graphics Magnification or reduction of details You can select the graphics display gt Shift the soft key row second row see figure The following functions are available Soft key Function Press the desired soft key to move the EES BE i o EJE Press the soft key to reduce the detail Press the soft key to enlarge the detail The RESET WORKPIECE BLANK soft key is used to restore the original section You can also use the mouse to change the graphic display The following functions are available gt To shift the model shown Hold the center mouse button or the wheel button down and move the mouse If you simultaneously oress the shift key you can only move the model horizontally or vertically gt To zoom in ona certain area Mark a zoom area by holding the left mouse button down After you release the left mouse button the TNC zooms in on the defined area gt To rapidly magnify or reduce any area Rotate the mouse wheel backwards or forwards TNC 620 User s Manual 152 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Errormessages 4 8 4 8 Error messages Display of errors The TNC generates error messages when it detects problems such as
9. GRAPHICS TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 75 Introduction 2 4 Status displays 2 4 Status displays General status display The general status display in the lower part of the screen informs you of the current state of the machine tool It is displayed automatically in the following modes of operation Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence except if the screen layout is set to display only and during Positioning with Manual Data Input In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes the status display appears in the large window Information in the status display Icon Meaning ACTL Position display Actual nominal or distance to go coordinates mode YIIZ Machine axes the TNC displays auxiliary axes in lowercase letters The sequence and quantity of displayed axes is determined by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual for more information Number of the active presets from the preset table If the datum was set manually the TNC displays the text MAN behind the symbol E F S M The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one tenth of the effective value Spindle speed S feed rate F and active M functions Axis is clamped Axis can be moved with the handwheel Axes are moving under a basic rotation Axes are moving under a 3 D basic rotation Axes are moving in a tilted working plane JBE O us The M128 function o
10. In combination with M128 and the new PLANE functions inclined tool machining in a tilted machining plane is now possible Two possibilities are available for definition m Inclined tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis m Inclined tool machining via normal vectors Inclined tool machining in a tilted machining plane only functions with spherical cutters With 45 swivel heads and tilting tables you can also define the incline angle as a space angle Use the TCPM FUNCTION see FUNCTION TCPM option 9 page 445 Inclined tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary axis gt Retract the tool gt Define any PLANE function consider the positioning behavior gt Activate M128 gt Via a straight line block traverse to the desired incline angle in the appropriate axis incrementally Example NC blocks TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 435 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 3 Inclined tool machining in a tilted plane option 9 Inclined tool machining via normal vectors Only one directional vector can be defined in the LN block This vector defines the Incline angle normal vector NX NY NZ or tool direction vector TX TY TZ Retract the tool Define any PLANE function consider the positioning behavior Activate M128 Execute program with LN blocks in which the tool direction is defined by a vector v vV vV Yy Example NC blocks
11. O BEGIN PGM SPHERE MM 1 FN 0 Q1 50 2 FN 0 Q2 50 3 FN 0 Q4 90 4 FN 0 Q5 0 5 FN 0 Q14 5 6 FN 0 Q6 45 7 FN 0 Q8 0 8 FN 0 Q9 360 9 FN 0 Q18 10 10 FN 0 Q10 5 11 FN 0 Q11 2 12 FN 0 Q12 350 13 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 50 14 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 15 TOOL CALL 1 Z 4000 16 L Z 250 RO FMAX 17 CALL LBL 10 18 FN 0 Q10 0 19 FN 0 Q18 5 20 CALL LBL 10 21 L Z 100 RO FMAX M2 22 LBL 10 23 FN 1 Q23 Q11 Q6 24 FN 0 Q24 Q4 25 FN 1 Q26 Q6 Q108 26 FN 0 Q28 Q8 27 FN 1 Q16 Q6 Q10 28 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT 29 CYCL DEF 7 1 X Q1 30 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y Q2 31 CYCL DEF 7 3 Z Q16 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Angle increment in space Sphere radius Starting angle of rotational position in the X Y plane End angle of rotational position in the X Y plane Angle increment in the X Y plane for roughing Allowance in sphere radius for roughing Set up clearance for pre positioning in the spindle axis Feed rate for milling Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance Angle increment in the X Y plane for finishing Call machining operation Retract the tool end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Calculate Z coordinate for pre posit
12. Overwrite protection for datum The line O in the preset table is write protected The TNC saves the last manually set datum in line O You can overwrite protect further lines in the preset table with the LOCKED column The overwrite protected lines are color highlighted in the preset table Caution Data may be lost If you forget the password you can no longer reset the write protection of a password protected line Make note of the password when you password protect lines Preferentially use simple protection with the soft key Proceed as follows to protect a datum from overwriting Io gt Press the CHANGE PRESET soft key PRESET gt Select the LOCKED column allt EDIT gt Press the EDIT CURRENT FIELD soft key Protection for datum without using password To gt Press the soft key The TNC writes an L in the UNLOCK LOCKED column Protection for datum with password Lock 7 gt Press the soft key UNLOCK PASSWORD gt Enter the password into the pop up window gt Confirm with the OK soft key or the ENT key The TNC writes in the LOCKED column TNC 620 User s Manual 490 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum management with the preset table Rescind write protection To edit a line you have previously write protected proceed as follows CHANGE gt Press the CHANGE PRESET soft key PRESET gt Select the LOCKED column al EDIT gt Press the EDIT CURRENT
13. PASTE Insert copied field FIELD APPEND Add the entered number of lines tools at the N LINES end of the table EEN Adding a row with tool number for entering LINE E Delete current line tool LINE Sort the tools according to the content of a column SORT 9O 2 v lt TNC 620 User s Manual 6 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 1 y Tooldata 5 2 Soft key Editing functions for tool tables Show all drills in the tool table DRILL Show all cutters in the tool table CUTTER TAP Show all taps thread cutters in the tool table THREAD CUTTER Show all touch probes in the tool table TOUCH PROBE Exiting any other tool table gt Call the file manager and select a file of a different type such as a part program Importing tool tables TABLE function Refer to your machine manual L The machine manufacturer can adapt the IMPORT lt If you export a tool table from an ITNC 530 and import it into a TNC 620 you have to adapt its format and content before you can use the tool table On the TNC 620 you can adapt the tool table conveniently with the IMPORT TABLE function The TNC converts the contents of the imported tool table to a format valid for the TNC 620 and saves the changes to the selected file Follow this procedure Save the tool table of the iITNC 530 to the TNC table directory Select the Programming mode of operation Programming Call the file manager Press the
14. Polar coordinates are useful with m Positions on circular arcs Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees e g bolt hole circles Overview of path functions with polar coordinates Path function key Tool movement Required input Page L Straight line Polar radius polar angle of the 231 Fa straight line end point P Circular path around circle Polar angle of the arc end 232 center pole to arc end point point direction of rotation P Circular arc with tangential Polar radius polar angle of the 232 connection to the preceding arc end point contour element E Combination of a circular anda Polar radius polar angle of the 233 linear movement arc end point coordinate of the end point in the tool axis TNC 620 User s Manual 230 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Polar coordinates 6 5 Zero point for polar coordinates pole CC You can set the pole CC at any point in the machining program before indicating points in polar coordinates Set the pole in the Y same way as you would program the circle center gt Coordinates Enter Cartesian coordinates for the pole or if you want to use the last programmed position do not enter any coordinates Before programming polar coordinates define the pole You can only define the pole in Cartesian Yoc coordinates The pole remains in effect until you define a new pole Example NC blocks 12 CC X 45 Y 25 Straight line LP The tool
15. TNC 620 User s Manual 436 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes 12 4 12 4 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 option 8 Standard behavior The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis in degrees min in mm programs and also in inch programs The feed rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the center of axis rotation The larger this distance becomes the greater the contouring feed rate Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes with M116 The machine geometry must be specified by the machine tool builder in the description of kinematics M116 works only on rotary tables M116 cannot be used with swivel heads If your machine is equipped with a table nead combination the TNC ignores the swivel head rotary axes M116 is also effective in an active tilted working plane and in combination with M128 if you used the M138 function to select rotary axes see Selecting tilting axes M138 page 443 Then M116 affects only those rotary axes that were selected with M138 The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate of a rotary axis in degrees min or 1 10 inch min In this case the TNC calculates the feed for the block at the start of each block With a rotary axis the feed rate is not changed during execution of the block even if the tool moves toward the center of the rotary axis Effec
16. gt Repeat the probing procedure for the remaining elements gt Terminate the probing procedure and switch to the evaluation menu Press the EVALUATE soft key gt Datum In the menu window enter both coordinates of the circle center confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 500 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 501 gt Terminate the probing function Press the END soft key Setting a center line as datum PROBING gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING y i CL soft key gt Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point gt Select the probing direction by soft key gt Start the probing procedure Press the NC Start button gt Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point gt Start the probing procedure Press the NC Start button gt Datum Enter the coordinate of the datum in the menu window confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the value to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 500 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 501 gt Terminate the probing function Press the END soft key After you have measured the second touch point you can use the evaluation menu to change the
17. gt Terminate the probing function Press the END soft key The TNC needs only three touch points to calculate outside or inside circles e g for circle segments More precise results are obtained if you measure circles using four touch points however You should always preposition the touch probe in the center or as close to the center as possible TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 517 Manual operation and setup 14 10 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 Outside circle gt Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point outside of the circle gt Select the probing direction or press the soft key for the automatic probing routine gt Probing Press the machine START button If you are not using the automatic probing routine you need to repeat this procedure After the third probing operation you can have the TNC calculate the center four touch points are recommended gt Terminate the probing procedure and switch to the evaluation menu Press the EVALUATE soft key gt Datum Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 500 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 501 gt To terminate the probe function press the END soft key After the
18. v vV VvV V Select the calibration function Press the CAL R soft key The TNC displays the current calibration data Enter the diameter of the ring gauge Enter the start angle Enter the number of touch points Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button The 3 D touch probe probes all required touch points in an automatic probing routine and calculates the effective ball tip radius If probing from opposite orientations is possible the TNC calculates the center offset Checking the results Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect Press the END soft key to terminate the calibrating function The TNC logs the calibration process in TCHPRMAN html In order to be able to determine the ball tip center misalignment the TNC needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer Refer to your machine manual TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 505 Manual operation and setup 14 8 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 Calibration with a stud or calibration pin Proceed as follows for manual calibration with a stud or calibration pin gt Inthe Manual operation mode position the ball tip above the center of the calibration pin gt Select the calibration function Press the CAL R Liz soft key Enter the diameter of the stud Enter the safety clearance Enter the start angle Enter the number of touch points v vV V V V Start the p
19. 17 MOD functions 17 10 Setting up data interfaces Setting the protocol protocol The data transfer protocol controls the data flow of a serial transmission comparable to MP5030 of the IT NC 530 Here the BLOCKWISE setting designates a form of data transfer where data is transmitted in blocks This is not to be confused with the blockwise data reception and simultaneous blockwise processing by older TNC contouring controls Blockwise reception of an NC program and simultaneous machining of the program Is not possible Data transmission protocol Selection Standard data transmission transmission STANDARD line by line Packet based data transter BLOCKWISE Transmission without protocol only RAVV_DATA character by character Setting data bits dataBits By setting the data bits you define whether a character is transmitted with 7 or 8 data bits Check parity parity The parity bit helps the receiver to detect transmission errors The parity bit can be formed in three different ways No parity NONE There is no error detection m Even parity EVEN Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an odd number of set bits Odd parity ODD Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an even number of set bits Setting the stop bits stopBits The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize each transmitted character during serial data tran
20. Diameter Pocket length Pocket width Length of the axis selected in the cycle Position of the centerline Angle in the A axis Angle in the B axis Coordinate of the axis selected in the cycle Measured deviation Center in reference axis Center in minor axis Diameter Pocket length Pocket width Measured length Position of the centerline Determined space angle Rotation about the A axis Rotation about the B axis Rotation about the C axis Workpiece status Good Rework scrap TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Parameter value Q150 Q151 Q152 Q153 Q154 Q155 Q156 Q157 Q158 Q159 Q160 Parameter value Q161 Q162 Q163 Q164 Q165 Q166 Q167 Parameter value Q170 Q171 Q172 Parameter value Q180 Q181 Q182 355 Programming Q parameters 9 12 Preassigned Q parameters Tool measurement with the BLUM Parameter value laser Reserved Q190 Reserved Q191 Reserved Q192 Reserved Q193 Reserved for internal use Parameter value Marker for cycles 0195 Marker for cycles Q196 Marker for cycles machining patterns Q197 Number of the last active measuring cycle Q198 Status of tool measurement with TT Parameter value Tool within tolerance Q199 0 0 Tool is worn LTOL RTOL is exceeded Q199 1 0 Tool is broken LBREAK RBREAK is 0199 2 0 exceeded TNC 620 User s Manual 356 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 9 13 Programming examples
21. Example Ellipse Program sequence The contour of the ellipse is approximated by many short lines defined in Q7 The more calculation steps you define for the lines the smoother the curve becomes The milling direction is determined with the starting angle and end angle in the plane Machining direction is clockwise Starting angle gt end angle Machining direction is counterclockwise Starting angle lt end angle m The tool radius is not taken into account O BEGIN PGM ELLIPSE MM 1 FN 0 Q1 50 2 FN 0 Q2 50 3 FN 0 Q3 50 4 FN 0 Q4 30 5 FN 0 Q5 0 6 FN 0 Q6 360 7 FN 0 Q7 40 8 FN 0 Q8 0 9 FN 0 Q9 5 10 FN 0 Q10 100 11 FN 0 Q11 350 12 FN 0 Q12 2 13 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 14 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 15 TOOL CALL 1 Z 4000 16 L Z 250 RO FMAX 17 CALL LBL 10 18 L Z 100 RO FMAX M2 19 LBL 10 20 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT 21 CYCL DEF 7 1 X Q1 22 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y Q2 23 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION 24 CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT Q8 25 Q35 Q6 Q5 Q7 26 Q36 Q5 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming examples 9 13 Center in X axis Center in Y axis semiaxis in X semiaxis in Y Starting angle in the plane End angle in the plane Number of calculation steps Rotational position of the ellipse Milling depth Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Set up clearance for pre positioning Definition of wor
22. HEIDENHAIN O BEGIN POU ee a 1 BLK FOAN 0 1 Z ke Y 2 40 2 BLK FOAN 0 2 Ke200 Weed zZ 0 3 TOOL CALL 16 Z S3000 4 L 24100 R FMAX M3 CYGL DEF 230 MULTIPASS MILLING 0225 0 K NT 1 O22684 0 Of2ire 6 i 21 O210 Ota je 3 O20684 15 OF07 4 80 O200 4150 CALL LOL 1 REPS i L 22 AG FMAX L Me220 Y 70 Ad FMAX 00 16 47 FURTHER VIEW EETA STAAT OPTIONS e Sa E o B EAE a a Ye RESET START F BEGE EGE E oO F HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming NC Software 817600 02 817601 02 817605 02 English en 2 2015 Controls of the TNC Controls of the TNC Keys on visual display unit Key Function G Select split screen layout Toggle the display between machining and programming modes B Soft keys for selecting functions on screen a gt A Shifting between soft key rows Machine operating modes Function A lt Manual operation Electronic handwheel Positioning with manual data Input Program run single block oj w e el el Program run full sequence Programming modes Function A D lt Programming Test run ul le Program file management TNC functions Function A lt PaM Select or delete programs and files external data transfer PGM Define program call select datum CALL and point tables select MOD functions Display help text for NC error messages cal
23. If the first block of an FK contour is an FCT or FLT block you must program at least two NC blocks with the gray path function keys to fully define the direction of contour approach Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL command TNC 620 User s Manual 238 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 FK programming graphics 6 6 If you wish to use graphic support during FK programming select the PROGRAM GRAPHICS screen layout see Programming page 74 Incomplete coordinate data often is not sufficient to fully define a workpiece contour In this case the TNC indicates the possible solutions in the FK graphic You can then select the contour that matches the drawing The FK graphic displays the elements of the workpiece contour in different colors Blue The contour element is fully defined SELECT SOLUTION SOLUTION The last FK element is only shown in blue after the departure movement despite full definition e g via CLSD Green The entered data describe a limited number of possible solutions select the correct one Red The entered data are not sufficient to determine the contour element enter further data If the entered data permit a limited number of possible solutions and the contour element Is displayed in green select the correct contour element as follows
24. Programming O parameters 9 1 Principle and overview of functions Programming notes You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a program Q parameters can be assigned numerical values between 999 999 999 and 999 999 999 The input range is limited to 16 digits of which 9 may be before the decimal point Internally the TNC calculates numbers up to a value of 10 You can assign a maximum of 255 characters to QS parameters The TNC always assigns some Q and OS parameters the same data For example the O parameter Q108 is always assigned the current tool radius see Preassigned Q parameters page 352 The TNC saves numerical values internally in a binary number format Standard IEEE 754 Due to this standardized format some decimal numbers do not have an exact binary representation round oft error Keep this in mind especially when you use calculated O parameter contents for jump commands or positioning movements TNC 620 User s Manual 296 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Principle and overview of functions Calling Q parameter functions When you are writing a part program press the Q key in the numeric keypad for numerical input and axis selection below the The TNC then displays the following soft keys Soft key Function group Page Basic arithmetic assign add 299 ARITHM Subtract multiply divide square root Dare Trigonometric functions 301 NOME
25. Remote Desktop Manager Option 133 Display and remote operation of external computer units Diagnostics Available only to authorized specialists to start diagnostic functions Settings Configuration of miscellaneous settings Date Time Set the date and time Language System dialog language setting During startup the TNC overwrites this setting with the language setting of the machine parameter CfgLanguage Network Network settings of the control m Screensaver Screensaver settings SELinux Security software settings for Linuxbased operating systems Shares Settings for external network drives m VNC Setting for external softwares that access for maintenance purposes on the control for example Virtual Network Computing WindowManagerConfig Available only to authorized specialists for setting the window manager Firewall Firewall settings see Firewall page 588 Tools Only for authorized users The applications available under tools can be started directly by selecting the pertaining Tile type in the file management of the TNC see File management Fundamentals page 111 TNC 620 User s Manual 84 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Remote Desktop Manager option 133 2 6 2 6 Remote Desktop Manager option 133 Introduction The Remote Desktop Manager enables you to display external computer units on the TNC screen that are connected via Ethernet and to operate them
26. The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Tilting the working plane through axis angle PLANE AXIAL Application The PLANE AXIAL function defines both the position of the working plane and the nominal coordinates of the rotary axes This function is particularly easy to use on machines with Cartesian coordinates and with kinematics structures in which only one rotary axis Is active PLANE AXIAL can also be used if you have only one rotary axis active on your machine You can use the PLANE RELATIVE function after PLANE AXIAL if your machine allows spatial angle definitions Refer to your machine manual Before programming note the following Enter only axis angles that actually exist on your machine Otherwise the TNC generates an error message Rotary axis coordinates defined with PLANE AXIAL are modally effective Successive definitions therefore build on each other Incremental input is allowed Use PLANE RESET to reset the PLANE AXIAL function Resetting by entering 0 does not deactivate PLANE AXIAL SEQ TABLE ROT and COORD ROT have no function in conjunction with PLANE AXIAL Parameter description for the positioning behavior see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 427 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software o
27. User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 291 Programming Q parameters 9 1 Principle and overview of functions 9 1 Principle and overview of functions With parameters you can program entire families of parts ina single part program by programming variable parameters instead of fixed numerical values Use parameters for e g Coordinate values Feed rates Spindle speeds Cycle data With parameters you can also m Program contours that are defined through mathematical functions Make execution of machining steps depend on certain logical conditions m Variably design FK programs Parameters are always identified with letters and numbers The letters determine the type of parameter and the numbers the parameter range See the table below for detailed information Parameter type Parameter range Meaning Q parameters Parameters effect all programs in the TNC memory 0 30 Parameters for HEIDENHAIN cycles 31 99 Parameters for users 100 199 Parameters for special TNC functions 200 1199 Parameters for HEIDENHAIN cycles 1200 1399 Parameters for cycles of machine tool builder or third party provider 1400 1499 Parameters for CALLactive cycles of machine tool builder or third party provider 1500 1599 Parameters for DEFactive cycles of machine tool builder or third party provider 1600 1999 Parameters for users QL parameters Parameters only effective locally within a progr
28. m Program section repeats Jump commands M functions such as M2 or M30 Cycle calls Only use automatic drawing during contour programming TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 149 Programming Programming aids 4 7 Programming graphics Generating a graphic for an existing program gt Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the graphic to be generated or press GOTO and enter the desired block number RESET gt To generate graphics press the RESET START START soft key Additional functions Soft key Function Generate a complete graphic w uo D 4 a Mm D D 0 a a m 4 4a oa Generate programming graphic blockwise SINGLE Generate a complete graphic or complete it after RESET START Stop the programming graphics This soft key only appears while the TNC is generating the programming graphics STOP select plan view Select front view Select side view afi i i TNC 620 User s Manual 150 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming graphics 4 7 Block number display ON OFF gt Shift the soft key row gt To show block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NO soft key to SHOW gt Hide block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NO soft key to OMIT Erasing the graphic gt gt Shift the soft key row gt Erase graphic Press CLEAR GRAPHICS soft key Showing grid lines gt Shift the soft key row
29. press the machine START button gt Checking the results y Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect gt Press the CANCEL soft key to terminate the calibrating function The TNC logs the calibration process in TCHPRMAN html TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 503 Manual operation and setup 14 8 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The center offset can be determined only with a Suitable touch probe If you want to calibrate using the outside of an object you need to preposition the touch probe above the center of the calibration sphere or calibration pin Ensure that the touch points can be approached without collision When calibrating the ball tio radius the TNC executes an automatic probing routine During the first probing cycle the TNC determines the center of the calibration ring or stud coarse measurement and positions the touch probe in the center Then the ball tip radius is determined during the actual calibration process fine measurement If the touch probe allows probing from opposite orientations the center offset is determined during another cycle The characteristic of whether and how your touch probe can be oriented is already defined in HEIDENHAIN touc
30. 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 310 Text No measuring axis defined Tool breakage tolerance exceeded Enter Q247 unequal to 0 Enter Q247 greater than 5 Datum table Enter Q351 unequal to 0 Thread depth too large Missing calibration data Tolerance exceeded Block scan active ORIENTATION not permitted 3 D ROT not permitted Activate 3 D ROT Enter depth as negative Q303 in meas cycle undefined Tool axis not allowed Calculated values incorrect Contradictory meas points Incorrect clearance height Contradictory plunge type This fixed cycle not allowed Line is write protected Oversize greater than depth No point angle defined Contradictory data Slot position 0 not allowed Enter an infeed not equal to 0 switchover of Q399 not allowed Tool not defined Tool number not allowed Tool name not allowed software option not active Kinematics cannot be restored Function not permitted Contradictory workpc blank dim Measuring position not allowed Kinematic access not possible Meas pos not in traverse range Preset compensation not possible TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Error number 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 TNC 620 User s Manual Text Tool radius too large Plunging type is not possible Plunge angle incorrectly defined Angular length is undefined Slot width is too large scaling factors not
31. 251 L X 0 Y 38 5 F125 M140 MB MAX M140 is also effective if the tilted working plane function is active On machines with swivel heads the TNC then moves the tool in the tilted coordinate system With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in the positive direction Always detine a TOOL CALL with a tool axis before entering M140 otherwise the direction of traverse is not defined Danger of collision If you modify the position of a rotary axis with the handwheel superimposition M118 function and then run M140 the TNC ignores the superimposed values with the retraction movement This may cause undesired motion or collisions on machines with rotary axes in the head TNC 620 User s Manual 378 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 Standard behavior When the stylus is deflected the TNC outputs an error message as soon as you attempt to move a machine axis Behavior with M141 The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is deflected This function is required if you wish to write your own measuring cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been deflected Danger of collision If you use M141 make sure that you retract the touch probe in the correct direction M141 functions only for movements with straight line blocks Effect
32. 4 CYCL DEF 3 2 DEPTH 8 25 CYCL DEF 3 3 PLNGNGS F333 a a OMNAHSWH FURTHER VIEW ab OPTIONS t TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Modes of operation 2 3 Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block In the Program run full sequence mode of operation the TNC iy ezogran curl vali eoquenee executes a program continuously to its end or to a manual bee tere or programmed stop You can resume program run after an meeer BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 interruption ee L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 In the Program run single block mode of operation you execute eve DeF 40 POCKET WrLLING each block separately by pressing the machine START button With OYOL DEF 4 3 PLNONGIO F393 point pattern cycles and CYCL CALL PAT the control stops after GOL DEF 4 6 Faes on maoruse each point 0 000 _ 0000 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Soft key Window Program PROGRAM Left program right status display PROGRAM Left program right graphics GRAPHICS option 20 Graphic option 20 POSITION Left program right collision object Collision body KINEMATICS Soft keys for selecting the screen layout for pallet tables option 22 Pallet management Soft key Window Pallet table PALLET PROGRAM Left program right pallet table PALLET Left pallet table right status display PALLET Left pallet table right graphics
33. 9 3 Describing contours with mathematical functions Programming fundamental operations Example 1 a gt Select the Q parameter functions Press the Q key Program blocks in the TNC 16 FN 0 Q5 10 gt Select the mathematical functions Press the BASIC 17 FN 3 Q12 Q5 7 ARITHM ARITHMETIC soft key ae gt Select the Q parameter function ASSIGN Press the X FNO X Y soft key PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT ENT gt 12 Enter the Q parameter number and confirm with the ENT key FIRST VALUE PARAMETER oa gt Enter 10 Assign the numerical value 10 to O5 and confirm with the ENT soft key Example 2 gt Select the Q parameter functions Press the Q key e gt Select the mathematical functions Press the ARITHM BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key me gt To select the Q parameter function xy MULTIPLICATION press the FN3 X Y soft key PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT gt 12 Enter the Q parameter number and confirm with the ENT key FIRST VALUE PARAMETER ENT gt Enter Q5 as the first value and confirm with the ENT key SECOND VALUE PARAMETER oar gt Enter 7 as the second value and confirm with the ENT key TNC 620 User s Manual 300 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 9 4 Angle functions Definitions Sine sinad a c Cosine cosaq b c Tangent tanaq a b sina cosa where cis the side opposite the right angle als the side opposite the angle a bis the third si
34. Enter the code number 123 Changing parameters Press the END soft key to exit the configuration editor v vV V V V V Press the SAVE soft key to save changes The icon at the beginning of each line in the parameter tree shows additional information about this line The icons have the following meanings m Branch exists but is closed o E Branch is open Empty object cannot be opened nitialized machine parameter Uninitialized optional machine parameter fr Can be read but not edited pail Can neither be read nor edited The type of the configuration object is identified by its folder symbol i Key group name E List m Entity parameter object Displaying help texts The HELP key enables you to call a help text for each parameter object or attribute If the help text does not fit on one page 1 2 is then displayed at the upper right for example press the HELP PAGE soft key to scroll to the second page To exit the help text press the HELP key again Additional information such as the unit of measure the initial value or a selection list is also displayed If the selected machine parameter matches a parameter in the previous control model the corresponding MP number is shown TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 18 1 597 Tables and overviews 18 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter list Parameter settings DisplaySettings sett
35. HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 16 1 545 Test run and program run 16 2 Showing the workpiece blank in the working space option 20 16 2 Showing the workpiece blank in the working space option 20 Application In the Test Run operating mode you can graphically check the position of the workpiece blank or reference point in the machine s working space and activate work space monitoring in the Test Run mode Press the BLANK IN WORK SPACE soft key to activate this function You can use the soft key SW LIMIT MONITORING 2nd sott key row to activate or deactivate the function A transparent cuboid represents the workpiece blank Its dimensions are shown in the BLK FORM table The TNC takes the dimensions from the workpiece blank definition of the selected program The workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate system Its datum lies within the traverse range cuboid For a test run it normally does not matter where the workpiece blank is located within the working space However if you activate working space monitoring you must graphically shift the workpiece blank so that it lies within the working space Use the soft keys shown in the table You can also activate the current datum for the Test Run operating mode see the following table Soft keys Function shift workpiece blank in positive negative X At a direction Shift workpiece blank in positive
36. HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Function Effect of Q parameters Automatic cancelation of tool radius compensation NC blocks with M91 Tool shape compensation Mid program startup in a point table Empty CC block pole of last tool position is used in NC program Axis specific scaling of RND block Reaction if a contour element with length O is defined before or after a RND or CHF block TNC 620 User s Manual TNC 620 Q60 to Q99 or QS60 to QS99 are always local Block with RO DEP block END PGM No consideration of tool radius compensation Tool shape compensation is not supported because this type of programming Is considered to be axis value programming and the basic assumption is that axes do not form a Cartesian coordinate system The tool is positioned above the next position to be machined Last positioning block in the working plane must contain both coordinates of the working plane RND block is scaled the result is an ellipse Error message Is issued HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 ITNC 530 Q60 to Q99 or QS60 to QS99 are local or global depending on MP7251 in converted cycle programs cyc Nested calls may cause problems Block with RO DEP block PGM CALL Programming of Cycle 10 ROTATION m Program selection Consideration of tool radius compensation Tool shape compensat
37. In the MOD menu select the Graphic settings group select the model type select the model quality Press the APPLY soft key Press the OK soft key You have the following simulation parameters for the graphic settings v vV V V iv Model type Displayed Choice Properties Application symbol 3 D Very true to detail Milling with undercuts Ls heavy time and processor milling turning operations consumption I 2 5 D Fast Milling without undercuts E x No model Very fast Line graphics Model quality Displayed Choice Properties symbol DEOS Very high High data transfer rate exact depiction of tool geometry depiction of block end points and block numbers possible DOC High High data transfer rate exact depiction of tool geometry DOO Medium Medium data transfer rate approximation of tool geometry BONO Low Low data transfer rate coarse approximation of tool geometry 568 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Machine settings 17 3 17 3 Machine settings External access vanua operation E programming The machine tool builder can configure the external access options Refer to your machine manual Machine dependent function With the TNCOPT soft key you can permit or lock access for an external diagnostics or commissioning program With the MOD function External access you can grant or restrict access to the TNC If you have restricted the external access it is no longer po
38. Incorrect data input Logical errors in the program Contour elements that are impossible to machine Incorrect use of touch probes When an error occurs It is displayed in red type in the header Long and multi line error messages are displayed in abbreviated form Complete information on all pending errors is shown in the error window If a rare processor check error should occur the TNC automatically opens the error window You cannot remove such an error Shut down the system and restart the TNC The error message is displayed in the header until it is cleared or replaced by a higherpriority error An error message that contains a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block Open the error window ERR gt Press the ERR key The TNC opens the error window and displays all accumulated error messages Closing the error window gt Press the END soft key or gt Press the ERR key The TNC closes the error window TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 153 Programming Programming aids 4 8 Error messages Detailed error messages The TNC displays possible causes of the error and suggestions for gt n Leo FK programming Illegal positio solving the problem gt Open the error window eee gt Information on the error cause and corrective INFO action Position the highlight on the error message and press the soft k
39. Iry to stay as close as possible to the handwheel holder and put the handwheel in Its holder when you are not using It TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 14 2 473 Manual operation and setup 14 2 Moving the machine axes If the TNC has triggered an emergency stop you must reactivate the handwheel Proceed as follows gt Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation gt Select the MOD function Press the MOD key gt Scroll through the soft key row SET UP gt Select the configuration menu for the wireless WIRELESS HANDWHEEL handwheel Press the SET UP WIRELESS HANDWHEEL soft key gt Click the Start handwheel button to reactivate the wireless handwheel gt To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu press the END button The MOD mode of operation includes a function for initial operation and configuration of the handwheel see Configure HR 550 FS wireless handwheel page 591 Selecting the axis to be moved You can activate directly through the axis address keys the principal axes X Y Z and three other axes defined by the machine tool builder Your machine tool builder can also place the virtual axis VT directly on one of the free axis keys If the virtual axis VT is not on one of the axis selection keys proceed as follows gt Press the handwheel soft key F1 AX The TNC displays all active axes on the handwheel display The currently acti
40. M 5 9 STATUS COORD OVERVIEW POS STATUS TRANSF STATUS STATUS STATUS OF Q PARAM 81 Introduction 2 4 Status displays Coordinate transformations TRANS tab Soft key STATUS COORD TRANSF Meaning Name of the active datum table Active datum number comment from the active line of the active datum number DOC trom Cycle 7 Active datum shift Cycle 7 The TNC displays an active datum shift in up to 8 axes Mirrored axes Cycle 8 Active basic rotation Active rotation angle Cycle 10 Active scaling factor factors Cycles 11 26 The TNC displays an active scaling factor in up to 6 axes scaling datum For further information refer to the User s Manual for Cycles Coordinate Transformation Cycles Displaying Q parameters QPARA tab Soft key STATUS OF Q PARAM 82 Meaning Display the current values of the defined Q parameters Display the character strings of the defined string parameters Press the Q PARAMETER LIST soft key The TNC opens a pop up window For each parameter type O QL QR OS define the parameter numbers you wish to control Separate single Q parameters with a comma and connect sequential Q parameters with a hyphen e g 1 3 200 208 The input range per parameter type is 132 characters The display in the QPARA tab always contains eight decimal places The result of Q1 COS 89 999 is show
41. NETWORK soft key second soft key row gt To manage the network drives Press the DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN soft key In a window the TNC shows the network drives available for access The soft keys described below are used to define the connection for each drive Function Soft key Establish the network connection If the Connect connection is active the TNC marks the Mount column Disconnect the network connection Unmount Automatically establish network connection Auto whenever the TNC is switched on The TNC marks the Auto column if the connection is established automatically Set up new network connection Add Delete existing network connection Remove Copy network connection Copy Edit network connection Machining Delete the status window Clear 134 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 USB devices on the TNC Caution Data may be lost Only use the USB interface for transferring and saving not for processing or running programs Backing up data from or loading onto the TNC is especially easy with USB devices The TNC supports the following USB block devices Floppy disk drives with FAT VFAT file system Memory sticks with the FAT VFAT file system Hard disks with the FAT VFAT file system CD ROM drives with the Joliet ISO 9660 file system The TNC automatically detects these types of USB devices when connected The TNC does not sup
42. NZ 0 8764339 TX 0 0078922 TY 0 8764339 TZ 0 2590319 F1000 M128 LN Straight line with 3 D compensation X Y Z Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point NX NY NZ Components of the surface normal vector TX TY TZ Components of the normalized vector for workpiece orientation F Feed rate Miscellaneous function Peripheral milling 3 D radius compensation with TCPM and radius compensation RL RR The TNC displaces the tool perpendicular to the direction of movement and perpendicular to the tool direction by the sum of the delta values DR tool table and TOOL CALL Determine the Z compensation direction with radius compensation RL RR see figure traverse direction Y For the TNC to be able to reach the set tool orientation you need to activate the function M128 see Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 option 9 page 440 The TNC then positions the rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the defined RR orientation with the active compensation m X This function is possible only on machines for which you can define spatial angles for the tilting axis configuration Refer to your machine manual The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary axes on all machines Refer to your machine manual Note that the TNC makes a compensating movement by the defined delta values The tool radius R defined in the tool table has no e
43. Path for FN 16 output if no path has been defined in the program serial Interface RS232 see Setting up data interfaces page 575 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 607 Tables and overviews 18 2 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces 18 2 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation When using the 25 pin adapter block TNC Conn cable 365725 xx Adapter block Conn cable 274545 xx 310085 01 Male Assignment Female Color Female Male Female Male Color Female 1 Do not 1 1 1 1 1 White 1 assign Brown 2 RXD 2 Yellow 3 3 3 3 Yellow 2 3 TXD 3 Green 2 2 2 2 Green 3 4 DTR 4 Brown 20 20 20 20 Brown 8 7 5 Signal GND 5 Red 7 7 7 7 Red 7 7 6 DSR 6 Blue 6 6 6 6 6 7 RTS 7 Gray 4 4 4 4 l Gray 5 8 CTR 8 Pink 5 5 5 5 Pink 4 9 Do not 9 8 Violet 20 assign Hsg External Hsg External Hsg Hsg Hsg Hsg External Hsg shield shield shield TNC 620 User s Manual 608 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces 18 2 When using the 9 pin adapter block TNC Male 1 CO N M or AJOJN Hsg Assignment Do not assign RXD TXD DTR Signal GND DSR RTS CTR Do not assign External Conn cable 355484 xx Fema
44. Power interrupted in the screen header gt Activate the Retraction mode Press the RETRACT OFF soft key The TNC displays the message RETRACT C gt Acknowledge the power interruption Press the CE key The TNC compiles the PLC program Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit If at least one axis is not referenced you have to compare the displayed position values with the actual axis value and confirm their agreement Follow the dialog if required af gt Check the preselected traversing mode if required select THREAD gt Check the preselected thread pitch if required enter the thread pitch Check the preselected direction of rotation if required select the direction of thread rotation Right handed thread The spindle turns in clockwise direction when moving into the workpiece and counterclockwise when retracting Left hand thread The spindle turns in counterclockwise direction when moving into the workpiece and clockwise when retracting gt Activate retraction Press the RETRACT soft key RETRACT gt Retraction Retract the tool with the machine axis keys or the electronic handwheel Axis key Z Retraction from the workpiece Axis key Z Moving into the workpiece gt Exit retraction Return to the original soft key level Vv e gt End the Retraction mode Press the END RETRACTION RETRACTION soft key The TNC checks whether the Retrac
45. Programming Tools 5 1 Entering tool related data 5 1 Entering tool related data Feed rate F The feed rate F is the speed at which the tool center point moves The maximum feed rates can be different for the individual axes and are set in machine parameters Input You can enter the feed rate in the TOOL CALL block tool call and in every positioning block see Creating the program blocks with the path function keys page 206 In millimeterporograms you enter the feed rate F in mm min and in inch programs for reasons of resolution in 1 10 inch min Alternatively with the corresponding soft keys you can also define the feed rate in mm per revolution mm rev FU or in mm per tooth mm tooth FZ Rapid traverse If you wish to program rapid traverse enter F MAX To enter FMAX press the ENT key or the FMAX soft key when the dialog question FEED RATE F appears on the control s screen To move your machine at rapid traverse you can also program the corresponding numerical value e g F30000 Unlike FMAX this rapid traverse remains in effect not only in the individual block but in all blocks until you program a new feed rate Duration of effect A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block with a different feed rate is reached FMAX is only effective in the block in which it is programmed After the block with F MAX is executed the feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered a
46. SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions ae gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions Select FUNCTION PARAX FUNCTION PARAX Vv FUNCTION gt Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP FUNCTION gt Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF If you want ae to switch off the parallel axis functions only for individual parallel axes then the respective axis must be specifically indicated TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 391 Programming Special functions 11 3 Working with the parallel axes U V and W FUNCTION PARAXMODE NC block To activate the PARAXMODE function you must always 13 FUNCTION PARAXMODE X Y W define three axes If you combine the PARAXMODE and PARAXCOMP functions the TNC deactivates the PARAXCOMP function for an axis that was defined in both functions When you deactivate PARAXMODE the PARAXCOMP function becomes active again Use the PARAXMODE function to define the axes the TNC is to use for machining You program all traverse movements and contour descriptions in the principal axes X Y and Z independent of your machine Define the three axes in the PARAXMODE function e g FUNCTION PARAXMODE X Y W which the TNC is to use to execute the programmed traverse movements Proceed as follows for the definition SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions FCT Peers gt Select the menu for defining various plain langua
47. TNC 620 User s Manual 272 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 1 Labeling subprograms and program section repeats 8 1 Labeling subprograms and program section repeats Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as necessary Label The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are marked In a part program by labels LBL A LABEL is identified by a number between 1 and 65535 or by a name you define Each LABEL number or LABEL name can be set only once in the program with the LABEL SET key The number of label names you can enter Is only limited by the internal memory once Do not use a label number or label name more than Label O LBL 0 is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired TNC 620 User s Manual 274 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 8 2 Subprograms Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to calling a subprogram CALL LBL The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end LBL O The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the subprogram call CALL LBL Programming notes A main program can contain any number of subprograms You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired A subprogram cannot call itself Write subprograms
48. TNC model software and features New functions 81760x 01 New special operating mode Retraction after a power Interruption page 556 New graphic simulation Graphics option 20 page 536 New MOD function tool usage file within the machine settings group Tool usage file page 570 New MOD function set system time within the systems settings group Set the system time page 571 New MOD group graphic settings Graphic settings page 568 With the new cutting data calculator you can calculate the spindle speed and the feed rate Cutting data calculator page 146 Now you can activate and deactivate the active chatter compensation ACC by soft key Activating deactivating ACC page 388 New if then decisions were introduced in the jump commands Programming if then decisions page 304 The character set of the fixed cycle 225 Engraving was expanded by more characters and the diameter sign see User s Manual for Cycle Programming New fixed cycle 275 Trochoidal Milling see User s Manual for Cycle Programming New fixed cycle 233 ENGRAVING see User s Manual for Cycle Programming In the drilling cycles 200 203 and 205 the parameter Q395 DEPTH REFERENCE was introduced in order to evaluate the T ANGLE see User s Manual for Cycle Programming The probing cycle 4 MEASURING IN 3 D was introduced see User s Manual for Cycle Programming 14 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversat
49. Ta gt Press the SHOW SOLUTION soft key repeatedly until the correct contour element is displayed Use the zoom function 2nd soft key row if you cannot distinguish possible solutions in the standard setting a gt If the displayed contour element matches the SOLUTION drawing select the contour element with SELECT SOLUTION If you do not yet wish to select a green contour element press the END SELECT soft key to continue the FK dialog select the green contour elements as soon as possible with the SELECT SOLUTION soft key This way you can reduce the ambiguity of subsequent elements The machine tool builder may use other colors for the FK graphics Showing block numbers in the graphic window To show a block number in the graphic window gt Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW sott key row 3 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 239 Programming Programming contours 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Initiating the FK dialog If you press the gray FK button the TNC displays the soft keys you can use to initiate an FK dialog see the following table Press the FK button a second time to deselect the soft keys If you initiate the FK dialog with one of these soft keys the TNC shows additional soft key rows that you can use for entering known coordinates directional data and data regarding the course of the contour Soft key F
50. To exit Mozilla Firefox proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Quit The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the Mozilla Firefox gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The Mozilla Firefox opens the File pull down menu gt Select the Quit menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 129 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Working with ZIP archives To open ZIP archives with the extension zip directly on the TNC Sena SE MEETS proceed as follows Caiet 24 Be gt Calling the File Manager gt Select the directory in which the archive file is saved gt Move the highlight to the archive Tile ane gt Press ENT The TNC opens the archive file in its own application using the Xarchiver additional tool jethod defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx defx With the key combination ALT TAB you can always return to the TNC user interface while leaving the archive Tile open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface If you position the mouse pointer over a button a brief tooltip explaining the function of this but
51. and D from line 6 of the presently opened table Save the first value in Q parameter Q10 second value in Q11 third value in Q12 56 FN 28 TABREAD Q10 6 RADIUS DEPTH D TNC 620 User s Manual 408 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Dwell time FUNCTION FEED DWELL 11 8 11 8 Dwell time FUNCTION FEED DWELL Programming dwell time Application L The behavior of this function varies depending on the respective machine x Refer to your machine manual The FUNCTION FEED DWELL function is used to program a recurring dwell time in seconds e g to force chip breaking Program FUNCTION FEED DWELL immediately prior to the machining you wish to run with chip breaking The defined dwell time from FUNCTION FEED DWELL is not effective with rapid traverse and probing motion l Damage to the workplace Do not use FUNCTION FEED DWELL for machining threads Procedure Proceed as follows for the definition NC block SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions 13 FUNCTION FEED DWELL D TIMEO 5 F TIME5 oe gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions select the FUNCTION FEED soft key FUNCTION FEED oon gt Select the FEED DWELL soft key aie gt Define the interval duration for dwelling D TIME gt Define the interval duration for cutting FTIME Vv TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 409 Programming Special func
52. execute it immediately You can also call TNC cycles The program is stored in the file MDI In the Positioning with MDI mode of operation the additional status display can also be activated Positioning with manual data input MDI Limitation The following functions are not available in the Positioning with MDI operating mode FK tree contour programming Program section repeats Subprogramming Path compensations RL and RR The programming graphics Program call PGM CALL The program run graphics 7 gt Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation Program the file MDI as you wish gt To start program run press the machine START button TNC 620 User s Manual 530 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming and executing simple machining operations 15 1 Example 1 A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum you can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines First you pre position the tool with straight line blocks to the hole center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece surface Then drill the hole with Cycle 200 DRILLING 0 BEGIN PGM SMDI MM 1 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2000 Call the tool tool axis Z spindle speed 2000 rom 2 L Z 200 RO FMAX Retract the tool F MAX rapid traverse 3 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX M3 Move the tool at F MAX to a position above the hole s
53. function External access page 569 12 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC model software and features Changed functions 73498x 02 The maximum number of characters for the NAME and DOC fields in the tool table has been increased from 16 to 32 Enter tool data into the table page 170 The columns ACC were added to the tool table Enter tool data into the table page 170 Operation and positioning behavior of the manual probing cycles has been improved Using 3 D touch probes option 17 page 495 Predefined values can now be entered Into a cycle parameter with the PREDEF function in cycles see User s Manual for Cycle Programming A new optimization algorithm is now used with the KinematicsOpt cycles see User s Manual for Cycle Programming With Cycle 257 Circular Stud Milling a parameter is now available with which you can determine the approach position on the stud see User s Manual for Cycle Programming With Cycle 256 Rectangular Stud a parameter is now available with which you can determine the approach position on the stud see User s Manual for Cycle Programming With the Basic Rotation probing cycle workpiece misalignment can now be compensated for via a table rotation Compensation of workpiece misalignment by rotating the table page 511 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 13 Fundamentals
54. in idle state TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 577 17 MOD functions 17 10 Setting up data interfaces Define behavior after reception of ETX noEotAfterEtx With define behavior after reception of ETX optional you determine whether the EOT character is sent after the ETX character was received m JRUE The EOT character is not sent m FALSE The EOT character is sent Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC software Enter the following settings in the user parameters seriallnterfaceRS232 definition of data blocks for the serial ports RS232 Parameters Selection Data transfer rate in baud Has to match the setting In TNCserver Data transmission protocol BLOCKWISE Data bits in each transferred 7 bits character Type of parity checking EVEN Number of stop bits 1 stop bit Specify type of handshake RTIS CIS File system for file operations FE1 578 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Setting up data interfaces 17 10 Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem The functions Transfer all files Transfer selected file and Transfer directory are not available in the FE2 and FEX modes Icon External device Operating mode PC with HEIDENHAIN TNCremo data LSV2 transfer software HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units FE1 Non HEIDENHAIN devices such as FEX printers scanners punchers PC witho
55. m M2 or M30 PARAXMODE OFF You must deactivate the parallel axis functions before switching the machine kinematics Use the PARAXMODE OFF function to switch off the parallel axis function The TNC then uses the principal axes defined by the machine manufacturer Proceed as follows for the definition SPEC FCT PROGRAM FUNCTIONS FUNCTION PARAX FUNCTION PARAXMODE FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF gt Show the soft key row with special functions gt Select the menu for defining various plain language functions gt Select FUNCTION PARAX gt Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE gt Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 393 Programming Special functions 11 3 Working with the parallel axes U V and W Example Drilling in the W axis 0 BEGIN PGM PAR MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z 2222 Call the tool in the spindle axis Z 4 L Z 0 W 0 RO FMAX M91 Reset the principle axis and minor axis 5 L Z 100 RO FMAX M3 Position the principal axis 6 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 Q210 0 sDWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 s SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q395 0 DEPTH REFERENCE 7 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY Z W Activate display compensation 8 FUNCTION PARAXMODE X Y W Positive axis selection 9 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMA
56. of the cycle This means that some machining operations will be repeated If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or program section repeat use the RESTORE POS AT N function to return to the position at which the program run was interrupted TNC 620 User s Manual 554 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Program run 16 5 When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores The data of the last defined tool Active coordinate transformations e g datum shift rotation mirroring m The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined Note that the stored data remain active until they are reset e g if you select a new program The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION soft key Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways Machine STOP button pressed Programmed interruption Resuming program run after an error With an erasable error message gt Remove the cause of the error gt Clear the error message from the screen Press the CE key gt Restart the program or resume program run where It was interrupted With an non erasable error message gt Press and hold the END key for two seconds This induces a TNC system restart gt R
57. the touch probe inside the hole at a position that is offset by approximately the safety clearance from the wall For prepositioning keep in mind the starting angle for the first probing operation with an angle of 0 the TNC probes in the positive direction of the principal axis TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 497 Manual operation and setup 14 7 Using 3 D touch probes option 17 Selecting touch probe cycles gt Select the Manual Operation or El Handwheel mode of operation TOUCH gt Select the touch probe functions by pressing EA the TOUCH PROBE soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys see overview table PROBING gt Select the touch probe cycle by pressing the E appropriate soft key for example PROBING POS for the TNC to display the associated menu When you select a manual probing function the TNC opens a form displaying all data required The content of the forms varies depending on the respective function You can also enter values in some of the fields Use the arrow keys to move to the desired input field You can position the cursor only in fields that can be edited Fields that cannot be edited appear dimmed TNC 620 User s Manual 498 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Using 3 D touch probes option 17 14 7 Recording measured values from the touch probe cycles 7 The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for
58. values tool table and TOOL CALL If TCPM see Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 option 9 page 440 is active the TNC maintains the tool perpendicular to the workpiece contour If no tool orientation is programmed in the LN block If there is a tool orientation T defined in the LN block and M128 or TCPM FUNCTION is active at the same time then the TNC will position the rotary axes automatically so that the tool can reach the defined orientation If you have not activated M128 or TCPM FUNCTION then the TNC ignores the direction vector T even if it is defined in the LN block The TNC is not able to automatically position the rotary axes on all machines Refer to your machine manual Danger of collision On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited traverse sometimes automatic positioning can require the table to be rotated by 180 In this case make sure that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or the clamps TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 453 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 6 Three dimensional tool compensation option 9 Example Block format with surface normals without tool orientation LN X 31 737 Y 21 954 Z 33 165 NX 0 2637581 NY 0 0078922 NZ 0 8764339 F1000 M128 Example Block format with surface normals and tool orientation LN X 31 737 Y 21 954 Z 33 165 NX 0 2637581 NY 0 0078922
59. 0001 mm The largest possible is 10 mm Confirm the selected jog increment with soft key 4 OK With the or handwheel key move the active handwheel axis in the corresponding direction Entering miscellaneous functions M gt gt gt gt Press the handwheel soft key F3 MSF Press the handwheel soft key F1 M Select the desired M function number by pressing the F1 or F2 key Execute the M function with the NC start key Entering the spindle speed S gt gt gt Press the handwheel soft key F3 MSF Press the handwheel soft key F2 S select the desired speed by pressing the F1 or F2 key If you press and hold the respective key each time it reaches a decimal value O the TNC increases the counting increment by a factor of 10 If in addition you press the CTRL key the counting increment increases to 1000 Activate the new speed S with the NC start key 476 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Moving the machine axes 14 2 Entering the feed rate F gt Press the handwheel soft key F3 MSF gt Press the handwheel soft key F3 F gt Select the desired feed rate by pressing the F1 or F2 key If you press and hold the respective key each time It reaches a decimal value O the TNC increases the counting increment by a factor of 10 If in addition you press the CTRL key the counting increment increases to 1000 gt Confirm the new feed rate F with the handwheel sof
60. 2015 Remote Desktop Manager option 133 2 6 Setting Meaning Input Full screen mode or user Size of the connection window Required defined window size Permit further connections Enable access to the VNC server also by other VNC connections Required share View only The external computer cannot be operated in display mode Required Entries in the Advanced Available only to authorized specialists Optional options area Starting and stopping the connection Once a connection has been configured it is shown as an icon in the Remote Desktop Manager window Click the connection icon with the right mouse key to open a menu in which the display can be started and stopped Use the right DIADUR key on the keyboard to change to Desktop 3 and back to the TNC interface You can also use the task bar to get to this desktop If the desktop of the external connection or the external computer is active all inouts from the mouse and the keyboard are transmitted there All connections are canceled automatically when the HEROS 5 operating system is shut down Please note however that only the connection is canceled whereas the external computer or the external system is not shut down automatically TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 89 Introduction 2 7 SELinux security software 2 7 SELinux security software SELinux is an extension for Linux based operating systems SELinux is an additional sec
61. 234 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Polar coordinates 6 5 Example Linear movement with polar coordinates TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 235 Programming Programming contours 6 5 Path contours Polar coordinates Example Helix LO x lt Z TNC 620 User s Manual 236 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 6 6 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Fundamentals Workpiece drawings that are not dimensioned for NC often contain unconventional coordinate data that cannot be entered with the gray path function keys For example m Known coordinates on the contour element or in Its proximity Coordinate data can be referenced to another contour element Directional data and data regarding the course of the contour You can enter such dimensional data directly by using the FK free contour programming function The TNC derives the contour from the known coordinate data and supports the programming dialog with the interactive programming graphics The figure at upper right shows a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient programming method TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 237 Programming Programming contours 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 The following p
62. 352 ees Radius compensation 197 Sales 1 o eee eer ETETE 198 Outside corners inside CORES ai de 199 Rapid traverse 166 Reading out machine parameters 349 Reference system 95 95 Replacing teXtsS 110 Retractor e 556 After a power interruption 556 Retraction trom the contour 378 Returning to the contour 561 VO 1S aarncarsesuasran sevens teeeacetees 437 Reduce display M94 439 Shortest path traverse M126 438 Rounding corners M197 382 SO Screen keyboard 138 Screen layout 72 Search FUNCION 109 Selecting a contour from DXF 264 Selecting positions from DXF 267 Selecting the datum 00 98 selecting the unit of measure 102 Select kinematics 570 Setting the BAUD RATE 5 5 576 576 576 576 5 7 O77 877 S77 578 Software NUMDET 00 08e 574 Sl ea Od ee eaten ee te EON tp 384 Special FUNCIONS 384 DOL COMMMANGS acrins 327 Status display 76 AQOIHONA risorsi 77 General eerren 76 Straight lin eee 219 231 String paramete rs cccee 341 Structuring programs 142 DUD DFOGT AM iccsitevacncesnaiincnseassiarys 275 Superimposing handwheel positioning M118 3 6 Surface normal vector 422 436 450 451 CII sacar cantante che teat T 466 SWItCN ON cccceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeee eens 464 E Eee E E 445 Ee E E E E E 449 feach N 105 219 TO O ee eee 547 Tes
63. Control component for virtual machines ConfigDesign Software for configuring the control TeleService Software for remote diagnostics and maintenance 624 TNC 620 Available Available Available Limited functionality available Not available Available Available TNC 620 iT NC 530 E X m X E X m X E X m X E X m X E X E X E X m X E X E X E X m X E X m X E X m X E X E X E X E X X iT NC 530 Available Available Available Available Available Not available Available TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Comparison Machine specific functions Function TNC 620 ITNC 530 Switching the traverse range Function available Function available Central drive 1 motor for multiple machine Function available Function available axes C axis operation spindle motor drives Function available Function available rotary axis Automatic exchange of milling head Function available Function available Support of angle heads Function not available Function available Balluf tool identification Function available with Python Function available Management of multiple tool magazines Function available Function available Expanded tool management via Python Function available Function available Comparison User functions Function TNC 620 ITNC 530 Program entry m HEIDENHAIN conversational m X m X m DIN ISO m X m X m With sma
64. E acta een E E apts doer AA E AN EE T EEA A ane 280 Calling any program as a SUDPOGIAM ccccceccceccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeetaeeeaneeeneenaes 281 Aae E E E E S ane tern tene career 283 Types Of NESTING cccccceccc cece eecec eect a eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae erre rt re eeeeneesaeseaeseeaeeeaesseeseseeeeaeeegeseeeseeaeeeeeseaeeeneeeneenas 283 PV MON LS o ir secant antics aia pcan aie A E E ios ed nacre A env E peta E 283 ORO Fay IE Neel UNO Oa eiiiai iaaea Re EEEa a aaa aE 284 Repeating program section repeatS ss esuerierusrrsrerit tirrr rrit rtr rrr e rE EPES rEPEEPEPEEPEEPEEPEEEEEEEE EErEE 285 Repedimg aA SUDDO AI aseensa naia a is Eea EAE tira E ENa boon aaron n ATA RIA 286 Programmingiexamples n a E E eee E A E T E ueeee 287 Example Milling a contour in several INISSOSssccsevicidcetaviswie fest sadvreisawseanyvannheseoseStiaviadvsad CANNA 287 c Ea e EES E E E E E E E EE E E A E E ee ae 288 Example Group of holes with Several tOOls ccccccccccceccee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeae seen eeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeetaeetaneeaneenaes 290 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 31 Contents 9 1 Principle and overview Of FUNCTIONS ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeaseseeeeeeeeaseneeeeeeeesaneeeeeseeeeseneseeeass 294 FF TO AY VIN TOS ieee cette E aetna A E secre ance A res A EES 296 Calling Q parameter TUNCUONS arinaren ekini ee Aei ai iiei anai En ai a a Eii 2
65. FMAX M2 Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to an auxiliary point Py It then moves on a Straight line to the end point Py The arc is tangentially connected both to the last contour element and to the line from Py to Py Once these lines are known the radius R suffices to unambiguously define the tool path gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LCT soft key gt Enter the coordinates of the end point Px gt Radius R of the circular arc Enter R as a positive value Example NC blocks 23 L Y 20 RR F100 Last contour element PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LCT X 10 Y 12 R 8 F100 Coordinates PN arc radius 8 mm 25 L Z 100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z return to block 1 end program TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 217 Path function key X O Le z J FK 218 Overview of path functions Function Straight line L Chamfer CHF Circle center CC Circular arc C Circular arc CR Kreisbogen CT Corner rounding RND FK free contour programming Programming Programming contours 6 4 Path contours Cartesian coordinates 6 4 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Tool movement Stra
66. For rotary axes 437 Modes of Operation 73 MOD TUNIC TION ensinei 566 P XU A E 566 OVET VIEW ere een een ae ere 567 Select 566 Move machine axes Jog positioning 468 Moving the axes With machine axis direction OTS eiae 467 Moving the machine axes 467 with the handwheel 469 Multiple axis machining 445 NC and PLC synchronization 325 NC error messages 153 NGS TMG accximannmeassatpoiceeunbunnedinita 283 Network connection 000 134 Network settings 582 C Open BMP TNS ccamuruiactossnsantas 132 Open contour corners M98 370 Open GIF file 132 Opening a video file 131 Opening Excel Tiles 0 128 Opening graphic Tiles 132 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Opening TXT files 131 Open INI file 131 Open JPG filesinin 132 Open PNG file 132 Open TXT file 131 Operating timMeS cceeee 573 Option NUMDET x ccnccctnswidesaweanntes 574 ie Pallet table 458 Application 458 BET EAE EEE E ETE ETN 460 Select and EXitaiseiiienisina 460 Transfer coordinates 458 458 Parallel axes 389 Parameter programming See Q parameter programming 294 341 Fala XCOM Di tasaredivavmnivininnenraa 389 PATAX OGG casi icon tnwitsaiocesiwaniienns 389 Part families 298 Pa ae EN 114 Path OFM OUNS cicncoassiestesecnccomeses 218 Cartesian coordinates 218 Circle with tangential COMME
67. HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Describing contours with mathematical functions 9 3 Describing contours with mathematical functions Application The Q parameters listed below enable you to program basic mathematical functions in a part program gt Select a O parameter function Press the O key in the numerical keypad at right The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row gt Select the mathematical functions Press the BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Overview Soft key Function ar FN 0 ASSIGN sey e g FN 0 Q5 60 Directly assign value e FN 1 ADDITION x y e g FN 1 Q1 Q2 5 Form and assign sum from two values a FN 2 SUBTRACTION my e g FN 2 Q1 10 5 Form and assign difference between two values FN 3 MULTIPLICATION XY e g FN 3 Q2 3 3 Form and assign the product of two values oe FN 4 DIVISION e g FN 4 Q4 8 DIV Q2 xy Form and assign the quotient of two values Not permitted Division by 0 he FN 5 SQUARE ROOT e g FN 5 Q20 SQRT 4 SORT Form and assign the square root of a value Not permitted Square root from negative value To the right of the character you can enter the following Two numbers The O parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 9 3 299 Programming Q parameters
68. If further contour elements in the selected machining sequence are selectable these elements turn green With divergences the element with the lowest angle distance Is selected Click on the last green element to assume all elements into the contour program gt The TNC shows all selected contour elements in the list view window The TNC displays elements that are still green in the NC column without a check mark The TNC does not save these elements to the contour program You can also include the marked elements in the contour program by clicking in the list view window gt f necessary you can also deselect elements that you already selected by clicking the element in the graphics window again but this time while pressing the CTRL key You can deselect all selected elements by clicking the icon gt Save the selected contour elements to the clipboard of the TNC so that you can then insert the contour In a plain language program or To save the selected contour elements in a plain language program enter any file name and the target directory in the pop up window displayed by the TNC Default setting Name of the DXF file As an alternative you can also select the Tile type Plain language program H or contour description HC gt Confirm the entry The TNC saves the contour program to the selected directory Cancel Selected Elements soft key and select the next contour as described above ENT x gt If
69. If the FN27 function is to be run only in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes you can skip the respective program section by using a jump command page 303 You can write only to numerical table fields If you wish to write to more than one column ina block you must save the values under successive Q parameter numbers You wish to write to the columns Radius Depth and D in line 5 of the presently opened table The value to be written in the table must be saved in the Q parameters Q5 Q6 and Q7 53 Q5 3 75 54 Q6 5 55 Q7 7 5 56 FN 27 TABWRITE 5 RADIUS DEPTH D Q5 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 407 Programming Special functions 11 7 Freely definable tables FN 28 TABREAD Read from a freely definable table With the FN 28 TABREAD function you read from the table previously opened with FN 26 TABOPEN You can define i e read several column names in a TABREAD block The column names must be written between quotation marks and separated by a comma In the FN 28 block you can define the Q parameter number in which the TNC is to write the value that is first read You can read only numerical table fields If you wish to read from more than one column ina block the TNC will save the values under successive Q parameter numbers Example You wish to read the values of the columns Radius Depth
70. If you want to use the potentiometers on the handwheel proceed as follows gt Press the CTRL and Handwheel keys on the HR 5xx The TNC shows the soft key menu for selecting the potentiometers on the handwheel display gt Press the HW soft key to activate the handwheel potentiometers If you have activated the potentiometers on the handwheel you must reactivate the potentiometers of the machine operating panel before deselecting the handwheel Proceed as follows gt Press the CTRL and Handwheel keys on the HR 5xx The TNC shows the soft key menu for selecting the potentiometers on the handwheel display gt Press the KBD soft key to activate the potentiometers of the machine operating panel TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 475 Manual operation and setup 14 2 Moving the machine axes Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning the TNC moves the currently active handwheel axis by a preset distance defined by you gt gt gt Press the handwheel soft key F2 STEP Activate incremental jog positioning Press handwheel soft key 3 ON select the desired jog increment by pressing the F1 or F2 key If you press and hold the respective key each time it reaches a decimal value O the TNC increases the counting increment by a factor of 10 If in addition you press the CTRL key the counting increment increases to 1 The smallest possible jog Increment Is 0
71. L Z 250 RO FMAX 5 LX Y RO FMAX 6 L Z 10 RO F3000 M13 7 APPR X Y RL F500 16 DEP X Y F3000 M9 17 L Z 250 RO FMAX M2 18 END PGM BSPCONT MM Cycle program layout 0 BEGIN PGM BSBCYC MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y Z 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X Y Z 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000 4 L Z 250 RO FMAX 5 PATTERN DEF POS1 X Y 7 Go 6 CYCL DEF 7 CYCL CALL PAT FMAX M13 8 L Z 250 RO FMAX M2 9 END PGM BSBCYC MM TNC 620 User s Manual 54 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming the first part 1 3 Programming a simple contour The contour shown to the right is to be milled once to a depth of 5 mm You have already defined the workpiece blank After you have initiated a dialog through a function key enter all the data requested by the TNC in the screen header gt Call the tool Enter the tool data Confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Do not forget the tool axis Z gt Retract tool Press the orange axis key Z and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Press the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Enter Miscellaneous function M and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the input positioning block gt Preposition the tool in the working plane Press the orange X axis key and ent
72. M141 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M141 becomes effective at the start of block TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 10 4 379 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Deleting basic rotation M143 Standard behavior The basic rotation remains in effect until it is reset or is overwritten with a new value Behavior with M143 The TNC erases a programmed basic rotation trom the NC program The function M143 is not permitted during mid program startup Effect M143 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M143 becomes effective at the start of the block TNC 620 User s Manual 380 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior 10 4 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 Standard behavior At an NC stop the TNC stops all traverse movements The tool stops moving at the point of interruption Behavior with M148 The M148 function must be enabled by the machine tool builder The machine tool builder defines in a machine parameter the path that the TNC is to traverse for a LIFTOFF command The TNC retracts the tool by up to 2 mm in the direction of the tool axis if in the LIFTOFF column of the tool table you set the parameter Y for the active tool see Enter tool data into the table page 1 0 LI
73. M197 is effective blockwise and is only effective on outside corners Example NC blocks L X Y RL M197 DLO 876 TNC 620 User s Manual 382 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming Special functions 11 1 Overview of special functions 11 1 Overview of special functions The TNC provides the following powertul special functions for a large number of applications Function Description Active Chatter Control Option 145 page 387 Working with text files page 399 Working with treely definable tables page 403 Press the SPEC FCT and the corresponding soft keys to access further special functions of the TNC The following tables will give you an overview of which functions are available Main menu for SPEC FCT special functions SPEC gt Press the special functions key Ti O ag Soft key Function Description caoeean Define program defaults page 385 DEFAULTS CONTOUR Functions for contour and point page 385 POINT MACHINING machinin g TILT Define the PLANE function page 415 l ea site sien waa asn PLANE DEFAULTS POIN MACHINING PLANE FUNCTIONS Saecean Define different conversational page 386 FUNCTIONS fu nections PROGRAM Programming aids page 137 MING After pressing the SPEC FCT key you can open the smartSelect selection window with the GOTO key The TNC displays a structure overview with all available functions
74. M3 8 L IX 20 IY 15 9 L X 60 IY 10 Capture actual position You can also generate a straight line block L block by using the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key gt In the Manual Operation mode move the tool to the position you want to capture gt Switch the screen display to programming gt Select the program block after which you want to insert the Straight line block gt Press the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key The i TNC generates a straight line block with the actual position coordinates TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 219 Programming Programming contours 6 4 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Inserting a chamfer between two straight lines The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two straight lines The line blocks before and after the CHF block must be in the same working plane as the chamfer The radius compensation before and after the CHF block must be the same The chamfer must be machinable with the current tool CHF o gt Chamfer side length Length of the chamfer and if necessary gt Feed rate F effective only in CHF block Example NC blocks 7 L X 0 Y 30 RL F300 M3 8 L X 40 IY 5 9 CHF 12 F250 10 L IX 5 Y 0 You cannot start a contour with a CHF block A chamfer is possible only in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part of the contour A teed rate programmed in the CHF b
75. N Daas The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside PHJPHENDENOOEA BEG front cover SHMOAAMOOOOFOUD Baan HARPOSwHOWNWIOOe mpn Some machine manufacturers do not use the L O E a aes an on on a po standard operating panel from HEIDENHAIN Refer De e to your machine manual 2052 POTAB Z epe PEAS External buttons e g NC START or NC STOP are 5 described in the manual for your machine tool A OOD p popop DAWA FD EEEH TNC 620 User s Manual 72 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Modes of operation 2 3 2 3 Modes of operation Manual Operation and El Handwheel The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine tool In this mode of operation you can position the machine axes manually or by increments set the datums and tilt the working plane vanua operation programming 2 Manual operation an osition display MODE NOML Sy 2 95 000 The El Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the 10 000 machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel 20 000 0 000 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout select as described previously Soft key Window T o X Nm PI TI PEAAOS 0 Y Nm 07 03 Positions TOUCH PRESET 3D ROT ee OL E A pes POSITION Left positions right status display STATUS POSITION Left positions right collision object KINEMATICS Positioning with Manual Data Inp
76. P matured for e aa otary ace indivi idually With this rsion of the shire reece ze ate measure t salignment one ta s spindle he ad or tal ble select the drive and the directory in which the text ee or head axe e rotary axis must be a twice each time with a stylus of a different length file is saved he new calibration cycle 40 automatically calibrates the touch probe de me ee gt Move the highlight to the text file pon ects eon eons oie aaa NE gt Press the ENT key The TNC opens the text file on with the internal text editor nner ERA t its ee Alternatively you can also open the ASCII files using the Leafpad additional tool The shortcuts you are familiar with trom Windows which you can use to edit texts quickly CTRL C CTRL V are available within Leafpad With the key combination ALT TAB you can always return to the TNC user interface while leaving the text Tile open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface To open Leafpad proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the Menu HEIDENHAIN icon from the task bar gt Select the Tools and Leafpad menu items in the pull down menu To exit Leafpad proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Quit The TNC returns to the file manager Displaying video files This feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder wil Refer
77. PGM MGT key Move the highlight to the tool table you want to import Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Shift the soft key row Select the IMPORT TABLE soft key The TNC inquires whether you really want to overwrite the selected tool table Do not overwrite the file Press the CANCEL soft key or Overwrite the file Press the OK soft key gt Open the converted table and check its contents vY vV V V vv iv vv TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 177 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data The following characters are permitted in the Name column of the tool table amp 0123456 7 SB9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUV WKY Z_ The TNC changes a comma in the tool name to a period during import The TNC overwrites the selected tool table when running the IMPORT TABLE function To avoid losing data be sure to make a backup copy of your original tool table before importing it The procedure for copying tool tables using the TNC file manager is described in the section on file management see Copying a table page 120 When tool tables are imported from an ITNC 530 all existing tools are imported along with their corresponding tool type Nonexistent tool types are imported as type O MILL Check the tool table after the import TNC 620 User s Manual 178 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Pocket table for tool changer EJ roo table editing Brest run ti Program
78. Programming 2 2015 TNCguide Inhalt Index Suchen Schl sselwort 3 D 3D Darstellung 3D Tastsysteme 3D Tastsysteme kalibrieren 3D Tastsysteme kalibrieren schalt Allgemeines zu den Tastsystemzy Antastwerte in Nullpunkt Tabelle Antastwerte in Preset Tabelle schi Antastzyklen Antastzyklen Betriebsart Manuell el Antastzyklen Siehe Benutzer Han Automatische Werkzeug Vermess BAUD Rate einstellen Beliebiger Einstieg ins Programm gt 4 9 3D Darstellung Mit der hochaufl senden 3D Darstellung k nnen Sie die fain otaa BY Fror am Test Oberfl che des bearbeiteten Werkst cks detailliert darstellen Die TNC erzeugt durch eine simulierte Lichtquelle realistische Verhaltnisse von Licht un Sch 3D Darstellung wahlen Softkey 3D Darstellung dr cken SA T 3D Darstellung drehen vergr ern verkleinern und verschieben ee Funktionen zum Drehen und Vergr ern Verkleinern w hlen Die TNC zeigt gus folgende Softkeys Funktion Darstellung in 5 Schritten vertikal drehen Darstellung in 5 Schritten horizontal kippen ZUR CK VORWARTS SEITE SEITE VERZEI CHN t OE 161 Programming Programming aids 4 9 TNCguide context sensitive help system Downloading current help files You ll find the help files for your TNC software on the HEIDENHAIN homepage www heidenhain de under gt Documentation and information User Documentation TNCguide Select the desired
79. Select the Program Run Full Sequence the Program Run Single Block or the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation gt Shift the soft key row gt Activate ACC Set the soft key to ON and the TNC displays the ACC symbol in the position display see Status displays page 76 gt To deactivate ACC Set the soft key to OFF If ACC is on in the position display the TNC shows the symbol ace TNC 620 User s Manual 388 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the parallel axes U V and W 11 3 11 3 Working with the parallel axes U V and W Overview Your machine must be configured by the machine manufacturer If you want to use parallel axis functions Depending on the configuration the PARAXCOMP function may be activated as standard Refer to your machine manual The axes U V and W are secondary axes parallel to the principal axes X Y and Z respectively Principal axes and parallel axes are permanently assigned to each other Principal axis Parallel axis Rotary axis X U A Y V B Z W C The TNC provides the following functions for machining with the parallel axes U V and W Soft Function Meaning Page key runerton PARAXCOMP Define the TNC s 391 PARAXCOMP behavior when positioning parallel axes cunetron PARAXMODE Define the axes the 392 PARAXMODE TNC is to use for machining After the TNC is started up the standard configuration is always effective You
80. Soft key Meaning No direct Active fixed cycle selection possible Active values of Cycle 32 Tolerance TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 l11 CC X 22 5 Y 35 75 Status displays 2 4 Program run full sequence Gi Program run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H 0 BEGIN PGM STAT1 MM SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshift d CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 CALL LBL 99 LBL 99 PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 STAY CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING CYCL DEF 17 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 17 2 DEPTH 1 10 CYCL DEF 17 3 PITCH 1 0 X Nm P1 T1 0 Y Nm 06 31 x rte oO 10 200 8 fj 0 000 y 95 000 Gi 0 000 Mode nom o i aza B6200 G omm min Ovr 100 m 5 9 STATUS COORD OVERVIEW POS STATUS TRANSF Q PARAM STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF Program run full sequence EP rooraming th Program run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H Overview PGm LBL cyc m Pos Toot TT TRANS aPana S A fever 0 BEGIN PGM STAT1 MM SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshift d CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 PEE CALL LBL 99 LBL 99 PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 STAY CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING CYCL DEF 17 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 17 2 DEPTH 1 10 CYCL DEF 17 3 PITCH 1 0 X Nm P1 T1 0 Y Nm 06 31 al Br 0 000 5000 0 000 Mode NOML o a tz B
81. Soft key Tagging function Tag a single file TAG Tag all files in the directory FILES oe Untag a single file FILE UNTAG Untag all files ALL COPY TAG Copy all tagged files Lee hws some functions such as copying or erasing files can not only be used for individual files but also for several files at once To tag several files proceed as follows gt Move the highlight to the first file gt To display the tagging functions press the TAG soft key gt Tag a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key FILE Move the highlight to the next file you wish to tag Only works via soft keys Do not use the arrow keys gt To tag further files press the TAG FILES soft key FILE etc ry irr M gt Copy the tagged files Press the COPY soft key or gt Delete the tagged files Leave the active soft key and then press the DELETE soft key to delete the tagged files TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 3 4 123 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Renaming a file gt Move the highlight to the file you wish to rename gt Select the renaming function gt Enter the new Tile name the file type cannot be changed gt To rename Press the OK soft key or the ENT key Sorting files gt Select the folder in which you wish to sort the files gt Select the SORT soft key gt Select the soft key with the correspond
82. StalU ssexcdaoesosacecaceeteasennacnee 116 Filter for hole positions with DXF data update 271 FIFE Wall arrinin FK programming 237 237 Circular We WS sicacsatininedeseisares 242 Fundamentals 237 FK Programming Fa FG esiri o eeen 239 FK programming Initiating dialog 240 INpuUt OUTC MS asstusncaanmaeincnnenneann 243 Auxillary points 246 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Circle data 244 Closed ContoulS 6 245 Direction and length of contour elements 243 ENA POINTS tesreincrerecsauces 243 Relative data 0668 247 Straight WES cascovatussinseiwsavneeas 241 FN14 ERROR Displaying error MESSAGES ccceccee neces 308 308 FN16 FPRINT Output of formatted TSS A TE EE E E E 512 312 FN18 SYSREAD Reading system E E a ce en ee 316 316 FN19 PLC Transfer values to the Oe ene a nee 325 325 FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC SYNCRTONIZAtION assasin 525 FN23 CIRCLE DATA Calculate a circle from 3 points 302 FN24 CIRCLE DATA Calculate a circle from 4 points 302 FN26 TABOPEN Open a freely definable table 406 FN27 TABWRITE Write to a freely definable table 407 407 FN28 TABREAD Read from a freely definable table 408 408 FN29 PLC Transfer values to the E ects eee niente 326 FN37 EXPORT 326 Formatted output of Q parameter WANES srianan eina 312 FO VIE W essien misrin boantauat
83. TNC suggests on the screen press the machine START button or gt To move the axes in any sequence press the soft keys RESTORE X RESTORE Z etc and activate each axis with the machine START button gt To resume machining press the machine START button TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 561 Test run and program run 16 6 Automatic program start 16 6 Automatic program start Application Eg Program run full sequence Bane editing A Program run full sequence The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of the automatic program start function Refer to your machine manual TNC nc_prog 113 H 0 BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 2Z 0 TOOL CALL Automatic program start CYCL DEF Start pro gram CYCL DEF Date DD MM yy CYCL DEF 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 Caution Danger for the operator The autostart function must not be used on machines that do not have an enclosed working space CANCEL eda Es emn Ad 38 240 0 0 000 In a Program Run operating mode you can use the AUTOSTART soft key see figure at upper right to define a specific time at which the program that is currently active in this operating mode is to be started AUTOSTART gt Show the window for entering the starting time ES see figure at center right gt Time hrs min sec Time o
84. USAGE test 186 Touch probe cycles 0 495 Manual Operation mode 495 see Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Touch probe monitoring 379 TRANS DATUM cece 396 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Traversing reference marks 464 TIGONOMENY vnvictesicsnintennoscecnenes 301 T NEC O eae nee ene one 451 User parameters Machine Specific c008 596 Using touch probe functions with mechanical probes or measuring Window Manager 83 Wireless handwheel 472 Assign handwheel holder 591 ie gis U eee nes 591 Selecting transmitter power 592 SE MING channe lesides 592 Statistical data 593 Working space monitoring 546 550 Workpiece positions 97 Writing probing values in a datum TNO NS A EET 500 Writing probing values in a preset e D e EET E E 501 a ee ae Zero point Shift 396 Coordinate input 0 396 ZIP archive 130 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 655 HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Strafge 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 32 1000 Measuring systems 49 8669 31 3104 E mail service ms support heidenhain de TNC support lt gt 49 8669 31 3101 E mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E ma
85. User s Manual 214 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Approaching and departing a contour 6 3 Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa on a circular arc The feed rate programmed in the APPR block is effective for the entire path that the TNC traversed in the approach block path Ps to Pa If you program all three principal axes X Y and Z in the approach block the TNC initially traverses the tool from the starting point Ps In the working plane and then in the tool axis on the auxiliary point Py The control only traverses the tool in the working plane from auxiliary point Py to the contour point Pa Consider this behavior when importing programs trom earlier controls Adapt the program if required Earlier controls traverse the auxiliary point Py in all three principal axes simultaneously The arc is connected tangentially both to the line Ps Py as well as to the first contour element Once these lines are known the radius then suffices to completely define the tool path gt Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LCT soft key gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa gt Radius R of the circular arc Enter R as a positi
86. Y 0 RO L Z 5 RO FMAX M APPR LCT X 10 FPOL X 100 Y 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Column Meaning TOKEN TOOL Tool usage time per TOOL CALL The entries are listed in chronological order TTOTAL Total usage time of a tool STOTAL Call of a subprogram the entries are listed in chronological order TIMETOTAL The total machining time of the NC program is entered in the WTIME column In the PATH column the TNC saves the path name of the corresponding NC programs The TIME column shows the sum of all TIME entries feed time without rapid traverse movements The TNC sets all other columns to O TOOLFILE In the PATH column the TNC saves the path name of the tool table with which you conducted the test run This enables the TNC during the actual tool usage test to detect whether you pertormed the test run with the TOOL T TNR Tool number 1 No tool inserted yet IDX Tool index TNC 620 User s Manual 186 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Column Meaning NAME Tool name from the tool table TIME Tool usage time in seconds feed time without rapid traverse movements WTIME Tool usage time in seconds total usage time between tool changes RAD Tool radius R Oversize of tool radius DR from the tool table in mm BLOCK Block number in which the TOOL CALL block was programmed PATH m TOKEN TOOL Path name of the active main pro
87. You can rapidly navigate with the cursor or mouse and select functions in the tree diagram The TNC displays online help for the specific functions in the window on the right TNC 620 User s Manual 384 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Overview of special functions 11 1 Program defaults menu PE gt Select the program defaults menu DEFAULTS Soft key Function Description e Sno ae Define workpiece blank page 100 tea tof Hote ves ns nL Faso FORM e select datum table see User s TABLE Manual for i L100 RO kx M30 Cycles OBAL Define global cycle parameters See User s DEF Manual for Cycles Functions for contour and point machining menu CONTOUR gt Select the menu for functions for contour and o OE POINT a l G Programmin g MACHINING point machining Se Soft key Function Description 4 L 2 100 RO FMAX M13 EEE Assign contour description See User s see toT fers ves n me raso CONTOUR Manual for ge Cycles Sere Define a simple contour formula see User s DEF Manual for Cycles a Semana TEETAN Select a contour definition See User s CONTOUR DEF contour i FORMULA DEF PATTERN CONTOUR Manual for Cycles e Define a complex contour formula See User s FORMULA Manual for Cycles payee Define regular machining pattern see User s DEF Manual for Cycles select the point file with see User s PATTERN machining positions Manual for Cycles TNC 620 U
88. Z 4000 16 L Z 250 RO FMAX 17 CALL LBL 10 18 FN 0 Q10 0 19 CALL LBL 10 20 L Z 100 RO FMAX M2 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 I Center in X axis Center in Y axis Center in Z axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Cylinder radius Length of the cylinder Rotational position in the X Y plane Allowance for cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Number of cuts Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance Call machining operation Retract the tool end program 359 Programming O parameters 9 13 Programming examples 21 LBL 10 22 Q16 Q6 Q10 Q108 23 FN 0 Q20 1 24 FN 0 Q24 Q4 25 Q25 Q5 Q4 Q13 26 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT 27 CYCL DEF 7 1 X Q1 28 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y Q2 29 CYCL DEF 7 3 Z Q3 30 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION 31 CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT Q8 32 L X 0 Y 0 RO FMAX 33 L Z 5 RO F1000 M3 34 LBL 1 35 CC Z 0 X 0 36 LP PR Q16 PA Q24 FQ11 37 L Y Q7 RO FQ12 38 FN 1 Q20 Q20 1 39 FN 1 Q24 Q24 Q25 40 FN 11 IF Q20 GT Q13 GOTO LBL 99 41 LP PR Q16 PA Q24 FQ11 42 L Y 0 RO FQ12 43 FN 1 Q20 Q20 1 44 FN 1 Q24 Q24 Q25 45 FN 12 IF Q20 LT Q13 GOTO LBL 1 46 LBL 99 47 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION 48 CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT 0 49 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT 50 CYCL DEF 7 1 X 0 51 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 0 52 CYCL DEF 7
89. Z_Positive Z_Negative depending on tool axis Distance of tool lower edge to probe contact upper edge 0 001 to 99 9999 mm Offset of stylus to tool Rapid traverse in probing cycle 10 to 300 000 mm min Rapid traverse in probing cycle Probing teed rate with tool measurement 1 to 3 000 mm min Probing feed rate with tool measurement Calculation of probing feed rate ConstantTolerance Calculation of probing feed rate with constant tolerance VariableTolerance Calculation of probing feed rate with variable tolerance ConstantFeed Constant probing feed rate Type of speed determination Automatic Determine speed automatically MinSpindleSpeed Use minimum spindle speed Max permissible rotational soeed on cutting edge 1 to 129 m min Permissible rotational speed on cutter circumference Maximum permissible speed with tool measurement 0 bis 1 000 1 min Maximum permissible speed Maximum permissible measurement error with tool measurement 0 001 to 0 999 mm First maximum permissible measurement error Maximum permissible measurement error with tool measurement 0 001 bis 0 999 mm Second maximum permissible measurement error NC stop during tool check True When breakage tolerance is exceeded the NC program is stopped False The NC program is not stopped TNC 620 User s Manual 602 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Machine specific user parameters 18 1 Parameter settings NC stop during tool measurem
90. a tilted working plane Danger of collision Make sure that the angle values entered in the menu for tilting the working plane match the actual angles of the tilted axis Deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function before you cross the reference points Take care that there is no collision Retract the tool trom the current position first If necessary The TNC automatically activates the tilted working plane if this function was enabled when the control was switched off Then the TNC moves the axes in the tilted coordinate system when an axis direction key is pressed Position the tool in such a way that a collision is excluded during the subsequent crossing of the reference points To cross the reference points you have to deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function see To activate manual tilting page 526 If you use this function then for non absolute encoders you must confirm the positions of the rotary axes which the TNC displays in a pop up window The position displayed is the last active position of the rotary axes before switch off If one of the two functions that were active before is active now the NC START button has no function The TNC outputs a corresponding error message TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Switch on switch off 14 1 465 Manual operation and setup 14 1 Switch on switch off Switch off 7 Deactivation is a machine dependent f
91. absolute datum with the coordinates X 0 Y 0 Holes 5 to 7 are dimensioned with respect to a relative datum with the absolute coordinates X 450 Y 750 With the DATUM SHIFT cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position X 450 Y 750 to be able to program holes 5 to 7 without further calculations TNC 620 User s Manual 98 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Opening programs and entering 3 2 3 2 Opening programs and entering Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN conversational format A part program consists of a series of program blocks The figure at right illustrates the elements of a block The TNC numbers the blocks of a part program in ascending Block sequence The first block of a program is identified by BEGIN PGM the program name and the active unit of measure The subsequent blocks contain information on pai E eee The workpiece blank Teel calle Block number Approaching a safe position Feed rates and spindle speeds as well as Path contours cycles and other functions The last block of a program is identified by END PGM the program name and the active unit of measure After each tool call HEIDENHAIN recommends always traversing to a safe position from which the TNC can position the tool for machining without causing a collision TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 99 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening progr
92. after the block with M2 or M30 If subprograms are located before the block with M2 or M30 in the part program they will be executed at least once even if they are not called Programming a subprogram gt To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key gt Enter the subprogram number If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry gt To mark the end press the LBL SET key and enter the label number 0 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Subprograms O BEGIN PGM CALL LBL1 L Z 100 M2 8 2 275 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 2 Subprograms Calling a subprogram gt Calla subprogram Press the LBL CALL key gt Enter the subprogram number of the subprogram you wish to call If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry gt If you want to enter the number of a string parameter as target address press the OS soft key The TNC will then jump to the label name that is specified in the defined string parameter gt Ignore repeats REP by pressing the NO ENT key Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats CALL LBL O is not permitted as it is only used to call the end of a subprogram TNC 620 User s Manual 276 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Program section repeats 8 3 8 3 Program section repeats Label The beginning of a program
93. are selectable these elements turn green With divergences the element with the lowest angle distance Is selected Click on the last green element to assume all elements into the contour program You select the machining sequence of the contour with the first contour element If the contour element to be extended or shortened is a Straight line then the TNC extends shortens the contour element along the same line If the contour element to be extended or shortened is a circular arc then the TNC extends shortens the contour element along the same arc TNC 620 User s Manual 266 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 DXF converter option 42 73 Selecting and saving machining positions You must use the touchpad on the TNC keyboard or a mouse attached via the USB port in order to select a machining position If the positions to be selected are very close to one another use the zoom function If required configure the basic settings so that the TNC shows the tool paths see Basic settings page 259 Three possibilities are available in the pattern generator for defining machining positions m Single selection You select the desired machining position through individual mouse clicks see Single selection page 268 Rapid selection of hole positions with the mouse area By dragging the mouse to define an area you can select all the hole positions within it see Rapid selection o
94. at any block Optional block skip Functions for graphic simulation Machining time measuring the Additional status display TNC 620 User s Manual 548 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Test run Danger of collision The TNC cannot graphically simulate all traverse motions actually performed by the machine These include Traverse motions during tool change if the machine manufacturer defined them in a tool change macro or via the PLC Positioning movements that the machine manufacturer defined in an M function macro Positioning movements that the machine manufacturer performs via the PLC HEIDENHAIN therefore recommends proceeding with caution for every new program even when the program test did not output any error message and no visible damage to the workpiece occurred With cuboid workpiece blanks the TNC starts a program test run after a tool call at the following position m n the working plane in the center of the defined BLK FORM m n the tool axis 1 mm above the MAX point defined in the BLK FORM With rotationally symmetric workpiece blanks the TNC starts a program test run after a tool call at the following position m n the machining plane at the position X 0 Y 0 m n the tool axis 1 mm above the defined workpiece blank In order to ensure unambiguous behavior during program run after a tool change you should always move to a position from which the TNC can position the to
95. be damaged by the tool are not machined dark areas in figure You can also use M120 to calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data created on an external programming system This means that deviations trom the theoretical tool radius can be compensated Use LA Look Ahead behind M120 to define the number of blocks maximum 99 that you want the TNC to calculate in advance Note that the larger the number of blocks you choose the higher the block processing time will be Input If you enter M120 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be calculated in advance Effect M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius compensation RL or RR M120 is then effective trom this block until radius compensation is canceled with RO M120 LAO is programmed or M120 is programmed without LA or another program is called with PGM CALL the working plane is tilted with Cycle 19 or the PLANE function M120 becomes effective at the start of block 374 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior 10 4 Restrictions After an external or internal stop you can only re enter the contour with the function RESTORE POS AT N Before you start the block scan you must cancel M120 otherwise the TNC will output an error message m When using the path functions RND an
96. builder Refer to your machine manual Activating feed rate limitation When the F LIMITED soft key is set to ON the TNC limits the maximum permissible axis speeds to the specified safely limited speed gt Select the Manual Operation mode gt Scroll to the last soft key row gt Switch on off feed rate limit TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 483 Manual operation and setup 14 4 Optional safety concept functional safety FS Additional status displays On a control with functional safety FS the general status display contains additional information about the current status of safety functions The TNC shows this information as operating statuses of the status displays T S and F Status display Brief description STO Energy supply to the spindle or a feed drive is Interrupted SLS Safely limited speed A safely limited speed IS active SOS Safe operating stop Safe operating stop is active STO Safe torque off Energy supply to the motor is Interrupted The TNC shows the active safety related mode of operation with an icon in the header to the right of the operating mode text Safety related operating mode gt 0 g 214 5 SOM_1 operating mode active SOM SOM_2 mode active 20 SOM SOM_3 mode active 3 SOM SOM_4 mode active 4 O 484 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum management with the pre
97. contour will be damaged when the end point is approached Departing the end point in the spindle axis Program the departure from the end point in the spindle axis separately See figure at center right NC blocks 50 L X 60 Y 70 RO F700 51 L Z 250 RO FMAX Common starting and end points Do not program any radius compensation if the starting point and end point are the same In order to make sure the contour will not be damaged the optimal starting point should lie between the extended tool paths for machining the first and last contour elements Figure at right If you set the ending point in the dark gray area the contour will be damaged when the contour Is approached departed TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 209 Programming Programming contours 6 3 Approaching and departing a contour Overview Types of paths for contour approach and departure The functions for contour approach APPR and departure DEP are activated with the APPR DEP key You can then select the desired path function with the corresponding soft key Approach Departure Function APPR LT DEP LT Straight line with tangential E oa connection APPR LN APPR CT Se APPR LCT Straight line perpendicular to a contour point Circular arc with tangential T APPR LT APPR LN APPR CT APPR LCT connection m J lt A Circular arc with tangentia
98. direction of the centerline You can choose by soft key whether the datum or zero point should be set in the reference axis minor axis or tool axis This can be necessary if for example you would like to save the measured position in the reference and minor axis TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 519 Manual operation and setup 14 10 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 Measuring workpieces with a 3 D touch probe You can also use the touch probe in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel operating modes to make simple measurements on the workpiece Numerous programmable probe cycles are available for complex measuring tasks see User s Manual for Cycles Chapter 16 Automatic workpiece inspection With a 3 D touch probe you can determine Position coordinates and from them m Dimensions and angles on the workpiece Finding the coordinates of a position on an aligned workpiece PROBING gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING ie POS soft key gt Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point gt Select the probe direction and axis of the coordinate Use the corresponding soft keys for selection gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as reference point Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point see Corner as d
99. eee ia 220 Chatter Control 387 Checking the axis positions 483 Circle Cente ae here ore 222 Circular path 223 232 Code NUMDbETS ccecce 574 COMP STSOM iscccontternncienntnsaniiertasnn 623 Compensating workpiece 652 misalignment By measuring two points on a straight surface 509 Condition of RTS line 577 Connecting removing USB devices 135 Connector pin layout for data FE A AC SS rasetteetccitorcinascttie ontsasint eet 608 Context sensitive help 158 Control panel 72 Conversational dialog 103 Coordinate transformation 396 Copying program sections 108 108 Corner rounding 221 Doo Data BackUp 113 Data interface 575 Connector pin layouts 608 Oe OIDs E EE O 575 Data output on the screen 315 Data transfer software 580 Data transfer speed 575 576 576 5 6 576 577 577 Datum management 485 Datum setting 493 Without a 3 D touch probe 493 Datum shift POSE HINO isinieeriiitreiri 398 Using the datum table 397 Datum table 500 Transferring test results 500 Defining local Q parameters 297 Defining nonvolatile Q parameters 297 Defining the workpiece blank 102 Depart CON OUTF cecce 208 Dial rorirori 103 DIECO Y ean potdsveadyateiaeaiwn 114 118 O E 121 CO r E 118 DEE TO neier 122 Displaying HTML files 129 Displaying Internet fi
100. entered in an L block Enter the coordinates of the target point and confirm your entry with ENT RADIUS COMP RL RR NO COMP gt Select tool movement to the left of the i programmed contour Press the RL soft key or Select tool movement to the right of the contour Press the RR soft key or gt Select tool movement without radius compensation or cancel radius compensation Press the ENT key END gt Terminate the block Press the END key ek n m 4 y TNC 620 User s Manual 198 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tool compensation 5 3 Radius compensation Machining corners Outside corners If you program radius compensation the TNC moves the tool around outside corners on a transitional arc If necessary the TNC reduces the feed rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress for example at very great changes of direction m Inside corners The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners under radius compensation From this point It then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the workpiece at the inside corners The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour Danger of collision To prevent the tool trom damaging the contour be careful not to program the starting or end position for machining inside corners at a corner of the contour TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programm
101. gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt Position the touch probe near the second touch point on the same workpiece edge gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt Datum Enter both datum coordinates into the menu window and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 501 gt To terminate the probe function press the END soft key HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used You can identify the intersection of two straight lines by holes or studs and set this as the datum For each Straight line however probing must only be with two identical touch probe functions e g two holes The Corner as datum probing cycle identities the angle and intersection of two straight lines In addition to datum setting the cycle can also activate a basic rotation The TNC has two soft keys for you to decide which straight line you wish to use for this The soft key ROT 1 activates the angle of the first straight line as basic rotation and the soft key ROT 2 the angle of the second straight line If you wish to activate the basic rotation in the cycle you must always do this before datum setting After you set a datum or write to a zero point or preset table the ROT 1 and ROT 2 soft keys are no longer displayed TNC 620 Use
102. if necessary gt Direction of rotation DR gt Feed rate F gt Miscellaneous function M The TNC normally makes circular movements in the active working plane If you program circular arcs that do not lie in the active working plane e g C Z X DR with a tool axis Z and at the same time rotate this movement then the TNC moves the tool in a spatial arc which means a circular arc In 3 axes software option 8 Example NC blocks 5 CC X 25 Y 25 6 L X 45 Y 25 RR F200 M3 7 C X 45 Y 25 DR Full circle For the end point enter the same point that you used for the Starting point The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the circle Inout tolerance up to 0 016 mm selected through the circleDeviation machine parameter Smallest possible circle that the TNC can traverse 0 0016 um TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 223 Programming Programming contours 6 4 Path contours Cartesian coordinates CircleCR with defined radius The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R CR p gt Coordinates of the arc end point gt Radius R the algebraic sign determines the size of the arc gt Direction of rotation DR Note The algebraic sign determines whether the arc is concave or convex gt Miscellaneous function M gt Feed rate F Full circle For a Tull circle program two blocks in Succession The end point of the first semicircle is the s
103. in Cycle 7 you can use TRANS DATUM to directly program shift values or activate a line from a selectable datum table In addition there is also the TRANS DATUM RESET function which you can easily use to reset a datum shift TRANS DATUM AXIS You can define a datum shift by entering values in the respective NC block axes with the TRANS DATUM AXIS Function You can define up to 13 TRANS DATUMAXIS X 10 Y 25 Z 42 nine coordinates in one block and incremental entries are possible Proceed as follows for the definition gt Show the soft key row with special functions ena gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions gt Select transformations TRANSFORM gt Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM DATUM gt Select the value input soft key gt Enter the datum shift in the affected axes confirming with the ENT key each time Values entered as absolute values refer to the workpiece datum which is specified either by datum setting or with a preset from the preset table Incremental values always refer to the datum which was last valid this may be a datum which has already been shifted TNC 620 User s Manual 396 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Definition of a datum shift 11 5 TRANS DATUM TABLE You can define a datum shift by selecting a datum number from a NC block datum table with the TRANS DATUM TABLE function Proceed as 13 TRANS DATUMTABLE TABLINE25 follows for the de
104. in which you wish to store the new program FILE NAME NEW H ENT gt Enter the new program name and confirm your entry with the ENT key gt Select the unit of measure Press the MM or INCH omn soft key The TNC switches the screen layout and initiates the dialog for defining the BLK FORM workpiece blank cI gt Select a rectangular workpiece blank Press the soft key for a rectangular blank form WORKING PLANE IN GRAPHIC XY gt Enter the spindle axis e g Z WORKPIECE BLANK DEF MINIMUM 7 gt Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN point and confirm each of your entries with the ENT key WORKPIECE BLANK DEF MAXIMUM a gt Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point and confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Example Display the BLK form in the NC program 0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM Program begin name unit of measure 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 40 Spindle axis MIN point coordinates 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 MAX point coordinates 3 END PGM NEW MM Program end name unit of measure The TNC automatically generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END blocks If you do not wish to define a blank form cancel the dialog at Working plane in graphic XY by pressing the DEL key TNC 620 User s Manual 102 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Opening programs and entering 3 2 Programming tool movements in c
105. increment function Preset table TNC 620 User s Manual TNC 620 The jog increment can be defined separately for linear and rotary axes Basic transformation translation and rotation of machine table system to workpiece system via the columns X Y and Z as well as Spatial angles SPA SPB and SPC In addition the columns X_OFFS to W_OFFS can be used to define the axis offset of each individual axis The function of the axis offsets can be configured HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 sectional plane can be selected via three toggle soft keys Are ignored during Test Run Function not available Function not available Function not available Function not available Function not available ITNC 530 The jog increment applies for both linear and rotary axes Basic transformation translation of machine table system to workpiece system via the columns X Y and Z as well as a ROT basic rotation in the working plane rotation In addition the columns A to W can be used to define datums in the rotary and parallel axes 643 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Function Behavior during presetting Handling of preset table Preset tables that depend on the range of traverse Definition of feed rate limitation 644 TNC 620 Presetting in a rotary axis has the same effect as an axis offset The offset is also effective for k
106. is effective incrementally from the current tool position in the active tool axis direction that the TNC approaches before tilting MB MAX positions the tool just before the software limit Switch TNC 620 User s Manual 430 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Positioning the rotary axes in a separate block Proceed as follows if you want to position the rotary axes in a separate positioning block option STAY selected Danger of collision Pre position the tool to a position where there is no danger of collision with the workpiece clamping devices during positioning Do not program mirroring of the rotary axis between the PLANE function and the positioning otherwise the control positions to the mirrored values but the PLANE function calculates without mirroring gt Select any PLANE function and define automatic positioning with the STAY option During program execution the TNC calculates the position values of the rotary axes present on the machine and stores them in the system parameters Q120 A axis Q121 B axis and Q122 C axis gt Define the positioning block with the angular values calculated by the TNC NC example blocks Position a machine with a rotary table C and a tilting table A to a space angle of B 45 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 431 Programming Multiple axis machin
107. language TNC Controls series e g TNC 600 Desired NC software number e g TNC 620 81760x 01 select the desired language version from the TNCguide online help table Download the ZIP file and unpack it gt Move the unzipped CHM files to the TNC in the TNC tncguide en directory or into the respective language subdirectory see also the following table vY V V V V V YV y If you want to use TNCremo to transfer the chm files to the TNC then in the Extras gt Configuration gt Mode gt Transfer in binary format menu item you have to enter the extension CHM TNC 620 User s Manual 162 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Language German English Czech French Italian Spanish Portuguese swedish Danish Finnish Dutch Polish Hungarian Russian Chinese simplified Chinese traditional Slovenian Norwegian Slovak Korean Turkish Romanian TNC 620 User s Manual TNCguide context sensitive help system TNC directory TNC tncguide de TNC tncguide en TNC tncguide cs TNC tncguide fr TNC tncguide it TNC tncguide es TNC tncguide pt TNC tncguide sv TNC tncguide da TNC tncguide fi TNC tncguide nl TNC tncguide pl TNC tncguide hu TNC tncguide ru TNC tncguide zh TNC tncguide zh tw TNC tncguide sl TNC tncguide no TNC tncguide sk TNC tncguide kr TNC tncguide tr TNC tncguide ro HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 4 9 163
108. larger by a factor of 10 17 7 Displaying operating times Application The MACHINE TIME MOD function enables you to see various TETE e r types of operating times Operating time Meaning Control on Operating time of the control since being put into service Machine on Operating time of the machine tool since being put into service O 100 N OFI Program run Duration of controlled operation since being put into service operating time displays Refer to your machine E manual 7 The machine tool builder can provide further TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 573 17 MOD functions 17 8 Software numbers 17 8 Software numbers Application The following software numbers are displayed on the TNC screen after the Software version MOD function has been selected Control model Designation of the control managed by HEIDENHAIN m NC SW Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN m NCK Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN PLC SW Number and name of the PLC software managed by your machine tool builder In the FCL information MOD function the TNC shows the following information Development level FCL Feature Content Level Development level of the software installed on the control see Feature Content Level upgrade functions page 11 17 9 Entering the code number Application The TNC requires a code
109. length and the radius gt Press the TOUCH PROBE soft key CALIBRATE gt Display the calibration cycles Press CALIBRATE i TS gt Select the calibration cycle Calibration cycles of the TNC Soft key Function Page Calibrating the length 503 offset using a calibration ring Measure the radius and the center page 505 Measure the radius and the center page 506 Liz offset using a stud or a calibration pin Measure the radius and the center page 507 offset using a calibration sphere TNC 620 User s Manual 502 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 14 8 Calibrating the effective length HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The effective length of the touch probe is always referenced to the tool datum The machine tool builder usually defines the spindle tip as the tool datum gt Set the datum in the spindle axis such that for the machine tool table Z 0 gt Select the calibration function for the touch est probe length Press the CAL L soft key The TNC displays the current calibration data gt Datum for length Enter the height of the ring gauge in the menu window gt Move the touch probe to a position just above the ring gauge gt To change the traverse direction if necessary press a soft key or an arrow key gt To probe the upper surface of the ring gauge
110. machine tool manual HEIDENHAIN generally recommends activating SELinux because it provides additional protection against attacks from outside TNC 620 User s Manual 90 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes and electronic 2 8 handwheels 2 8 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes and electronic handwheels 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software option The various HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes enable you to Automatically align workpieces Quickly and precisely set datums Measure the workpiece during program run Measure and inspect tools All of the cycle functions touch probe cycles and fixed cycles are described in the Cycle Programming User s Manual Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual ID 1096886 xx The triggering touch probes TS 220 TS 440 TS 444 TS 640 and TS 740 These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece alignment datum setting and workpiece measurement The TS 220 transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and is a cost effective alternative for applications where digitizing is not frequently required The TS 640 see figure and the smaller TS 440 feature infrared transmission of the triggering signal to the TNC This makes them highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers Principle of operation HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feat
111. message You can suppress the error message with the M function M107 see Definition of a normalized vector page 451 The TNC will not display an error message if an entered tool oversize would cause damage to the contour Machine parameter toolRefPoint defines whether the CAD system has calculated the tool length compensation from the center of sohere PT or the south pole of the sphere PSP see figure TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 451 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 6 Three dimensional tool compensation option 9 Permissible tool shapes You can describe the permissible tool shapes in the tool table via tool radii R and R2 see figure Tool radius R Distance from the tool center to the tool circumference Tool radius 2 R2 Radius of the curvature between tool tip and tool circumference The ratio of R to R2 determines the shape of the tool R2 0 End mill m R2 R Radius cutter 0 lt R2 lt R Toroid cutter These data also provide the coordinates of the tool datum PT Using other tools Delta values If you want to use tools that have different dimensions than the ones you originally programmed you can enter the difference between the tool lengths and radii as delta values in the tool table or TOOL CALL Positive delta value DL DR DR2 The tool is larger than the original tool oversize Negative delta value DL DR DR2 The too
112. mm the tool radius with an undersize of 1 mm 20 TOOL CALL 5 2 Z S2500 F350 DL 0 2 DR 1 DR2 0 05 The character D preceding L R and R2 designates delta values Preselection of tools The preselection of tools with TOOL DEF can vary depending on the individual machine tool Refer to your machine manual If you are working with tool tables use a TOOL DEF block to oreselect the next tool Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding Q parameter or type the tool name in quotation marks TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 183 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Tool change Automatic tool change The tool change function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Refer to your machine manual If your machine tool has automatic tool changing capability the program run is not interrupted When the TNC reaches a TOOL CALL it replaces the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine Automatic tool change if the tool life expires M101 The function of M101 can vary depending on the individual machine tool Refer to your machine mo manual When the specified tool life has expired the TNC can automatically insert a replacement tool and continue machining with it Activate the miscellaneous function M101 for this M101 is reset with M102 Enter the respective tool life after which machining is to be continued with a replacement tool in the TIME2 column of
113. mode E m X option 40 m Fixture monitoring E m X option 40 ool carrier management X option 40 TNC 620 User s Manual 630 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Function TNC 620 ITNC 530 CAM support Loading of contours from DXF data m X option 42 m X option 42 Loading of machining positions from DXF data m X option 42 m X option 42 m Offline filter for CAM files m X m Stretch filter m X E MOD functions m User parameters Config data Numerical structure OEM help files with service functions m X Data medium inspection m X m Load service packs E E X Setting the system time E X mE X m Select the axes for actual position capture m X Definition of traverse range limits E X m X m Restricting external access X E X m Switching the kinematics m X m X Calling fixed cycles m With M99 or M89 m X m X m With CYCL CALL m X m X m With CYCL CALL PAT m X m X m With CYC CALL POS m X m X Special functions Creating backward programs X m Datum shift with TRANS DATUM m X m X m Adaptive Feed Control AFC m X option 45 Global definition of cycle parameters GLOBAL DEF E X m X m Pattern definition with PATTERN DEF m X m X m Definition and execution of point tables E X E X m Simple contour formula CONTOUR DEF X E X Functions for large molds and dies Global program settings GS
114. moves in a straight line from its current position to the Straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block LP gt Polar coordinate radius PR Enter the distance trom the pole CC to the straight line end point p gt Polar coordinate angle PA Angular position of the Straight line end point between 360 and 360 The sign of PA depends on the angle reference axis f the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is counterclockwise PA gt 0 f the angle from the angle reference axis to PR is clockwise PA lt 0 Example NC blocks 12 CC X 45 Y 25 13 LP PR 30 PA 0 RR F300 M3 14 LP PA 60 15 LP IPA 60 16 LP PA 180 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 231 Programming Programming contours 6 5 Path contours Polar coordinates Circular path CP around pole CC The polar coordinate radius PR is also the radius of the arc PR is defined by the distance from the starting point to the pole CC The last programmed tool position will be the starting point of the arc J gt Polar coordinate angle PA Angular position of the arc end point between 99999 9999 and P 99999 9999 gt Direction of rotation DR Example NC blocks 18 CC X 25 Y 25 19 LP PR 20 PA 0 RR F250 M3 20 CP PA 180 DR For incremental coordinates enter the same sign for DR and PA Consider this behavior when importing programs from earlier controls Adapt the progr
115. must deactivate the parallel axis functions before switching the machine kinematics TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 389 Programming Special functions 11 3 Working with the parallel axes U V and W FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY Use the PARAXCOMP DISPLAY function to activate the display NC block function for parallel axis movements The TNC considers the 13 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY W traverse movements of the parallel axis in the position display of the associated principal axis sum display Therefore the position display of the principal axis always displays the relative distance from the tool to the workpiece regardless of whether you move the principal axis or the minor axis Proceed as follows for the definition SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions ene gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions Select FUNCTION PARAX FUNCTION PARAX LEED Vv Perron gt Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP FUNCTION gt Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY DISPLAY gt Define the parallel axis whose movements the TNC is to take into account in the position display of the associated principal axis FUNCTION PARAXCOMP MOVE NC block 13 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP MOVE W The PARAXCOMP MOVE function can be used only in connection with straight line blocks L The TNC uses the PARAXCOMP MOVE function to compensate for the movement of a parallel a
116. need to download the help files from the HEIDENHAIN home page see Downloading current help files page 162 The TNCguide context sensitive help system includes the user ii documentation in HTML format The TNCguide is called with the att EE ures er een te ae treet HELP key and the TNC often immediately displays the information Z mecca Myce re see specific to the condition from which the help was called context sensitive call Even if you are editing an NC block and press the HELP key you are usually brought to the exact place in the documentation that describes the corresponding function T Eo ala e The TNC always tries to start the TNCguide in the language that you have selected as the conversational language on your TNC If the files with this language are not yet available on your TNC it automatically opens the English version The following user documentation is available in TNCguide Conversational Programming User s Manual BHBKlartext chm m DIN ISO User s Manual BHBIso chm m User s Manual for Cycle Programming BHBtchprobe chm List of All Error Messages errors chm In addition the main chm book file is available with the contents of all existing chm Tiles As an option your machine tool builder can embed machine specific documentation in the TNCguide These documents then appear as a separate book in the main chm file TNC 620 User s Manual 158 HEIDENHAIN Conversatio
117. negative Y a direction shift workpiece blank in positive negative Z direction T Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum a Switch monitoring function on or off monitoring Note that even with BLK FORM CYLINDER a cuboid is shown in the working space as workpiece blank When BLK FORM ROTATION is used no workpiece blank is shown in the working space TNC 620 User s Manual 546 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions for program display 6 3 Functions for program display Overview In the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence modes of operation the TNC displays the following soft keys for displaying a part program in pages Soft key Functions Go back in the program by one screen Go forward in the program by one screen W m rg H 2 Go to the start of the program gt Go to the end of the program ka Z o TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 16 3 547 Test run and program run 16 4 Test run 16 4 Test run Application In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and program sections to reduce programming errors during program run The TNC checks the programs for the following Geometrical incompatibilities Missing data Impossible jumps m Violation of the machine s working space The following functions are also available Blockwise test run Interruption of test
118. number Pocket reservation for box magazines Special tool ST If your special tool blocks pockets in front of and behind its actual pocket these additional pockets need to be locked in column L status L The tool is always returned to the same pocket In the tool magazine Locked pocket see also column ST Display of the comment to the tool from TOOL T Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC Function is defined by the machine tool builder The machine tool documentation provides further information Tool type Function is defined by the machine tool builder The machine tool documentation provides further information Box magazine Lock the pocket above Box magazine Lock the pocket below Box magazine Lock the pocket at left Box magazine Lock the pocket at right Dialog Tool number Pocket reserv Yes ENT No NOENT Special tool Fixed pocket Yes ENT No NO ENT Pocket locked Yes ENT No NO ENT PLC status Value Tool type for pocket table Lock the pocket above Lock the pocket below Lock the pocket at left Lock the pocket at right TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Soft key Editing functions for pocket tables select beginning of table oO m rg H 2 Select end of table select previous page in table select next page in table AEE RESET Reset pocket table POCKET TA
119. number for the following functions Function Code number selecting user parameters 123 Configuring an Ethernet card NET123 Enabling special functions for Q parameter 555343 programming TNC 620 User s Manual 574 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Setting up data interfaces 17 10 Setting up data interfaces Serial interfaces on the TNC 620 The TNC 620 automatically uses the LSV2 transmission protocol for serial data transfer The LSV2 protocol is permanent and cannot be changed except for setting the baud rate machine parameter baudRateLsv2 You can also specify another type of transmission interface The settings described below are therefore effective only for the respective newly defined interface Application To set up a data Interface select the file manager PGM MGT and press the MOD key Press the MOD key again and enter the code number 123 The TNC shows the user parameter GfgSeriallnterface in which you can enter the following settings Setting the RS 232 interface Open the RS232 folder The TNC then displays the following settings Setting the BAUD RATE baudRate You can set the BAUD RATE data transter speed from 110 to 115 200 baud TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 EQ Program run full B vacnine parameter programming ei Programming Table editing gt Machine p 17 10 ar programming ORE M FUNCTIONS 575
120. number of the channel with the least amount of rane oe oad radio traffic smallest bar eek a gt Click the Start handwheel button to reactivate the wireless handwheel gt Click the Properties tab gt Click the Select channel button The TNC shows all available channel numbers Click the channel number for which the TNC determined the least amount of radio traffic gt To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu press the END button Selecting the transmitter power Configuration of wireless handwheel o Gl Please keep in mind that the transmission range Pope a Configuration Statistics of th e WI re ess h an dwh ee d ecreases wh en th e handwheel serial no 0037478964 Connect HW Data packets 5228 Channel setting 16 Select channel Lost packets 0 0 00 transmitter power is reduced Channel in use 16 CRC error 0 0 00 Transmitter power Full power Set power Max successive lost 0 gt Press the MOD key to select the MOD function alsa gt Select the Machine settings menu HANDWHEEL ONLINE Error code Stop HW Start handwheel End gt Select the configuration menu for the wireless handwheel Press the SET UP WIRELESS HANDWHEEL soft key gt Click the Set power button The TNC shows the three available power settings Click the desired setting gt To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu press the END button TNC 620 User s Manual 592 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Pr
121. open the CAD viewer or DXF converter the following screen layout is displayed Screen display TNC nc_prog pleuel_conro d_DXF_2 dxf S EEJ ES 2 amp anlal Oy top 5 CL 0 007 mm 1 xX HD Type Line segment Start 5 File loaded without errors 2D MM 4 XY Header Graphics window List view window Element information window oO A OO N gt Footer TNC 620 User s Manual 254 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 CAD viewer 72 7 2 CAD viewer Application The CAD viewer allows you to open standardized CAD data formats directly on the TNC The TNC displays the following file formats Files Type Step Tiles STP and STEP Iges Tiles IGS and IGES DXF files DXF The file can simply be selected via the file manager of the TNC just like NC programs This permits you to check quickly and simply for problems directly in the model You can position the datum anywhere in the model In this way the coordinates of selected points can be displayed The following icons are available Icon Setting Show or hide the list view window to enlarge the graphics window Display of the various layers Set the datum or delete set datum Set the zoom to the largest possible view of the complete graphics Change the background color black or white 0 01 set resolution The resolution specifies how 0 007 many decimal places the TNC should use when generating the contour program Defaul
122. option 17 X 412 datum from inside of circle X option 17 X 413 datum from outside of circle X option 17 X 414 datum at outside corner X option 17 X 415 datum at inside corner X option 17 X 416 datum at circle center X option 17 X 417 datum in touch probe axis X option 17 X 418 datum at center of 4 holes X option 17 X 419 datum in one axis X option 17 X 420 measuring an angle X option 17 X 421 measuring a hole X option 17 X 422 measuring a circle from outside X option 17 X 423 measuring a rectangle from inside X option 17 X 424 measuring a rectangle from outside X option 17 X 425 measuring inside width X option 17 X 426 measuring a ridge from outside X option 17 X 427 boring X option 17 X 430 measuring a bolt hole circle X option 17 X 431 measuring a plane X option 17 X 440 measuring an axis shift X 441 Rapid probing on TNC 620 partly possible with touch probe X table 450 saving the kinematics X option 48 X option 48 451 measuring the kinematics X option 48 X option 48 452 preset compensation X option 48 X option 48 460 calibrating a TS on a sphere X option 17 X 461 calibrate TS length X option 17 X 462 calibration in a ring X option 17 X 463 calibration on stud X option 17 X 480 calibrating a TT X option 17 X 481 measuring inspecting the tool length X option 17 X 482 measuring inspecting the tool radius X option 17 X 483 measuring inspecting the
123. option 22 Application Pallet table management Is a machine dependent function The standard functional range is described below Refer to your machine manual Pallet tables P are used for machining centers with pallet changers The pallet table calls the part programs that are required for the different pallets and activates presets datum shifts and datum tables You can also use pallet tables to run In succession several programs that have different reference points If you want to create or manage pallet tables the name of the Tile must begin with a letter Pallet tables contain the following information TYPE entry obligatory Identification for pallet or NC program select with ENT NAME entry obligatory Pallet or program name The machine tool builder determines the pallet name see your machine tool manual The program name must be stored In the same directory as the pallet table Otherwise you must enter the Tull path name for the program PRESET entry optional Preset number from the preset table The preset number defined here is interpreted by the TNC as a workpiece datum DATUM entry optional Name of the datum table The datum table must be stored in the same directory as the pallet table Otherwise you must enter the full path name for the datum table Datums from the datum table can be activated in the NC program with Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT LOCATION entr
124. parameter You can also check and process the assigned or imported values by using the functions described below As in Q parameter programming you can use a total of 2000 OS parameters see Principle and overview of functions page 294 The STRING FORMULA and FORMULA O parameter functions contain various functions for processing the string parameters Soft key STRING FORMULA functions Page Assigning string parameters 342 STRING Chain linking string parameters 342 Converting a numerical value to a 343 TOCHAR string parameter Copy a substring from a string 344 SUBSTR parameter Soft key FORMULA string functions Page Converting a string parameter to a 345 Diii numerical value Checking a string parameter 346 INSTR Finding the length of a string 347 cia parameter Compare alphabetic priority 348 STRCOMP When you use a STRING FORMULA the result of the arithmetic operation is always a string When you use the FORMULA function the result of the arithmetic operation is always a numeric value TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 9 11 341 Programming Q parameters 9 11 String parameters Assigning string parameters You have to assign a string variable before you use It Use the DECLARE STRING command to do so SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions OR gt Open the function menu FUNCTIONS NG gt Select string functions FUNCTIONS BEE Ape
125. part of the help is assigned to the selected soft key the TNC opens the book file main chm in which you can use the search function or the navigation to find the desired explanation manually Even if you are editing an NC block context sensitive help is available gt Select any NC block gt Select the desired word gt Press the HELP key The TNC starts the helo system and shows a description for the active function does not apply to miscellaneous functions or cycles that were integrated by your machine tool builder TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 159 Programming Programming aids 4 9 TNCguide context sensitive help system Navigating in the TNCguide It s easiest to use the mouse to navigate in TNCguide A table of contents appears on the left side of the screen By clicking the rightward pointing triangle you open subordinate sections and by clicking the respective entry you open the individual pages It is operated in the same manner as the Windows Explorer Linked text positions cross references are shown underlined and in blue Clicking the link opens the associated page Of course you can also operate the TNCguide through keys and soft keys The following table contains an overview of the corresponding key functions Soft key Function m f the table of contents at left is active Select the entry above it or below it m f the text window at right is active Move
126. point has been used for more than one connection mE Server Name of the server Authorization name Name of the directory on the server that the TNC is to access m User User name with which the user logs on to the network Password Network drive password protected not protected Request password Request Do not request password during connection Options Display additional connection options To manage the network drives use the screen buttons To add network drives use the Add button The TNC then starts the connection wizard which guides you by dialog through the required definitions Status log Display of status Information and error messages Press the Clear button to delete the contents of the Status Log window TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 587 17 MOD functions 17 12 Firewall 1712 Firewall Application You can set up a firewall for the primary network interface of the control It can be configured so that incoming network traffic is blocked and or a message is displayed depending on the sender and the service However the firewall cannot be started for the second network interface of the control if it is active as DHCP server Once the firewall has been activated a symbol appears at the lower right in the taskbar The symbol changes depending on the safety level that the firewall was activated with and informs about the level of th
127. program at the label that is programmed after the condition for information on labels see Labeling subprograms and program section repeats page 274 If it is not fulfilled the TNC continues with the next block To call another program as a subprogram enter a PGM CALL program call after the block with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example FN 9 IF 10 EQU 10 GOTO LBL1 Abbreviations used IF l If EQU Equal to NE Not equal to GT Greater than LT Less than GOTO Go to UNDEFINED Undefined DEFINED Defined TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 303 FNS IF X EQ GOTO Is UNDEFINED FNS IF X EQ GOTO Is DEFINED FN10 IF X NE GOTO FN11 IF X GT Y GOTO FN12 LE X LT Y GOTO 304 Programming Q parameters 9 6 If then decisions with Q parameters Function FN 9 IF EQUAL JUMP e g FN 9 IF Q1 EQU Q3 GOTO LBL UPCAN25 If both values or parameters are equal jump to specified label FN 9 IF UNDEFINED JUMP e g FN 9 IF Q1 IS UNDEFINED GOTO LBL UPCAN25 If the given parameter is undefined jump to the specified label FN 9 IF DEFINED JUMP e g FN 9 IF Q1 IS DEFINED GOTO LBL UPCAN25 If the given parameter is defined jump to the specified label FN 10 IF UNEQUAL JUMP e g FN 10 IF 10 NE Q5 GOT
128. projection angle PLANE PROJECTED Application Projection angles define a machining plane through the entry of two angles that you determine by projecting the first coordinate plane Z X plane with tool axis Z and the second coordinate plane Y Z with tool axis Z onto the machining plane to be defined Before programming note the following You can only use projection angles if the angle definitions are given with respect to a rectangular cuboid Otherwise there will be deformations on the workpiece Parameter description for the positioning behavior see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 Input parameters PROJECTED gt Proj angle in 1st coord plane Projected angle of the tilted machining plane in the 1st coordinate plane of the fixed machine coordinate system Z X for tool axis Z see figure at top right Inout range from 89 9999 to 89 9999 The 0 axis is the principal axis of the active working plane X for tool axis Z See figure at top right for positive direction gt Proj angle in 2nd coord plane Projected angle in the 2nd coordinate plane of the fixed machine coordinate system Y Z for tool axis Z see figure at top right Inout range from 89 9999 to 89 9999 The 0 axis is the minor axis of the active machining plane Y for tool axis Z gt ROT angle of tilted plane Rotation of the tilted coordinate system around the tilted tool axis correspond
129. radius compensation If you program APPR LN or APPR CT with RO the control stops the machining simulation with an error message This method of function differs from the iITNC 530 control TNC 620 User s Manual 212 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Approaching and departing a contour 6 3 Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa on a straight line that connects tangentially to the contour The auxiliary point Py is separated from the first contour point Pa by the distance LEN gt Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LT soft key ka gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa gt LEN Distance from the auxiliary point Py to the first contour point Pa gt Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN gt Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LN soft key pg gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa gt Length Distance to the auxiliary point Py Always enter LEN as a positive value gt Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN
130. recently set manually via the axis keys or via soft key If the datum set manually is active the TNC displays the text PR MAN 0 in the status display TNC 620 User s Manual 486 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum management with the preset table Manually saving the datums in the preset table In order to save datums in the preset table proceed as follows gt Select the Manual Operation mode gt Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface or position the measuring dial correspondingly PRESET gt Display the preset table The TNC opens the eo preset table and sets the cursor to the active table row oe gt Select functions for entering the presets The TNC PRESET displays the available possibilities for entry in the sott key row See the table below for a description of the entry possibilities gt Select the line in the preset table that you want to change the line number is the preset number D B H OOO e gt If needed select the column axis in the preset table that you want to change CORRECT gt Use the soft keys to select one of the available THE aj Spe PRESET entry possibilities see the following table Soft key Function Directly transfer the actual position of the tool the measuring dial as the new preset This function only saves the preset in the axis which is currently highlighted ENTER Assign any value to the actual position of the too
131. researc eee ree sericea oven er meee wee eae roe aiunane 352 vuos ron Me FLC JIO T i 0 euria a tee sn a eee 352 A OOL TT a e A E gecioieaa steunaadectaeuaraen 352 Toora e O en A E E O TE E EE E EEAS 352 PAE Sae OTIO e AEA E EAE ene ve neon tere 393 COOR Oa 2 I WU ea E E E A can estat vieenecoamie dence 353 DO OT a e E T E E E 353 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 s sessssessesierrsrrerrerrrrrrerrerrrrrrrrrerrerrerrern SiG Toengi OTi eana aeai a a E aaa EEA i n ei 353 Coordinates after probing during Programi TUN esisiirireroiniea niae EERE EET OEN 354 9 13 Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT TO E na tent tain tnd sa tg AE re see walter esa ae cio seca EA EEE S E E E EE 354 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles rotary axis coordinates calculated by the ENB ace eae ser A ice eee ate cc ate A ects pa oe see er etoanc ET 354 Measurement results from touch probe cycles see also User s Manual for Cycle Programming 355 Oga epe E Nee ee criamene 357 meaa E o E E E E Ge E EE O E A AON EEN 357 Example Concave cylinder machined with spherical CUHHET essesssssusriesrerrrerrerrrrrerrrrrrerrerrerrerrrere gt 359 Example Convex sphere machined with end Mill ccc cccecccecccscceceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaeeeaeseaesenaeeeas 361 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 10 1 Entering
132. section repeat is marked by the label O BEGIN PGM LBL The end of a program section repeat is identified by CALL LBL n REPn END PGM Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program section CALL LBL n REPn 2 Then the program section between the called LABEL and the label call CALL LBL n REPn is repeated the number of times entered after REP 3 The TNC resumes the part program after the last repetition Programming notes m You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times in succession The total number of times the program section is executed Is always one more than the programmed number of repeats because the first repeat starts after the first machining process TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 277 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 3 Program section repeats Programming a program section repeat gt To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key and enter a LABEL NUMBER for the program section you wish to repeat If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry gt Enter the program section Calling a program section repeat gt Calla program section Press the LBL CALL key gt Enter the number of the program section to be repeated If you want to use a label name press the LBL NAME soft key to switch to text entry gt Enter the number of repeats REP and confirm wi
133. soft key The TNC loads the first word of the current block If required press the info key again to load the desired word gt Start the search process The TNC moves to the next occurrence of the text you are searching for FIND To replace the text and then move to the next occurrence of the text press the REPLACE soft key To replace all text occurrences press the REPLACE ALL soft key To skip the text and move to its next occurrence press the FIND soft key REPLACE Vv End the search function y TNC 620 User s Manual 110 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 File management Fundamentals 3 3 3 3 File management Fundamentals Files Files in the TNC Type Programs in HEIDENHAIN format A in DIN ISO format Compatible Programs HEIDENHAIN Unit Programs AU HEIDENHAIN Contour Programs HC Tables for Tools T Tool changers TCH Datums D Points PNT Presets PR Touch probes TP Backup files BAK Dependent files e g structure items DEP Freely definable tables TAB Pallets P Texts as ASCII files A Protocol files TXT Help files CHM CAD files as ASCII files DXF AGES SIEP When you write a part program on the TNC you must first enter a program name The TNC saves the program to the internal memory as a file with the same name The TNC can also save texts and tables as files The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can easily find and manage your files Here you ca
134. speed specified by the machine manufacturer gt Select the Manual Operation mode gt Scroll to the last soft key row gt Switch on off feed rate limit TNC 620 User s Manual 480 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Optional safety concept functional safety FS 14 4 14 4 Optional safety concept functional safety FS Miscellaneous Ld You machine tool builder adapts the HEIDENHAIN safety concept to your machine Refer to your E machine manual Every machine tool operator is exposed to certain risks Although protective devices can prevent access to dangerous points the operator must also be able to work on the machine without this protection e g protective door opened Several guidelines and regulations to minimize these risks have been developed within the last few years The HEIDENHAIN safety concept integrated in the TNC controls complies with Performance Level d as per EN 13849 1 and SIL 2 as per IEC 61508 features safety related modes of operation in accordance with EN 12417 and assures extensive operator protection The basis of the HEIDENHAIN safety concept is the dual channel processor structure which consists of the main computer MC and one or more drive controller modules CC control computing unit All monitoring mechanisms are designed redundantly in the control systems Satety relevant system data are subject to a mutual cyclic data comparison Safety relevant errors always l
135. the O parameter in which the TNC is to save the result of comparison Confirm with the ENT key gt Shift the sott key row FORMULA gt Select the function for comparing string STRCOMP parameters ie g9 gt Enter the number of the first QS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the second OS parameter to be compared and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key The TNC returns the following results 0 The compared OS parameters are identical m 1 The first QS parameter precedes the second OS parameter alphabetically 1 The first OS parameter follows the second OS parameter alphabetically Example QS12 and QS14 are compared for alphabetic priority 37 Q52 STRCOMP SRC_QS12 SEA_QS14 348 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 String parameters 9 11 Reading out machine parameters Use the CFGREAD function to read out TNC machine parameters as numerical values or as strings In order to read out a machine parameter you must use the TNC s configuration editor to determine the parameter name parameter object and if they have been assigned the group name and Index Icon Type Meaning Example Key Group name of the CHANG machine parameter if assigned Entity Parameter object CfgGeoCycle the name starts with Cfg Attribu
136. the TNC uses the SPC column The OFFSET view shows the offset values for the preset Write the currently active datum to a selectable line in the table This function saves the datum in all axes and then activates the appropriate row in the table automatically If inch display is active Enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum management with the preset table 14 5 Editing the preset table Editing function in table mode BEGIN Select the table start A If 9 lt Select the table end END Select the previous page in the table Select the next page in the table Select the functions for preset entry Display the Basic Transtormation Axis Offset selection ACTIVATE Activate the datum of the selected line of the PRESET preset table APPEND Add the entered number of lines to the end of the N LINES table 2nd soft key row Copy the highlighted field 2nd soft key row Insert the copied field 2nd soft key row RESET Reset the selected line The TNC enters in all LINE columns 2nd soft key row m Insert a single line at the end of the table 2nd LINE soft key row E Delete a single line at the end of the table 2nd LINE soft key row TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 489 Manual operation and setup 14 5 Datum management with the preset table
137. the smallest diameter a Display the next smaller diameter found iL Display the next larger diameter found 351 Display the largest diameter found default setting You can have the tool path displayed by clicking the Show tool path icon see Basic settings page 259 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 73 271 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 73 DXF converter option 42 Element information In the element information window the TNC displays the coordinates of the machining position that you last selected via mouse click In the list view window or graphics window You can also use the mouse to change the graphic display The following functions are available gt In order to rotate the model shown in three dimensions you hold the right mouse button down and move the mouse gt To shift the model shown Hold the center mouse button or the wheel button down and move the mouse gt To zoom in ona certain area Mark a zoom area by holding the left mouse button down After you release the left mouse button the TNC zooms in on the defined area gt To rapidly magnify or reduce any area Rotate the mouse wheel backwards or forwards gt To return to the standard display Press the shift key and simultaneously double click with the right mouse key The rotation angle is maintained if you only double click with the right mouse key
138. the traverse mode or the parameters were not correctly chosen you can change them manually TNC 620 User s Manual 556 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Program run 16 5 Danger of collision For nonreterenced axes the TNC adopts the most recently saved axis values These values generally are not the exact actual axis positions As a result for example the tool might not move exactly along the actual tool direction If the tool is still in contact with the workpiece it can cause stress or damage to the tool and workpiece Stress or damage to the workpiece or tool can also be caused by uncontrolled coasting or braking of axes after a power interruption Move the axes carefully If the tool is still in contact with the workpiece Set the feed rate override to the smallest values possible If you use the handwheel use a small feed rate factor The traverse range monitoring is not available for nonreterenced axes Observe the axes while you move them Do not move to the limits of traverse TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 55 7 Test run and program run 16 5 Program run Example The power failed while a thread cutting cycle in the tilted working plane was being performed You have to retract the tap gt Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC starts the operating system This process may take several minutes Then the TNC will display the message
139. these devices Additional options button Additional settings for the DNS DHCP server Set standard values button Set factory settings gt Sandbox Changes must always be made in agreement with your machine tool builder 586 Manuai operation Programming OQ TNC BO lost foune TNC nc_prog PGM H 1 DXF st f eo pro Network settings mo Computer name interfaces internet PingRoutng NFS UDGD OHCP server machine net TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 09 25 Ethernet interface 17 11 Network settings specific to the device gt Press the DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN soft key to enter the network settings for a specific device You can define any number of network settings but you can manage only seven at one time januar operation Programing 09 24 G TNC e0 lost found S0 nc_prog p Mount Ano Type Drive D Server Share User Password Ask for password Options dis 5 1 zeichnun Screens a13608 yes Setting Meaning Network drive List of all connected network drives The TNC shows the respective status of the network connections in the columns Mount Network drive connected not connected Qk Apply Cancel Mount Auto Auto Network drive is to be connected automatically manually Type Type of network connection cits and nfs are possible Drive Designation of the drive on the TNC ID Internal ID that identities if a mount
140. to page in the window To close the pop up window press the CE key To have the program close the window program the following NC block 96 FN 16 F PRINT TNC MASKE MASKE1 A SCLR If you output the same file more than once in the program the TNC appends all texts to the end of the texts already output within the target file Exporting messages The FN 16 function also enables you to save the log files externally Enter the complete target path in the FN 16 function 96 FN 16 F PRINT TNC MSK MSK1 A PC325 LOG PRO1 TXT If you output the same Tile more than once in the program the TNC appends all texts to the end of the texts already output within the target file TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 315 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions FN 18 SYSREAD Reading system data With the FN 18 SYSREAD function you can read system data and store them in Q parameters You select the system data through a group name ID number and additionally through a number and an index Group name ID no Number Index Meaning Program information 10 3 Number of the active fixed cycle 103 Q parameter Relevant within NC cycles for inquiry as number to whether the Q parameter given under IDX was explicitly stated in the associated CYCLE DER System jump addresses 13 1 Label jumped to during M2 M30 instead of ending the current program Value 0 M2 M30 has the no
141. to your machine manual To open video files directly on the TNC proceed as follows gt Call the File Manager Select the directory in which the video file is saved Move the highlight to the video file Ea gt Press ENT The TNC opens the video file in its own application Vv TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 131 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Displaying graphic files To open graphics files with the extension bmp gif jog or png directly on the TNC proceed as follows gt Call the File Manager select the directory in which the graphics Tile is saved gt Move the highlight to the graphics file gt Press ENT The TNC opens the graphics file in its own application using the ristretto additional tool return to the TNC user interface while leaving the graphics file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface More information on how to use the ristretto With the key combination ALT TAB you can always function is provided under Help To exit ristretto proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Quit The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the ristretto additional tool gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys
142. tool length and radius X option 17 X 484 calibrating the infrared TT X option 17 X 638 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Comparison Differences in programming Function switching the operating mode while a block is being edited File handling Save file function Save file as function m Discard changes File management Mouse operation Sorting function Entry of name Support of shortcuts m Favorites management Configuration of column structure m Soft key arrangement Skip block function Selecting a tool from the table Programming special functions with the SPEC FCT key Programming approach and departure motions with the APPR DEP key Pressing the END hard key while the CYCLE DEF and TOUCH PROBE menus are active Calling the file manager while the CYCLE DEF and TOUCH PROBE menus are active Calling the file manager while CYCL CALL SPEC FCT PGM CALL and APPR DEP menus are active TNC 620 User s Manual TNC 620 Permitted m Available m Available m Available m Available m Available Opens the Select file pop up window m Not available m Not available Not available m Slightly different Available selection via split screen menu Pressing the key opens a soft key row as a Submenu To exit the submenu press the SPEC FCT key again then the TNC shows the last active
143. touch point on the second workpiece edge select the probing direction via soft key Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the second touch point on the second workpiece edge Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Then the TNC shows the coordinates of the measured corner point To set to 0 Press the SET DATUM soft key Press the END soft key to close the menu Further information on this topic Datum setting see Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 page 515 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Workpiece setup 1 6 67 First steps with the TNC 620 1 7 Running the first program 1 7 Running the first program Selecting the correct operating mode You can run programs either in the Single Block or the Full Sequence mode gt Press the operating mode key The TNC goes into the Program Run Single Block mode and the TNC executes the program block by block You have to confirm each block with the NC start key gt Press the Program Run Full Sequence operating mode key The TNC switches to that mode and runs the program after NC start up to a program interruption or to the end
144. use of this function Refer to your E machine manual After executing any selected touch probe cycle the TNC displays the soft key WRITE LOG TO FILE If you press this soft key the TNC will record the current values determined in the active touch probe cycle If you store the measuring results the TNC creates the text file TCHPRMAN TXT If you have not defined a path in the machine parameter fn16DefaultPath the TNC will store the TCHPRMAN TXT and TCHPRMAN html files in the main directory TNC When you press the WRITE LOG TO FILE soft key the TCHPRMAN TXT file must not be active in the Programming mode of operation The TNC will otherwise display an error message The TNC writes the measured values to the TCHPRMAN TXT or TCHPRMAN htmI file If you execute several touch probe cycles in succession and want to store the resulting measured data you must make a backup of the contents stored in TCHPRMAN TXT between the individual cycles by copying or renaming the Tile Format and content of the TCHPRMAN TXT file are preset by the machine tool builder TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 499 Manual operation and setup 14 7 Using 3 D touch probes option 17 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table Use this function if you want to save measured values in the workpiece coordinate system If you want to save measured values in the machine based coordinate s
145. uses open source software Further information is available on the control under gt Programming and Editing operating mode gt MOD function gt LICENSE INFO soft key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 11 Fundamentals TNC model software and features New functions New functions 73498x 02 DXF files can be opened directly on the TNC in order to extract contours and point patterns Programming Data transfer from CAD files page 253 The active tool axis direction can now be activated in manual mode and during handwheel superimposition as a virtual tool axis Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 Miscellaneous Functions software option page 376 Writing and reading data in freely definable tables Freely definable tables page 403 New touch probe cycle 484 for calibrating the wireless TT 449 tool touch probe see User s Manual tor Cycles The new HR 520 and HR 550 FS handwheels are supported Traverse with electronic handwheels page 469 New machining cycle 225 ENGRAVING see User s Manual for Cycle Programming New Active Chatter Control ACC software option Active Chatter Control ACC option 145 page 387 New manual probing cycle Center line as datum Setting a center line as datum page 519 New function for rounding corners Rounding corners M197 page 382 External access to the TNC can now be blocked with a MOD
146. with respect to the currently active perhaps tilted coordinate system incremental space angle Example NC blocks TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 447 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 5 FUNCTION TCPM option 9 Type of interpolation between the starting and end position The TNC provides two functions for defining the type of interpolation between the starting and end position PATH gt PATHCTRL AXIS determines that the tool point i between the starting and end position of the respective NC block moves on a Straight line Face Milling The direction of the tool axis at the starting and end positions corresponds to the respective programmed values but the tool circumference does not describe a defined path between the starting and end positions The surface produced by milling with the tool circumference Peripheral Milling depends on the machine geometry PATH gt PATHCTRL VECTOR determines that the tool CONTROL x we VECTOR tip between the starting and end position of the respective NC block moves on a straight line and also that the direction of the tool axis between starting and end position is interpolated so that a plane results from machining at the tool circumference Peripheral Milling With PATHCTRL VECTOR remember Any defined tool orientation is generally accessible through two different tilting angle positions The TNC uses the solution over the short
147. working space Changing of the control parameters depending on the speed or acceleration of an axis Load Adaptive Control LAC option 143 Adaptive load control Automatic determination of workpiece weight and frictional forces Changing of control parameters depending on the actual mass of the workpiece Active Chatter Control ACC option 145 Active chatter control Fully automatic function for chatter control during machining TNC 620 User s Manual 10 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC model software and features Feature Content Level upgrade functions Along with software options significant further improvements of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level upgrade functions Functions subject to the FCL are not available simply by updating the software on your TNC All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge when you receive a new machine Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n where n indicates the sequential number of the feature content level You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the FCL functions For more information contact your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN Intended place of operation The TNC complies with the limits tor a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas Legal information This product
148. you for the unit of measurement for the new program gt Select the unit of measure Press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC automatically generates the first and last blocks of the program Afterwards you can no longer change these blocks Further information on this topic a File Management see Working with the file manager page 114 Creating a new program see Opening programs and entering page 99 52 manuar operation EB erogramming ma Programmin g TNC nc_prog H I 54 file s 198 18 GB s Date Time 02 05 2011 10 15 24 16 07 2013 08 57 47 02 05 2011 10 15 24 02 05 2011 10 15 24 26 07 2012 08 08 20 L 02 05 2011 10 15 24 02 05 2011 10 15 24 02 05 2011 10 15 24 02 05 2011 10 15 24 02 05 2011 10 15 24 16 07 2013 09 18 08 02 05 2011 10 15 24 18 09 2012 13 06 26 05 03 2013 11 54 16 25 07 2012 10 41 26 10 07 2013 08 51 09 26 07 2012 09 59 02 02 05 2011 10 15 24 02 05 2011 10 15 24 16 07 2013 09 15 28 09 10 2012 07 11 22 11 03 2013 10 19 46 sevect copy BILE TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming the first part Defining a workpiece blank After you have created a new program you can define a workpiece blank For example define a cuboid by entering the MIN and MAX points each with reference to the selected refer
149. 0 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z 83500 4 L Z 100 RO FMAX M13 5 PLANE 6 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX M13 7 L Z 2 RO FMAX 8 L Z 6 RO F2000 9 APPR LCT X 12 Y 5 R5 RL F250 10 L Y 60 TETA TEE T 0 ar ra SPATIAL PROJECTED EULER VECTOR POINTS REL SPA RESET r a Was RE SNS eT NSE RETR Manual operation Manual operation Position display MODE NOML REY E 95 000 10 000 0 000 0 000 A a h Active PGM 0 X Nm P1 1 0 Y Nm 07 03 TOUCH PRESET 3D ROT M S F PROBE TABLE KA dz ia Y 415 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Resetting the PLANE function gt Show the soft key row with special functions NC block 25 PLANE RESET MOVE ABST50 F1000 SPECIAL gt To select special TNC functions press the SPECIAL FUNCTZONS TNC FUNCT soft key aut gt To select the PLANE function press the TILT Ena MACHINING PLANE soft key The TNC displays the available definitions in the soft key row RESET gt Select the Reset function This internally resets the PLANE function but does not change the current axis positions Specify whether the TNC should automatically move the rotary axes to the default setting MOVE or TURN or not STAY see Automatic positioning MOVE TURN STAY entry is mandatory page 429 MOVE 1 al gt To
150. 0 Mid program startup active 1 Yes 0 No 11 Search phase 14 Number of the last FN14 error 16 Real execution active 1 Execution 2 Simulation 31 Radius compensation in MDI mode with paraxial positioning blocks permitted O Not permitted 1 Permitted Example Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to Q25 55 FN 18 SYSREAD Q25 ID210 NR4 IDX3 TNC 620 User s Manual 324 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Additional functions 9 8 FN 19 PLC Transfer values to the PLC l This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder e The FN 19 PLC function transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC FN 20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder With the FN 20 WAIT FOR function you can synchronize the NC and PLC during a program run The NC stops machining until the condition that you have programmed in the FN 20 WAIT FOR block is fulfilled SYNC is used whenever you read for example system data via FN18 SYSREAD that require synchronization with real time The TNC stops the look ahead calculation and executes the subsequent NC block only when the NC program has actually reached that block Example Pause internal look ahead calculation read current position in the X axis 32 FN 20 WAIT FOR SYNC 33 FN 18 SYSREAD Q1 ID270 N
151. 0 Drilling E 201 Reaming E 202 Boring a 203 Universal drilling z 204 Back boring m 205 Universal pecking E 206 Tapping with a floating tap holder new E 207 Rigid tapping new E 208 Bore milling E 209 Tapping with chip breaking a 220 Polar pattern E 221 Cartesian pattern E 225 Engraving E 230 Multipass milling E TNC 620 User s Manual 620 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Overview tables 18 4 Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL number active active 231 Ruled surface a 232 Face milling E 233 Face milling selectable machining direction consider the sides Ww 240 Centering E 241 Single lip deep hole drilling E 247 Datum setting z 251 Rectangular pocket complete machining A 252 Circular pocket complete machining a 253 Slot milling E 254 Circular slot E 256 Rectangular stud complete machining E 257 Circular stud complete machining z 262 Thread milling oO 263 Thread milling countersinking E 264 Thread drilling milling E 265 Helical thread drilling milling E 267 Outside thread milling E 275 Trochoidal slot D Miscellaneous functions M Effect Effective at block Start End Page MO Program STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF E 365 M1 Optional program run STOP Spindle STOP Coolant OFF z 564 M2 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display E 365 depending on machine parameter Return jump to block 1 M3 Spindle ON clockwise z 365 M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise Oo M5 Spindle STOP E M6 To
152. 0 EULNUO EULROT25 Tilt angle of the working plane ae CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING CYCL DEF 17 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 17 2 DEPTH 1 Angle of a basic rotation tne Econ 11 CC X 22 5 Y 36 75 0 X Nm P1 T1 Active kinematics ny C oeo 000 __ 95 000 GM 0 000 X us ke Mode nome o_ e ia Omm min v m 5 9 STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS OF COORD OVERVIEW POS STATUS TRRNSE Q PARAM TNC 620 User s Manual 80 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Information on tools TOOL tab Soft key TOOL STATUS Meaning Display of active tool Tool number and tool name RI Number and name of a replacement tool Tool axis Tool length and tool radii Oversizes delta values from the tool table TAB and the TOOL CALL PGM Tool life maximum tool life TIME 1 and maximum tool life for TOOL CALL TIME 2 Display of programmed tool and replacement tool Tool measurement TT tab a lt Soft key No direct selection possible The TNC displays the TT tab only if the function is active on your machine Meaning Number of the tool to be measured Display whether the tool radius or the tool length is being measured MIN and MAX values of the individual cutting edges and the result of measuring the rotating tool DYN dynamic measurement Cutting edge number with the corresponding measured value If the measured value is fol
153. 0 Entering formulas directly Soft key Linking function Arc tangent Inverse function of the tangent determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite side to the adjacent side e g Q12 ATAN Q50 Powers of values eg Q15 3 3 Constant PI 3 4159 e g Q15 PI ATAN Natural logarithm LN of a number r Z Base 2 7183 e g Q15 LN Q11 Logarithm of a number Base 10 e g Q33 LOG Q22 Exponential function 2 7183 to the power of n e g Q1 EXP Q12 Negate multiplication by 1 e g Q2 NEG Q1 r D a l Truncate digits after the decimal point Form an integer e g Q3 INT Q42 Absolute value of a number e g Q4 ABS Q22 Truncate digits before the decimal point Form a fraction e g Q5 FRAC Q23 Check algebraic sign of a number e g Q12 SGN Q50 When return value Q12 1 then O50 gt 0 When return value Q12 1 then Q50 lt 0 Calculate modulo value division remainder e g Q12 400 360 Result Q12 40 FRAC O ooe TNC 620 User s Manual 338 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Rules for formulas Entering formulas directly 9 10 Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following rules Higher level operations are performed first 12Q1 5 3 2 10 35 1 Calculation 5 3 15 2 Calculation 2 10 20 3 Calculation 15 20 35 or 13 Q2 SQ 10 3 3 73 1 Calculation step 10 squared 100 2 Calculation step 3 to the third po
154. 126 cccccccecccecceeeceeeeece cess eeeee seen eeeeeeeueeeaeeeseeetaestanetaeeenes 438 Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 ccc cccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeas 439 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 option 9 440 Sy a1 eyed are O arc a V1 Ul hoo ate nan enna ee eee ne ee ne eee ee ee E ee 443 Compensating the machine s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block KEE 0 0 0 ec ene E nn ee ee E eee E 444 TNC 620 User s Manual 38 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 12 5SFUNCTION TCRM option 9 ccnp ccritenas E coco E I T E T a a 445 FINS a E A E T E E E E ES E EN A ET 445 Bonning te ee TG TION iorri E sesso uncle a a o 445 Mode of action of the programmed feed rate cccccccccccccececceceeeeeeee seen esse eseseseeneeeeeeeeeeteneeeneeeneseaeees 446 Interpretation of the programmed rotary axis CoordinateS s sssesisierierrrrrrrrerrerrerrrrrrerrerrrrrrrrren 446 Type of interpolation between the starting and end posSition ssscessersiesiriierirrrsrrererierrerrererrerrerren 448 Recetino tme TFN FONC THON cusar E E E EENE E ee ee nee 449 12 6 Three dimensional tool compensation option Q ccccsscecssseeecsseeecesseeccsseeceasseseesseeeeaseeesaeeees 450 OOC O eee E TE E E canteeoeeesasia eousee 450 Denton ora nonna od VOCO esre nE S EEE EEEE EE 451 FIA S SEO took el
155. 138 The TNC performs the above functions only in those tilting axes that you have defined using M138 If you restrict the number of tilting axes with the M138 function your machine may provide only limited tilting possibilities Effect M138 becomes effective at the start of block You can reset M138 by reprogramming It without entering any axes Example NC blocks Perform the above mentioned functions only in the tilting axis C L Z 100 RO FMAX M138 C TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 443 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 4 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes Compensating the machine s kinematics configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block M144 option 9 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the machining program If the position of a tilted axis changes in the program the resulting offset in the linear axes must be calculated and traversed in a positioning block Behavior with M144 The TNC calculates into the position value any changes in the machine s kinematics configuration which result for example from adding a spindle attachment If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes the position of the tool tip to the workpiece is also changed The resulting offset is calculated in the position display Positioning blocks with M91 M92 are permitted if M144 is active The position display in the operat
156. 15 115 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Calling the file manager gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC displays the file management window see figure for default setting If the TNC displays a different screen layout press the WINDOW soft key manuai operation g Programming G Programming The narrow window on the left shows the available drives and directories Drives designate devices with which data are stored or transferred One drive is the internal memory of the TNC Other drives are the interfaces RS232 Ethernet which can be used for example for connecting a personal computer A directory is always identified by a folder symbol to the left and the directory name to the right Subdirectories are shown to the right of and below their parent directories If there are subdirectories you can show or hide them using the key The wide window on the right shows you all files that are stored in the selected directory Each file is shown with additional information illustrated in the table below Display Meaning File name File name max 25 characters and Tile type Byte File size in bytes Status File properties E Program is selected in the Programming mode of operation S Program is selected in the Test Run mode of operation M Program is selected in a Program Run mode of operation
157. 17 8 17 9 MOD fUNCIONA E a sated ones meer taser boeh Gatare hcaneeaaate A sean eveneaenaee is 566 SS CEM UN PNAC EO IN eei E O EEE goat A TE ETE A 566 Clee CNV CVSS SS KOS a E E EEE E E EER 566 FEC ECD TM CT Il esha arrnseteyaearerstscaerct S E E E TEA 566 Overview of MOD FUNCT INS irc eccndssuttoussnccionstocncamaie inai i aaa a EE EE a ENKE aE aE 567 Graphic settings aa a e E E E a Sree ou A neeae i 568 WIAGIINIG SeS E E A E E A 569 ETN C r E E E E a e R 569 T NE E a ata E EA E A E E A 569 Tora a e A E E E E E eee 570 SS E e a E E EE AE N EE ner EE E E 570 Systemes ettngS a aE a EE A caer tar T A T SE T EE O E ER EN 571 Se Te SNS E E E EEE EE E EE EE 571 Select the eLo Eea a E E E E E T E E reees 572 API a O Ea r E E EOE E E E 572 Setting E E E or ckecets oatetit ete iihacorit sts diredasai eee rereets 573 POCO ere n atte canna tinea sta ain E ath abearing Sa RA E enue ebenode A 573 Displaymg operating times aaa aA a eee eee E a AAA Aa E A aaa AA Aa a a a 573 POO OW A EEA A E O A EE EE O S 573 renane eo E a E E E E E E E 574 APPICCIU O r eE cape Ea TEATE EE E OEA E NEN ONAA pn EER AT EE AS EEAO EE 574 Entenngi the codemumber e eaa a a E E E A E E a cartes 574 AEE E E NE E T si nea E AE A A EEA A E enamine 574 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 17 10 Setting up Gata INteraGeS ana a a cetecece A E cee oiene taste cse muster E sracuk meeae 575 Serale Cenan tE TNG D U eta tenner me tne en ea
158. 2 2015 441 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 4 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes Inclined machining with noncontrolled rotary axes If you have noncontrolled rotary axes counting axes on your machine then in combination with M128 you can also perform inclined machining operations with these axes 1 Manually traverse the rotary axes to the desired positions M128 must not be active 2 Activate M128 The TNC reads the actual values of all rotary axes present calculates from this the new position of the tool center point and updates the position display 3 The TNC performs the necessary compensating movement in the next positioning block Carry out the machining operation 5 At the end of program reset M128 with M129 and return the rotary axes to the initial positions Proceed as follows As long as M128 is active the TNC monitors the actual positions of the noncontrolled rotary axes If the actual position deviates from the nominal position by a value greater than that defined by the machine manufacturer the TNC outputs an error message and interrupts program run TNC 620 User s Manual 442 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes 12 4 Selecting tilting axes M138 Standard behavior The TNC performs M128 TCPM and tilts the working plane only in those axes for which the machine tool builder has set the appropriate machine parameters Behavior with M
159. 22 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Input parameters VECTOR gt X component of base vector X component BX WA of the base vector B see figure at top right Inout range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 gt Y component of base vector Y component BY of the base vector B see figure at top right Inout range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 gt Zcomponent of base vector Z component BZ of the base vector B see figure at top right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 gt X component of normal vector X component NX of the normal vector N see figure at center right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 gt Y component of normal vector Y component NY of the normal vector N see figure at center right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 gt Z component of normal vector Z component NZ of the normal vector N see figure at lower right Input range 9 9999999 to 9 9999999 gt Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 NC block 5 PLANE VECTOR BX0O 8 BY 0 4 BZ 0 42 NX0O 2 NYO 2 NZO 92 Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning VECTOR Vector BX BY BZ Base vector X Y and Z components NX NY NZ Normal vector X Y and Z components TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 423 Programming Multiple axis mac
160. 23 Tool no PLC value 29 Tool no Probe center offset in minor axis CALOF gt 26 Tool no Spindle angle during calibration CALANG 27 Tool no Tool type for pocket table 28 Tool no Maximum rom NMAX 32 Tool no Point angle TANGLE 34 Tool no LIFTOFF allowed 0 No 1 Yes 35 Tool no Wear tolerance for radius R2TOL 37 Tool no Corresponding line in the touch probe table 38 Tool no Timestamp of last use Pocket table data 51 1 Pocket number Tool number 2 Pocket number Special tool O No 1 Yes 3 Pocket number Fixed pocket O No 1 Yes 4 Pocket number Locked pocket O No 1 Yes 5 Pocket number PLC status Tool pocket 52 1 Tool no Pocket number P 2 Tool no Magazine number TNC 620 User s Manual 318 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Group name ID no Number Index Values programmed immediately 1 after TOOL CALL 60 OIOI BIW l CO CO N l l Values programmed immediately after TOOL DEF 61 Active tool compensation 200 1 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and Oversize from TOOL CALL 2 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and Oversize from TOOL CALL 3 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and Oversize from TOOL CALL TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Additional functions 9 8 Meaning Tool number T Active tool axis 0 X6 U ley 7a 2Z 20 VV Spindle speed S Oversize fo
161. 3 D view The high resolution 3 D view enables you to display the surface of the machined workpiece in greater detail With a simulated light source the TNC creates realistic light and shadow conditions O gt Press the 3 D view soft key 00 10 30 MAX o m VIEWS FURTHER KENI Fr 5 1 VIEW O START OPTIONS TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 539 Test run and program run 16 1 Graphics option 20 Rotating enlarging reducing and shifting the 3 D view gt Select the functions for rotating and enlarging Soft keys Function Rotate in 5 steps about the vertical axis om om co oe Enlarge the graphic stepwise gt angle gt gt Shift the soft key row Soft keys Function t 4 Move the graphic upward or downward e Move the graphic to the left or right gt angle You can also use the mouse to change the graphic display The following functions are available gt In order to rotate the model shown in three dimensions you hold the right mouse button down and move the mouse If you simultaneously press the shift key you can only rotate the model horizontally or vertically gt To shift the model shown Hold the center mouse button or the wheel button down and move the mouse If you simultaneously press the shift key you can only move the model horizontally or vertically gt To zoom in ona ce
162. 3 Z 0 53 LBL O 54 END PGM CYLIN 360 Subprogram 10 Machining operation Account for allowance and tool based on the cylinder radius Set counter Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Calculate angle increment Shift datum to center of cylinder X axis Account for rotational position in the plane Pre position in the plane to the cylinder center Pre position in the spindle axis Set pole in the Z X plane Move to starting position on cylinder plunge cutting obliquely into the material Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Finished If finished jump to end Move in an approximated arc for the next longitudinal cut Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming examples 9 13 Example Convex sphere machined with end mill Program sequence m This program requires an end mill The contour of the sphere is approximated by many short lines in the Z X plane defined in Q14 The smaller you define the angle increment the smoother the curve becomes m You can determine the number of contour cuts through the angle increment in the plane defined in O18 m The tool moves upward in three dimensional cuts The tool radius is compensated automatically
163. 5 Engraving cycle 225 OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can be integrated Program verification graphics program run graphics Plan view Projection in three planes 3 D view Tool compensation M120 Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks 3 D machining M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Input resolution HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Linear axes down to 0 01 um Rotary axes to 0 00001 Supported DXF format AC1009 AutoCAD R12 Adoption of contours and point patterns Simple and convenient specification of reference points select graphical features of contour sections from conversational programs Backup restore active kinematics Test active kinematics Optimize active kinematics Fundamentals TNC model software and features Extended Tool Management option 93 Extended tool management Python based Remote Desktop Manager option 133 Remote operation of external m Windows on a separate computer unit computer units Incorporated in the TNC interface Cross Talk Compensation CTC option 141 Compensation of axis couplings Determination of dynamically caused position deviation through axis acceleration Compensation of TCP Tool Center Point Position Adaptive Control PAC option 142 Adaptive position control m Changing of the control parameters depending on the position of the axes In the
164. 554 Resuming program TUM after an IMTEMPUD TOM icrsncceuceneeat annwting ee Saactemeagaehvwaesabapeuenetebannednbeaiataienmiawniadeaets 554 Retraction after a power IMLONF UOT OM ii ccsiscscnsa nies so tea inndsudeanaenemannn toed ade dened deieli erde ieia 556 Any entry into program mid program STEMUD virovidsvinedecim einedndendienniviiont byane vier ndysidibyntwlesautivvideunndibenoswnaiis 559 FNS CURE tO Me CONTOU ci coialescxicvattsiaeartaniscseopsiesciaoscer eigapnantsidsaciceivtniseiiieh A reali asiuid eleva ao aRaaciotantee said wkaemadienhiunends 561 PUITOMLALIG DFO GMA Ea a terete ea eater E cet co ircen einer naene 562 ANG otchd 6 0 eee etn ter no nn nt nen ee ene eee er ee eee E E E ee ar ee eee 562 Optional Hlock Skiprcc ne a T T E E T E a E etree trarircn E T TOE 563 POMC a a E E EE E E E E E EEEE E E S E E E 563 NSS ENC the 7 CUS CUS sect ettsnarcrisivpr tre seer iima ni AEEA Sermon EEE RE A Ea a ENA EE aai naei 563 ErasinG the CII AC LCN rusitcsacunssuitinnisonsin cuie nsiimiestidlennsanits dice bieatsauataatihiuiekucbeaieneie dnt e ERAO aioa e iO iA 563 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 16 82 Optional programm KuUlt iMtCIUP EON ce eaaa serene scenes aero E E a tenses 564 PRT OIC AHN e i E E E ait ns aeeist E E E E A E E E 564 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 45 Contents 46 17 1 17 2 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 17 7
165. 9 option 19 option 19 23 Floor finishing 24 Side finishing 25 Contour train option 19 option 19 option 19 26 Axis specitic scaling 27 Cylinder surface option 8 option 8 28 Cylinder surface option 8 option 8 XI X X X XIXI OK XX KL OK X X 29 Cylinder surface ridge 30 run 3 D data 32 tolerance with HSC mode and TA X option 8 Option 8 X X XI XIX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X TNC 620 User s Manual 632 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Cycle TNC 620 ITNC 530 39 Cylinder surface external contour X option 8 X option 8 200 Drilling X X 201 Reaming X option 19 X 202 Boring X option 19 X 203 Universal drilling X option 19 X 204 Back boring X option 19 X 205 Universal pecking X option 19 X 206 Tapping with floating tap holder X X 207 Rigid tapping X X 208 Bore milling X option 19 X 209 Tapping with chip breaking X option 19 X 210 Slot with reciprocating plunge X option 19 X 211 Circular slot X option 19 X 212 Rectangular pocket finishing X option 19 X 213 Rectangular stud finishing X option 19 X 214 Circular pocket finishing X option 19 X 215 Circular stud finishing X option 19 X 220 Polar pattern X option 19 X 221 Cartesian pattern X option 19 X 225 Engraving X option 19 X 230 Multipass milling X option 19 X 231 Ruled sur
166. 97 9 2 Part families Q parameters in place of numerical VAIUCS sccccseecseeeeseeeeeseeeeeeceeeeseeeeesens 298 POMC SOW A EAE A E E A EE EE O S 298 9 3 Describing contours with mathematical FUNCTIONS cece eee ee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeseeessaeeesaes 299 PIO NEVO lactose in recess teenie case ep cca EA dace perdu aaa ede nae amiga dam visas OASE AEA E 299 NG EATE E T NE N EEE A EAE I E A EEA 299 Pregramnming fundamental operations auissen a a Ta aaa E ET i 300 DEA STATICS functions A E cece cae eee ree er etre E ee rarer ree tea E a E A 301 DEE a e N a win ceo lesen E E E ocean aaateaenetaaiieaat armen arentatmanceosas 301 Programming mMoonometie TUNCIONS cererii kenaan eo tE Ta eK E a E AANE a EEE 301 O GalculatlOMmcOt E a a 302 PTO A E EEE EAA AAA AA AE E A 302 9 6 If then decisions with Q parametelrs cccsccccsecceseeeeeeecceeeeeueeeeueeeeueeeeueeeeaueeeeueeeaeseaeeeeaueeseeneseags 303 PIE e E ATER AE E TAE E EEEE E A E A S EA AAR 303 Unconditional UII O Sionrcucenvernivercionrtien comaleanmeniantenadennesnen cup Daa R AE AE EEE KARERA EEEO EAT 303 ADOT TO U E ET ETA opty E A A AE E OEE A 303 ROOM AEG M then QEGSIONS sariani iiaa a ponte aaa ad aaa E aa TA 304 9 7 Checking and changing Q parameters ccccssccccsececcsseecccsseeccaseeecusseecugseeceaseeseasseseagsesenasesenaesees 305 LOOO ULLA 305 G3 SP o o AA E corretieteaerataitccr meet 307 ONIA EAN A 307 FN 14 ERROR Display
167. AT gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Miscellaneous function M Switch on the spindle and coolant e g M13 Confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block O1 8 100 90 10 20 80 90 100 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming the first part 1 3 gt Enter Retract tool Press the orange axis key Z and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Press the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Miscellaneous function M Enter M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block Example NC blocks Further information on this topic Creating a new program see Opening programs and entering page 99 m Cycle programming See User s Manual for Cycles TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 59 First steps with the TNC 620 1 4 Graphically testing the first part Advanced Graphic Features software option 1 4 Graphically testing the first part Advanced Graphic Features software option Selecting the correct operating mode You can test programs in the Test Run mode gt Press the Test Run operating mode key the TNC swi
168. ATUM soft key in the Manual Operation mode The figure shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and workpiece datum M91 M92 in the Test Run mode In order to be able to graphically simulate M91 M92 movements you need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece blank referenced to the set reference point see Showing the workpiece blank in the working space option 20 page 546 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 367 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 3 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate data Moving to positions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 Standard behavior with a tilted working plane The TNC places the coordinates in the positioning blocks in the tilted coordinate system Behavior with M130 The TNC places coordinates in straight line blocks in the untilted coordinate system The TNC then positions the tilted tool to the programmed coordinates of the untilted system Danger of collision Subsequent positioning blocks or fixed cycles are carried out in a tilted coordinate system This can lead to problems in fixed cycles with absolute pre positioning The function M130 is allowed only if the tilted working plane function is active Effect M130 functions blockwise in straight line blocks without tool radius compensation TNC 620 User s Manual 368 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programm
169. Advanced options area TNC 620 User s Manual Remote Desktop Manager option 133 Meaning Name of the connection in the Remote Desktop Manager Behavior with terminated connection Always restart Never restart E o m Always after an error Ask after an error Connection automatically established during control powerup Connection icon in the task bar m Double click with left mouse button The control starts the connection m Single click with left mouse button The control changes to the desktop of the connection m Single click with right mouse button The control displays the connection menu Number of desktop for the connection whereby desktops 0 and 1 are reserved for the NC software Enable access to connected USB mass memory Host name or IP address of the external computer Name of the user User password Domain of the external computer Size of the connection window Available only to authorized specialists HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 2 6 Input Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Optional 87 Introduction 2 6 Remote Desktop Manager option 133 Configuring the connection VNC Configuring an external computer You do not need an additional VNC server for your external computer for connecting to VNC Install and configure the VNC server e g the TightVNC server before configuring
170. BLE RESET Reset tool number column T COLUMN T BEGIN Go to beginning of the line LINE Qa Go to end of the line 2 m SIMULATED Simulate a tool change Select a tool from the tool table The TNC shows the contents of the tool table Use the arrow keys to select a tool press OK to transfer it to the pocket table EDIT Edit the current field CURRENT FIELD SELECT Sort the view SORT The machine manufacturer defines the features properties and designations of the various display E filters Refer to your machine manual 7 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 181 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Call tool data A TOOL CALL in the part program is defined with the following data gt Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key gt Tool number Enter the number or name of the tool The tool must already be defined in a TOOL DEF block or in the tool table With the TOOL NAME soft key you can enter a name With the QS soft key you enter a string parameter The TNC automatically places the tool name in quotation marks You have to assign a tool name to a string parameter first Names always refer to an entry in the active tool table TOOL T If you wish to call a tool with other compensation values also enter the index you defined in the tool table after the decimal point There is a SELECT soft key for calling a window from which you can select a tool defined in the too
171. COM aiian 226 Circular path around circle center Ci erni 223 Circular path with defined Aea PE E EE 224 OverVieW ce 218 Straight HNG iraran 219 Polar coordinates 230 Circular path around pole E EE E ere EE 232 Circular path with tangential CONNEC O wascrwsrtectsioscadievaoes 232 OverVieW cc 230 Straight IME sciis 231 Path THMCTIONS scuncrsccteededsvvenbind 202 Fundamentals 202 Circles and circular arcs 205 Pre DOSItlON cceeeeee 206 PDF VIEWET arroan 127 PLANE FUNC OM sessretivscces 413 414 PLANE function Automatic positioning 429 Axis angle definition 427 Euler angle definition 420 Inclined tool machining 435 Incremental definition 426 Point definition 424 Positioning behavior 429 Projection angle definition 419 PGS EEE EE EE 416 Selection of possible solutions 432 Spatial angle definition 417 Vector definition 422 653 Index lI ICV aa 542 PLC and NC synchronization 325 Pocket table 179 Polar coordinates 96 Fundamentals 96 PrOQraAMMING ccecceeeeeees 230 POSH OF INO inaari 530 With Manual Data Input 530 With tilted working plane 368 444 Preset table 485 501 Transferring test results 501 Principal AXES araire 95 95 Probing a plane 513 Processing DXF data Basic Settings 259 Filter for hole positions 271 selecting
172. CTION you can define the mode of action of various functions Mode of action of the programmed feed rate F TCP F CONT Interpretation of the rotary axis coordinates programmed in the NC program AXIS POS AXIS SPAT m ype of interpolation between start and target position PATHCTRL AXIS PATHCTRL VECTOR Defining the TCPM FUNCTION gt Select the special functions ee gt Select the programming aids FUNCTIONS gt Select the TCPM FUNCTION TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 445 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 5 FUNCTION TCPM option 9 Mode of action of the programmed feed rate The TNC provides two functions for defining the mode of action of the programmed feed rate z gt F TCP determines that the programmed feed TCP rate is interpreted as the actual relative velocity between the tool point TCP Tool Center Point and the workpiece F gt F CONT determines that the programmed feed CONTOUR rate is interpreted as the contouring feed rate of the axis programmed in the respective NC block Example NC blocks 13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP Feed rate refers to the tool tip 14 FUNCTION TCPM F CONT Feed rate is interpreted as the speed of the tool along the contour Interpretation of the programmed rotary axis coordinates Up to now machines with 45 swivel heads or 45 tilting tables could not easily set the angle of inclination or a tool orientation with respe
173. Connection options You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network through the RJ45 connection X26 100BaselX or 10Basel or directly to a PC The connection is metallically isolated from the control electronics For a 100BaselTX or 10BaselT connection you need a Twisted Pair cable to connect the TNC to your network The maximum cable length between TNC and a node depends on the quality grade of the cable the 10BaseT 100BaseTx sheathing and the type of network 100BaseIX or 10Basel No great effort is required to connect the TNC directly to a PC that has an Ethernet card Simply connect the TNC port X26 and the PC with an Ethernet crossover cable trade names crossed patch cable or STP cable Configuring the TNC Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a network specialist gt Press the MOD key in the Programming operating mode and enter the code number NET123 gt In the file manager press the NETWORK soft key NET TNC 620 User s Manual 582 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Ethernet interface 17 11 General network settings gt Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK soft key to enter the general network settings The Computer name tab is active Wanuai operation Programming ae BO lost foune LTNC nc_prog PGM H I OXF S nc_prog Network settings Setting Meaning com Primary Name of the Ethernet interface
174. Conversational Programming 2 2015 213 Programming Programming contours 6 3 Approaching and departing a contour Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection APPR CT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves from PH to the first contour point PA following a circular arc that is tangential to the first contour element The arc from Py to Pa is determined through the radius R and the center angle CCA The direction of rotation of the circular arc is automatically derived from the tool path for the first contour element gt Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR CT soft key gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa gt Radius R of the circular arc m f the tool should approach the workpiece in the direction defined by the radius compensation Enter R as a positive value If the tool should approach from the workpiece side Enter R as a negative value gt Center angle CCA of the arc CCA can be entered only as a positive value m Maximum input value 360 gt Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks 7 L X 40 Y 10 RO FMAX M3 Approach PS without radius compensation 8 APPR CT X 10 Y 20 Z 10 CCA180 R 10 RR F100 PA with radius compensation RR radius R 10 9 L X 20 Y 35 End point of the first contour element 10L Next contour element TNC 620
175. DENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Technical information 18 3 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 places before the decimal point places after the decimal point mm O to 32 7679 5 1 32 characters enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL Permitted special characters amp 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 Mmm 0 to 99 999 999 5 3 rom O to 99 999 999 5 3 mm min or mm tooth or mm rev O to 3600 000 4 3 s 9 9999 to 9 9999 2 4 mm O to 360 0000 3 4 360 0000 to 360 0000 3 4 5 400 0000 to 5 400 0000 4 4 O to 2999 4 0 0 000001 to 99 999999 2 6 O to 999 4 0 O to 1999 4 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 9 6 O to 999 5 0 Any text string in quotes 1 to 65 534 5 0 O to 1199 4 0 619 Tables and overviews 18 4 Overview tables 18 4 Overview tables Fixed cycles Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL number active active 7 Datum shift E 8 Mirror image E 9 Dwell time m 10 Rotation a 11 Scaling factor E 12 Program call a 13 Spindle orientation E 14 Contour definition 19 Tilting the working plane E 20 Contour data SL II a 21 Pilot drilling SL H E 22 Rough out SL II z 23 Floor finishing SL Il E 24 Side finishing SL Il 25 Contour train E 26 Axis specific scaling m 27 Cylinder surface E 28 Cylindrical surface slot z 29 Cylinder surface ridge a 39 Cylinder surface contour E 32 Tolerance E 20
176. Datum tables for storing workpiece related datums X X Preset table for saving reference points presets X X Pallet management Support of pallet files X option 22 E X m ool oriented machining E m X m Pallet preset table for managing pallet datums X Returning to the contour With mid program startup X X After program interruption X X Autostart function X X Actual position capture Actual positions can be X X transferred to the NC program Enhanced file management Creating multiple directories and subdirectories X X m Sorting function m X m X Mouse operation X X Selection of target directory by soft key X E X Programming aids m Help graphics for cycle programming E X E X m Animated help graphics when PLANE PATTERN DEF E m X function is selected Help graphics for PLANE PATTERN DEF X E X Context sensitive help function for error messages m X m X TNCguide Browserbased help system X X Context sensitive call of helo system X E X m Calculator m X scientific m X standard Comment blocks in NC program m X m X m Structure blocks in NC program X a X m Structure view in test run x m X Dynamic Collision Monitoring DCM m Collision monitoring in Automatic operation E m X option 40 m Collision monitoring in Manual operation E m X option 40 Graphic depiction of the defined collision objects E m X option 40 m Collision checking in the Test Run
177. E E EEE REE EE ea renies 492 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe cece cece eee eeeeecaeeeeeeeeaeesaeesaeeeeaeesaeesaanessaesaeesaanees 493 POS OEE A E Shs ates cueaae anand aaron E E 493 FIFA CUP crea sip ane serceia EE luce eda eg cveal ge aneeaneeg pas S 493 adau FUE Gir IO TNE aa EE NEEE Er 493 Using touch probe functions with mechanical probes or measuring ClalS cece cceccee cece neeeeeeeeeeeenees 494 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 41 Contents 42 14 7 Using 3 D touch probes option 17 a I aa coe ieee te A E I et cue E E a ena 495 sheets ng A E E E E E E tse EE E E 495 PUNC MOE JIA TOUCA DODE CYC E rie e NTE S ETRE E E EEC 496 Selecting TOUCH Probe CY C16 S usri eae iiaa iN aa EEA EN Ea EATER E AEE R EERENS 498 Recording measured values from the touch probe cycleS eisssissrssrrerrerrerrrerrsrrerrerrrerrerrerrerrrere 499 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table ssssssrserrerreerrrrrerrerrrern 500 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table ce cceccceseeee nese eeens 501 14 8 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe Option 17 cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeesseaeeeeeessenaas 502 FCO CLIO E E E A E E E E E sab acamdiesebagleeaacaeoutaanh 502 ah ONO e SMe LICH GHEY egaa AS E EENE E EE EE EE 503 Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center m
178. EE Seve in an NC program and to ensure that other changes are not made to copies of the same table rows at the same time This results in the following transaction sequence 1 AQ parameter is specified for each column to be edited The Q parameter is assigned to a column t is bound SQL BIND 2 Address the table file select rows and transfer them to the result set In addition you define which columns are transferred to the result set SQL SELECT You can lock the selected rows Other processes can then read these rows but cannot change the table entries You should always lock the selected rows when you are going to make changes SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE 3 Read rows from the result set modify and or add new rows Adopt one row of the result set into the Q parameters of your NC program SQL FETCH Prepare changes in the Q parameters and transfer to a row in the result set SQL UPDATE Prepare new table row in the O parameters and transfer as a new row to the result set SQL INSERT 4 Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the data from the result set is placed in the table file The data is now saved in the file Any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL COMMIT If table entries were not changed or inserted only read access any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL ROLLBACK WITHOUT INDEX Multiple transactions can be edited at t
179. EEEE EE E E A E EE TE EE E 243 PN OVS N E caosn ta oases E O ENE E EE E E E A E E aeons 246 PORTIO A e T T E AA A E A 247 Example FK programming 1 jaceneccvwarunsehvertsn ences seavenianinaatenteent ear ialoredecntenesvesvimeiedandiporegeadineaitnaies 249 Eales i D OO UGE 2 aiecas aunt aia ticna a EEE EAER ESEE E ASAE 250 ES OO Ol AUC aaa a E E ahaa tntteanstanaa soi EEE ga 251 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 29 Contents 30 7 1 7 2 7 3 CAD viewer and DXF converter screen layOut cccssccssseecsseecsseeeeeeeeeeneesaseesaseeeaseesaseeeaneeeeneeees 254 CAD viewer and DXF converter screen layOUt 0 ce cccccccccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeseeeeeeaeeeaeeeeaeenieeeas 254 CAD viewer me a E A T A E O E ec E A EA eee re 255 PO NEC es E EE EA P AEEA E E E A E E AE EE EE EA 295 DXF CONVENE OPO aaa E A A A A eigenen ts 256 A e e e A E A ENEO A AE A E E A 256 VVOFKING wih the DAF CONVEO erriei iiinn E REA A EALER PE DARTRO AAEE ENAREN EEEN 257 ES TaN Che Te E E E EIEE ite E N E A E A 258 Ba O E E E E E E E nobuaiceasptebatnatepatees 259 EN E anon e E T E AE es cissencteusveatoes 261 Denno Me Gatien Ee EEn E EEE EET EEOAE E ET EEEE 262 Selecing and Savino a COMOU een ne ner nier ee ene eee eer 264 SElSCIING and Saving machining WOSIT OMS irectawevbvaatesrnsaen verewessund acietawaaladeaadectialvandansiemateerasaetasaanicanante 267 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversati
180. EIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Optional safety concept functional safety FS 14 4 Checking the axis positions This function must be adapted to the TNC by your machine manufacturer Refer to your machine E manual After switch on the TNC checks whether the position of an axis matches the position directly after switch off If a deviation occurs this axis is displayed red in the position display Axes that are marked red can no longer be moved while the door is opened In such cases you must approach a test position for the axes in question Proceed as follows gt Select the Manual Operation mode gt Execute the approach with NC Start to move the axes in the sequence shown gt When the test position has been reached the TNC asks whether the position was approached correctly Confirm with the OK soft key if the TNC approached the test position correctly and with END if the TNC approached the position incorrectly gt If you confirmed with OK you must confirm the correctness of the test position again with the permissive button on the machine operating panel gt Repeat this procedure for all axes that you want to move to the test position Danger of collision Approach the test positions in such a way that no collision between tool and the workpiece or the clamping devices can occur If necessary pre position the axes manually The location of the test position is specified by your machine tool
181. EIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Example for a machine with a rotary table C and a tilting table A Programmed function PLANE SPATIAL SPA 0 SPB 45 SPC 0 Limit switch Starting position SEQ None A 0 C 0 not prog None A 0 C 0 None A 0 C 0 None A 0 C 105 not prog None A 0 C 105 None A 0 C 105 90 lt A lt 10 A 0 C 0 not prog 90 lt A lt 10 A 0 C 0 None A 0 C 135 Selecting the type of transformation entry optional For tilting angles that only rotate the coordinate system around the tool axis a specific function enables you to define the type of transformation ROT gt COORD ROT specifies that the PLANE function should only rotate the coordinate system to the defined tilting angle Compensation results by computing and a rotary axis is not moved ROT gt TABLE ROT specifies that the PLANE function should position the rotary axes to the defined tilting angle Compensation results from rotating the workpiece When the PLANE AXIAL function is used COORD ROT and TABLE ROT are nonfunctional COORD ROT is active only if tilting is around the tool axis only e g SPC 45 with tool axis Z As soon as a second swivel axis is required for implementation TABLE ROT is automatically active If you use the TABLE ROT function in conjunction with a basic rotation and a tilting angle of O then the TNC tilts the tabl
182. ELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 Row number is programmed directly 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX5 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Accessing tables with SQL commands 9 9 SOL UPDATE SQL UPDATE transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the row of the result set addressed with INDEX The existing row in the result set is completely overwritten SQL UPDATE takes into account all columns entered in the Select command me gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which UPDATE the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle index too large value outside of value range or incorrect data format gt Database SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT gt Database Index to SQL result Line number within the result set The table entries prepared in the Q parameters are written to this row If you do not enter an index the first row is written to n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index SQL INSERT SQL INSERT generates a new row in the result set and transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the new row SQL INSERT takes into account all columns entered in the Select command Table columns not entered in the Select command are fi
183. END key The parameters used by the TNC internally or in cycles are provided with comments If you want to check or edit local global or string parameters press the SHOW PARAMETERS Q QL QR QS soft key The TNC then displays the specific parameter type The functions previously described also apply TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 305 Programming Q parameters 9 7 Checking and changing Q parameters You can have the Q parameters be shown in the additional status display in all operating modes except for the Programming operating mode gt If you are in a program run interrupt it if required for example by pressing the machine STOP button and the soft key If you are In a test run interrupt It gt Call the soft key row for screen layout PROGRAM gt Select the screen layout with additional status ete display In the right half of the screen the TNC shows the Overview status form FH gt Press the STATUS OF Q PARAM soft key a gt Press the Q PARAMETER LIST soft key The TNC aw opens a pop up window gt For each parameter type O OL OR OS define the parameter numbers you wish to control separate single O parameters with a comma and connect sequential Q parameters with a hyphen e g 1 3 200 208 The input range per parameter type is 132 characters The display in the QPARA tab always contains eight decimal places The result of Q1 COS89 999 is show
184. EP LU 0 cccecc cece cee eee eeeee seen eeeeeeeeeenees 216 Departing in a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP UN 216 Departing on a circular path with tangential connection DEP CU cccccccc cece neceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenenens 217 Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT 217 6 4 Path contours Cartesian COOrdimates cccccsceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaseeesaeeessaaeeesaaeeessaeeessaenees 218 Overview of path TUNCTIONS cccccccccccecccncceeeeeee seen eeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseaeseeaseeeeeeaeseeeseeaeeeaeeeseeesaeeeseetaeeeneeeaes 218 S NAN SS epee cette ged ses ce neler ete vse ate as itp udp tc needa gota paces eee eeeaarcienaeeee 219 Inserting a chamfer between two Straight INES 0 ccecceccececcee eee neeeeeeeeeeeeneseseeeeeeesaeseneeeeaeenneseaeees 220 Comer roundino TD uc sepcosesoecetian nossnaen ceases e E EEA EEEE E ENE E E AEREO EEE EEE 221 C ater a E A E A E E E E E E 222 Circular path around circle Center CO surenin en en ro EEEE nr AEE nee ny ere eee 223 Ile ay Wh le Cl TadiU ereraa bansaumeoueunenesnenoad E E A 224 Circle CT with tangential CONNecCtiIOnN s ssssessssiesiusrrerrerit nitrite eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneseuesteeseeeeeeaesenesenateneeeas 226 Example Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian COOrdinates cccccccceceeecseceeeseeeeeaeenaeees 227 Example Circular movements with Cartesian coordinateS
185. EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 7 CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING 11 CG X 22 5 Y 35 76 0 X Nm P1 T1 0 Y Nm 06 31 Active PGM STAT1 x ooo 0 000 Y 95 000 0 0 000 Taz B s 2000 M 5 9 ss STATUS J STATUS COORD OVERVIEW STATUS TRANSF Q PARAM STATUS OF Program run full sequence e Program run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H A Active PG 0 BEGIN PGM STAT1 MM cc 1 SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshi CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 4 CALL LBL 99 LBL 99 PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING CYCL DEF 17 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 17 2 DEPTH 1 10 CYCL DEF 17 3 PITCH 1 11 CC X 22 5 Y 35 75 0 x a Mode NOML G omm min i B Programming Pom LBL cyc m Pos Toot TT TRANS PARA TATA 5 00 00 00 m2 Bs 2000 M 5 9 status STATUS TOOL STATUS COORD OVERVIEW Pos STATUS TRANSF Q PARAM STATUS OF TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Program section repeat Subprograms LBL tab Soft key Meaning No direct Active program section repeats with block selection number label number and number of possible programmed repeats repeats yet to be run Active subprograms with block number in which the subprogram was called and the label number that was called Information on standard cycles CYC tab
186. FIELD soft key Datum protected without password or gt Press the soft key The TNC rescinds write UNLOCK protection Datum protected with password Lock 7 gt Press the soft key UNLOCK PASSWORD gt Enter the password into the pop up window gt Confirm with the OK soft key or the ENT key The TNC rescinds write protection TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 14 5 491 Manual operation and setup 14 5 Datum management with the preset table Activating the datum Activating a datum from the preset table in the Manual Operation mode When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC resets the active datum shift mirroring rotation and scaling factor However a coordinate transtormation that was programmed in Cycle 19 Tilted Working Plane or through the PLANE function remains active gt Select the Manual Operation mode PRESET gt Display the preset table TABLE gt Select the datum number you want to activate or GOTO gt With the GOTO key select the datum number that you want to activate Confirm with the ENT key DOB e ACTIVATE gt Activate the datum PRESET Confirm activation of the datum The TNC sets the display and if defined the basic rotation EXECUTE M gt Exit the preset table Activating a datum from the preset table in an NC program Use Cycle 247 in order to activate datums from the preset table during prog
187. FTOFF takes effect in the following situations An NC stop triggered by you An NC stop triggered by the software e g if an error occurred in the drive system m When a power interruption occurs Danger of collision Remember that especially on curved surfaces the surface can be damaged during return to the contour Retract the tool before returning to the contour In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter define the value by which the tool is to be retracted In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter you can also switch the function off Effect M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149 M148 becomes effective at the start of block M149 at the end of block TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 381 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Rounding corners M197 Standard behavior The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners with active radius compensation This my lead to grinding of the edge Behavior with M197 With Function M197 the contour at the corner is tangentially extended and a smaller transition arc is then inserted When you program Function M197 and then press the ENT key the TNC opens the DL input field In DL you define the length with which the TNC extends the contour elements With M197 the corner radius is reduced the corner grinds less and the traverse movement is still tangential Effect The Function
188. Further information on this topic Setting datums with 3 D touch probe see Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 page 515 Setting datums without 3 D touch probe see Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe page 493 TNC 620 User s Manual 66 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Setting datums with 3 D touch probe option 17 gt Insert a 3 D touch probe In the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode run a TOOL CALL block containing the tool axis and then return to the Manual Operation mode TOUCH gt PROBE iy PROBING gt fm gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt DATUM gt SET gt select the probing functions The TNC displays the available functions in the soft key row Set the datum at a workpiece corner for example Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the first workpiece edge select the probing direction via soft key Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the second touch point on the first workpiece edge Press NC start The touch probe moves in the defined direction until it contacts the workpiece and then automatically returns to its starting point Use the axis direction keys to pre position the touch probe to a position near the first
189. HAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Window manager 2 5 2 5 Window manager The machine tool builder determines the available functions and behavior of the window manager Refer to your machine manual The TNC features the Xfce window manager Xfce is a standard application for UNIX based operating systems and is used to manage graphical user interfaces The following functions are possible with the window manager Display a task bar for switching between various applications user interfaces Manage an additional desktop on which special applications from your machine tool builder can run Control the focus between NC software applications and those of the machine tool builder The size and position of pop up windows can be changed It is also possible to close minimize and restore the pop up windows The TNC shows a Star in the upper left of the screen if an application of the window manager or the window manager itself has caused an error In this case switch to the window manager and correct the problem If required refer to your machine manual TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 83 Introduction 2 5 Window manager Task bar In the task bar you can choose different workspaces by mouse click The TNC provides the following workspaces Manuai operation Programming 09 42 TNC nc_prog PGM H I OXF
190. HS E Vr cassia arcs auf sedated E E E E E 64 TOC TAS Cte Malaccan severe eraai iea E eini eaten tonaeetiaedaaaatsneataiasetucdiueenedeee 65 TO SAVVORKDICCE SEUD cicero eee reser en noch ne E oie ee oat eC a er So a ee ee aCe OR 66 Selecting the corect operating lOO siiin innii iE a ea 66 carmona Mne WAE E e a E aA N eN 66 Setting datums with 3 D touch probe option 17 iiacsiniasnantointindansitasatornd sewsitatasih enti vadandhbilenisasimasmansincvamenas 67 17 Running the TSE MOG GAN e oa a E a tees ch E A onieeerenr yee 68 selecung the conect operitng ModE sariani aE aa iaia a aani a SA 68 Choosing the programi you want to TUfiusairesireinrnsni aain E E ENERE 68 Sae e MO a eion EE E E N E EEEE EER E OE T ANE 68 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 21 Contents 22 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 TMG ING GOZO cares wrececes E ate sem conan cea cosine sanis ee anecm tert ats sot cee vatestneenere rs etenc arses retartrae terre ieanceers Gane 70 Programming In HEIDENHAIN conversational and DIN ISO Q ccc ccccccccccc cece eceeeeeeeeeeaeeseeseaeeeneeeeaeenas 70 OFS NO EE E E aaa aaa aaa to E E E 70 Visual display unit and operating Panell cccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaeesaeesaesaeesanseeesanesaessensenesaees 71 Display SCS SU hrnnareneraversena gaa ney teeiee constaesaerueveatiiercrymraeranaite coreunereedmaabisar vee rhea vimana sateen unereiiah arn 71 SOTO T
191. He a T a O aa EEE R S 72 EErEE o lt OAE E E ENE AERE AE OA AT A PE A A T AAE E ee ee A AE 72 WVIOGES OF Ope E E e 73 Manual Operation and El Handwheel essssessesrsrsrrernerrrerrerrrrretrerrt orte riter errre rte rr erre rr EEEPrEEEEErE SEEE rreran 73 Positioning with Manual Data IMUT ongsisearntvsaicuescoasato quiet danioad Suet i eE A a iE ie nwiete 73 BON a VMI E P E E A A E E E E 74 ea a OEE E E N EAEE EE N N EE EE E E O E E E E T 74 Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single BIOCk essesnssissinernerrsrsrrerrerrrrrerrrrrrerrerrerrern 75 Statussdisplay S ae E A T a A a ee A E E E eecrer dren 76 EE EEES I AE E E E A EN E EEE E EEE A 76 POGIUO Mal StatUS display seriinin aai EAA AAAA rE AAEE EEA 77 Mdo Maa E E a 83 MASK OGM src paves cera as E jarani sneer cea E enna r aps pinta palin ines aan asaa nie 84 Remote Desktop Manager Option 133 ccccssccsssseeccsseececesececsseeseaseeeeaseeseusseesuaseeseassessesserseaseessas 85 IIIT CHENG TON este crcl teat reese es E gr gcse srs A ae E A PE ES E E E vice E 85 Configuring connections Windows Terminal S LrViCe cccccccccccccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeseueeeeneetaneeaneeenes 86 Conngurng the connection VIN G xk vccacusitennnsaatinn ere Taiana aria taaa eia aiios eda aa d aaaeeeaa 88 Staing and SLOG the Connecte cirssascncsatndarsiscns tiene bn datetpenesitacioassinnts ia RA EREA R eR 89 SELINUXSEOCUNEY SOLCW ALG rccctittararcnrares since ternecaraces
192. IDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Moving the machine axes The HR 550 FS wireless handwheel features a rechargeable battery The battery is recharged when you put the handwheel in the holder see figure You can operate the HR 550 FS with the accumulator for up to 8 hours before it must be recharged again It is recommended however that you always put the handwheel in its holder when you are not using It As soon as the handwheel is in its holder it switches internally to cable operation In this way you can use the handwheel even if it were completely discharged The functions are the same as with wireless operation When the handwheel is completely discharged It takes about 3 hours until it is fully recharged in the handwheel holder Clean the contacts 1 in the handwheel holder and of the handwheel regularly to ensure their proper functioning The transmission range is amply dimensioned If you should nevertheless happen to come near the edge of the transmission area which is possible with very large machines the HR 550 FS warns you in time with a plainly noticeable vibration alarm If this happens you must reduce the distance to the handwheel holder into which the radio receiver is integrated Caution Danger to the workpiece and tool If interruption free operation is no longer possible within the transmission range the TNC automatically triggers an emergency stop This can also happen during machining
193. Insert a line tool index 2nd soft key row LINE DELETE Delete a line tool index 2nd soft key row LINE a aA Copy the tool data of the selected tool 2nd soft key row RECORD men Insert the copied tool data in the selected tool 2nd soft DATA REC key row TNC 620 User s Manual 192 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Importing tool data Using this function you can simply import tool data that you have measured externally on a presetting device for example The Tile to be imported must have the CSV format comma separated value The CSV file format describes the structure of a text file for exchanging simply structured data Accordingly the import file must have the following structure Row 1 In the first line you define the column names in which the data defined in the subsequent lines is to be placed The column names are separated from each other by commas Other lines All the other lines contain the data that you wish to import into the tool table The order of the data must match the order of the column names in Line 1 The data is separated by commas decimal numbers are to be defined with a decimal point Follow the steps outlined below for importing gt Copy the tool table to be imported to the hard disk of the TNC in the TNC systems tooltab directory gt Start expanded tool management gt Select the IMPORT TOOL soft key in the Tool Management The TNC shows a pop up windo
194. Js 2000 Omm min Ovr 100 m 5 9 STATUS COORD OVERVIEW POS STATUS TRANSF Q PARAM STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF 79 Introduction 2 4 Status displays Active miscellaneous functions M M tab Soft key Meaning Program run full sequence A Program run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H 0 BEGIN PGM STAT1 MM No direct List of the active M functions with fixed selection meaning ER CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 ossible Ae LBL 99 pa PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 STAY List of the active M functions that are adapted Teredo w 9 CYCL DEF 17 2 DEPTH 1 10 CYCL DEF 17 3 PITCH 1 by your machine manufacturer D E 0 X Nm P1 T1 0 Y Nm 06 31 r a 0000 95 000 0 0 000 10 000 Mode nome 0 t2 Bezw E ommmin __ Ovr 100 BTE n STATUS STATUS STATUS TOOL STATUS OF COORD OVERVIEW POS STATUS TRANSF Q PARAM Positions and coordinates POS tab f peers wee T ee Soft key Meaning Program run full sequence B ogramming fel Program run full sequence DST Bs Da Bee TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H Overview Pam LBL cyc m Pos Toot TT TRANS PARA eye Type of position display e g actual position ae 0 BEGIN PGM STAT1 MM POS SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshift d CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 CALL LBL 99 LBL 99 PLANE EULER EULPR
195. K element FLT Straight line with tangential connection FL Straight line without tangential connection ay FCT Circular arc with tangential connection Circular arc without tangential connection Pole for FK programming Pole for FK programming gt To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key n a gt To initiate the dialog for defining the pole press the FPOL soft key The TNC then displays the axis soft keys of the active working plane gt Enter the pole coordinates using these soft keys 7 v d The pole for FK programming remains active until you define a new one using FPOL TNC 620 User s Manual 240 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Free straight line programming Straight line without tangential connection gt To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key FL gt To initiate the dialog for free programming of Straight lines press the FL soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys gt Enter all known data In the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data is entered If the entered data describes several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see FK programming graphics page 239 Straight line with tangential connection If the straight line connects tangentiall
196. L Danger of collision If you work with Cycle8 MIRROR IMAGE in a tilted system please note the following Program the tilting motion first and then define Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Mirroring a rotary axis with Cycle 8 only mirrors the motions of the axis but not the angles defined in the PLANE functions As a result the positioning of the axes changes Programs created on an ITNC 530 or on earlier TNCs are not compatible Automatic positioning MOVE TURN STAY entry is mandatory After you have entered all parameters for the plane definition you must specify how the rotary axes will be positioned to the calculated axis values gt The PLANE function is to automatically position the rotary axes to the calculated position values The position of the tool relative to the workpiece is to remain the same The TNC carries out a compensation movement in the linear axes MOVE TURN Vv the rotary axes to the calculated position values but only the rotary axes are positioned The TNC does not carry out a compensation movement In E T The PLANE function is to automatically position a TURN the linear axes gt You will position the rotary axes later in a separate HTA iiti positioning block i If you have selected the MOVE option PLANE function is to position Pe the axes automatically the following two parameters must still be defined Dist tool tip center of rot and Feed rate F If you have se
197. L Comparison Differences in MDI operation Function Execution of connected sequences Saving modally effective functions 650 TNC 620 Function partially available Function partially available ITNC 530 COORD ROT is used m Only PLANE AXIAL is executed Incremental spatial angle is interoreted as an absolute value Incremental axis angle is interoreted as an absolute value m Function is available with all PLANE functions m Function available details are different m Function available details are different The tool length entries L and DL from the tool table are taken into account in the position display ITNC 530 Function available Function available TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Comparison Differences in programming station Function Demo version Demo version Copying NC programs shifting the horizontal soft key row TNC 620 User s Manual TNC 620 Programs with more than 100 NC blocks cannot be selected an error message is issued If nesting with PGM CALL results in more than 100 NC blocks there is no test graphic display an error message is not issued Copying to and trom the directory TNC is possible with Windows Explorer Clicking the soft key bar shifts the sott key row to the right or to the left HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 IT
198. LK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 30 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL GALL 5 2 2500 L Z 250 RO FMAX M3 CYCL DEF 19 0 WORK CYCL DEF 19 1 Bea Search Replace 7 CYCL DEF 208 BORE A Q200 2 set up Find text CURRENT WORD 0201 20 DEPTH ____ FINO Q206 150 FEED f REPLACE aon ow REPLACE ALL gt Repeat the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for 8 L X 20 Y 25 RO Flinn mew 9 L X 35 RO FMAX M99 10 L X 50 RO FMAX M99 11 L X 65 RO FMAX M99 12 CYCL DEF 19 0 WORKING PLANE 13 CYCL DEF 19 1 B 0 14 CYCL DEF 19 0 WORKING PLANE 15 CYCL DEF 19 1 gt End the search function v copy PASTE CURRENT WORD FIND REPLACE REPLACE ALL END FIELD FIELD TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 109 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening programs and entering Finding Replacing any text The find replace function is not possible if m aprogram is protected m the program is currently being run by the TNC When using the REPLACE ALL function ensure that you do not accidentally replace text that you do not want to change Once replaced such text cannot be restored gt Select the block containing the word you wish to find gt Select the Search function The TNC Superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row gt Press the CURRENT WORD
199. LUE POCKET CALCULATOR eR 148 Function Load the feed per revolution from the open dialog field into the cutting data calculator form Load the feed per tooth from the open dialog field into the cutting data calculator form Load the value from an open dialog field into the cutting data calculator form Switch to the pocket calculator Move the cutting data calculator in the direction of the arrow Position the cutting data calculator in the center Use inch values in the cutting data calculator Close the cutting data calculator TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming graphics 4 7 4 7 Programming graphics Generate do not generate graphics during programming While you are writing the part program you can have the TNC generate a 2 D pencil trace graphic of the programmed contour gt Switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left and graphics to the right Press the screen layout key and the PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key gt Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON While you are entering the program lines the TNC generates each programmed path contour In the graphics window in the right screen halt If you do not wish to have graphics generated during programming set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF If AUTO DRAW is set to ON during generation of the 2 D line graphic the control does not consider
200. Left program right programming graphics SERRE Test Run In the Test Run mode of operation the TNC checks programs and program sections for errors such as geometrical incompatibilities missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the working space This simulation is supported graphically in different display modes option 20 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Soft key Window Program PROGRAM Left program right status display PROGRAM Left program right graphics GRAPHICS option 20 Graphic option 20 Programming G Programming 4 M BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 100 Y 50 Z 5 BLK FORM 0 2 X 50 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 6 Z 2000 FN 0 Q55 200 STARTING ANGLE L X 0 Y 50 F500 k Z 5 APPR LCT X 0 Y 32 R2 RL F300 9 L IX 75 10 FCT DR CCX 75 CCY 12 OnNOnhkwon 24 L IX 18 RO BEGIN RESET START TNC nc_prog PGM 113 h BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 4 Z 2000 L 2 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L 2 2 RO FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIACULAR POCKET 15 CYCL DEF 5 1 SET UP2 16 CYCL DEF 5 2 DEPTH 10 CYCL DEF 5 3 PLNGNG10 F333 18 CYCL DEF 5 4 RADIUS15 CYCL DEF 5 5 F888 DR 20 L 2 8 RO FMAX M99 21 L 2 2 RO FMAX 2 CYCL DEF 3 0 SLOT MILLING 23 CYCL DEF 3 1 SET UP2
201. N Conversational Programming 2 2015 185 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Tool usage test 7 The tool usage test function must be enabled by your machine manufacturer Refer to your machine E manual In order to be able to conduct a tool usage test tool usage files have to be generated see page 570 The NC program has to be completely simulated in the Test Run operating mode or executed in the Program Run Full Sequence or Single Block operating mode Applying the tool usage test Before starting a program in the Program Run mode of operation TETEE E o E you can use the TOOL USAGE and TOOL USAGE TEST soft keys to a anh abai check whether the tools being used in the selected program are x available and have sufficient remaining service life The TNC then compares the actual service life values in the tool table with the nominal values from the tool usage file After you have pressed the TOOL USAGE TEST soft key the TNC displays the result of the tool usage test in a pop up window To close the pop up window press the ENT key a s 0 008 The TNC saves the tool usage times in a separate Tile with the extension pgmname H T DEP This file is not visible unless the machine parameter CfgPgmMgt dependentFiles is set to MANUAL The generated tool usage file contains the following information S HEBEL H all BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 35 Y 50 Z 10 BLK FORM 0 2 X 120 Y 20 Z 0 TOOL CALL 2 Z S2000 F500 L Z 100 RO FMAX L X 30
202. NC 530 Programs can be selected max 100 NC blocks are displayed further blocks are truncated in the display Nested programs can be simulated TNCremo or file manager of programming station must be used for copying Clicking any soft key bar activates the respective soft key row 651 Index Index Bbo 3 D basic rotation BIS 3D compensation 450 Delta VENUS siieseidtenesdoswiecnedeas 452 Face MIMO iaitecntcasisavwientvaionaam 453 Normalized vector 451 Peripheral Milling 0 454 Too orientation 452 3 D compensation Jool Shapes 452 3 D touch probes Calibration 502 Accessing tables 327 CCESSOTIES ceee 91 Actual position capture 105 Adding comments 139 141 Additional axes c00cce 95 95 Adjusting spindle speed 480 Align tool AXIS cccce cece ee eee 434 Angle TUNCTIONS ccccceeeeee es 301 Approach CONTOU 208 ASCI FES act 399 Automatic program start 562 Automatic tool measurement 173 Basic FOLAUOMh ccsutdatscesantounouadecds 510 Measuring in Manual Operation RTOS PETE EAA 510 Behavior after reception of ETX 578 BIOCEN 107 B CVG T E E T 107 Block Check Character 577 CAD VIEWEf ceren 255 CAD viewer and DXF converter screen layout 254 Calculating with parentheses 337 Calculation of circles 302 Calculator 143 CAM programming 450 Chane gee eee
203. NC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 459 Programming Pallet editor 13 1 Pallet management option 22 Select pallet table gt Call the file manager in the Programming and Editing or Program Run mode Press the PGM MGT key gt Display all type P files Press the SELECT TYPE and SHOW ALL soft keys gt Select a pallet table with the arrow keys or enter a new Tile name to create a new table gt Confirm your entry with the ENT key Exiting the pallet file gt To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key gt To select a different type of Tile press the SELECT TYPE soft key and the soft key for the desired file type e g SHOW H gt Select the desired file Run pallet file MP7683 defines whether the pallet table is to be executed blockwise or continuously Use the screen layout button to switch between table view and form view gt Select the file manager in the Program Run Full Sequence or Program Run Single Block operating modes Press the PGM MGT key gt Display all type P files Press the SELECT TYPE and SHOW P soft keys gt Select the pallet table with the arrow keys and contirm with ENT gt Execute the pallet table Press the NC start key TNC 620 User s Manual 460 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Pallet management option 22 13 1 Screen layout for executing pallet tables You can have the TNC display the program contents and palle
204. ND key The TNC saves the entered positioning block gt Retracting tool Press the orange axis key Z and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Press the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M ENTER M2 to end the program and confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block TNC 620 User s Manual 56 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming the first part Further information on this topic Complete example with NC blocks see Example Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates page 227 Creating a new program see Opening programs and entering page 99 Approaching departing contours see Approaching and departing a contour page 208 Programming contours see Overview of path functions page 218 Programmable feed rates see Possible teed rate input page 104 Tool radius compensation see Tool radius compensation page 197 Miscellaneous functions M see M functions for program run inspection spindle and coolant page 365 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 1 3 57 First steps with the TNC 620 1 3 Programming the first part Creating a cycle program The holes depth of 20 mm shown in t
205. O LBL 10 If both values or parameters are unequal jump to specified label FN 11 IF GREATER JUMP g g FN 11 IF Q1 GT 10 GOTO LBL 5 If the first value or parameter is greater than the second value or parameter jump to specified label FN 12 IF LESS JUMP e g FN 12 IF Q5 LT 0 GOTO LBL ANYNAME If the first value or parameter is smaller than the second value or parameter jump to specified label TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Checking and changing Q parameters 9 7 9 7 Checking and changing Q parameters Procedure You can check Q parameters in all operating modes and also edit Ede scoren zun fui sequence gt See them rogram run full sequence i gt If you are in a program run interrupt it if required for example i 18 L IX 0 1 RO FMAX by pressing the machine STOP button and the soft key If you 19 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING FACTOR are in a test run interrupt it aso F gt To call the Q parameter functions press the Q Feru INFO INFO soft key or the Q key ne gt The TNC lists all parameters and their current T E m fa values Use the arrow keys or the GOTO key to eog 20 000 select the desired parameter 5 gt If you would like to change the value press the soft key enter the new value and confirm with the ENT key gt To leave the value unchanged press the soft key or end the dialog with the
206. O eeaeee A E E EEEE A E EEE AAA E E 582 COS CUI OP TONS a focncteran gasstreecasaonaa ideea a Na ENA EAE a E const Aaa a TAa aA A EAEN AE Eat 582 CO E TA E A R A E EE EEE E A E E A E A E 582 VIZ IOV ANN aa E N a foe cee waa es cea en Reese ciate codes A a E 588 POS TOM Maganic cette eh fee a cpa oh te cece eeepc Sees cane cette dn tej adidas eed E seeana ac eles 588 17 13 Configure HR 550 FS wireless handwheel cccccccssceesseeeeseeeeeeeesaeeesaeeseaeeesaeeesaaeessaeessaneesanees 591 POC OW tas ctseecae ci occsnnas A A tia sie A E A OAE 591 Assigning the handwheel to a specific handwheel Noldel ccccccecceeccee cece eeeeeeeueseeeseenesenestaeseanees 591 Seting the transmission channe Mee ee ne nee oo oe ee ee eee 592 Selecting Me transmiter DOWE Tairisin eiii Ea ea ahaidi iiaeaa Ea RE 592 TU E E A N 593 VIA EO AGT IMAGINE contiguratio m aan a ere TE E E Serene N 594 PO O e a acts datapstoseae aealesscbauen eassecteaasepence 594 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 47 Contents 48 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 Machine specific user ParamMetels cccccccceccseecsseeeeeeeaseeaseeeeeeeuneeaeeeeeneeseeeeeeeseneeenesenessenseeeeseneneas 596 ADDU E acerca reac vk aE E AAO AE AAA A ch ned bcm E E 596 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces ccccccsseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 608 Ro Z202 G V 24 imntertace TOF HEIDEN TIAIN devices croc
207. OL CALL 4 Z 82000 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 POCKET MILLING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUS8 16 5 3 BEGIN 551 Test run and program run 16 5 Program run Running a part program Preparation 1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table 2 Set the datum 3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files status M 4 Select the part program status M You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the override knobs It is possible to reduce the feed rate when starting the NC program using the FMAX soft key The reduction applies to all rapid traverse and feed rate movements The value you enter is no longer in effect after the machine has been turned off and on again In order to re establish the respectively defined maximum feed rate after switch on you need to re enter the corresponding value The behavior of this function varies depending on the respective machine Refer to your machine manual Program Run Full Sequence gt Start the part program with the machine START button Program Run Single Block gt Start each block of the part program individually with the machine START button TNC 620 User s Manual 552 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Program run 16 5 Interrupt m
208. PLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z Z0SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 50 SQL ROLLBACKQ1 HANDLE Q5 TNC 620 User s Manual 336 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Entering formulas directly 9 10 9 10 Entering formulas directly Entering formulas You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations directly into the part program by soft key Press the FORMULA soft key to call the mathematical functions The TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft key rows Soft key Linking function Addition e g Q10 Q1 Q5 Subtraction e g Q25 Q7 Q108 Multiplication e g Q12 5 Q5 Division e g Q25 Q1 Q2 Opening parenthesis e g Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Closing parenthesis e g Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Square e g Q15 SQ5 Square root e g Q22 SQRT 25 SQRT Sine of an angle e g Q44 SIN 45 Cosine of an angle e g Q45 COS 45 EEE Ee eee Tangent of an angle e g Q46 TAN 45 TAN Arc sine Inverse function of the sine determine the angle trom the ratio of the opposite side to the hypotenuse e g Q10 ASIN 0 75 Arc cosine Inverse function of the cosine determine the angle from the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse e g Q11 ACOS Q40 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 337 Programming Q parameters 9 1
209. PM manufacturer depending on the axis configuration Permissive key Arrow keys for defining handwheel sensitivity 3 Handwheel activation key XIV AZ 4 Key for TNC traverse direction of the selected axis av vivi 5 Rapid traverse superimposition for direction key D Kd A 6 Spindle switch on machine dependent function key can be e Bi 8 exchanged by the machine manufacturer 14 Generate NC block key machine dependent function key can 5 be exchanged by the machine manufacturer Spindle switch off machine dependent function key can be 16 exchanged by the machine manufacturer CTRL key for special functions machine dependent function key can be exchanged by the machine manufacturer 18 NC start machine dependent function key can be exchanged by the machine manufacturer NC stop machine dependent function key can be exchanged by the machine manufacturer Handwheel Spindle speed potentiometer Feed rate potentiometer Cable connection not available with the HR 550 FS wireless handwheel TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Moving the machine axes 14 2 Handwheel display 1 Only with wireless handwheel HR 550 FS Shows whether F the handwheel is in the docking station or whether wireless Sooooc 2 HEIDEHHAIH operation is active SVB 1273 97859 2 Only with wireless handwheel HR 550 FS Shows the field D strength 6 bars maximum field strength 3 Only with wire
210. Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view 3 D line graphics Magnification of details Programming graphics a In the Programming mode the contour of the NC blocks is drawn on screen while they are being entered 2 D pencil trace graphics even while another program is running Program run graphics X Graphic simulation of real time machining in plan view projection in 3 Display modes planes 3 D view Machining time E Calculation of machining time in the Test Run operating mode E Display of the current machining time in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes Datum management E For saving any reference points Contour returning to E Mid program startup in any block in the program returning the tool to the calculated nominal position to continue machining Program interruption contour departure and return Datum tables E Multiple datum tables for storing workpiece related datums Touch probe cycles Calibrating the touch probe Compensation of workpiece misalignment manual or automatic Datum setting manual or automatic Automatic workpiece measurement x X X X X Tools can be measured automatically TNC 620 User s Manual 614 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Specifications Components Program memory Input resolution and display step Input range Interpolation Block processing time 3 D straight line without radius compensation Axis feedback control Ra
211. Program has dependent files with the DEP extension that are not displayed e g with use of the tool usage test EE File is protected against erasing and editing ca File is protected against erasing and editing because It Is being run Date Date that the Tile was last edited Time Time that the file was last edited To display the dependent Tiles set the machine parameter CfgPgmMgt dependentFiles to MANUAL TNC 620 User s Manual 116 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 Selecting drives directories and files PGM gt Calling the File Manager MGT Use the arrow keys or the soft keys to move the highlight to the desired position on the screen gt Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa gt Moves the highlight up and down within a window Moves the highlight one page up or down within a window a 8800 y Step 1 Select drive gt Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window SELECT gt To select a drive press the SELECT soft key or a me gt Press the ENT key Step 2 Select a directory gt Move the highlight to the desired directory in the left hand window the right hand window automatically shows all files stored in the highlighted directory Step 3 Select a Tile gt Press the SELECT TYPE soft key SHou gt Press the soft key for the desired file type or H gt Press the SHOW ALL soft key to display al
212. Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the programmed angular value Example Current angular value 538 Programmed angular value 180 Actual distance of traverse 358 Behavior with M94 At the start of block the TNC first reduces the current angular value to a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed value If several rotary axes are active M94 will reduce the display of all rotary axes As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94 The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis Example NC blocks To reduce display of all active rotary axes L M94 To reduce display of the C axis only L M94 C To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in the C axis to the programmed value L C 180 FMAX M94 Effect M94 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M94 becomes effective at the start of block TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 12 4 439 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 4 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM M128 option 9 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the machining program If the position of a til
213. R1 IDX1 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 325 Programming O parameters 9 8 Additional functions FN 29 PLC Transfer values to the PLC This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder e The FN 29 PLC function transfers up to eight numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC FN 37 EXPORT This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder You need the FN 37 EXPORT function if you want to create your own cycles and integrate them in the TNC TNC 620 User s Manual 326 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Accessing tables with SQL commands 9 9 9 9 Accessing tables with SOL commands Introduction Accessing of tables is programmed on the TNC with SOL commands in transactions A transaction consists of multiple SOL commands that guarantee an orderly execution of the table entries Tables are configured by the machine manufacturer Names and designations required as parameters for SOL commands are also specified The following terms are used Table A table consists of x columns and y rows It is saved as a file in the File Manager of the TNC and is addressed with the path and file name table name Synonyms can also be used for addressing as an alternative to the path and file name Columns The number and names of the columns are specified when configuring the table I
214. R550 Is not needed always put it in the handwheel holder This way you can ensure that the handwheel batteries are always ready for use thanks to the contact strip on the rear side of the wireless handwheel and the recharge control and that there is a direct contact connection for the emergency stop circuit If an error interruption of the radio connection poor reception quality defective handwheel component occurs the handwheel always reacts with an emergency stop Please read the notes on the configuration of the HR 550 FS wireless handwheel see Configure HR 550 FS wireless handwheel page 591 Caution Danger to the operator and machine Due to safety reasons you must switch off the wireless handwheel and the handwheel holder after an operating time of 120 hours at the latest so that the TNC can run a functional test when it is restarted If you use several machines with wireless handwheels in your workshop you have to mark the handwheels and holders that belong together so that their respective associations are clearly identifiable e g by color stickers or numbers The markings on the wireless handwheel and the handwheel holder must be clearly visible to the user Before every use make sure that the correct handwheel tor your machine is active Spasma _HEIDENHAIN ST Y 129 9788 Re FO E BD 20 5 60 STEP O AX STEP MSF OPM 00000 XB EZ WV LV i RS t Dgo TNC 620 User s Manual HE
215. RAM soft key for p ee the TNC to call the previously selected program with CALL SELECTED PGM TNC 620 User s Manual 282 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Nesting 8 5 8 5 Nesting Types of nesting Subprogram calls in subprograms Program section repeats within a program section repeat Subprogram calls in program section repeats m Program section repeats in subprograms Nesting depth The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or subprograms Maximum nesting depth for subprograms 19 Maximum nesting depth for main program calls 19 where a CYCL CALL acts like a main program call You can nest program section repeats as often as desired TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 283 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 5 Nesting Subprogram within a subprogram Example NC blocks 0 BEGIN PGM UPGMS MM 17 CALL LBL SP1 Call the subprogram marked with LBL SP1 35 L Z 100 RO FMAX M2 Last program block of the main program with M2 36 LBL SP1 Beginning of subprogram SP1 39 CALL LBL 2 Call the subprogram marked with LBL 2 45 LBL O End of subprogram 1 46 LBL 2 Beginning of subprogram 2 62 LBL O End of subprogram 2 63 END PGM UPGMS MM Program execution 1 Main program UPGMS is executed up to block 17 2 Subprogram SP1 is called and executed up to b
216. Select any probe function gt Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input boxes depends on the touch probe cycle being run gt Enter the preset number in the Number in table input box gt Press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key The TNC saves the datum in the preset table under the entered number TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 501 Manual operation and setup 14 8 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 14 8 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 Introduction In order to precisely specify the actual trigger point of a 3 D touch probe you must calibrate the touch probe otherwise the TNC cannot provide precise measuring results Always calibrate a touch probe in the following cases Commissioning Stylus breakage Stylus exchange Change in the probe feed rate Irregularities caused for example when the machine heats up m Change of active tool axis When you press the OK soft key after calibration the calibration values are applied to the active touch probe The updated tool data become effective Immediately and a new tool call is not necessary During calibration the TNC finds the effective length of the stylus and the effective radius of the ball tip To calibrate the 3 D touch probe clamp a ring gauge or a stud of known height and known radius to the machine table The TNC provides calibration cycles for calibrating the
217. Switching the operating mode while helo menu is active selecting the background operating mode while help menu is active Identical error messages Acknowledgment of error messages Access to protocol functions Saving service Tiles TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC 620 Call via ERR key Help menu is closed when the operating mode Is switched Helo menu is closed when F12 is used for switching Are collected tn a list Every error message even if it is displayed more than once must be acknowledged the Delete all function is available Log and powerful filter functions errors keystrokes are available Available No service file is created when the system crashes ITNC 530 Call via HELP key Operating mode switchover is not allowed key Is non functional Helo menu remains open when F12 is used for switching Are displayed only once Error message to be acknowledged only once Complete log without filter functions available Available A service file is automatically created when the system crashes 641 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Function Find function List of words recently searched for E Show elements of active block m Show list of all available NC blocks Starting the find function with the up down arrow keys when highlight is on a block Programming graphics m Tru
218. TRY CIRCLE Function for calculating circles 302 CALCU LATION If then conditions jumps 303 JUMP DIVERSE Other functions 307 FUNCTION Entering formulas in the part 337 FORMULA program aoe Function for machining see User s FORMULA complex contours Manual for Cycles The TNC shows the soft keys Q QL and QR when you are defining or assigning a Q parameter First press one of these soft keys to select the desired type of parameter and then enter the parameter number Vv If you have a USB keyboard connected you can oress the O key to open the dialog for entering a formula TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 9 1 297 Programming O parameters 9 2 Part families Q parameters in place of numerical values 9 2 Part families Q parameters in place of numerical values Application The Q parameter function FN 0 ASSIGN assigns numerical values to O parameters This enables you to use variables in the program instead of fixed numerical values Example NC blocks You need write only one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimensions as O parameters To program a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to the individual Q parameters Example Cylinder with Q parameters Cylinder radius R Q1 Cylinder height H Q2 Cylinder Z1 Q1 30 Q2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 298 TNC 620 User s Manual
219. TUM AX oeri Era E EEEE EEE EAE Ea e EE 396 TARN OATU ABD E reenn E E E S N 397 TRAN DATUM RES Yager de state naea teeta tee cir ntact a cso es na O Paton trait acenecvn tatiana neta ce 398 CREATING CONE Mes verre cece cession a eee e rere saree ce A E E ea etee cine Seana E c eae rer earner 399 APOI LO aren E trea alsa ota ee a ran sgt une easeaise aura nea areas a pa aas ena Oka A AEEA 399 FP qiigie mes g e EIO let gt TO oe ene eee ne ne E r A ne E 399 Fe UIE E aaa den ctvselsna tien snes EEEE ARA A AAE E A 400 Deleting and re inserting characters words and IINGS cccccccc cece cece eee ceeeee eee eee e esse eeneeea sean eeneeeneeaneeees 400 0 19 810 ESE 6 016 Co ene eee rer ene ene er E A ere ae eer EA tee eee pee mtr re ete 401 Finding text SEGUON S oneone aRar AEEA E E EARE ETEEN E AEA EN E AE TARA EEEREN 402 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 11 7 Freely definable tables 7 amenan a a es ar ere i ane ale claus ale nen Senay PO Rete 403 FURCATA E E E E E E 403 COAG 2 Meel dennable Tale criei e EEE ea aN EEEE 403 Editing the table TOTA eects ce seers tsetse certs ee ecureuil EEEE EEEE AEA ESERE 404 Switching between table and form VIEW vacaccsvsdssantstubeennvumnceamcienadavestnh aia badaaRoanctilenthadsuuuneds due damavadnddnds 405 FN 26 TABOPEN Open a freely definable table cc ccccccccccceccceeeeeeneeeeee scene eeeaeseeneceeneeesneeeens 406 FN 27 TABWRITE Write to a fr
220. The ristretto additional tool opens the File pull down menu gt Select the Quit menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 User s Manual 132 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 Data transfer to from an external data medium Before you can transfer data to an external data medium you must set up the data interface see Setting up data interfaces page 575 Depending on the data transfer software you use problems can occur occasionally when you transmit data over a serial interface They can be overcome by repeating the transmission gt Call the File Manager SHOW TREE gt Select the screen layout for data transfer press the WINDOW soft key Use the arrow keys to highlight the file s that you want to transfer gt Moves the highlight up and down within a window gt Moves the highlight from the right to the left window and vice versa eS If you wish to copy trom the TNC to the external data medium move the highlight in the left window to the Tile to be transferred If you wish to copy trom the external data medium to the TNC move the highlight in the right window to the file to be transferred Sou gt Select another drive or directory Press the SHOW TREE TREE soft key gt Use the arrow keys to select the desired directory gt Selec
221. The additional tools enable you to display or edit various externally created Tile types on the TNC File types Description PDF files pdf page 127 Excel spreadsheets xls csv page 128 Internet files htm html page 129 ZIP archives zip page 130 Text files ASCII Tiles e g txt ini page 131 Video files page 131 Graphics files omp jog gif png page 132 If you transfer files from a PC to the control by means of TNCremo you must have entered the file name extension pdf xls zip bmp gif jog and png in the list of the file types for binary transmission menu item Extras gt Configuration gt Mode in TNCremo TNC 620 User s Manual 126 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 Displaying PDF files To open PDF Tiles directly on the TNC proceed as follows gt Calling the File Manager Select the directory in which the PDF file is saved rhe HR 520 Handvnee Increases Operator Comfort gt Move the highlight to the PDF Tile M Press ENT The TNC opens the PDF file in its own application using the PDF viewer additional tool return to the TNC user interface while leaving the PDF file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface If you position the mouse pointer over a button a brief tooltip explaining the function of this button will With the key combination ALT TAB you c
222. The tolerance specifies how far apart neighboring contour elements may be from each other You can use the tolerance to compensate for inaccuracies that occurred when the drawing was made The default setting is 0 0001 mm WV Point assumption mode fi Specify whether the TNC should display the tool path as a dashed straight line during selection of machining positions 1 Path optimization mode il The TNC optimizes the tool traverse movement to give the shortest traverse movements between the machining positions Optimization is reset with repeated actuations Please note that you must set the correct unit of measure since the DXF file does not contain any such information If you want to generate programs for older TNC controls you must limit the resolution to three decimal places In addition you must remove the comments that the DXF converter inserts into the contour program The TNC displays the active basic settings in the footer of the screen TNC 620 User s Manual 260 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 DXF converter option 42 73 Setting layers As a rule DXF files contain multiple layers The designer uses the layers to create groups of various types of elements such as the actual workpiece contour dimensions auxiliary and design lines shadings and texts So that as little unnecessary information as possible appears on the screen during selection of the contours you can hide all ex
223. Tool data Enter tool data into the table You can define and store up to 32767 tools and their tool data in a tool table Also see the editing functions later in this Chapter In order to be able to assign various compensation data to a tool indexing tool number insert a line and extend the tool number by a dot and a number from 1 to 9 e g T 5 2 You must use tool tables if you wish to use Indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than one length compensation value m your machine tool has an automatic tool changer you want to fine rough the contour with Cycle 22 see User s Manual for Cycle Programming ROUGH OUT you want to work with Cycles 251 to 254 see User s Manual for Cycle Programming Cycles 251 to 254 If you create or manage further tool tables the Tile name has to start with a letter You can select either list view or form view for tables via the Screen layout key VVhen you open the tool table you can also change its layout TNC 620 User s Manual 170 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tool table Standard tool data Abbr T NAME R2 DL DR DR2 ANGLE TL RT TIME1 TIME2 CUR_TIME Inputs Number by which the tool is called in the program e g 5 indexed 5 2 Name by which the tool is called in the program no more than 32 characters all capitals no spaces Compensation value for tool length L Compensation value for the tool radi
224. Touch probe table for managing different 3 D touch X probes Creating tool usage file checking the availability X X Cutting data calculation Automatic calculation of Simple cutting data Using technology tables spindle speed and feed rate calculator Define any tables m Freely definable m Freely definable tables TAB files tables TAB files m Reading and writing m Reading and writing with FN functions with FN functions m Definable via config data Jable names must start with a letter m Reading and writing with SOL functions TNC 620 User s Manual 626 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Function Constant contouring speed relative to the path of the tool center or relative to the tool s cutting edge Parallel operation Creating programs while another program Is being run Programming of counter axes Tilting the working plane Cycle 19 PLANE function Machining with rotary tables Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes m Cylinder Surface Cycle 27 m Cylinder Surface Slot Cycle 28 m Cylinder Surface Ridge Cycle 29 m Cylinder Surface External Contour Cycle 39 m Feed rate in mm min or rev min Traverse in tool axis direction Manual operation 3 D ROT menu m During program interruption m With handwheel superimpositioning Approaching and departing the contour Via a straight line or arc Entry of feed rate
225. X M99 Infeed runs minor axis W 10 FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF Restore standard axis configuration 11 L Z 0 W 0 RO FMAX M91 Reset the principle axis and minor axis 12 L M30 13 END PGM PAR MM TNC 620 User s Manual 394 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 File functions 11 4 11 4 File functions Application The FILE FUNCTION features are used to copy move and delete files from within the part program You must not use FILE functions on programs or files to which you have previously made reference with functions such as CALL PGM or CYCL DEF 12 PGM CALL Defining file functions gt Press the special functions key A gt Select the program functions FUNCTIONS ee gt Select the file functions The TNC displays the FILE available functions wn ae do e oft k Function Meaning D lt E FILE Copy file Enter the name and path copy COPY of the file to be copied as well as the target path Se FILE Move file Enter the name and path MOVE MOVE of the Tile to be moved as well as the target path ae FILE Delete Tile Enter the path and name DELETE DELETE of the Tile to be deleted TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 395 Programming Special functions 11 5 Definition of a datum shift 11 5 Definition of a datum shift Overview As an alternative to the coordinate transformation Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT you can use the TRANS DATUM plain language function Just as
226. a CONntOUT 8 264 selecting hole positions single selection 0 268 selecting machining positions 267 Setting lAVEMS eee eee 261 Setting the datum 0 262 FOCI GIN een 99 FO OO ES E 106 Opening a new program 102 Organizationin 99 SCG MUN Wl O oe isrnoai 142 Program call Any desired program as SUPPO AT acisini riiin 279 Program defaults 385 Program Management See File Management 111 Programming grapnics 239 Programming tool movements 103 Program UNG sipsgrepatircie apiece 391 CS cit eainenimartannionsein ens 552 METOD uneis bbs Mid program startup 399 Optional block skip 563 OVEIVIQW ccc cece cecceecceeeeeeeeeenes 551 Resuming after interruption 554 Retraction 556 Program section repeat 277 Projection in three planes 542 Protection ZONG 569 Q parameter EXD Ol a E 326 Transter values to the E OE SETETE 325 320 Q parameter programming 294 341 Additional functions 8 307 Angle functions cccceee 301 Calculation of circles 302 654 If then CeCISIONS eee 303 Mathematical functions 299 Programming notes 296 342 343 344 346 348 Q parameters 294 341 CHECKING vacissntiasiaivagteowtnormaenunst 305 Local parameters QL 294 Nonvolatile parameters OR 294 FPSAS SIGS O bias ainsivaanssonwinaimeanntsn
227. a point file enter the target directory and any file name in the pop up window displayed by the TNC Default setting Name of the DXF Tile Alternately you can also select the file type E OC gt Confirm the entry The TNC saves the contour program to the selected directory gt If you want to select more machining positions press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 269 7 Programming Data transfer from CAD files fr A gt 270 73 DXF converter option 42 Rapid selection of hole positions via icon select the mode for choosing a machining position The graphics window becomes active for position selection select the icon The TNC opens a window in which you can filter the holes by size If required configure the filter settings see Filter settings page 271 and click the OK button to confirm The TNC loads the selected positions into the list view window displays a point symbol If necessary you can also deselect elements that you already selected by clicking the element in the graphics window again but this time while pressing the CTRL key Alternatively select the element in the list view window and press DEL You can deselect all selected elements by clicking the icon save the selected machining positions to the clipboard of the TNC so that you can then insert them as a positioning bloc
228. achine START button to continue the block scan After a block scan return the tool to the calculated position with RESTORE POSITION Tool length compensation does not take effect until after the tool call and a following positioning block This also applies if you have only changed the tool length TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 559 Test run and program run 16 5 Program run The TNC skips all touch probe cycles in a mid program startup Result parameters that are written to from these cycles might therefore remain empty You may not use mid program startup if the following occurs after a tool change in the machining program The program is started in an FK sequence The stretch filter is activated m Pallet management is used m The program is started in a threading cycle Cycles 17 206 207 and 209 or the subsequent program block Touch probe cycles 0 1 and 3 are used before program start gt Go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan Enter GOTO 0 BLOCK gt Select mid program startup Press the MID PROGRAM STARTUP soft key gt Start up at N Enter the block number N at which the block scan should end gt Program Enter the name of the program containing block N gt Repetitions If block N is located in a program section repeat or in a Subprogram that is to be run repeatedly enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the b
229. achining There are several ways to interrupt a program run Programmed interruptions Pressing the machine STOP button Switching to Program Run Single Block mode If the TNC registers an error during program run it automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions You can define interruptions directly in the part program The TNC interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following entries STOP with and without miscellaneous function Miscellaneous function MO M2 or M30 Miscellaneous function M6 determined by the machine tool builder Interruption through the machine STOP button gt Press the machine STOP button The block that the TNC is currently executing is not completed The NC stop signal in the status display blinks see table gt If you do not wish to continue the machining process you can reset the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key The NC stop signal in the status display goes out In this case the program must be restarted from the program beginning Icon Meaning Program run is stopped lol Interruption of machining by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode of operation You can interrupt a program that is being run in the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation by switching to the Program Run Single Block mode The TNC interrupts the machining process at the end of the current block TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conver
230. addition you can have a part program call a separate program for execution Programming with subprograms and program section repeats see Programming Subprograms and program section repeats page 273 Programming with Q parameters Instead of programming numerical values in a part program you enter markers called Q parameters You assign the values to the Q parameters separately with the Q parameter functions You can use the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that control program execution or describe a contour In addition parametric programming enables you to measure with the 3 D touch probe during program run Programming with Q parameters see Programming Q parameters page 293 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 6 1 203 Programming Programming contours 6 2 Fundamentals of path functions 6 2 Fundamentals of path functions Programming tool movements for workpiece machining You create a part program by programming the path functions for the individual contour elements in sequence You usually do this by entering the coordinates of the end points of the contour elements given in the production drawing The TNC calculates the actual path of the tool from these coordinates and trom the tool data and radius compensation The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously Movement parallel to the machine axes The program block c
231. am 0 499 Parameters for users OR parameters Parameters that are nonvolatile on all programs in the TNC memory i e they remain in effect even after a power interruption 0 499 Parameters for users 294 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Principle and overview of functions 9 1 QS parameters the S stands for string are also available on the TNC and enable you to process texts Parameter Parameter range Meaning type QS Parameters effect all programs in the TNC memory parameters 0 99 Parameters for users 100 199 Parameters for system information on the TNC that can be read by the NC programs of the user or by cycles 200 1199 Parameters for HEIDENHAIN cycles 1200 1399 Parameters providing feedback to the user s NC program with cycles of the machine tool builder or a third party provider 1400 1599 Parameters for cycles of machine tool builder or third party provider 1600 1999 Parameters for users You gain maximum safety for your applications by using only parameter ranges recommended for the user in your NC programs Please note that the specified use of the parameter ranges is recommended by HEIDENHAIN but cannot be ensured Machine tool builder or third party functions may still cause overlaps with the user s NC program In this regard please observe the machine manual or third party documentation TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 295
232. am if required Circle CTP with tangential connection The tool moves on a circular path starting tangentially from a preceding contour element gt Polar coordinate radius PR Distance between the arc end point and the pole CC Pe gt Polar coordinate angle PA Angular position of the arc end point The pole is not the center of the contour arc Example NC blocks 12 CC X 40 Y 35 13 L X 0 Y 35 RL F250 M3 14 LP PR 25 PA 120 15 CTP PR 30 PA 30 16 L Y 0 TNC 620 User s Manual 232 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Polar coordinates 6 5 Helix A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a linear movement perpendicular to this plane You program the circular path in a main plane A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates Application large diameter internal and external threads Lubrication grooves Calculating the helix To program a helix you must enter the total angle through which the tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions and the total height of the helix Thread revolutions n Thread revolutions overrun at start and end of thread Total height h Thread pitch P times thread revolutions n Incremental total angle Thread revolutions x 360 angle for IPA beginning of thread angle for thread overrun Starting coordinate Z Pitch P times thread revolutions thread overrun at start of thread Shape of the h
233. am words for entries begin with the letter R for Relative The figure at right shows the entries that should be programmed as relative data The coordinates and angles for relative data are always programmed in incremental dimensions You must also enter the block number of the contour element on which the data are based The block number of the contour element on which the relative data are based can only be located up to 64 positioning blocks before the block in which you program the reference If you delete a block on which relative data are based the TNC will display an error message Change the program first before you delete the block Data relative to block N End point coordinates Soft keys Known data Cartesian coordinates relative to block N Polar coordinates relative to block N Example NC blocks 12 FPOL X 10 Y 10 13 FL PR 20 PA 20 14 FL AN 45 15 FCT IX 20 DR R20 CCA 90 RX 13 16 FL IPR 35 PA 0 RPR 13 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 247 Programming Programming contours 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Data relative to block N Direction and distance of the contour element Soft key Known data Angle between a straight line and another element or between the entry tangent of the arc and another element Straight line parallel to another contour element Distance from a Straight line to a parallel contour element Exampl
234. amming 2 2015 Programming the first part 1 3 Programming the first part Selecting the correct operating mode You can write programs only in Programming mode gt Press the Programming operating mode key The TNC switches to Programming mode Further information on this topic Operating modes see Programming page 74 The most important TNC keys Key Functions for conversational guidance Confirm entry and activate the next dialog prompt Ignore the dialog question END End the dialog immediately DEL Abort dialog discard entries Soft keys on the screen with which you select functions appropriate to the active operating state Further information on this topic m Writing and editing programs see Editing a program page 106 Overview of keys see Controls of the TNC page 2 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 1 3 51 First steps with the TNC 620 1 3 Programming the first part Opening a new program file management gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC opens the file manager The file management of the TNC is arranged much like the file management on a PC with the Windows Explorer The file management enables you to manage data on the Internal memory of the TNC gt Use the arrow keys to select the folder in which you want to open the new file gt Enter any desired file name with the extension H gt Confirm with the ENT key The control asks
235. ams and entering Define the blank BLK FORM Immediately after initiating a new program you define an unmachined workpiece blank If you wish to define the blank at a later stage press the SPEC FCT key the soft key and then the BLK FORM soft key The TNC needs this definition for graphic simulation You only need to define the workpiece blank if you wish to run a graphic test for the program The TNC can depict various types of blank forms Soft key Function cI Define a rectangular blank EI Define a cylindrical blank Define a rotationally symmetric blank Rectangular blank The sides of the cuboid lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes This blank is defined by two of its corner points MIN point the smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values MAX point the largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incremental values Example Display the BLK FORM in the NC program 0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM Program begin name unit of measure 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 40 Spindle axis MIN point coordinates 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 MAX point coordinates 3 END PGM NEW MM Program end name unit of measure Cylindrical blank The cylindrical blank form is defined by the dimensions of the cylinder Rotation axis X Y or Z m R Radius of the cylinder with positive sign Length of the cylinder with positive sign m DIST Shifting along the rotational a
236. an always be displayed More information on how to use the PDF viewer is provided under Help To exit the PDF viewer proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Close The TNC returns to the Tile manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the PDF viewer gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The PDF viewer opens the File pull down menu gt Select the Close menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 127 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Displaying and editing Excel files Proceed as follows to open and edit Excel files with the extension xls xlsx or csv directly on the TNC gt Calling the File Manager gt Select the directory in which the Excel Tile is saved Move the highlight to the Excel Tile Press ENT The TNC opens the Excel file in its own application using the Gnumeric additional tool vv return to the TNC user interface while leaving the Excel file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface If you position the mouse pointer over a button a brief tooltip explaining the function of this button will With the key combination ALT TAB you can always be displayed More information on h
237. an set the time zone data and time manually or with the aid of an NTP server synchronization To set the system time manually gt Inthe MOD menu select the System settings group gt Press the SET DATE TIME soft key gt Select your time zone in the Time zone area gt Press the LOCAL NTP soft key in order to select the Set time manually entry Vv If required change the datum and the time Press the OK soft key To set the system time with the aid of an NTP server In the MOD menu select the System settings group Press the SET DATE TIME soft key select your time zone in the Time zone area Press the LOCAL NTP soft key in order to synchronize the time entry through the NTP server Vv v v v Yy Enter the host name or the URL of an NTP server Press the ADD soft key gt Press the OK soft key v vy TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 17 4 571 MOD functions 17 5 Select the position display 17 5 Select the position display Application In the Manual Operation mode and the Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block modes of operation you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed The figure at right shows the different tool positions m Initial position Target position of the tool m Workpiece datum m Machine datum The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates Function Display Nominal position the value presentl
238. an use the soft keys to change views Press the STOP soft key The TNC interrupts the test run gt Press the START soft key The TNC resumes the test run after a break STOP START M Further information on this topic m Running a test run see Test run page 548 Graphic functions see Graphics option 20 page 536 Adjust the simulation speed see Speed of the setting test runs page 537 TNC 620 User s Manual 62 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 1 5 Setting up tools Selecting the correct operating mode Tools are set up in the Manual Operation mode gt Press the operating mode key The TNC switches to the Manual mode of operation Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of operation page 73 Preparing and measuring tools gt Clamp the required tools in their tool holders gt When measuring with an external tool presetter Measure the tools note down the length and radius or transfer them directly to the machine through a transfer program gt When measuring on the machine store the tools in the tool changer see page 65 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Setting up tools Manual operation Brest run A i L Manual operation 1 5 Position display MODE NOML 200 000 240 000 0 X Nm P4 T4 0 Y Nm 09 10 TOUCH PRESET PROBE TABLE aA 63
239. and pertorm the desired calculation gt Press the actual position capture key or the CONFIRM VALUE soft key for the TNC to transfer the value into the active input box and closes the calculator You can also transter values from a program into the calculator When you press the GET CURRENT VALUE soft key or the GOTO key the TNC transfers the value from the active input field to the calculator The calculator remains active even after a change in operating modes Press the END soft key to close the calculator TNC 620 User s Manual 144 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Calculator 4 5 Functions in the pocket calculator Soft key Function Load the nominal or reference value of the respective axis position into the calculator AX VALUES GET Load the numerical value from the active input CURRENT VALUE field into the calculator CONFIRM Load the numerical value from the calculator siii field into the active input field COPY Copy the numerical value from the calculator FIELD PASTE Insert the copied numerical value into the FIELD calculator CUTTING Open the cutting data calculator DATA CALCULATOR Position the calculator in the center You can also shift the calculator with the arrow keys on your keyboard If you have connected a mouse you can also position the calculator with this TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 145 Programming Programm
240. anded functions Group 2 616 One HR 410 portable handwheel or One HR 550 FS portable wireless handwheel with display or One HR 520 portable handwheel with display or One HR 420 portable handwheel with display or One HR 130 panel mounted handwheel or Up to three HR 150 panel mounted handwheels via HRA 110 handwheel adapter TS 260 Triggering 3 D touch probe with cable connection TS 440 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TS 444 Battery ftree 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TS 640 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TS 740 High precision 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TT 160 3 D touch trigger probe for tool measurement TT 449 3 D touch trigger probe for tool measurement with infrared transmission Machining with rotary tables Cylindrical contours as If in two axes Feed rate in distance per minute Coordinate transformations Tilting the working plane Interpolation Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane spatial arc 3 D machining Motion control with minimum jerk 3 D tool compensation through surface normal vectors m Using the electronic handwheel to change the angle of the swivel head during program run without affecting the position of the tool point TCPM Tool Center Point Management m Keeping the tool normal to the contour ool radius compensation perpendicular to traversing direction and tool direction Interpo
241. anel Setting the screen layout You select the screen layout yourself In the Programming mode of operation for example you can have the TNC show program blocks in the left window while the right window displays programming graphics You could also display the program structure in the right window instead or display only program blocks in one large window The available screen windows depend on the selected operating mode To change the screen layout G gt Press the screen layout key The soft key row shows the available layout options see Modes of operation PROGRAM gt Select the desired screen layout GRAPHICS Control panel The TNC 620 is delivered with an integrated keyboard As an alternative the TNC 620 is also available with a separate display ao i unit and an operating panel with alphabetic keyboard 1 Alpha numeric keyboard for entering texts and file names as well as for DIN ISO programming w 2 E File management m Calculator m MOD function HELP function 3 3 Programming modes ta 4 Machine operating modes E o oe itiati ing di 208 8808828 gunn 5 Initiating programming dialogs E 200e 5Seeugee Poono 6 Navigation keys and GOTO jump command peo 2P00E Dani 7 7 Numerical inout and axis selection 7 ny SHG 2080 2 eme E 8 Touchpad z oS oe core 00m me 9 Mouse buttons 10 Machine operating panel refer to your machine manual er ane OS OOM
242. anous TUNG HONS Miesreiiceriisee rei eiae N EEEE EENE 202 Subprograms and program section repeatS s ssissiiesieri ertr rr ees rere rrt rre rr estan eeaeeeseeeaestaneeaneennes 203 Programming Wih O parame CSS seasea i a EA T EE E aE 203 6 2 Fundamentals of path funCtiGnS c ccc nccccc eeccctccceecees cores eecercceeiccecctaccsevece sees seeuseoccecuersesnne caer cares 204 Programming tool Movements for workpiece MACHNINING ccccceccseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeseeeeenaeeens 204 6 3 Approaching and departing a Contout ices cons coo ceva cineses ees conn sseeraue cov acsuetcvecsaramesenesnensravnecuestseeries 208 Sorin pont ana Ena DON assener Ta utr peda a 208 Overview Types of paths for contour approach and departure s s sssissiesrerrrerrsrrerrerrrerrrrrerrerrrrre 210 Important positions for approach and CED l BUNS cass cotuveia dies ind aemcsnantainnnsyadelmesdvedaidtine binder detehiledieleusddsinmaanes 211 Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LU cecccc ccc eee cece eeeeeen seen ones 213 Approaching on a Straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN 213 Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection APPR CT e sssssssesiesrrerrerresrerrrerrerrerrenn 214 Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR al eee ee ee ee eee eee ee 215 Departing In a straight line with tangential connection D
243. apturing the current By soft key position X By hard key Writing measured values in preset table Writing measured values in datum tables Comparison Touch probe cycles for automatic workpiece inspection Cycle X option 17 option 17 TNC 620 X ITNC 530 gt lt O reference plane 1 polar datum measuring measuring in 3 D oO BR WIN 30 calibrating TT X calibrating TS X X option 17 option 17 option 17 option 17 option 17 option 17 calibrating TS length 31 measuring tool length i 32 measuring tool radius Option 17 option 17 33 measuring tool length and radius i 400 basic rotation option 17 401 basic rotation from two holes l option 17 402 basic rotation from two studs option 17 403 compensating a basic rotation via a rotary axis 404 setting a basic rotation option 17 option 17 405 compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis 408 slot center datum X X lt HK XX XIXIXIXIXI XI X option 17 option 17 X X WK KX OK X X X X X X X X X XI X X 409 ridge center datum TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 option 17 637 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 620 ITNC 530 410 datum from inside of rectangle X option 17 X 411 datum from outside of rectangle X
244. are included in this chapter Machine switch on Programming the first part Graphically testing the first part Setting up tools Workpiece setup Running the first program 1 2 Machine switch on Acknowledging the power interruption and moving to the reference points Switch on and crossing over the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool Refer to your E machine manual gt Switch on the power supply for control and machine The TNC Starts the operating system This process may take several minutes Then the TNC will display the Power interrupted message In the screen header gt Press the CE key The TNC compiles the PLC program gt Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks operation of the emergency stop circuit and goes into the reference run mode gt Cross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button If you have absolute linear and angle encoders on your machine there is no need for a reference run fl The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode Further information on this topic Traversing the reference marks see Switch on page 464 Operating modes see Programming page 74 50 vanua operation Brest run fe Manual operation 0 X Nm P4 T4 0 Y Nm 09 10 TOUCH PRESET PROBE TABLE 4 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Progr
245. art handwheel End gt Select the configuration menu for the wireless handwheel Press the SET UP WIRELESS HANDWHEEL soft key gt Click the Connect HR button The TNC saves the serial number of the wireless handwheel located in the handwheel holder and shows it in the configuration window to the left of the Connect HR button gt To save the configuration and exit the configuration menu press the END button TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 591 17 MOD functions 17 13 Configure HR 550 FS wireless handwheel Setting the transmission channel If the wireless handwheel is started automatically the TNC tries to OEEO select the transmission channel supplying the best transmission perom en signal If you want to set the transmission channel manually a _ Paap Oe proceed das follows Channel in use 16 CRC error 0 0 00 gt Press the MOD key to select the MOD function ie Full power Set power Max successive lost 0 gt Select the Machine settings menu sous o gt Select the configuration menu for the wireless handwheel Press the SET UP WIRELESS HANDWHEEL soft key cere gt Click the Frequency spectrum tab a 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 gt Click the Stop HR button The TNC stops the connection to the wireless handwheel and determines the current frequency 50 dBm spectrum for all of the 16 available channels I hte E AA A gt Memorize the
246. asic rotation whenever the TNC is moving the machine axes according to a basic m rotation O EREDJ oo rs Y 199 417 O 0 000 fel 520 000 F Omm min Canceling a basic rotation gt Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Enter a rotation angle of zero and confirm with the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe 14 9 option 17 Measuring 3 D basic rotation The misalignment of any tilted plane can be measured by probing 3 positions The Probe plane function enables you to measure this misalignment and save it as a 3 D basic rotation in the preset table Observe the following when selecting the touch points The sequence and position of the touch points determines how the TNC calculates the direction of the plane With the first two points you specify the direction of the reference axis Define the second point in the positive direction of the desired reference axis The position of the third point determines the direction of the minor axis and tool axis Define the third point in the positive Y axis of the desired workplace coordinate system m 1st point On the reference axis m 2nd point On the reference axis in a positive direction trom the first point 3rd point On the minor axis in a positive di
247. asinuiensaanoittasdmatutsendtanainesnsutaondnades 373 Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Miscellaneous Functions SOS ODON aes gente cpa tev eases ccc ie cena cece A oe pec even gioseer oe deateer E 374 Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 Miscellaneous Functions software OON ec seater ase sae ees ecu gents cece E E tae neces eet ea E 3 6 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 ccccccccccssecceeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesneeeeenees 378 Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 iat csc rsscynesscirtusten Steere cite latinas netdiasnin neat ateien basi EEEE EErEE eRe deans 3 9 Deleting Dasic TOCA ION MIAS sisicssinstatinarcitionetmncratctoons unelsncdvameiansesntianataneslbarbanetlemarentyerntaatenrdintiosicisnanratioan ASEEN EEREN ns 380 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 0 cccccccecceeceeaeeeeeeseeeeaeeean sean es 381 POUTINE E OE T S aeaii EEEE A EE E E EAEE NE A 382 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 35 Contents 36 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 Overview of special FUNCTIONS cccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesnasseeeeeeaeeeeeaeseeeesaaseeesenaaeeeesaaseeessaaaeeeees 384 Main menu tor SPEC FOT special TINGE OS sn cciesinmanarocentucisabensaacniseasbssetRiaieatissaindisancset EELER TEETE AAEE 384 Prodam dela uks MEN eai Ean EE E EEE EEE REEE 385 Func
248. ata medium The TNC in a network USB devices on the TNC 24 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 AIk Screen keyboard m eaa a re ertccstactank tcatevar tava E rates tuacrracenatsetuna sageatesmacaerfesteataraa aren eeieieetarees tts 138 Enter the text with the screen KeyDOaI 0 ccc ccccc cece eee c eee ee ce eece een eeeeeeee eee eeea seen eedeeeaeeseeeseeeseesneeaeenes 138 AZ eA AGINGEGCOMMMENTS neater ertes er errses etre ace cece anes rae toon neath ater oor meine tees niantee toranantesrrennnnene ta 139 POISE e e E AEE EE A E E EA daa AE E E AA 139 Entering comments during DFOGKFAMIMING ts savsisvcroranierinrnicareredineeasnbiolaiannrunsaibundawereninerabeajnnsnvnaesdvincenslains 139 ins rting comments atter programi enti Y ercisecniisoreisieniieer reicinn eeii e E i E d 139 Entering a comment in a separate DIOC Kai cirinciaiinatcanlanattinutatninabeidannaepinbwtiatedivntseiocig coins sniiinenialeaebtida Seles 139 Functions Tor ediino of the Ol NMS N eari a E cases nse 140 A 3 D E o E A e oree e E E E ene ricer 141 E AORN area R E O E E E TR 141 S O rs sett E ela E tn crt EE EEEE AE EA EEE E E AE E 141 AAAS aTe POC LELLI E ake eee nan ore ee Ore ecu wen ceea Le peoRurN eo eGw sen eLonee 142 Denntiomand OIC ONS arco cryaneaecieros ctsbeedinontotteain eientocns ueeotacaalyoetienspqes EEEa Aate aeia 142 Displaying the program structure window Changing the active WINKOW ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeee
249. ate axes X Y and Z The axes are mutually perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum A coordinate identities the distance from the datum in one of these directions A position in a plane is thus described through two coordinates and a position in space through three coordinates Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as absolute coordinates Relative coordinates are referenced to any other known position reference point you define within the coordinate system Relative coordinate values are also referred to as Incremental coordinate values 94 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Fundamentals 3 1 Reference system on milling machines When using a milling machine you orient tool movements to the Cartesian coordinate system The illustration at right shows how the Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes The figure illustrates the right hand rule tor remembering the three axis directions the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb points in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction The TNC 620 can control up to 5 axes The axes U V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respectively Rotary axes are designated as A B and C The illustration at lower right shows the assignment of secondary a
250. ate the information line in the operating mode line ON Activate the information line in the operating mode line DisplaySettings Settings for 3 D graphic simulation Model type of 3 D graphic simulation 3 D processor intensive Model display for complex machining with undercuts 2 5 D Model display for 3 axis machining No Model Model display deactivated Model quality of 3 D graphic simulation very high High resolution Display of block end points possible high High resolution medium Medium resolution low Low resolution DisplaySettings Settings for position display Position display with TOOL CALL DL As Tool Length The programmed oversize DL is considered as a tool length modification for display of the workpiece oriented position As Workpiece Oversize The programmed oversize DL is considered as a workpiece oversize for display of the workpiece oriented position TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 601 Tables and overviews 18 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter settings ProbeSettings Configuration of tool measurement TT140_1 M function for spindle orientation 1 Spindle orientation directly via NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of M function for spindle orientation Probing routine MultiDirections Probe from several directions SingleDirection Probe from one direction Probing direction for tool radius measurement X_Positive Y_Positive X_Negative Y_Negative
251. atum page 516 The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as reference point TNC 620 User s Manual 520 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 14 10 Measuring workpiece dimensions PROBING gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING POS ieee POS soft key gt Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point A gt Select the probing direction by soft key gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt If you need the current datum later write down the value that appears in the Datum display gt Datum Enter O gt Cancel the dialog Press the END key gt Select the probing function again Press the PROBING POS soft key gt Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point B gt Select the probe direction with the soft keys same axis but from the opposite direction gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button The value displayed as datum is the distance between the two points on the coordinate axis To return to the datum that was active before the length measurement gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING POS soft key gt Probe the first touch point again gt Set the datum to the value that you wrote down previously gt Cancel the dialog Press the END key Measuring angles You can use the 3 D touch probe to measure a
252. axis Main plane Z XY also UV XV UY Y ZX also WU ZU WX X YZ also VW YW VZ You can program circles that do not lie parallel to a main plane by using the function for tilting the working plane see User s Manual for Cycles Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE or Q parameters see Principle and overview of functions page 294 Direction of rotation DR for circular movements When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element enter the direction of rotation as follows Clockwise direction of rotation DR Counterclockwise direction of rotation DR TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 205 Programming Programming contours 6 2 Fundamentals of path functions Radius compensation The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to the first contour element You cannot activate radius compensation in a circle block It must be activated beforehand in a straight line block see Path contours Cartesian coordinates page 218 or approach block APPR block see Approaching and departing a contour page 208 Pre position Danger of collision Before running a part program always pre position the tool to prevent the possibility of damaging It or the workpiece Creating the program blocks with the path function keys The gray path function keys initiate the plain language dialog The TNC asks you successively for all the necessary
253. bbr TYPE DOC PLC LCUTS PTYP NMAX LIFTOFF TP_NO T ANGLE PITCH LAST_USE ACC 172 Tool data Inputs Tool type Press the ENT key to edit the field the GOTO key opens a window in which you can select the tool type You can assign tool types to specify the display filter settings such that only the selected type Is visible in the table Comment on tool up to 32 characters Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22 Tool type for evaluation in the pocket table Function is defined by the machine tool builder The machine tool documentation provides further information Limit the spindle speed for this tool The programmed value IS monitored error message as well as an Increase in the shaft speed via the potentiometer Function Inactive Enter Input range 0 to 999999 if function not active enter Definition of whether the TNC should retract the tool in the direction of the positive tool axis at an NC stop in order to avoid leaving dwell marks on the contour If Y is defined the TNC retracts the tool from the contour provided that this function was activated in the NC program with M148 see Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 page 381 Reference to the number of the touch probe in the touch probe table Point angle of the tool Is used by the Centering cycle Cycle 240 in order to calculate the centering depth tro
254. block and automatically transfer it to the subsequent positioning blocks and cycles For feed rate input in positioning blocks or cycles select the soft key F AUTO The TNC then uses the feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block If you have to change the feed rate later you only need to adjust the feed rate value in the TOOL CALL block Functions in the cutting data calculator Soft key Function b s Load the spindle speed from the cutting data MIN Cc IEN calculator form into an open dialog field m F Load the feed rate from the cutting data MM MIN i z4 calculator form into an open dialog field vc Load the cutting speed trom the cutting data M MIN k i calculator form into an open dialog field Fz Load the feed per tooth from the cutting data MM ZAHN i g z calculator form into an open dialog field Fu Load the feed per revolution from the cutting MM7U z data calculator form into an open dialog field ACCEPT Load the tool radius into the cutting data Pi calculator form b Load the spindle speed from the open dialog ee field into the cutting data calculator form u Load the feed rate from the open dialog field ACCEPT i FEED RATE into the cutting data calculator form TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 147 Programming Programming aids 4 6 Cutting data calculator Soft key 2 ACCEPT FEED RATE amp ACCEPT FEED RATE GET CURRENT VA
255. ce a jump over this program section The called part program must not contain a CALL PGM call into the calling part program otherwise an infinite loop will result Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 4 Any desired program as subprogram O BEGIN PGMA CALL PGM B END PGMA TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Any desired program as subprogram 8 4 Calling any program as a subprogram Danger of collision Coordinate transformations that you define in the called program remain in effect for the calling program too unless you reset them If the program you want to call is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it trom then you only need to enter the program name If the called program is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you must enter the complete path e g TNC ZW35 ROUGH PGM1 H If you want to call a DIN ISO program enter the file type after the program name You can also call a program with Cycle 12 PGM CALL As a rule Q parameters are effective globally with a PGM CALL So please note that changes to Q parameters in the called program also influence the calling program Call a program with PGM CALL The PGM CALL function calls any program as a subprogram The control runs the called program from the position where it was called in the program gt To select the functions for progra
256. cessive layers contained in the DXF file The DXF file to be processed must contain at least one layer Elements not assigned to a layer are automatically moved by the TNC to the anonymous layer You can even select a contour if the designer has saved it on different layers gt Select the mode for the layer settings In the list view window the TNC shows all layers contained in the active DXF file gt Hide a layer Select the layer with the left mouse button and click its check box to hide it Alternatively use the space key gt Show a layer Select the layer with the left mouse button and click its check box to show It Alternatively use the space key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 261 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 73 DXF converter option 42 Defining the datum The datum of the drawing for the DXF file is not always located in a manner that lets you use It directly as a reference point for the workpiece Therefore the TNC has a function with which you can shift the drawing datum to a suitable location by clicking an element You can define a reference point at the following locations m At the beginning end or center of a straight line m At the beginning center or end of a circular arc At the transition between quadrants or at the center of a complete circle m By directly inputting numerical values into the list view window m At t
257. cies eciniencedaunievsctebaliasharorheateniasndatieasindimeayedabnctuawontean 608 Non HEIDENHAIN COVICES siccvontnsnscisenssumsdecutcanislunniethilvawctes oondinnndausienmnie coxwdhatdoxelydiekswadsubehivouoeneananvanbsrtuavmaledien 610 Finemet interac TA SO yO eearasnesedecace cues e E E a E eE e e 611 Mechnicakintormatio neea A A a E a ea cake a re a ace Sac hae 612 DAAE E E T ane eo way etn ce eer nteey ance enac neue aanzenet 620 I CYCO ads iui steatosis once a rE A EEE ta 620 ISOS hanc ous Tn E aan e aa R EA A E E T EEE TRG 621 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared cccsccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseenseeneneneees 623 CO a O PECON eian A ENA A E NA 623 Comparison Data interfaceS s esssssusruerierir tiurii erre re rt rt rre eeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseeteeeeeecueeeaeseanees 623 COmMPISON ACCES OE area ri eee ee en eE ee ere 624 COMPSON FPE SONA eeki EET ia E EEE EEEE 624 Comparison Machine specific TUNGUONSsisiniicririaiseinsnierr inann a Ea irii 625 Companson User TUNCtION S samen oe rene en er v0 EEE E EESE E EAE EEE EEA Fi 625 CGOmMmPaAIOr CYCO arrena eenaa a EEr OE ENA e EE AE E EEEa i EATE EEE 632 C mparisoni Miscellaneous TUMCU OMS iicsaueicanet sciina cutie cienne A EaR E ANANA 635 Comparison Touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes 00008 637 Comparison Touch probe cycles for automatic workpiece INSPECTION 0c cece eccc eee eeeeecee eeu eeeeeseeeen
258. complete machining Behavior with M98 With the miscellaneous function M98 the TNC temporarily suspends radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely machined Effect M98 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed M98 takes effect at the end of block Example NC blocks Move to the contour points 10 11 and 12 in succession 10 L X Y RL F 11 L X IY M98 12 L IX TNC 620 User s Manual 370 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior 10 4 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate regardless of the direction of traverse Behavior with M103 The TNC reduces the feed rate when the tool moves in the negative direction of the tool axis The feed rate for plunging FZMAX is calculated from the last programmed feed rate FPROG and a factor F FZMAX FPROG x F Programming M103 If you enter M103 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog by asking you the factor F Effect M103 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M103 program M103 once again without a factor M103 is also effective in an active tilted working plane The feed rate reduction is then effective during traverse in the negative direction of the tilted tool axis Example NC blocks The feed rate for plunging is to be 20 of the feed rate in the plane
259. conclude entry Press END The PLANE RESET function resets the current PLANE function or an active cycle 19 completely angles 0 and function is inactive It does not need to be defined more than once Deactivate tilting in the Manual operation operating mode in the 3D ROT menu TNC 620 User s Manual 416 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Defining the working plane with the spatial angle PLANE SPATIAL Application Spatial angles define a working plane using up to three rotations of the coordinate system two perspectives that have always the same result are available for this purpose Rotations about the machine based coordinate system he sequence of the rotations is first around the machine axis C then around the machine axis B and then around the machine axis A Rotations about the respectively tilted coordinate system The sequence of rotations is first around the machine axis C then around the rotated axis B and then around the rotated axis A This perspective is usually easier to understand because one rotary axis is fixed so that the rotations of the coordinate system are easier to comprehend Before programming note the following You must always define the three spatial angles SPA SPB and SPC even if one of them 0 This operation corresponds to 19 if the entries in Cycle 19 are defined as spatial ang
260. ct to the currently active coordinate system spatial angle This function could only be realized through specially written programs with normal vectors LN blocks The TNC now provides the following function gt AXIS POS determines that the TNC interprets the programmed coordinates of rotary axes as the nominal position of the respective axis gt AXIS SPAT determines that the TNC interprets the SPATIAL programmed coordinates of rotary axes as the Spatial angle TNC 620 User s Manual 446 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 FUNCTION TCPM option 9 12 5 AXIS POS should be used primarily if your machine is equipped with Cartesian rotary axes You can also use AXIS POS with 45 swivel heads tilting tables if it is ensured that the programmed rotary axis coordinates define the desired orientation of the working plane correctly this can be accomplished with a CAM system for example AXIS SPAT The rotary axis coordinates entered in the positioning block are space angles that are given with respect to the currently active perhaps tilted coordinate system incremental space angle After you switch on FUNCTION TCPM with AXIS SPAT in the first positioning block you should always program all three spatial angles in the inclination angle definition This also applies if one or more Spatial angles are 0 AXIS SPAT The rotary axis coordinates entered in the positioning block are space angles that are given
261. ction must be enabled by your machine manufacturer Refer to your machine E manual With the MOD function Tool usage file you can select whether the TNC never once or always uses a tool usage file To generate a tool usage file gt Inthe MOD menu select the Machine settings group gt Select the Tool usage file menu gt Select the desired setting for the Program Run Full Sequence Single Block and Test Run operating modes gt Press the APPLY soft key gt Press the OK soft key Select kinematics L The Select Kinematics function must be enabled and adapted by the machine manufacturer Refer to your machine manual You can use this function to test programs whose kinematics does not match the active machine kinematics If your machine manufacturer saved different kinematic configurations in your machine you can activate one of these kinematics configurations with the MOD function When you select a kinematics model for the test run this does not affect machine kinematics Danger of collision When you switch the kinematics model for machine operation the TNC implements all of subsequent movements with modified kinematics Ensure that you have selected the correct kinematics in the test run for checking your workpiece TNC 620 User s Manual 570 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 System settings 17 4 System settings Set the system time With the Set system time MOD function you c
262. ctivate manual tilting page 526 Tilting under program control Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE in the part program see User s Manual for Cycles Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE Tilting under program control PLANE function in the part program see The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 page 413 The TNC functions for tilting the working plane are coordinate transtormations The working plane is always perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 523 Manual operation and setup 14 11 Tilting the working plane option 8 When tilting the working plane the TNC differentiates between two machine types Machine with tilting table You must tilt the workpiece into the desired position for machining by positioning the tilting table for example with an L block The position of the transformed tool axis does not change in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the table and therefore the workpiece by 90 for example the coordinate system does not rotate f you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves in Z direction In calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers only the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular tilting table the so called translational components Machine with swivel head You must tilt the wor
263. d To do so you can reset the graphic to the workpiece blank Soft key Function RESET Show the unmachined workpiece blank BLK FORM Tool display Regardless of the operating mode you can also show the tool during the simulation Soft key Function Program Run Full Sequence Program Run Single Block Test Run TNC 620 User s Manual 544 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Graphics option 20 Measurement of machining time Machining time in the Test Run mode of operation The control calculates the duration of the tool movements and displays this as machining time in the test run The control takes feed movements and dwell times into account The time calculated by the control can only conditionally be used for calculating the production time because the control does not account for machine dependent times such as tool change Machining time in the machine operating modes Time display from program start to program end The timer stops whenever machining Is Interrupted Activating the stopwatch function gt Shift the sott key row until the soft key for the stopwatch functions appears gt Select the stopwatch functions o STORE gt Select the desired function via soft key e g saving the displayed time V A D lt Stopwatch functions Store displayed time f e a m P Display the sum of stored time 0 and displayed time TNC 620 User s Manual
264. d right aligned string lengths Writing to LOG file with FN16 Displaying parameter contents in the additional status display Displaying parameter contents during programming Q INFO SQL functions for writing and reading tables TNC 620 E I X X X X X X X X K X E X X X X I E gt lt ITNC 530 5 X X X X KK KK KK XK XxX X E X X X TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Function Graphic support m 2 D programming graphics REDRAW function Show grid lines as the background m 3 D line graphics est graphics plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view High resolution view Tool display Adjusting the simulation speed Coordinates of line intersection for projection in 3 planes Expanded zoom functions mouse operation Displaying frame for workpiece blank Displaying the depth value in plan view during mouse over Targeted stop of test run STOP AT N Consider tool change macro m Program run graphics plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view High resolution view TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC 620 with option 9 X with option 9 X with option 9 X with option 9 X with option 9 with option 9 ITNC 530 629 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 ITNC 530
265. d the TNC locks the tool status L Inout range O to 0 9999 mm Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation Tool radius measurement Tool offset between stylus center and tool center Default setting No value entered offset tool radius Tool length measurement Tool offset in addition to offsetToolAxis between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Default O Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Inout range O to 3 2767 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Inout range O to 0 9999 mm TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Dialog Number of teeth Wear tolerance length Wear tolerance radius Wear tolerance Radius 2 Cutting direction M4 ENT M3 NOENT Tool offset radius Tool offset length Breakage tolerance length Breakage tolerance radius 173 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Editing the tool table The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is Eoo toie eaiting Eresi run designated TOOL T and must be saved in the TNC table directory A Silage ga niaslaiil Other tool tables that are to be archived or used for test runs are given different file names with the extension T By default
266. d CHF the blocks before and after RND or CHF must contain only coordinates in the working plane f you want to approach the contour on a tangential path you must use the function APPR LCT The block with APPR LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane f you want to depart the contour on a tangential path use the function DEP LCT The block with DEP LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane Before using the functions listed below you have to cancel M120 and the radius compensation Cycle 32 Tolerance Cycle 19 Working plane m PLANE function m M114 m M128 m CPM FUNCTION TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 375 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 Miscellaneous Functions software option Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M118 M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run Just program M118 and enter an axis specific value linear or rotary axis in millimeters Input If you enter M118 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the axis specific values The coordinates are entered with the orange axis direction buttons or the ASCII keyboard Effect Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 o
267. d of block Reset M144 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop Reset M148 Suppress limit switch message Rounding the corners Laser cutting functions TNC 620 recommended Cycle 32 recommended M128 TCPM X option 8 X option 21 X option 21 possible via user parameters X X option 9 X X XK X X option 9 X possible via FN 17 X TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 ITNC 530 X X X option 8 option 8 option 9 option 9 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Comparison Touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes Cycle Touch probe table tor managing 3 D touch probes TNC 620 ITNC 530 Calibrating the effective length Calibrating the effective radius option 17 option 17 Measuring a basic rotation using a line Set the datum in any axis Setting a corner as datum option 17 Option 17 option 17 Setting a circle center as datum l Setting a center line as datum option 17 Option 17 Measuring a basic rotation using two holes cylindrical studs Setting the datum using four holes cylindrical studs X X X X X X X X X X X option 17 Option 17 X X XI K XIX X X X X Setting the circle center using three holes cylindrical studs option 17 Support of mechanical touch probes by manually c
268. de The TNC can find the angle from the tangent a arctan a b arctan sin a cos a Example a 25mm b 50mm a arctan a b arctan 0 5 26 57 Furthermore a b c where a a x a c V a b Programming trigonometric functions Press the soft key to call the trigonometric functions The TNC then displays the soft keys that are listed in the table below Soft key Function rare FN 6 SINUS SIN X e g FN 6 Q20 SIN Q5 Define and assign the sinus of an angle in degrees z FN 7 COSINUS COS Xx gt e 0 FN 7 Q21 COS Q5 Define and assign the cosine of an angle in degrees e FN 8 ROOT SUM OF SQUARES X LEN Y e g FN 8 Q10 5 LEN 4 Form and assign length from two values wia FN 13 ANGLE X ANG e g FN 13 Q20 25 ANG Q1 Calculate the angle from the arc tangent of two sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle 0 lt angle lt 360 and assign it to a parameter TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Angle functions 9 4 301 Programming Q parameters 9 5 Calculation of circles 9 5 Calculation of circles Application The TNC can use the functions for calculating circles to calculate the circle center and the circle radius from three or four given points on the circle The calculation is more accurate if four points are used Application These functions can be used if you wish to determine the location and size of a h
269. ded 400 m Pin Signal Description 1 TX Transmit Data 2 TX Transmit Data 3 REC Receive Data 4 Vacant 5 Vacant 6 REC Receive Data 7 Vacant 8 Vacant TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 18 2 611 Tables and overviews 18 3 Technical information 18 3 Explanation of symbols Default Axis option Advanced Function Set 1 Advanced Function Set 2 X NS E User functions Short description Program entry Position entry Tool Compensation Tool tables Constant contour speed Parallel operation Cutting data 3 D machining Advanced Function Set 2 Rotary table machining Advanced Function Set 1 Contour elements 612 O O Technical information Software option except Advanced Function Set 1 and Advanced Function Set 2 Basic version 3 axes plus closed loop spindle Additional axis for 4 axes plus closed loop spindle Additional axis for 5 axes plus closed loop spindle In HEIDENHAIN conversational and DIN ISO X Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates Incremental or absolute dimensions Display and entry in mm or inches Tool radius in the working plane and tool length Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks M120 Multiple tool tables with any number of tools With respect to the path of the tool center With respect to the cutting edge Creating a program with graphical
270. default GW Manually enter the IP addresses of the default gateway gt Apply the changes with the OK button or discard them with the Cancel button TNC 620 User s Manual 584 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Ethernet interface 17 11 gt Select the Internet tab GJvanuai operation Programming 09 27 une TNC nc_prog PGM H 1 OXF GO nc_prog Network settings oO demo Computer name interfaces internet PingRouting NFS UIOIGIO DHCP E POM Proxy PGM2 Direct connection to intemet NAT se The control forward lt n Setting Meaning Proxy Direct connection to Internet NAT The control forwards Internet inquiries to the default gateway and from there they must be forwarded through network address translation e g If a direct connection to a modem Is available m Use proxy Define the Address and Port of the Internet router in your network ask your network administrator for the correct address and port Add Delete Telemaintenance he machine manufacturer configures the server for telemaintenance here Changes must always be made in agreement with your machine tool builder gt Select the Ping Routing tab to enter the ping and routing settings januar operation Programing sap TNC nc_prog PGM H 1 DXF foune E S nc_prog Network settings BO demo Computer name Interfaces Internet PingRousng NFS UID GIO DHCP server EE PGM Ping Setting Meaning Ping In the Addr
271. der which a file is saved The individual names are separated by a backslash The path including all drive characters directory and the file name including the extension must not exceed 255 characters Example TNCA The directory AUFTR1 was created on the TNC drive Then in the AUFTR1 directory the directory NCPROG was created and the part AUFTRI NCPROG program PROG1 H was copied into it The part program now has the following path TNC AUFTR1 NCPROG PROG1 H Bm WZTAB The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with different paths TNC 620 User s Manual 114 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 Overview Functions of the file manager Soft key Function Page Copy a single file 118 SELECT Display a specific file type 117 aS play a sp yp Create new file 118 FILE O LAST Display the last 10 files that 121 FILES EEZ were selected ed Delete a file 122 Tag a file 123 TAG Rename a file 124 PROTECT Protect a file against editing 125 a and erasure ra Cancel file protection 125 Import a tool table 177 TABLE Manage network drives 134 NET Select the editor 125 Sort files by properties 124 SORT COPY DIR Copy a directory 121 C gt Delete directory with all its subdirectories Refresh directory Rename a directory Create a new directory PTREETORY TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 20
272. dle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF CLEAR status display depending on machine parameter Return jump to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change Stop program run machine dependent function Spindle STOP Coolant on Coolant off Spindle ON clockwise coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise coolant on Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or cycle call modally effective machine dependent function Constant contouring speed at corners not required at TNC 620 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position detined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired Reset M101 Reduce teed rate during plunging to factor F percentage Reactivate most recently set datum Machining with second ky factor Machining with first ky factor Suppress error message for replacement tools with oversize Reset M107 Constant contouring speed at cutting edge feed rate increase and reduction Constant contouring speed at cutting edge only feed rate reduction Reset M109 M110 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Con
273. dy output within the target file If you use FN16 more than once in the program the TNC saves all texts in the file that you defined in the FN16 function The file is not output until the TNC reads the END PGM block or you press the NC stop button or you close the file with M_CLOSE In the FN16 block program the format file and the log file with their respective file type extensions If you enter only the Tile name for the path of the log file the TNC saves the log Tile in the directory in which the NC program with the FN16 function is located You can define a standard path for outputting protocol files via the user parameters fn16DefaultPath and fn16DefaultPathSim Program Test TNC 620 User s Manual 314 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Additional functions 9 8 Displaying messages on the TNC screen You can also use the function FN16 F PRINT to display any messages from the NC program in a pop up window on the TNC screen This makes It easy to display explanatory texts Including long texts at any point in the program in a way that the user has to react to them You can also display O parameter contents if the protocol description file contains such instructions For the message to appear on the TNC screen you need only enter SCREEN as the name of the protocol file 96 FN 16 F PRINT TNC MASKE MASKE1 A SCREEN If the message has more lines than fit in the pop up window you can use the arrow keys
274. e TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC model software and features TNC model software and features This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of the following NC software numbers TNC model NC software number TNC 620 817600 02 TNC 620 E 817601 02 TNC 620 Programming Station 817605 02 The suffix E indicates the export version of the TNC The export version of the TNC has the following limitations Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the TNC on your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include ool measurement with the TT Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of Improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users User s Manual for Cycle Programming All of the cycle functions touch probe cycles and fixed cycles are described in the Cycle Programming User s Manual Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual ID 1096886 xx TNC 620 User s Manua
275. e ID no Number Index Meaning Traverse range 230 2 1169 Negative software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 3 1169 Positive software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 5 Software limit switch on or off O on 1 off Nominal position in the REF 1 1 X axis system 240 Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis X axis OO OO NI OO A AJI W N Current position in the active 1 coordinate system 270 Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis OO OO NI OO o1 AJOJN TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 321 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions Group name ID no Number TS triggering touch probe 350 50 51 92 D3 54 bo 56 57 TT tool touch probe 70 71 72 75 76 77 78 322 Index WO NMI gt OINI gt w N Meaning Touch probe type Line in the touch probe table Effective length Effective ball radius Rounding radius Center offset reference axis Center offset minor axis Spindle orientation angle in degrees center offset Rapid traverse Measuring feed rate Maximum measuring range Safety clearance Spindle orientation possible O No 1 Yes Spindle orientation angle Touch probe type Line in the touch probe table Center point in reference axis REF system Center point in minor axis REF system Center point in tool axis REF system Probe contact radius Rapid traverse M
276. e axes changes Programs created on an ITNC 530 or on earlier TNCs are not compatible The actual position capture function is not possible with an active tilted working plane If you use the PLANE function when M120 is active the TNC automatically rescinds the radius compensation which also rescinds the M120 function Always use PLANE RESET to reset PLANE functions Entering 0 in all PLANE parameters does not completely reset the function If you restrict the number of tilting axes with the M138 function your machine may provide only limited tilting possibilities The TNC only supports tilting the working plane with spindle axis Z TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 413 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Overview All PLANE functions available on the TNC describe the desired working plane independently of the rotary axes actually present on your machine The following possibilities are available Soft key Function Required parameters Page SPATIAL SPATIAL Three Spatial angles 417 WAS SPA SPB and SPC PROJECTED PROJECTED Iwo projection angles 419 wes PROPR and PROMIN and a rotation angle ROT EULER EULER Three Euler angles 420 ays precession EULPR nutation EULNU and rotation EULROT VECTOR VECTOR Normal vector for 422 ya defining the plane and base vector for defining the direction o
277. e NC blocks 17 FL LEN 20 AN 15 18 FL AN 105 LEN 12 5 19 FL PAR 17 DP 12 5 20 FSELECT 2 21 FL LEN 20 IAN 95 22 FL IAN 220 RAN 18 Data relative to block N Circle center CC Soft key Known data Cartesian coordinates of the circle center relative to block N Polar coordinates of the circle center relative to block N Example NC blocks 12 FL X 10 Y 10 RL BFL 14 FL X 18 Y 35 15 E 16 FL 17 FC DR R10 CCA 0 ICCX 20 ICCY 15 RCCX12 RCCY14 TNC 620 User s Manual 248 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 6 6 Example FK programming 1 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 249 Programming Programming contours 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Example FK programming 2 TNC 620 User s Manual 250 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 6 6 Example FK programming 3 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming Programming contours 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 TNC 620 User s Manual 252 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 7 1 CAD viewer and DXF converter screen layout 7 1 CAD viewer and DXF converter screen layout CAD viewer and DXF converter screen layout If you
278. e SELinux security software SELinux security software page 90 The posAfterContPocket machine parameter has been added that influences positioning after an SL cycle Machine specitic user parameters page 596 Protective zones can be defined in the MOD menu Entering traverse limits page 569 Write protection is possible for single lines in the preset table Saving the datums in the preset table page 486 New manual probing function for aligning a plane Measuring 3 D basic rotation page 513 New function for aligning the machining plane without rotary axes Tilt the working plane without rotary axes page 434 CAD files can be opened without Option 42 CAD viewer page 255 New Software Option 93 Extended Tool Management Tool management Option 93 page 188 16 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC model software and features Modified functions 81760x 02 FZ and FU feed rate input possible in the Tool Call block Call tool data page 182 The input range of the DOC column in the pocket table has been expanded to 32 characters Pocket table for tool changer page 1 79 Commands FN 15 FN 31 FN 32 FT and FMAXT from predecessor controls no longer generate ERROR blocks during import When simulating or running an NC program with these commands the control interrupts the NC program with an error message that helps you to find an alternative i
279. e are loaded PERSONI 14SQL BIND Q884 Enter the sorting criteria in the SQL SELECT ORDER BY function TAB EXAMPLE MEAS Z Enter the column designation and the keyword for ascending descending order If you do not use this option the rows are placed i in random order 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y Lock out the selected rows for other applications with the SQL MEAS_Z FROM TAB EXAMPLE SELECT FOR UPDATE function Other applications can continue to read these rows but cannot change them We strongly recommend using this option if you are making changes to the table entries Selection of table rows with the a WHERE function Empty result set If no rows match the selection criteria the SOL server returns a valid handle but no table entries sal gt Parameter no for result O parameter for the 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE WHERE MEAS_NO lt 20 EXECUTE handle The SOL server returns the handle for the group of columns and rows selected with the current Select command With an error selection could not be executed the SOL server returns a 1 Code 0 identifies an invalid Selection of table rows with the WHERE function and Q parameters handle gt Data bank SQL command text with the following elements 20SQL Q5 SELECT SELECT keyword MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE Name of the SOL command names of the table WHERE MEAS NO 011 column
280. e desired view The available status displays described below can be selected either directly by soft key or with the switch over soft keys Please note that some of the status information described below is not available unless the E associated software option is enabled on your TNC TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 77 Introduction 2 4 Status displays Overview After switch on the TNC displays the Overview status form provided that you have selected the PROGRAM STATUS screen layout or POSITION STATUS The overview form contains a summary of the most important status information which you can also find on the various detail forms Soft key STATUS OVERVIEW Meaning Position display Tool information Active M functions Active coordinate transtormations Active subprogram Active program section repeat Program called with PGM CALL Current machining time Name of the active main program General program information PGM tab Soft key No direct selection possible 78 Meaning Name of the active main program Circle center CC pole Dwell time counter Machining time when the program was completely simulated in the Test Run operating mode Current machining time in percent Current time Active programs EJP rogram run full sequence fe Program run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H A RFNOML 0 BEGIN PGM STAT1 MM 6 PLANE EULER
281. e deviation of circle radius 0 0001 to 0 016 mm Permissible deviation of circle radius on the circle end point compared to circle start point Configuration of machining cycles Overlap factor for pocket milling 0 001 to 1 414 Overlap factor for Cycle 4 POCKET MILLING and Cycle 5 CIRCULAR POCKET Behavior after machining a contour pocket PosBeforeMachining Position as before machining a cycle ToolAxClearanceHeight Position tool axis to clearance height Display Spindle 2 error message if M3 M4 is not active on Output error message off Do not output error message Display Enter negative depth error message on Output error message off Do not output error message Approach behavior on a slot wall in a cylindrical surface LineNormal Approach with straight line CircleTangential Approach with an arc movement M function for spindle orientation in machining cycles 1 Spindle orientation directly via NC 0 Function inactive 1 to 999 Number of M function for spindle orientation Do not display Plunging type not possible error message on Error message is not displayed TNC 620 User s Manual 604 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Machine specific user parameters 18 1 Parameter settings off Error message is displayed Geometry filter for filtering out linear elements Type of stretch filter Off No filter active ShortCut Leave out single points on polygon Average The geometry filter smoot
282. e highlight on the error message and press the DELETE soft key DELETE eE gt Delete all error messages Press the DELETE ALL ALL soft key If the cause of the error has not been removed the error message cannot be deleted In this case the error message remains in the window Error log The TNC stores errors and important events e g system startup in an error log The capacity of the error log is limited If the log is full the TNC uses a second file If this is also full the first error log is deleted and written to again and so on To view the error history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE gt Open the error window gt Press the LOG FILES soft key FILES ERROR gt Open the error log file Press the ERROR LOG soft key a If you need the previous log file Press the FILE PREVIOUS FILE soft key OUERT gt If you need the current log file Press the FILE CURRENT FILE soft key M The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file and the most recent entry is at the end TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 155 Programming Programming aids 4 8 Error messages Keystroke log The TNC stores keystrokes and important events e g system Startup in a keystroke log The capacity of the keystroke log is limited If the keystroke log is full the control switches to a second keystroke log If this second file becomes Tull the first keystroke log is c
283. e in the TNC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the PC window 1 gt To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC select the Tile in the PC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted Tile into the TNC window 2 If you want to control data transfer from the TNC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner gt Select lt Extras gt lt ITNCserver gt TNCremo is now in server mode It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC gt You can now Call the file management functions on the TNC by pressing the key PGM MGTsee Data transfer to from an external data medium page 133 in order to transfer the desired files End TNCremo Select lt File gt lt Exit gt Refer also to the TNCremo context sensitive help texts where all of the functions are explained in more detail The help texts must be called with the F1 key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 581 17 MOD functions 17 11 Ethernet interface 17 11 Ethernet interface Introduction The TNC is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect the control as a client in your network The TNC transmits data via the Ethernet card with the smb protocol Server Message Block for Windows operating systems or the TCP IP protocol family Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol and with support from the NFS Network File system
284. e machine kinematics 444 LN blocks Three dimensional tool compensation 450 412 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Introduction The machine manufacturer must enable the functions for tilting the working plane You can only use the PLANE function in its entirety on machines which have at least two rotary axes head and or table Exception PLANE AXIAL can also be used If only a single rotary axis is present or active on your machine The PLANE function is a powertul function for defining tilted working planes In various manners The parameter definition of the PLANE function is separated into two parts The geometric definition of the plane which is different for each of the available PLANE functions The positioning behavior of the PLANE function which is independent of the plane definition and is identical for all PLANE functions see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 Danger of collision If you work with Cycle8 MIRROR IMAGE in a tilted system please note the following Program the tilting motion first and then define Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Mirroring a rotary axis with Cycle 8 only mirrors the motions of the axis but not the angles defined in the PLANE functions As a result the positioning of th
285. e machining data with an allowance enter the oversize value in the TOOL CALL block of the part program A negative delta value describes a tool undersize DL DR DR2 lt 0 An undersize is entered in the tool table for wear Delta values are usually entered as numerical values In a TOOL CALL block you can also assign the values to Q parameters Inout range You can enter a delta value with up to 99 999 mm Delta values from the tool table influence the graphical representation of the clearing simulation Delta values from the TOOL CALL block influence the position display depending on the machine parameter progToolCallDL Entering tool data into the program The machine tool builder determines the scope of function of the TOOL DEF function Refer to your mo machine manual The number length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the TOOL DEF block of the part program gt Select the tool definition Press the TOOL DEF key gt Tool number Each tool is uniquely identified by its tool number gt Tool length Compensation value for the tool length gt Tool radius Compensation value for the tool radius In the programming dialog you can transfer the value for tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by pressing the desired axis soft key Example 4 TOOL DEF 5 L 10 R 5 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 169 Programming Tools 5 2
286. e safety settings Icon Meaning No firewall protection provided although I W it was activated in the configuration This can happen for example if PC names were used in the configuration for which there are no equivalent IP addresses as yet y Firewall active with medium safety level Firewall active with high safety level All services except for the SSH are blocked Have the standard settings checked by your network specialist and change them If necessary The settings in the additional tab SSH settings are in preparation for future enhancements and currently have no function Configuring the firewall Make your firewall settings as follows gt Use the mouse to open the task bar at the bottom edge of the screen see Window manager page 83 gt Press the green HEIDENHAIN button to open the JH menu gt Select the Settings menu item gt Select the Firewall menu item HEIDENHAIN recommends activating the firewall with the prepared default settings gt Set the Active option to enable the firewall gt Press the Set standard values button to activate the default settings recommended by HEIDENHAIN gt Close the dialog with OK TNC 620 User s Manual 588 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Firewall 17 12 Firewall settings Option Meaning Active Switching the firewall on or off Interface Selection of the ethO interface usually corresponds to X26 of the MC main computer eth1 c
287. e to scale display of grid Editing contour subprograms In SLII cycles with AUTO DRAW ON Moving the zoom window Programming minor axes m Syntax FUNCTION PARAXCOMP Define the behavior of the display and the paths of traverse m Syntax FUNCTION PARAXMODE Define the assignment of the parallel axes to be traversed Programming OEM cycles m Access to table data m Access to machine parameters Creating interactive cycles with CYCLE QUERY e g touch probe cycles in Manual Operation 642 TNC 620 m Not available m Not available m Not available Works with max 50000 blocks can be set via config datum m Available m f error messages occur the cursor is on the CYCL CALL block in the main program Repeat function not available m Available m Available m Via SQL commands and via FN17 FN18 or TABREAD TABWRITE functions m With the CFGREAD function m Available ITNC 530 m Available m Available m Available No limitation regarding program length Not available f error messages occur the cursor is on the error causing block in the contour subprogram Repeat function available m Not available Not available m Via FN17 FN18 or TABREAD TABWRITE functions m Via FN18 functions m Not available TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Comparison Differences in Test R
288. e to the angle defined in the basic rotation TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Resulting axis position A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 A 45 C 90 Error message A 45 C 90 COORD ROT TABLE ROT 433 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Tilt the working plane without rotary axes This feature must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual The machine tool builder must take Into account e g the precise angle of a mounted angular head in the kinematics description You can also align the programmed working plane perpendicular to the tool without rotary axes e g for adapting the working plane for a mounted angular head Use the PLANE SPATIAL function and the STAY positioning behavior to swivel the working plane to the angle specified by the machine tool builder Example of mounted angular head with permanent tool direction Y NC syntax TOOL CALL 5 Z 4500 PLANE SPATIAL SPA 0 SPB 90 SPC 0 STAY The swivel angle must be precisely adapted to the tool angle otherwise the TNC outputs an error message TNC 620 User s Manual 434 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Inclined tool machining in a tilted plane option 9 12 3 12 3 Inclined tool machining in a tilted plane option 9 Function
289. e working plane and then move it to the entered height in the tool axis Abbreviation Meaning APPR Approach DEP Departure L Line C Circle T Tangential Smooth connection N Normal perpendicular The TNC does not check whether the programmed contour will be damaged when moving from the actual position to the auxiliary point Py Use the test graphics to check With the APPR LT APPR LN and APPR CT functions the TNC moves the tool from the actual position to the auxiliary point Py at the teed rate rapid traverse that was last programmed With the APPR LCT function the TNC moves to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate programmed with the APPR block If no feed rate is programmed before the approach block the TNC generates an error message TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 211 Programming Programming contours 6 3 Approaching and departing a contour Polar coordinates You can also program the contour points for the following approach departure functions over polar coordinates m APPR LI becomes APPR PLT m APPR LN becomes APPR PLN m APPR CT becomes APPR PCT m APPR LCT becomes APPR PLCT DEP LCT becomes DEP PLCT select by soft key an approach or departure function then press the orange P key Radius compensation The tool radius compensation is programmed together with the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The DEP blocks automatically discard the tool
290. ead to safe stopping of all drives through defined stop reactions Defined safety functions are triggered and safe operating statuses are achieved via safety relevant inputs and outputs dual channel implementation which have an influence on the system in all operating modes In this chapter you will find explanations of the functions that are additionally available on a TNC with functional safety TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 481 Manual operation and setup 14 4 Optional safety concept functional safety FS Explanation of terms Safety related operating modes Description SOM_1 SOM_2 SOM_3 SOM_4 Safety functions Description SSO SS1 SS1F SS2 STO SOS SLS 482 Brief description Safe operating mode 1 Automatic operation production mode Safe operating mode 2 Set up mode Safe operating mode 3 Manual intervention only for qualified operators Safe operating mode 4 Advanced manual intervention process monitoring Brief description Safe stop Safe stopping of all drives using different methods Safe torque off Energy supply to the motor is interrupted Provides protection against unexpected start of the drives Safe operating stop Provides protection against unexpected start of the drives Safely limited speed Prevents the drives from exceeding the specitied speed limits when the protective door is opened TNC 620 User s Manual H
291. easuring feed rate for stationary spindle Measuring feed rate for rotating spindle Maximum measuring range Safety clearance for linear measurement safety clearance for radial measurement Spindle speed Probing direction TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Group name ID no Reference point from touch probe cycle 360 Value from the active datum table in the active coordinate system 500 Basic transformation 507 Axis offset 508 Active preset 530 Read data of the current tool 950 TNC 620 User s Manual Number 1 Line Line Line SN OQ O1 AION CO HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Index 1to9 X Y Z A B C U V W Column 1 to6 X Y Z SPA SPB SPC 1to9 X_OFFS Y_OFFS Z_OFFS A OFFS B OFFS G OFFS U_OFFS V_OFFS VV_OFFS Additional functions 9 8 Meaning Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without probe length or probe radius compensation machine coordinate system Result of measurement of the touch probe cycles 0 and 1 without probe radius or probe length compensation Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without probe l
292. eating text files Editing texts Above the first line of the text editor there is an information field showing the file name location and line information File Name of the text file Line Line in which the cursor is presently located Column Column in which the cursor is presently located The text is inserted or overwritten at the location of the cursor You can move the cursor to any desired position in the text file by pressing the arrow keys The line in which the cursor is presently located is depicted in a different color You can insert a line break with the Return or ENT key Deleting and re inserting characters words and lines With the text editor you can erase words and even lines and insert them at any desired location in the text Move the cursor to the word or line that you wish to erase and insert at a different place in the text Press the DELETE WORD or DELETE LINE soft key The text is placed in the buffer memory v M vy Move the cursor to the location where you wish to insert the text and press the RESTORE LINE WORD soft key Soft key Function e Delete and temporarily store a line LINE E Delete and temporarily store a word WORD e Delete and temporarily store a character CHAR INSERT Insert a line or word from temporary storage LINE 7 WORD TNC 620 User s Manual 400 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Creating text files 11 6 Editing text blocks You can co
293. ect gt Moves the highlight up and down within a window ee eee sie gt To select a file Press the OK soft key or ao gt Press the ENT key The COPY FIELD soft key allows you to copy the path of a marked file You can reuse the copied path later e g with a program call via the PGM CALL key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 121 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Deleting a file Caution Data may be lost Once you delete files they cannot be restored gt Move the highlight to the file you want to delete DELETE gt To select the erasing function Press the DELETE DX soft key The TNC asks whether you really want to delete the file gt To confirm deletion press the OK soft key or gt To interrupt deletion Press the CANCEL soft key Deleting a directory Caution Data may be lost Once you delete files they cannot be restored gt Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete gt To select the erasing function press the DELETE soft key The TNC inquires whether you really intend to delete the directory and all its subdirectories and files gt To confirm the deletion press the OK soft key or gt To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key TNC 620 User s Manual 122 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager Tagging files
294. ects in a tree structure in the configuration editor Each parameter object has a name e g Settings for screen displays that gives information about the parameters it contains A parameter object entity is marked with an E in the folder symbol in the tree structure some machine parameters have a key name to identity them unambiguously The key name assigns the parameter to a group e g X for X axis The respective group folder bears the key name and is marked by a K in the folder symbol If you are in the configuration editor for the user parameters you can change the display of the existing parameters In the default setting the parameters are displayed with short explanatory texts To display the actual system names of the parameters press the key for the screen layout key and then the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display Parameters not yet active and objects appear dimmed These can be activated with the MORE FUNCTIONS and INSERT soft key The TNC saves a modification list of the last 20 changes to the configuration data To restore modifications select the corresponding line and press the MORE FUNCTIONS and DISCARD CHANGES soft key 596 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Machine specific user parameters Calling the configuration editor and changing parameters select the Programming mode of operation Press the MOD key
295. ecuted M functions are ignored Function also works within SL cycles Machine dependent with existing rotary axes Machine dependent datum shift in rotary axes Function not available Function not available Function available Function not available Function available Circular approach to contour of ridge In limit ranges geometrical conditions of tool contour vertical plunging is used if required 649 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Function PLANE function TABLE ROT COORD ROT not defined Machine is configured for axis angle m Programming an incremental Spatial angle according to PLANE AXIAL m Programming an incremental axis angle according to PLANE SPATIAL if the machine is configured for spatial angle Programming of PLANE functions with active Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Special functions for cycle programming m FN17 m FN18 Compensation of tool length in the position display TNC 620 Configured setting is used All PLANE functions can be used m Error message is issued m Error message is issued m Error message is issued m PLANE AXIAL is possible Function available details are different Function available details are different The tool length entries L and DL from the tool table are taken into account in the position display from TOOL CALL depending on the machine parameter prog ToolCallD
296. ed Abbreviation Meaning EULER Swiss mathematician who defined these angles EULPR Precession angle angle describing the rotation of the coordinate system around the Z axis EULNU Nutation angle angle describing the rotation of the coordinate system around the X axis shifted by the precession angle EULROT Rotation angle angle describing the rotation of the tilted machining plane around the tilted Z axis Defining the working plane with two vectors PLANE VECTOR Application You can use the definition of a working plane via two vectors if your CAD system can calculate the base vector and normal vector of the tilted machining plane A normalized input is not necessary The TNC calculates the normal so you can enter values between 9 999999 and 9 999999 The base vector required for the definition of the machining plane is defined by the components BX BY and BZ see figure at right The normal vector is defined by the components NX NY and NZ Before programming note the following The base vector defines the direction of the principal axis in the tilted machining plane and the normal vector determines the orientation of the tilted machining plane and at the same time Is perpendicular to It The TNC calculates standardized vectors from the values you enter Parameter description for the positioning behavior see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 TNC 620 User s Manual 4
297. ee planes in the Test Run operating mode gt Press the FURTHER VIEW OPTIONS soft key FURTHER VIEW OPTIONS gt Press the view in three planes soft key E i Select projection in three planes in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes gt Press the FURTHER VIEW OPTIONS soft key gt Press the view in three planes soft key ni 542 WJivanuai operation rest run W Jwanual operation rest run TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Graphics option 20 16 1 Move the sectional planes gt Select the functions for shifting the sectional Salil plane The TNC offers the following soft keys Soft keys Function Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right EE I or left tl E becker iam or downwards The position of the sectional planes is visible during shifting The default setting of the sectional plane is selected so that it lies in the working plane in the workpiece center and in the tool axis on the top surface Return sectional planes to default setting h gt Select the function for resetting the sectional amman planes TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 543 Test run and program run 16 1 Graphics option 20 Repeating graphic simulation A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desire
298. eeeeeeens 142 Inserting a structuring block in the program WINCKOW ccccceeccs cee eeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseueseneeenieeens 142 Selecting blocks in the program structure WINKOW cccccceccc neces eceseceeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeeaeeenneeeas 142 ASAC alc Ul at Mes cacc oot reece a eee eee een rc cc oan cincie a fea dc Mi ens ae ead ne one Re ta eta 143 012152106 9 eee E E E nen A ee A ee a ee eee ee ene ee 143 As o a E Cl abas Gall CUM ALON reece serrate are reece ee re ee eee a eee eee ee nate te eee ease eee eetaed neem tee 146 ANG E a ene E E N te nen PE nen E EEE E ee ee ee E T 146 A275 CProgrammingigraphics rE E R ne emai ceca E A anc Oe aie eae 149 Generate do not generate graphics during PrOGrAMMING cccccccccceneceeeeeueeeeeeeeeeeseeseseseeneesaeeeneseanees 149 Generating a graphic for AN EXISTING POG ccccccccccceeeec eee eeceee seen eeen este eseeeeesneeeeeeeenseanessneetaeseanees 150 Block number d oN ONORE siipra e ee ee errr 151 Ea nE 1 EEE E EE E SE EE RAEE E A 151 ROWNO ONA MIMS S aea a a EE a Ea e a Ea e E A 151 Magniticaton or red cion of details irme a E AE N R 152 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 25 Contents 26 4 8 4 9 Error messages oe aes E oe eae petite E tk ame yee goose nue dar aoe en 153 DEO akg he Cc veneer en een ene oe ene Oe Era ena ene ee eee ny Cre eee ee eee 153 Sa TS SOR IU strc sete cance netstat eet EE
299. eely definable table ccc cecccccecececesn ects eseeaeeseeseaeseeaeesneseaeneas 407 FN 28 TABREAD Read from a freely definable table ccccccceccee cece eeeeeeen essen seen esse esta estan eeanes 408 Dwell time FUNCTION FEED DVV Bierce ceterecccesee ene E A 409 PrO ANE TEMG aaa EE EE EE E E E I 409 Reseno WEI UNE air pisesaretartstearninceaumaiina tacapnsssicietsteancs EE EEEE 410 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 37 Contents 12 1 Functions for multiple axis MaChHiNINg cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeesanessaeeesaeessaeeesaanesaaeessnessanees 412 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane Software Option 8 cccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 413 PEE MAE UVC oerein aea aE gent Ao acide aio aetna bcd on eb Abide anode hss Ra centered 413 Sy paces proce erred cts ee ete E it gies ot N EE NE ened tale A A A 414 ST UAC ME FLEANE T0UNCHO enirere arose taco nero rsa a aon pester beer eep EEE 415 FOS LO CS aly e EEA EE ten cancuetobiiaiaianbetenintas diaven e E E EE 415 Resetmno the PLANE TNOUN sranie danan ENEE en EEE Eai aa ar E i E aen 416 Defining the working plane with the spatial angle PLANE SPATIAL cece cece cecce cena cena seen eennes 417 Defining the working plane with the projection angle PLANE PROJECTED 419 Defining the working plane with the Euler angle PLANE EULER ccc cceccecceeccee eee eeen essen eeanees 420 Defining the working plane
300. eeseenaaseeeesensagseeeeess 523 PN AO CII O eere a E T OEE dar na ia E A E E E A R D23 Traversing reference points in tilted AXES cece cccccecccecee eee e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeegeeenaeeneeeas 525 Fosition display n a tilted SySteMjasesrireriien ie ia Eea T EA i 525 Limitations on working with the tilting TUMCTION incnscscneudddeatinniennniags auch amunaisveduuiaeatasdatintteciculasduiiiaweaenader 525 TC a A NO E T AOE EE ENE E A R E aA 526 Setting the current tool axis direction as the active machining direction sseseriesierrrsrrerrerrerrrrrren 527 Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate SySteM s sesresiesrsrrerrerit rrt rrente r rtr t rr rrene EPn Errr errenneren 528 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 15 1 Programming and executing simple machining OperatiONns c ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeesaees 530 Positioning with manual data input MDI sessscnscvessantscscasisays sient aainarsaislea sctlusenonitsyaksns voici bisianesteatiueittewaleatngunciabiencaaseatul 530 Protecung and erasing programis n SMD csice scsergrsncinmnnanadansedccsbenaseneequaewonsestacioancageatatwnannsew aasaieaenseade 533 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 43 Contents 44 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 Graphics Option 20 2 aaa E E tes oitenes sarvetnerarssiecstaveracasinetiesseiteresamternce caver
301. eiiutiacteitwescsielcmenntashiedinngioeu iaa ieaiaia 51 TAE MOS IMNOAaNE TNC KEY orreen EES EE EEEE a EEEE Eai 51 Opening a new program file MANAGEMENL cccccceccceeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseseseeeeeeueeeaeeeeaeetaeeeanseneetaes 52 Denning a workpiece Dlan K orsiserenreisneei nnne i i i EEE EE Eiai 53 POr OU aa a A E E E E E 54 Froorimiimning a SMOE CONTOU sacarina ee ene ren ne EER EEE 55 Creating a Cycle progra esserne nE ai EE aE En Ena DEEE AE EEEn ROEDA a Eni 58 1 4 Graphically testing the first part Advanced Graphic Features software option cc0ss0008 60 Selecting the correct operating MOCE cece ccceccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee secu eeeeeseeeeesneeseeeeeeeeeaeeeaeseeeseaeeeeeesneseneees 60 Selecting the tool table TOF TAS test MI lxsiaiecnsiancitncnaine tan canitieniieiabanasaeanianet lt dosamis rete Ei EEn aE 60 CHOOSES programi you want tO TEST sa sataecsectnatarresict to dacsrcstcoient aera dacedon eateinanibem assailed E EA SEER E 61 Selecting the screen layout and the VIQW ccccccccccccccecee cece cece orreri e rt rt rre rer eeseeeeaeeeaeeeseeeteeetaetanesanes 61 T TTE FIN E E AE E E T A dake Rasta need ed nope 62 ALES UES CUCM CPUIED TOOS A E E a E a ear a a en Ue cS eee 63 Sel ctng the conect operim TIO CS 6 casita inaats esii E AEE EE EEE E 63 Preparing and measuring toolS s snuennsisiurnerreiurrrrrerr ert rt renr eri a eee need sete seen sed eeea seca eedeeeaeeeaeesesegeeeneeans 63 TE EON A VS
302. elix The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is determined by the work direction direction of rotation and radius compensation Internal thread Work direction Direction of rotation Radius compensation Right hand Z DR RL Left hand Z DR RR Right hand Z DR RR Left hand Z DR RL External thread Right hand Z DR RR Left hand Z DR RL Right hand Z DR RL Left hand Z DR RR TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 233 Programming Programming contours 6 5 Path contours Polar coordinates Programming a helix Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of rotation and the incremental total angle IPA The tool may otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the contour For the total angle IPA you can enter a value of 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 gt Polar coordinates angle Enter the total angle of tool traverse along the helix in incremental P dimensions After entering the angle specify the tool axis with an axis selection key gt Coordinate Enter the coordinate for the height of the helix in incremental dimensions gt Direction of rotation DR Clockwise helix DR Counterclockwise helix DR gt Enter the radius compensation according to the table Example NC blocks Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions 12 CC X 40 Y 25 13 L Z 0 F100 M3 14 LP PR 3 PA 270 RL F50 15 CP IPA 1800 IZ 5 DR TNC 620 User s Manual
303. emo TNCremoNT Datei Ansicht Extras Hilfe Before you transfer a program from the TNC to the PC you must make absolutely sure that you have already saved the program currently selected on the E TNC The TNC saves changes automatically when Die 020887 145120 you switch the mode of operation on the TNC or 8 caer 45130 when you select the file manager via the PGM MGT key 1200 06 04 99 15 39 42 06 04 99 15 39 44 06 04 99 15 39 44 06 04 99 15 39 46 Check whether the TNC is connected to the correct serial port on 0604991534 your PC or to the network a S elx o fe 06 04 99 15 33 40 OF 400 46 90 47 Steuerung TNC 400 r Dateistatus Frei 899 MByte Insgesamt B Maskiert a r VYebindung Protokoll ksz o Schnittstelle kom Baudrate Auto Detect firs200 DNC Verbindung aktiv Once you have started TNCremo you will see a list of all files that are stored in the active directory in the upper section of the main window 1 Using lt File gt lt Change directory gt you can select any drive or another directory on your PC If you want to control data transfer from the PC establish the connection with your PC in the following manner gt Select lt File gt lt Setup connection gt TNCremo now receives the tile and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the bottom left of the main window 2 gt To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC select the Til
304. emove the cause of the error gt Restart If you cannot correct the error write down the error message and contact your service agency TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 555 Test run and program run 16 5 Program run Retraction after a power interruption 2 The Retraction mode of operation must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual With the Retraction mode of operation you can disengage the tool from the workpiece after an interruption in power The Retraction mode of operation is selectable in the following conditions m Power interruption m Relay external DC voltage missing m Traverse reference points The Retraction operating mode offers the following modes of traverse Mode Function Machine axes Movement of all axes in the original coordinate system Tilted system Movement of all axes in the active coordinate system Effective parameters Position of the tilting axes Tool axis Movements of the tool axis in the active coordinate system Thread Movements of the tool axis in the active coordinate system with compensating movement of the spindle Effective parameters Thread pitch and direction of rotation The tilted system mode of traverse is available only when tilting the working plane Option 8 is enabled on your TNC The TNC selects the mode of traverse and the associated parameters automatically If
305. ence point After you have selected the desired blank form via soft key the TNC automatically initiates the workpiece blank definition and asks for the required data gt Working plane in graphic XY Enter the active spindle axis Z is saved as default setting Accept with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def Minimum X Enter the smallest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def Minimum Y Smallest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def Minimum Z Smallest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 40 confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def Maximum X Enter the largest X coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 100 confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def Maximum Y Enter the largest Y coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 100 Confirm with the ENT key gt Workpiece blank def Maximum Z Enter the largest Z coordinate of the workpiece blank with respect to the reference point e g 0 Confirm with the ENT key The TNC concludes the dialog Example NC blocks 0 BEGIN PGM NEW MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 40 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 3 END PGM NEW MM Further information on this topic m Defining the wo
306. ength or stylus probe compensation workpiece coordinate system Oriented spindle stop Read values Read the basic transformation of a preset Read the axis offset of a preset Read the number of the active preset Tool length L Tool radius R Tool radius R2 Oversize for tool length DL Tool radius oversize DR Tool radius oversize DR2 Tool locked TL O not locked 1 locked Number of the replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME 323 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions Group name ID no Number Index Meaning 12 PLC status 13 Maximum tooth length LCUTS 14 Maximum plunge angle ANGLE 15 TT Number of tool teeth CUT 16 TT Wear tolerance for length LTOL 17 TT Wear tolerance for radius RTOL 18 TT Direction of rotation DIRECT 0 Positive 1 Negative 19 TT Offset in plane R OFFS 20 TT Offset in length LOFFS 21 TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK 22 TT Break tolerance for radius RBREAK 23 PLC value 24 Tool type TYP 0 Milling cutter 21 Touch probe 2 Corresponding line in the touch probe table 32 Point angle 34 Lift off Touch probe cycles 990 1 Approach behaviour 0 Standard behavior 1 Effective radius Safety clearance zero 2 O Pushbutton monitoring off 1 Pushbutton monitoring on 4 0 Stylus not deflected 1 Stylus deflected 8 Current spindle angle Execution status 992 1
307. ent True When breakage tolerance is exceeded the NC program is stopped False The NC program is not stopped Modification of tool table during tool check and measurement AdaptOnMeasure Table modified after tool measurement AdaptOnBoth Table modified after tool check and measurement AdaptNever Table not modified after tool check and measurement Configuring a round stylus TT140_1 Coordinates of stylus center 0 X coordinates of stylus center referenced to machine datum 1 Y coordinates of stylus center referenced to machine datum 2 Z coordinates of stylus center referenced to machine datum safety clearance above stylus for pre position 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Safety clearance in tool axis direction Safety zone around stylus for pre position 0 001 to 99 999 9999 mm Safety clearance in the plane vertically to the tool axis TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 603 Tables and overviews 18 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter settings ChannelSettings CH_NC Active kinematics Kinematics to be activated List of machine kinematics Kinematics to be activated with control start up List of machine kinematics Determining the behavior of the NC program Resetting the machining time with program start True Machining time is reset False Machining time is not reset PLC signal for number of pending machining cycle Dependent on machine builder Geometry tolerances Permissibl
308. enter the rotation angle and feed rate you wrote down e g L C 2 561 F50 N e Vv gt Conclude entry Press the machine START button The rotation of the table corrects the misalignment TNC 620 User s Manual 532 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming and executing simple machining operations 15 1 Protecting and erasing programs in MDI The MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only needed temporarily Nevertheless you can store a program if necessary by proceeding as described below gt Select the Programming mode of operation gt To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key gt Move the highlight to the MD file gt Copy a file Press the COPY soft key DESTINATION FILE gt Enter the name under which you want to save the current contents of the MDI file e g BORE gt Press the OK soft key gt Close the file manager END soft key For more information see Copying a single Tile page 118 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 533 Test run and program run 16 1 Graphics option 20 16 1 Graphics option 20 Application In the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes as well as in the Test Run operating mode the TNC simulates the machining of the workpiece The TNC features the following views m Plan view m Projection in three planes m 3 D view I
309. eoe 405 Freely definable tables FS Functional safety 481 FU i Eisneris 223 Functional safety FS 481 Fundamentals 94 Goo Grap NiO Ginnie 536 Display MOdE S 0cccceee 538 With programming 149 Magnification of details 152 Graphic SC TINGS vsccagectieacgeneteces 568 Graphic simulation 0 544 Jool display 544 HO Handwheel ccccceeeeeeeeeneees 469 FV LCOS E O E 111 Helical interpolation 0 2353 E es E A NEE IA 233 Help SYSTEM ccccccceeeeeeeee ees 158 Help with error messages 153 TNC 620 User s Manual Initiated tools 176 Inserting and modifying blocks 107 Interrupt Machining 553 UNC i yaaa iins n a 70 BO Load machine configuration 594 LOOK GING Arasia 374 Moo MIT IVI sense teergonctennsecteenccininte 366 Machine settings 569 Manual datum setting 515 Circle center as datum 517 Corner as datum 0008 516 IN ANY AX S 515 setting a center line as datum 519 Measurement of machining Measuring workpieces 520 M functions For program run Inspection 365 For spindle and coolant 365 see miscellaneous functions 364 Mid program startup 559 After power failur 559 Miscellaneous functions 364 ENIE re 364 For coordinate data 366 For path behaviotr 0 369
310. eous functions M in contour subprogram m M110 feed rate reduction for inside corner General cylinder surface machining Contour definition Offset definition on cylinder surface Offset definition for basic rotation Circle programming with C CC APPR DEP blocks in contour definition Cylinder surface machining with Cycle 28 Complete roughing out of slot Definable tolerance Cylinder surface machining with Cycle 29 Cycles 25x for pockets studs and slots m Plunging movements TNC 620 User s Manual TNC 620 Cannot be defined with complex contour formula Real set operation possible m Error message is issued m Error message Is issued m Error message is issued m Function does not work within SL cycles m With X Y coordinates independent of machine type m With datum shift in X Y independent of machine type Function available Function available Function not available Function available Function available Direct plunging to contour of ridge In limit ranges geometrical conditions of tool contour error messages are triggered if plunging movements lead to unreasonable critical behavior HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 ITNC 530 Restricted definition in complex contour formula is possible Only restricted performance of real set operation possible Radius compensation is canceled program is executed Program is ex
311. equal Tool data inconsistent HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Additional functions 9 8 311 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions FN16 F PRINT Formatted output of text and Q parameter values With FN16 F PRINT you can also output to the screen any messages from the NC program Such messages are displayed by the TNC in a pop up window The function FN16 F PRINT transfers Q parameter values and texts In a selectable format If you send the values the TNC saves the data in the Tile that you defined in the FN16 block The maximum size of the output file is 20 kilobytes To output the formatted texts and O parameter values create a text file with the TNC s text editor In this file you then define the output format and Q parameters you want to output Example of a text file to define the output format MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATUM 02d 02d 04d DAY MONTH YEAR4 TIME 02d 02d 02d HOUR MIN SEC NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 9 3LF Q31 Y1 9 3LF Q32 Z1 9 3LF Q33 When you create a text file use the following formatting functions Special Function characters eae Define output format for texts and variables between the quotation marks 9 3LF Define the format for Q parameters 9 total characters incl decimal point of which 3 are after the decimal Long Floating decimal number S Format for tex
312. equence of all tools Copying and pasting of all tool data pertaining to a tool Graphic depiction of tool type in the table view and in the detail view for a better overview of the available tool types Expanded tool management ove J Programming Tools Pockets Tooling list T usage order T TYP NAME PTYP PE POCKE MAGAZINE Tool life REMAING L NULLWERKZEUG Not monitor 0 mnouw sr wo n Bo oo v7 097 09 O99 O09 OOD MOO O09 0 0 0 Ro Qadgadeeaedaceaceaeaaeaakdgwcieaanaaaa a Bea T g E E E E i E E E mi w m O H o jon o oni END BAGE RAGE MAGAZINE FORM FOR t l MANAGEMENT TOOL TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Available tool types Icon Tool type fT Milling cutter MILL Drill DRILL Tap TAP Center drill CENT Turning Tool TURN Touch probe TCHP Ream REAM Countersink CSINK F H i ll v Piloted counterbore TSINK TSINK Boring tool BOR Back boring tool BCKBOR Thread mill GF Thread mill w countersink GSF Thread mill w single thread EP Thread mill w indxbl insert WSP Thread milling drill BGF Circular thread mill ZBGF Roughing cutter MILL_R MILL_R Finishing cutter MILL_F MILL_F Rough finish cutter MILL_RF Ss Mt ca S Ss ee 2 Floor finisher MILL_FD MILL_FD TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 189 Programmi
313. er or by HEIDENHAIN Whenever the TNC comes to a block with FN 14 ERROR in the Program Run or Test Run mode it interrupts the program run and displays a message The program must then be restarted The error numbers are listed In the table Range of error numbers Standard dialog text QO 999 1000 1199 Machine dependent dialog Internal error messages see table Example NC block The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 1000 180 FN 14 ERROR 1000 Error message predefined by HEIDENHAIN Error number Text 1000 Spindle 1001 Tool axis is missing 1002 Tool radius too small 1003 Tool radius too large 1004 Range exceeded 1005 Start position incorrect 1006 ROTATION not permitted 1007 SCALING FACTOR not permitted 1008 MIRROR IMAGE not permitted 1009 Datum shift not permitted 1010 Feed rate is missing 1011 Input value incorrect 1012 Incorrect sign 1013 Entered angle not permitted 1014 Touch point inaccessible 1015 Too many points 1016 Contradictory input 1017 CYCL incomplete 1018 Plane wrongly defined 1019 Wrong axis programmed 1020 Wrong rom 1021 Radius comp undefined 1022 Rounding off undetined 1023 Rounding radius too large 1024 Program start undefined 308 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Additional functions 9 8 Error number Text 1025 Excessive nesting 1026 Angle reference missing 1027 No fixed cycle defined 1028 Slot width
314. er s Manual 440 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes 12 4 M128 on tilting tables If you program a tilting table movement while M128 is active the TNC rotates the coordinate system accordingly If for example you rotate the C axis by 90 through a positioning command or datum shift and then program a movement in the X axis the TNC executes the movement in the machine axis Y The TNC also transtorms the defined datum which has been shifted by the movement of the rotary table M128 with 3 D tool compensation If you carry out a 3 D tool compensation with active M128 and active radius compensation RL RR the TNC will automatically position the rotary axes for certain machine geometrical configurations Peripheral milling see Three dimensional tool compensation option 9 page 450 Effect M128 becomes effective at the start of block M129 at the end of block M128 is also effective in the manual operating modes and remains active even after a change of mode The feed rate for the compensation movement will be effective until you program a new feed rate or until you cancel M128 with M129 Enter M129 to cancel M128 The TNC also cancels M128 if you select a new program in a program run operating mode Example NC blocks Feed rate of 1000 mm min for compensation movements L X 0 Y 38 5 IB 15 RL F125 M128 F1000 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming
315. er the number of the QS parameter from which the substring is to be copied Confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the place starting from which to copy the substring and confirm with the ENT key SUBSTR gt Enter the number of characters to be copied and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Starts internally with the zeroth place Remember that the first character of a text sequence Example A four character substring LEN4 is read from the string parameter QS10 beginning with the third character BEG2 37 QS13 SUBSTR SRC_QS10 BEG2 LEN4 344 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 String parameters 9 11 Converting a string parameter to a numerical value The TONUMB function converts a string parameter to a numerical value The value to be converted should be only numerical The OS parameter must contain only one numerical value Otherwise the TNC will output an error message gt Select O parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the parameter in which the TNC is to save the numerical value Confirm with the ENT key shift the soft key row FORMULA gt Select the function for converting a string parameter to a numerical value TONUMB ye gt Enter the number of the OS parameter to be converted and confirm wit
316. er the value for the position to be approached e g 20 gt Press the orange axis key Y and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 20 Confirm your entry with the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Confirm Miscellaneous function M with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block gt Move tool to working depth Press the orange axis key Z and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 5 Press the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate the radius compensation gt Feed rate F Enter the positioning feed rate e g 3000 mm min confirm with the ENT key gt Miscellaneous function M Switch on the spindle and coolant e g M13 confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block gt Move to the contour Press the APPR DEP key The TNC shows a soft key row with approach and departure functions TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 55 First steps with the TNC 620 1 3 Programming the first part gt Select the approach function APPR CT Enter the coordinates of the contour starting point 1 in X and Y e g 5 5 confirm with the ENT key gt Center angle Enter the approach angle e g 90 confirm with t
317. erent blocks set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF gt Select a word in a block Press the arrow key repeatedly until the highlight is on the desired word gt Select a block with the arrow keys The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one you selected previously If you have started a search in a very long program the TNC shows a progress display window You then have the option of canceling the search via soft key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 107 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening programs and entering Marking copying cutting and inserting program sections The TNC provides the following functions for copying program sections within an NC program or into another NC program Soft key Function Pee switch the marking function on BLOCK CANCEL Switch the marking function off SELECTION CUT Cut the marked block ee EER Insert the block that is stored in the buffer BLOCK memory ER Copy the marked block BLOCK To copy a program section proceed as follows M Select the soft key row containing the marking functions y Select the first block of the section you wish to copy Mark the first block Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key The TNC then highlights the block and displays the CANCEL SELECTION soft key M M Move the highlight to the last block of the program section you wish to copy or cut The TNC show
318. erface gt Press the Configuration button to open the Configuration menu Setting Meaning Status Active interface Connection status of the selected Ethernet interface Name Name of the interface you are currently configuring Plug connection Number of the plug connection of this interface on the logic unit of the control Profile Here you can create or select a profile in which all settings shown in this window are stored HEIDENHAIN provides two standard profiles DHCP LAN Settings for the standard TNC Ethernet interface should work in a standard company network MachineNet Settings for the second optional Ethernet interface for configuration of the machine network Press the corresponding buttons to save load and delete profiles IP address Option Automatically procure IP address The TNC is to procure the IP address from the DHCP server Option Manually set IP address Manually define the IP address and subnet mask Inout Four numerical values separated by points in each field e g 160 1 180 20 and 255 255 0 0 Domain Name Option Automatically procure DNS The Server DNS TNC is to automatically procure the IP address of the domain name server Option Manually configure DNS Manually enter the IP addresses of the servers and the domain name Default Option Automatically procure default gateway GW The TNC is to automatically procure the default gateway Option Manually configure
319. es 637 Comparison Differenc s in programimin G sessersececaedrnortessnaencennacatmnntnand iaaii iii iaten 639 Comparison Differences in Test Run TUNCHONGLILY crisis coistaisddeninteswosmencamanit etulavidunin teas pininbwsnieeaeeeaies 643 Comparison Differences in lest RUN OD STATON is sic icsiiccahodtuacansdsneslsi niente e eeni enaena E E i 643 Comparison Differences in Manual Operation TUNCTIONAIILY ccc ceccce cece ee eeee ects eeeee esse ecen estan eeaneeenes 643 Comparison Differences in Manual Operation OPEration ccccccceccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeseeeeenaeenas 645 Comparison Differences in Program RUN OPEratiONn cccccecccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeseaeeeeeeeeeeetaetaneeneeenans 645 Comparison Differences in Program Run traverse MOVEMENNS ccccceccceeecceeeeceeeeeneeeeseeeeeneeesneees 646 Comparison Differences in MDI OPeration ccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeee seen eeeueeeaneesneeeaeseanetanes 650 Comparison Differences in programming StatOMiissininivasscussnvincini viavsainveariiwasiarsartaswtnswreiabonimenasvaweawes 651 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 First steps with the TNC 620 1 1 Overview 1 1 Overview This chapter is intended to helo TNC beginners quickly learn to handle the most important procedures For more information on a respective topic see the section referred to in the text The following topics
320. es shown in the table below Some of the files can also be edited File types PDF files Excel tables Internet files Text files Graphics files Type pdf xls CSV html txt ini bmp gif JPY png For further information about displaying and editing the listed file types see page 126 Data backup We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals The TNCremo data transmission freeware from HEIDENHAIN is a simple and convenient method for backing up data stored on the TNC You additionally need a data medium on which all machine specific data such as the PLC program machine parameters etc are stored Ask your machine manufacturer for assistance if necessary Take the time occasionally to delete any unneeded files so that the TNC always has enough memory Space for system Tiles such as the tool table TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 3 3 113 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager 3 4 Working with the file manager Directories To ensure that you can easily find your files we recommend that you organize your internal memory into directories You can divide a directory into further directories which are called subdirectories With the key or ENT you can show or hide the subdirectories Paths A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories un
321. ess field enter the IP number for which you want to check the network connection Input four numerical values separated by periods e g 160 1 180 20 As an alternative you can enter the name of the computer whose connection you want to check authonzaton m Press the Start button to begin the test The TNC shows the status information in the Ping field m Press the Stop button to conclude the test Routing For network specialists Status information of the operating system for the current routing m Press the Update button to refresh the routing information gt Select the NFS UID GID tab to enter the user and group identifications Wanvai operation Programing 09 28 ann LTNC nc_prog PGM H 1 DXF S0 nc_prog Network settings BO demo Computername tnterlaces internet Ping Routing NFS UID GIO DHCP server 3 PGM Set UIDIGID for NFS shares 55 Setting Meaning Set UID GID m User ID Definition of which user for NFS shares identification the end user uses to access files in the network Ask your network specialist for the proper value Group ID Definition of the group identification with which you access files in the network Ask your network specialist for the proper value User UID 1500 a0 tnoguide sem am Lee Iss TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 585 17 MOD functions 17 11 Ethernet interface gt DHCP server Settings for automatic net
322. est available path starting from the current position To attain the most continuous multiaxis movement possible define Cycle 32 with a tolerance for rotary axes see Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Cycle 32 TOLERANCE The tolerance of the rotary axes should be about the same as the tolerance of the contouring deviation that is also defined in Cycle 32 The greater the tolerance for the rotary axes Is defined the greater are the contour deviations during peripheral milling Example NC blocks 13 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS SPAT PATHCTRL AXIS Tool tip moves along a straight line 14 FUNCTION TCPM F TCP AXIS POS PATHCTRL VECTOR Tool tip and tool directional vector move in one plane 448 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 FUNCTION TCPM option 9 12 5 Resetting the TCPM FUNCTION gt FUNCTION RESET TCPM is to be used if you want to purposely reset the function within a program The TNC automatically resets TCPM FUNCTION if you select a new program in a program run mode You can reset the TCPM FUNCTION only if the PLANE function is inactive If required run PLANE RESET before FUNCTION RESET TCPM Example NC blocks TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 449 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 6 Three dimensional tool compensation option 9 12 6 Three dimensional tool compensation option 9 Introduction The TNC can carry
323. et table Aligning 3 D basic rotation If the machine has two rotary axes and the probed 3 D basic rotation is activated you can align the rotary axes with reference to the 3 D basic rotation using the ALIGN ROTARY AXES soft key In such cases Tilted Working Plane becomes active for all machine operating modes After aligning the plane you can align the reference axis with the Probing rot function Displaying 3 D basic rotation In the status display the TNC shows the symbol IM for the 3 D basic rotation if a 3 D basic rotation is saved in the active datum The TNC traverses the machine axes according to the 3 D basic rotation Canceling a 3 D basic rotation aoe gt Select the probe function by pressing the Boy PROBING PL soft key gt Enter O for all angles gt Press the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key gt Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key TNC 620 User s Manual 514 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 14 10 14 10 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 Overview The following soft key functions are available for setting the datum on an aligned workpiece Soft key Function Page PROBING Datum setting In any axis with 515 v T PROBING Setting a corner as datum 516 PROBING Setting a circle center as datum 517 e PROBING Center line as datum 519 Jae Setting the center line as datum Datum setting in any axi
324. eter functions FN 26 to FN 28 a AR ioe are provided for this purpose You can change the format of freely definable tables i e the columns and their properties by using the structure editor They enable you to make tables that are exactly tailored to your application You can also switch between table view default setting and form view iting Coordinate BEGIN PAGE PAGE 4 47 Creating a freely definable table gt To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key gt Enter any file name with the TAB extension and confirm with the ENT key The TNC displays a pop up window with permanently saved table formats gt Use the arrow key to select a table template e g EXAMPLE TAB and confirm with the ENT key The TNC opens a new table in the predefined format gt To adapt the table to your requirements you have to edit the table format see Editing the table format page 404 Machine tool builders may define their own table templates and save them in the TNC When you create a new table the TNC opens a pop up window listing all available table templates You can also save your own table templates in the TNC To do this you create a new table change the table format and save the table in the TNC system proto directory Then your template will also be available in the list box for table templates when you create a new table TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programm
325. ew file with the selected text Inserting another file at the cursor position gt Move the cursor to the location in the text where you wish to insert another Tile es gt Press the READ FILE soft key The TNC displays FILE the dialog prompt File name gt Enter the path and name of the Tile you want to insert TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 401 Programming Special functions 11 6 Creating text files Finding text sections With the text editor you can search for words or character strings in a text Two functions are available Finding the current text The search function is used for finding the next occurrence of the word in which the cursor is presently located gt Move the cursor to the desired word gt Select the search function Press the FIND soft key gt Press the FIND CURRENT WORD soft key gt Exit the search function Press the END soft key Finding any text gt Select the search function Press the FIND soft key The TNC displays the dialog prompt Find text gt Enter the text that you wish to find gt To find the text press the FIND soft key gt Exit the search function Press the END soft key TNC 620 User s Manual 402 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Freely definable tables 11 7 11 7 Freely definable tables Fundamentals In freely definable tables you can read and save any information gt See from the NC program The Q param
326. ey Only possible if startup position has already been approached Error messages are still active after the error has been corrected and must be acknowledged separately With point pattern cycles and CYCL CALL PAT the control stops after each point HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Switching the operating mode is allowed modal information Is saved program run can be continued by pressing NC start GOTO allowed Function also possible after starting the NC program Menu for returning is selected automatically The positioning mode is automatically exited after the position has been reached Possible in all operating states Error messages are sometimes acknowledged automatically after the error has been corrected Point pattern cycles and CYCL CALL PAT are handled by the control as a single block 645 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Comparison Differences in Program Run traverse movements Caution Check the traverse movements NC programs that were created on earlier TNC controls may lead to different traverse movements or error messages on a INC 620 Be sure to take the necessary care and caution when running in programs Please find a list of known differences below The list does not pretend to be complete Function Handwheel superimposed traverse with M118 Approach Departure with APPR DEP RO is active cont
327. ey The TNC opens a window with information on the error cause and corrective tan Fkigchs MUTOH APPR OED and looks sh motion component perpendicular to th action action a st solve the FK sequence completely or delete illegal positioning blocks fined over ray conto gt Leave Info Press the soft key again aiii ing keys and hav d t the working plane are illegal exception RND CHF APPR DEP SSS R INTERNAL LOG MORE CHANGE DELETE DELETE C INFO FILES FUNCTIONS WINDOW ALL INTERNAL INFO soft key The INTERNAL INFO soft key supplies information on the error message This information is only required if servicing is needed gt Open the error window T gt Detailed information about the error message INFO Position the highlight on the error message and press the INTERNAL INFO soft key The TNC opens a window with internal information about the error gt To exit Details press the INTERNAL INFO soft key again TNC 620 User s Manual 154 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Error messages 4 8 Clearing errors Clearing errors outside of the error window gt Clear the errors messages in the header Press the CE key In some operating modes such as the Editing mode the CE button cannot be used to clear the error since the button is reserved for other functions Deleting errors gt Open the error window gt Clear individual errors Position th
328. f day at which the program is to be started gt Date DD MM YYYY Date on which the program is to be started gt To activate the start press the OK TNC 620 User s Manual 562 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Optional block skip 16 7 16 7 Optional block skip Application In a test run or program run the control can skip over blocks that begin with a slash gt Torun or test the program without the blocks preceded by a slash set the soft key to ON gt Torun or test the program with the blocks preceded by a slash set the soft key to OFF This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks After a power interruption the TNC returns to the most recently selected setting Inserting the character gt Inthe Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be Inserted gt Select the INSERT soft key Erasing the character gt Inthe Programming mode you select the block in which the character is to be deleted gt Select the REMOVE soft key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 563 Test run and program run 16 8 Optional program run interruption 16 8 Optional program run interruption Application The behavior of this function varies depending on the respective machine wi Refer to your machine manual The TNC optionally interrupts program run at blocks containing M1 If you use M1 in the Program Ru
329. f hole positions with the mouse area page 269 Quick selection of hole positions via an icon Actuate the icon and the TNC then displays all existing hole diameters see Rapid selection of hole positions via icon page 270 Select the file type The following file types are available Point table PNT m Plain language program H If you save the machining positions to a plain language program the TNC creates a separate linear block with cycle call for every machining position L X Y M99 You can also transfer this program to old TNC controls and run it there The point table PTN from the TNC 640 is not compatible with the 1TNC 530 Running the point table causes problems and unpredictable behavior TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 267 7 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 73 DXF converter option 42 Single selection position The graphics window becomes active for position selection gt To select a machining position Click the desired element with the mouse and the TNC displays the element in orange If you simultaneously press the shift key the TNC indicates possible machining positions on the element with stars If you click a circle the TNC adopts the circle center as machining position If you simultaneously press the shift key the TNC indicates possible machining positions with stars The TNC loads the selected position into t
330. f the tilted X axis POINTS Coordinates of any 424 three points in the plane to be tilted RELATIVE Single incrementally 426 effective spatial angle AXIAL Up to three absolute or 427 incremental axis angles A B C RESET Resetting the PLANE 416 function TNC 620 User s Manual 414 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Defining the PLANE function gt Show the soft key row with special functions TILT gt Select the PLANE function Press the TILT ee MACHINING PLANE soft key The TNC displays the available definition possibilities in the soft key row Selecting functions gt Select the desired function by soft key The TNC continues the dialog and requests the required parameters Position display As soon as a PLANE function is active the TNC shows the calculated spatial angle in the additional status display see figure As arule the TNC internally always calculates with spatial angles independent of which PLANE function is active During tilting MOVE or TURN mode in the Distance To Go mode DIST the TNC shows in the rotary axis the distance to go or calculated distance to the final position of the rotary axis TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 W vanual operation B Programming ez D G Programmi ing TNC nc_prog 14 h 0 BEGIN PGM 14 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 2
331. f this service is blocked the VNC configuration dialog shows a warning from HEROS that VNC is disabled in the firewall TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 589 17 MOD functions 17 12 Firewall Option Meaning Method Under Method you can configure whether the service should not be available to anyone Prohibit all available to everyone Permit all or only available to some Permit some If you set Permit some you must also specify the computer under Computer that you wish to grant access to the respective service If you do not specify any computer under Computer the setting Prohibit all will become active automatically when the configuration is saved Log If Log is activated a red message is output if a network package for this service was blocked A blue message is output If a network package for this service was accepted Computer If the setting Permit some is selected under Method the relevant computers can be specified here The computers can be entered with their IP addresses or host names separated by commas If a host name Is used the system checks upon closing or saving of the dialog whether the host name can be translated into an IP address If this is not the case the user receives an error message and the dialog box is not closed If you enter a valid host name this host name will be translated into an IP address upon every startup of the control If a compute
332. face X option 19 X 232 Face milling X option 19 X 233 Face milling new X option 19 240 Centering X option 19 X 241 single lip deep hole drilling X option 19 X 247 Datum setting X X 251 Rectangular pocket complete X option 19 X 252 Circular pocket complete X option 19 X 253 Slot milling complete X option 19 X 254 Circular slot complete X option 19 X 256 Rectangular stud complete X option 19 X 257 Circular stud complete X option 19 X 262 Thread milling X option 19 X 263 Thread milling counter sinking X option 19 X 264 Thread drilling milling X option 19 X 265 Helical thread drilling milling X option 19 X 267 outside thread milling X option 19 X 270 contour train data for defining the behavior of Cycle 25 X X TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 633 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Cycle TNC 620 ITNC 530 275 trochoidal milling X option 19 X 276 3 D contour train X 290 Interpolation turning X option 96 TNC 620 User s Manual 634 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Comparison Miscellaneous functions M M00 M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 M08 M09 M13 M14 M30 M89 M90 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 M109 M110 M111 Effect Program STOP Spin
333. ference axis for the polar angle PA Coordinates of the pole Reference axis of the angle plane N X Y Z Y ZIX Z 96 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Fundamentals 3 1 Absolute and incremental workpiece positions Absolute workpiece positions Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to the datum of the coordinate system origin Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates Example 1 Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 X 10mm X 30 Mmm X 50 mm Y 10 Mmm Y 20 mm Y 30 mm Incremental workpiece positions Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed nominal position of the tool which serves as the relative imaginary datum When you write an NC program in incremental coordinates you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the previous and the subsequent nominal positions This is why they are also referred to as chain dimensions To program a position in incremental coordinates enter the function l before the axis Example 2 Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates Absolute coordinates of hole 4 X 10mm Y 10 Mmm Hole 5 with respect to 4 Hole 6 with respect to 5 X 20 mm X 20 mm Y 10 Mmm Y 10 mm Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the angle reference axi
334. ffect on the compensation Danger of collision On machines whose rotary axes only allow limited traverse sometimes automatic positioning can require the table to be rotated by 180 In this case make sure that the tool head does not collide with the workpiece or the clamps TNC 620 User s Manual 454 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Three dimensional tool compensation option 9 12 6 There are two ways to define the tool orientation m n an LN block with the components TX TY and TZ n an L block by indicating the coordinates of the rotary axes Example Block format with tool orientation 1 LN X 31 737 Y 21 954 Z 33 165 TX 0 0078922 TY 0 8764339 TZ 0 2590319 RR F1000 M128 LN Straight line with 3 D compensation X Y Z Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point TX TY TZ Components of the normalized vector for workpiece orientation RR Tool radius compensation F Feed rate M Miscellaneous function Example Block format with rotary axes 1 L X 31 737 Y 21 954 Z 33 165 B 12 357 C 5 896 RL F1000 M128 L Straight line X Y Z Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point B C Coordinates of the rotary axes for tool orientation RL Radius Compensation F Feed rate M Miscellaneous function TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 455 Programming Pallet editor 13 1 Pallet management option 22 13 1 Pallet management
335. finition SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions EN gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions Select transformations TRANSFORM TRANE gt Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM gt Reset the cursor to the function TRANS AXIS Vv gt Select datum shitting with TRANS DATUM TABLE gt If desired enter the name of the datum table trom which you want to activate the datum number and confirm with the ENT key If you do not want to define a datum table confirm with the NO ENT key gt Enter the line number to be activated by the TNC and confirm with the ENT key If you did not define a datum table in the TRANS DATUM TABLE block then the TNC uses the datum table already selected in the NC program with SEL TABLE or the datum table with status M selected in the Program Run Single Block or Program Run Full Sequence operating mode TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 397 Programming Special functions 11 5 Definition of a datum shift TRANS DATUM RESET Use the TRANS DATUM RESET function to cancel a datum shift How NC block you previously defined the datum Is irrelevant Proceed as follows for 13 TRANS DATUM RESET the definition SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions EN gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions Select transformations TRANSFORM vy TRANE g
336. for the Test Run and Programming modes the TNC also uses the TOOL T tool table In the Test Run mode press the TOOL TABLE soft key to edit it To open the tool table TOOL T gt Select any machine operating mode TOOL gt Select the tool table Press the TOOL TABLE soft TNC table tool t NAME PAGE SSS BEGIN END PAGE key Tote tlle gt Set the EDIT soft key to ON Displaying only specific tool types filter setting gt Press the TABLE FILTER soft key fourth soft key row gt Select the tool type by pressing a soft key The TNC only shows tools of the type selected gt Cancel the filter Press the SHOW ALL soft key The machine tool builder adapts the features of the filter function to the requirements of your machine Refer to your machine manual TNC 620 User s Manual 174 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Hiding or sorting the tool table columns You can adapt the layout of the tool table to your needs Columns that should not be displayed can be hidden gt Press the SORT HIDE COLUMNS soft key fourth soft key row gt Select the appropriate column name with the arrow key gt Press the HIDE COLUMN soft key to remove this column from the table layout You can also modify the sequence of columns in the table gt You can also modify the sequence of columns in the table with the Move to dialog The entry highlighted in Dis
337. g parameters for the key entity and attribute then confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number for the index or skip the dialog with NO ENT whichever applies gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Read as a string the axis designation of the fourth axis Parameter settings in the configuration editor DisplaySettings CfgDisplayData axisDisplayOrder O to 5 14 DECLARE STRINGQS11 Assign string parameter for key 15 DECLARE STRINGQS12 CFGDISPLAYDATA Assign string parameter for entity 16 DECLARE STRINGQS13 AXISDISPLAYORDER Assign string parameter for parameter name 17 QS1 Read out machine parameter CFGREAD KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 IDX3 TNC 620 User s Manual 350 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 String parameters 9 11 Reading a numerical value of a machine parameter Store the value of a machine parameter as a numerical value in a Q parameter oal gt Select Q parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the machine parameter Confirm with the ENT key gt Select the CFGREAD function gt Enter the numbers of the string parameters for the key entity and attribute then confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number for the index or skip the dialog with NO ENT whichever applies gt Close the parenthetical expression w
338. ge FUNCTIONS functions A gt Select FUNCTION PARAX PARAX FUNCTION gt Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE PARAXMODE UNETAN gt Select FUNCTION PARAXMODE PARAXMODE gt Define the axes for machining Move the principal axis and the parallel axis simultaneously If the PARAXMODE function is active the TNC uses the axes defined NC block in the function to execute the programmed traverse movements 13 FUNCTION PARAXMODE X Y W If the TNC is to traverse a parallel axis simultaneously with the associated principal axis you can identify the respective axis by 14 L Z 100 amp Z 150 RO FMAX additionally entering the character amp The axis with the amp character then refers to the principal axis The syntax element amp is only permitted in L blocks Additional positioning of a principal axis with the amp command is done in the REF system If you have set the position display to actual value this movement will not be shown If necessary switch the position display to REF value TNC 620 User s Manual 392 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the parallel axes U V and W 11 3 Deactivating FUNCTION PARAXMODE NC block After the TNC is started up the standard configuration 13 FUNCTION PARAXMODE OFF is always effective The parallel axis function PARAXMODE OFF is automatically reset by the TNC via the following functions Selection of a program End of program
339. ghted gt Click the second element straight line complete circle or circular arc with the left mouse button The TNC sets the reference point symbol on the intersection The TNC calculates the intersection of two elements even if it is on the extension of one of these elements If the TNC calculates multiple intersections it selects the intersection nearest the mouse click on the second element If the TNC cannot calculate an intersection it rescinds the marking of the element If a datum is set the color of the icon Set datum changes Delete a datum by clicking the icon amp Element information The TNC shows how far the reference point you haven chosen is located from the drawing datum MC_prog plevel conrod DXF 2 axf M HGCr SR tuS 242 oma 5 Oo x 12 0000 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 263 7 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 713 DXF converter option 42 Selecting and saving a contour You must use the touchpad on the TNC keyboard or a mouse attached via the USB port in order to select a contour specify the direction of rotation during contour selection so that it matches the desired machining direction Select the first contour element such that approach without collision is possible If the contour elements are very close to one another use the zoom function The following DXF elements are selectable as cont
340. gram or subprogram TOKEN STOTAL Path name of the subprogram T Tool number with tool index OVRMIN Minimum feed rate override that occurred during machining During Test Run the TNC enters the value 1 NAMEPROG 0 The tool number is programmed 1 The tool name is programmed There are two ways to run a tool usage test for a pallet file The highlight in the pallet file is on a pallet entry The TNC runs the tool usage test for the entire pallet The highlight in the pallet file is on a pallet entry The TNC runs the tool usage test for the entire pallet TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 187 188 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Tool management Option 93 Tool management is a machine dependent function which may be partly or completely deactivated The machine tool builder defines the exact range of functions Refer to your machine manual With the tool management your machine tool builder can provide many functions with regard to tool handling Examples Easily readable and if you desire adaptable representation of the tool data in fillable forms Any description of the individual tool data in the new table view Mixed representation of data from the tool table and the pocket table Fast sorting of all tool data by mouse Use of graphic aids e g color coding of tool or magazine status Program specitic list of all available tools Program specitic usage s
341. gramming 2 2015 245 Programming Programming contours 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Auxiliary points For both free programmed straight lines and free programmed circular arcs you can enter the coordinates of auxiliary points that are located on the contour or In Its proximity Auxiliary points on a contour The auxiliary points are located on the straight line the extension of the straight line or on the circular arc Soft keys Known data 3 X coordinate of an auxiliary point P1 or P2 of a straight line Y coordinate of an auxiliary point a P2y P1 or P2 of a straight line PAX e P2X PBX e X coordinate of an auxiliary point WZ LJ ae P1 P2 or P3 of a circular path Pav P2Y P3Y e Y coordinate of an auxiliary point m LJ L P1 P2 or P3 of a circular path Auxiliary points near a contour Soft keys Known data X and Y coordinates of the a E auxiliary point near a straight line p Distance of auxiliary point to straight line X and Y coordinates of an sa a an auxiliary point near a circular arc a Distance of auxiliary point to circular arc Example NC blocks 13 FC DR R10 P1X 42 929 P1Y 60 071 14 FLT AN 70 PDX 50 PDY 53 D10 TNC 620 User s Manual 246 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 6 6 Relative data Data whose values are based on another contour element are called relative data The soft keys and progr
342. gt Select the DECLARE STRING function STRING Example NC block 37 DECLARE STRING QS10 WORKPIECE Chain linking string parameters With the concatenation operator string parameter string parameter you can make a chain of two or more string parameters SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions y Open the function menu PROGRAM FUNCTIONS Select string functions STRING FUNCTIONS STRING gt Select the STRING FORMULA function FORMULA gt Vv Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the concatenated string Confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the string parameter in which the first substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key The TNC displays the concatenation symbol gt Confirm your entry with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the string parameter in which the second substring is saved Confirm with the ENT key gt Repeat the process until you have selected all the required substrings Conclude with the END key TNC 620 User s Manual 342 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 String parameters 9 11 Example QS10 is to include the complete text of QS12 QS13 and QS14 37 QS10 QS12 QS13 QS14 Parameter contents QS12 Workpiece QS13 Status QS14 Scrap QS10 Workpiece Status Scrap Converting a numerical value to a string parameter With the TOCHAR function the TNC converts a numerical value to a
343. h probes Other touch probes are configured by the machine tool builder After the touch probe is inserted it normally needs to be aligned exactly with the spindle axis The calibration function can determine the offset between touch probe axis and spindle axis by probing from opposite orientations rotation by 180 and can compute the compensation The calibration routine varies depending on how your touch probe can be oriented No orientation possible or orientation possible in only one direction The TNC executes one approximate and one fine measurement and determines the effective ball tip radius column R in tool t Orientation possible in two directions e g HEIDENHAIN touch probes with cable The TNC executes one approximate and one fine measurement rotates the touch probe by 180 and then executes one more probing operation The center offset CAL_OF in tchprobe tp is determined in addition to the radius by probing from opposite orientations m Any orientation possible e g HEIDENHAIN infrared touch probes For probing routine see orientation possible in two directions TNC 620 User s Manual 504 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 14 8 Calibration using a calibration ring Proceed as follows for manual calibration using a calibration ring gt Inthe Manual Operation mode position the ball tip inside the bore of the ring gauge gt
344. h the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter Q82 37 Q82 TONUMB SRC_QS11 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 345 Programming Q parameters 9 11 String parameters Checking a string parameter The INSTR function checks whether a string parameter is contained in another string parameter gt Select O parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function Enter the number of the Q parameter for the result and confirm with the ENT key The TNC saves in the parameter the position at which the sought after text begins gt Shift the soft key row Vv select the function for checking a string parameter INSTR IE Enter the number of the QS parameter in which the text to be searched for is saved Confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the QS parameter to be searched and confirm with the ENT key gt Enter the number of the place starting from which the TNC is to search the substring and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Remember that the first character of a text sequence starts internally with the zeroth place If the TNC cannot find the required substring it will save the total length of the string to be searched counting starts at 1 in the
345. he CALC key to show and hide the on line calculator E atoan a eert w gt Select the arithmetical functions The calculator is operated Savy ra with short commands via soft key or through the alphabetic l TA SET ur oteaan sant keyboard cass ee a Se7 ae Calculate function Shortcut soft key 1 na oe Addition T ems j Subtraction oR Hh Multiplication x aani nee ieee aa Division Calculations in parentheses Arc cosine ARC Sine SIN Cosine COS Tangent TAN Powers of values XAY Square root SORT Inversion 1 x pi 3 14159265359 PI Add value to buffer memory M Save the value to buffer memory MS Recall from buffer memory MR Delete buffer memory contents MC Natural logarithm LN Logarithm LOG Exponential function e x Check the algebraic sign SGN Form the absolute value ABS TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 143 Programming Programming aids 4 5 Calculator Calculate function Shortcut soft key Truncate decimal places INT Truncate integers FRAC Modulus operator MOD select view View Delete value CE Unit of measure MM or INCH Show angle values in radians RAD standard angle in degrees Select the display mode of the DEC decimal or HEX numerical value hexadecimal Transferring the calculated value into the program gt Use the arrow keys to select the word into which the calculated value is to be transferred gt Superimpose the on line calculator by pressing the CALC key
346. he ENT key gt Circle radius Enter the circular radius e g 8 mm confirm with the ENT key gt Confirm the Radius comp RL RR no comp with the RL soft key Activate the radius compensation to the left of the programmed contour gt Feed rate F Enter the machining feed rate e g 700 mm min save your entry with the END key gt Machine the contour and move to contour point 2 You only need to enter the information that changes In other words enter only the Y coordinate 95 and save your entry with the END key gt Move to contour point 3 Enter the X coordinate 95 and save your entry with the END key CHF o gt Define the chamfer at contour point 3 Enter the gt chamfer width 10 mm and save with the END key gt Move to contour point 4 Enter the Y coordinate 5 and save your entry with the END key CHF o gt Define the chamfer at contour point 4 Enter the chamfer width 20 mm and save with the END key gt Move to contour point 1 Enter the X coordinate 5 and save your entry with the END key APPR gt Depart the contour gt Select the departure function DEP CT gt Center angle Enter the departure angle e g 90 confirm with the ENT key gt Circle radius Enter the departure radius e g 8 mm confirm with the ENT key gt Feed rate F Enter the positioning feed rate e g 3000 mm min confirm with the ENT key gt Miscellaneous function M Switch on the coolant e g M9 confirm with the E
347. he Intersection between A straight line and a straight line even if the intersection Is actually on the extension of one of the lines Straight line circular arc Straight line full circle Circle circle regardless of whether a circular arc or a full circle You must use the touchpad or a connected mouse In order to specify a reference point You can also change the reference point once you have already selected the contour The TNC does not calculate the actual contour data until you save the selected contour in a contour program TNC 620 User s Manual 262 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 DXF converter option 42 73 Selecting a reference point on a single element gt Select the mode for specifying the reference point na gt Click the desired element with the mouse The TNC indicates possible locations for reference points on the selected element with stars gt Click the star you want to select as reference point The TNC sets the datum symbol at the selected place Use the zoom function if the selected element is too small Selecting a reference point on the intersection of two elements gt Select the mode for specifying the reference point gt Click the first element straight line complete circle or circular arc with the left mouse button The TNC indicates possible locations for reference points on the selected element with stars The element is colorhighli
348. he arrow keys Press the green navigation key to switch back to the Input window TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 405 Programming Special functions 11 7 Freely definable tables FN 26 TABOPEN Open a freely definable table With the function FN 26 TABOPEN you open a freely definable table to be written to with FN 27 or to be read trom with FN 28 Only one table can be open in an NC program A new block with FN 26 TABOPEN automatically closes the last opened table The table to be opened must have the file name extension TAB Example Open the table TAB1 TAB which is saved in the directory TNC DIR1 56 FN 26 TABOPEN TNC DIR1 TAB1 TAB TNC 620 User s Manual 406 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Freely definable tables 11 7 FN 27 TABWRITE Write to a freely definable table With the FN 27 TABWRITE function you write to the table that you previously opened with FN 26 TABOPEN You can write several column names in a TABWRITE block The column names must be written between quotation marks and separated by a comma You define the values that the TNC is to write to the respective column with O parameters Example Note that by default the FN 27 TABWRITE function writes values to the currently open table also in the Test run mode The FN18 ID992 NR16 function enables you to query in which operating mode the program is to be run
349. he figure at right are to be drilled with a standard drilling cycle You have already defined the workpiece blank gt Call the tool Enter the tool data Confirm each of your entries with the ENT key Do not forget the tool axis gt Retract tool Press the orange axis key Z and enter the value for the position to be approached e g 250 Press the ENT key gt Confirm Radius comp RL RR no comp by pressing the ENT key Do not activate radius compensation gt Confirm Feed rate F with the ENT key Move at rapid traverse FMAX gt Miscellaneous function M Confirm with the END key The TNC saves the entered positioning block gt Call the cycle menu LONG gt Display the drilling cycles THREAD gt Select the standard drilling cycle 200 The TNC Starts the dialog for cycle definition Enter all parameters requested by the TNC step by step and conclude each entry with the ENT key In the screen to the right the TNC also displays a graphic showing the respective cycle parameter gt Call the menu for special functions CONTOUR gt Display the functions for point machining MACHINING ee gt Select the pattern definition DEF POINT gt Select point entry Enter the coordinates of the 4 points and confirm each with the ENT key After entering the fourth point save the block with the END key gt Display the menu for defining the cycle call CYCLE gt Run the drilling cycle on the defined pattern CALL P
350. he list view window and displays a point symbol r gt Select the mode for choosing a machining am gt If necessary you can also deselect elements that you already selected by clicking the element in the graphics window again but this time while pressing the CTRL key Alternatively select the element in the list view window and press DEL You can deselect all selected elements by clicking the Icon gt If you want to specify the machining position at the intersection of two elements click the first element with the left mouse button the TNC displays stars at the selectable machining positions gt Click the second element straight line complete circle or circular arc with the left mouse button The TNC loads the intersection of the elements into the list view window displays a point symbol If there are several intersections the TNC assumes the Intersection nearest to the mouse save the selected machining positions to the clipboard of the TNC so that you can then insert them as a positioning block with cycle call in a plain language program or gt To save the selected machining positions to a point file enter the target directory and any file name in the pop up window displayed by the TNC Default setting Name of the DXF Tile Alternately you can also select the file type gt Confirm the entry The TNC saves the contour program to the selected directory E OD If you want to select more mach
351. he same time You must conclude a transaction even if it consists solely of read accesses Only this guarantees that changes insertions are not lost that locks are canceled and that result sets are released TNC 620 User s Manual 328 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Accessing tables with SQL commands 9 9 Result set The selected rows are numbered in ascending order within the result set starting from 0 This numbering is referred to as the index The index is used for read and write accesses enabling a row of the result set to be specifically addressed Janene dad It can often be advantageous to sort the rows in the result set Do Q5 Handle this by specifying the table column containing the sorting criteria Also select ascending or descending order SQL SELECT ORDER a Dateiver SQL Server The selected rows that were transferred to the result set are waltung addressed with the HANDLE All following SQL commands use the handle to refer to this set of selected columns and rows SAL SELECT SQL FETCH Q1 HANDLEQ When concluding a transaction the handle is released SQL COMMIT or SQL ROLLBACK It is then no longer valid You can edit more than one result set at the same time The SOL server assigns a new handle for each Select command Binding Q parameters to columns The NC program does not have direct access to the table entries in the result set The data must be t
352. he soft keys TNC 620 User s Manual 242 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Input options End point coordinates Soft keys Known data at ab Cartesian coordinates X and Y ES A Polar coordinates referenced to FPOL Example NC blocks 7 FPOL X 20 Y 30 8 FL IX 10 Y 20 RR F100 9 FCT PR 15 IPA 30 DR R15 Direction and length of contour elements Known data Length of a straight line Gradient angle of a straight line 5 amp MDE A lt Q Chord length LEN of an arc r m S Gradient angle AN of an entry tangent Center angle of an arc aE Caution Danger to the workpiece and tool Gradient angles that you defined incrementally IAN are referenced to the direction of the last positioning block by the TNC Programs that contain incremental gradient angles and were created on an ITNC 530 or on earlier TNCs are not compatible Example NC blocks 27 FLT X 25 LEN 12 5 AN 35 RL F200 28 FC DR R6 LEN 10 AN 45 29 FCT DR R15 LEN 15 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 6 6 243 Programming Programming contours 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Circle center CC radius and direction of rotation in the FC FCT block The TNC calculates a circle center for free programmed arcs from the data you enter This makes it possible to program full circles in an FK prog
353. hining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Defining the working plane via three points PLANE POINTS Application A working plane can be uniquely defined by entering any three points P1 to P3 in this plane his possibility is realized in the PLANE POINTS function Before programming note the following The connection from Point 1 to Point 2 determines the direction of the tilted main axis X for tool axis Z The direction of the tilted tool axis is determined by the position of Point 3 relative to the connecting line between Point 1 and Point 2 Use the right hand rule thumb X axis index finger Y axis middle finger Z axis see figure at right to remember thumb X axis points trom Point 1 to Point 2 index finger Y axis points parallel to the tilted Y axis in the direction of Point 3 Then the middle finger points in the direction of the tilted tool axis The three points define the slope of the plane The position of the active datum is not changed by the TNC Parameter description for the positioning behavior see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 TNC 620 User s Manual 424 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Input parameters POINTS gt NC block 5 PLANE POINTS P1X 0 P1Y 0 P1Z 20 P2X 30 P2Y 31 P2Z 20 P3X 0 P3Y 41 P3Z 32 5 Abbreviat
354. hs corners Maximum distance of filtered to unfiltered contour 0 to 10 mm The filtered out points lie within this tolerance to the resultant distance Maximum length of distance resulting from filtering 0 to 1000 mm Length over which geometry filtering is effective TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 605 Tables and overviews 18 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter settings settings for the NC editor 606 Creating backup files TRUE Create backup file after editing NC programs FALSE Create no backup file after editing NC programs Cursor behavior after deleting lines TRUE Cursor is on previous line after deletion iTNC behavior FALSE Cursor is on subsequent line after deletion Cursor behavior with the first and last line TRUE All round cursors permitted at PGM beginning end FALSE All round cursors not permitted at PGM beginning end Line break with multi line blocks ALL Always show lines completely ACT Only show lines of the active block completely NO Only show lines completely if the block is edited Activate help graphics with cycle input TRUE Fundamentally always show help graphics during input FALSE Only show help graphics if the CYCLE HELP soft key is set to ON The CYCLE HELP OFF ON soft key is displayed in the Programming mode of operation after pressing the Screen layout button Behavior of soft key row following a cycle input TRUE Leave cycle s
355. ide length for rectangular pocket cycle 2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle 1st side length for slot cycle 2nd side length for slot cycle Radius for circular pocket cycle Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle Direction of rotation for active fixed cycle Dwell time for active fixed cycle Thread pitch for Cycles 17 18 Finishing allowance for active fixed cycle Direction angle for rough out in active fixed cycle Probing angle Probing path Probing teed rate Dimensions O absolute G90 1 incremental G91 Result code for the last SQL command Tool length Tool radius Tool radius R2 Oversize for tool length DL Tool radius oversize DR Tool radius oversize DR2 Tool locked 0 or 1 Number of the replacement tool 317 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions Group name ID no Number Index Meaning 9 Tool no Maximum tool age TIME1 10 Tool no Maximum tool age TIME2 11 Tool no Current tool age CUR TIME 12 Tool no PLC status 13 Tool no Maximum tooth length LCUTS 14 Tool no Maximum plunge angle ANGLE 15 Tool no TT Number of tool teeth CUT 16 Tool no TT Wear tolerance for length LTOL 17 Tool no TT Wear tolerance for radius RTOL 18 Tool no TT Rotational direction DIRECT O positive 1 negative 19 Tool no TT Offset in plane R OFFS 20 Tool no TT Offset in length LOFFS 21 Tool no TT Break tolerance for length LBREAK 22 Tool no TT Break tolerance for radius RBREAK
356. ight line Chamfer between two Straight lines None Circular arc around a circle center CC to an arc end point Circular arc with a certain radius Circular arc with tangential connection to the preceding and Subsequent contour elements Circular arc with tangential connection to the preceding and Subsequent contour elements Straight line or circular path with any connection to the preceding contour element Required input Coordinates of the end point of the straight line Chamfer side length Coordinates of the circle center or pole Coordinates of the arc end point direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point arc radius direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point Rounding radius R see Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 page 237 Page 219 220 222 223 224 226 22 240 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Cartesian coordinates 6 4 Straight line L The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block gt Press the L key to open a program block for a linear movement gt Coordinates of the end point of the straight line if necessary gt Radius compensation RL RR RO gt Feed rate F gt Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks 7 L X 10 Y 40 RL F200
357. il service nc ogm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls 49 8669 31 3105 E mail service lathe support heidenhain de www heidenhain de Touch probes from HEIDENHAIN helo you reduce non productive time and improve the dimensional accuracy of the finished workpieces Workpiece touch probes TS 220 Signal transmission by cable TS 440 TS 444 Infrared transmission TS 640 TS 740 Infrared transmission e Workpiece alignment e Setting datums e Workpiece measurement Tool touch probes TT 140 Signal transmission by cable TT 449 Infrared transmission TL Contact free laser systems e Tool measurement e Wear monitoring e ool breakage detection 1096883 21 Ver01 SWO2 2 2015 H Printed in Germany
358. in the TOOL CALL block CALL DR TAB Oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation RO The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path or to the programmed coordinates Applications Drilling and boring pre positioning TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 197 Programming Tools 5 3 Tool compensation Contouring with radius compensation RR and RL RR The tool moves to the right of the programmed contour y RL The tool moves to the left of the programmed contour The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the radius Right or left are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour See figures Between two program blocks with different radius compensations RR and RL you must program at least one traversing block in the working plane without radius compensation that is with RO The TNC does not put radius compensation into effect until the end of the block in which it is first programmed In the first block in which radius compensation is activated with RR RL or canceled with RO the TNC always positions the tool perpendicular to the programmed starting or end position Position the tool at a sufficient distance from the Tirst or last contour point to prevent the possibility of damaging the contour Entering radius compensation Radius compensation is
359. inematics calculations and for tilting the working plane The machine parameter CfgAxisPropKinn gt presetToAlignAxis is used to define whether the axis offset Is to be taken Into account internally after zero setting Independently of this an axis offset has always the following effects m An axis offset always influences the nominal position display of the affected axis the axis offset is subtracted from the current axis value fa rotary axis coordinate is programmed in an L block then the axis offset is added to the programmed coordinate m Not available Feed rate limitation can be defined separately for linear and rotary axes ITNC 530 Rotary axis offsets defined by machine parameters do not influence the axis positions that were defined in the Tilt working plane function MP7500 bit 3 defines whether the current rotary axis position referenced to the machine datum is taken into account or whether a position of 0 is assumed for the first rotary axis usually the C axis m Available Only one feed rate limitation can be defined for linear and rotary axes TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Comparison Differences in Manual Operation operation Function Capturing the position values trom mechanical probes Exiting the touch probe functions menu TNC 620 Actual position capture by soft
360. information and inserts the program block into the part program 4 F M103 M118 M120 TNC 620 User s Manual 206 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Fundamentals of path functions 6 2 Example programming a straight line gt Initiate the programming dialog e g for a straight line COORDINATES gt Enter the coordinates of the straight line end point e g 20 in X z COORDINATES gt Enter the coordinates of the straight line end point e g 30 in Y and confirm with the ENT key a Radius comp RL RR no comp gt Select the radius compensation here press the RO soft key the tool moves without compensation Feed rate F F MAX ENT E gt Enter 100 feed rate e g 100 mm min and confirm your entry with ENT For programming in inches enter 100 for a feed rate of 10 inches per minute Or gt Move at rapid traverse Press the FMAX soft key or F MAX gt Traverse with the feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block Press the F AUTO soft key F AUTO MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M END gt Enter 3 miscellaneous function e g M3 and terminate the dialog with END o3 The part program now contains the following line L X 20 Y 30 RO FMAX M3 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 207 Programming Programming contours 6 3 Approaching and departing a contour 6 3 Approaching and departing a contour Starting po
361. ing 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior 10 4 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Machining small contour steps M97 Standard behavior The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners If the contour steps are very small however the tool would damage the contour In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error message Tool radius too large X Behavior with M97 The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elements as at inside corners and moves the tool over this point Program M97 in the same block as the outside corner Instead of M97 you should use the much more powerful function M120 LA see Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Miscellaneous Functions software option page 374 Effect M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed A corner machined with M97 will not be completely finished You may wish to rework the contour with a smaller tool Example NC blocks TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 369 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Machining open contour corners M98 Standard behavior The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points If the contour is open at the corners however this will result in in
362. ing 2 2015 199 Programming Programming contours 6 1 Tool movements 6 1 Tool movements Path functions A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour L elements such as straight lines and circular arcs With the path 1 CC functions you can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs L G FK free contour programming option 19 If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC and the dimensions given are not sufficient for creating a part program you can program the workpiece contour with the FK free contour programming The TNC calculates the missing data With FK programming you also program tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs Miscellaneous functions M With the TNC s miscellaneous functions you can affect m the program run e g a program interruption m the machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off m the path behavior of the tool TNC 620 User s Manual 202 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tool movements Subprograms and program section repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program section repeat If you wish to execute a specific program section only under certain conditions you also define this machining sequence as a subprogram In
363. ing 2 2015 403 Programming Special functions 11 7 Freely definable tables Editing the table format gt Press the EDIT FORMAT soft key shift the soft key row The TNC opens the editor form in which the table structure is shown The meanings of the structure commands header entries are shown in the following table EJ Program run felis Bae editing G Programming Table editin Structure Meaning command Available columns List of all columns contained in the table Move before The entry highlighted in Available columns is moved in front of this column Name Column name Is displayed in the header Column type TEXT Text entry SIGN Sign or BIN Binary number DEC Decimal positive complete number cardinal number HEX Hexadecimal number INT Complete number LENGTH Length is converted in inch programs FEED Feed rate mm min or 0 1 inch min IFEED Feed rate mm min or inch min FLOAT Floating point number BOOL Logical value INDEX Index TSTAMP Fixed format for date and time Default value Default value for the fields in this column Width Width of the column number of characters Primary key First table column Language sensitive Language sensitive dialogs column name TNC 620 User s Manual 404 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Freely definable tables 11 7 You can use a connected mouse or the TNC keyboard to navigate in the form Navigati
364. ing 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Selection of alternate tilting possibilities SEQ entry optional The position you define for the working plane is used by the TNC to calculate the appropriate positioning of the rotary axes present on the machine In general there are always two solution possibilities Use the SEQ switch to specify which possibility the TNC should use SEQ positions the master axis so that it assumes a positive angle The master axis is the 1st rotary axis from the tool or the last rotary axis from the table depending on the machine configuration see figure at top right a SEQ SEQ positions the master axis so that it assumes a negative angle ee If the solution you chose with SEQ is not within the machine s S range of traverse the TNC displays the Entered angle not NS permitted error message When the PLANE AXIS function is used the SEQ switch is nonfunctional If you do not define SEQ the TNC determines the solution as follows 1 The TNC first checks whether both solution possibilities are within the traverse range of the rotary axes 2 f they are then the TNC selects the shortest possible solution 3 If only one solution is within the traverse range the TNC selects this solution 4 lf neither solution is within the traverse range the TNC displays the Entered angle not permitted error message TNC 620 User s Manual 432 H
365. ing aids 4 6 Cutting data calculator 4 6 Cutting data calculator Application With the cutting data calculator you can calculate the spindle speed and the feed rate for a machine process Then you can load the calculated values into an opened feed rate or spindle speed dialog box in the NC program To open the cutting data calculator press the CUTTING DATA CALCULATOR soft key The TNC shows the soft key if you open the calculator CALC key open the dialog field for spindle speed input in the TOOL CALL block open the dialog field for feed rate input in positioning blocks or cycles O nD o a qam CALCULATOR m enter a feed rate in manual operation F soft key m enter a spindle speed in manual operation S soft key The cutting data calculator is displayed with different input fields depending on whether you calculate a spindle speed or a feed rate Window or spindle speed calculation Code letter Meaning R Tool radius mm VC Cutting speed m min os Result for spindle speed rev min 146 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Cutting data calculator 4 6 Window for feed rate calculation Code letter Meaning a Spindle speed rom Z Number of teeth on the tool n FZ Feed per tooth mm tooth FU Feed per revolution mm rev F Result for feed rate mm min You can also calculate the feed rate in the TOOL CALL
366. ing display criterion TNC 620 User s Manual 124 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 Additional functions Protecting a file Canceling file protection gt Move the highlight to the file you want to protect as gt Select the miscellaneous functions press the soft FUNCTIONS key PROTECT gt Enable file protection Press the soft key The file ft is tagged with the protected symbol gt To cancel file protection press the soft key Selecting the editor gt Move the highlight in the right window onto the file you want to open ae gt Select the miscellaneous functions press the soft FUNCTIONS key De To select the editor with which to open the EDITOR selected file press the soft key gt Mark the desired editor gt Press the OK soft key to open the file vy Connecting removing a USB device gt Move the highlight to the left window a gt Select the miscellaneous functions press the soft FUNCTIONS key gt Shift the sott key row Search for a USB device Yi gt To remove the USB device move the highlight to the USB device in the directory tree Remove the USB device For more information see USB devices on the TNC page 135 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 125 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Additional tools for management of external file types
367. ing error message S irienianieiisr iaaa d EAEE EKO NEN 308 FN16 FPRINT Formatted output of text and Q parameter ValUGS ccccceccccc cece eeeseeeeeeeeeneeeneseneees 312 PIN Gl SYSREAD Reading system Ce icsca ners tocnossisaiin caaiinapicionsanaiekeaupebinaunpiotebseeaiesinvesiiainaunsiavel 316 PN 19 PEC Transter values to the PLG ata audnseastondisnn saniintomnsmsietsilinsttawslnand aE aN acini ANEETA EEEE a 325 FN 20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization sseesessesnesrnerrerrrrrsrrrrrsrrsrrrrrerrrerrerrrererrrerrerrerreen 325 FN 29 PEG kansier values To MNE FLU erreniega ee Eee 326 FN 37 EXPOR I terartrncsucecen rte rta nier ENE aa Ra A GNT EE EAEE E REEE EAE a E AN TERNET AAEN 326 TNC 620 User s Manual 32 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 9 9 Accessing tables with SOL commands 2a 2e 1 ee ese ae see eae eee e a eee erates 327 A AONE UO aes E E E E E ent eaansiseadase ass amasensnciaanon 327 PTI NS IC MOI iat ede astee aise ceases domes A E E A E A 328 Programming SOL Command S ces viet conovrrontsuoiantiaunderedtinaneavitinnnesaiee Ea Aa KA a E a a a AR 330 DTS aE SS E I A E AAE EE EEE 330 FEDI a E E E eat oaneecy 331 SOL ELEC T E E E eee 332 lt OEN a E o E EE EE EE A E EE EE E EE A EE E 334 SOL UPDA NE seraa ra AE E E E EEEE 335 EN E e E E E E E E E eet etoaianesseeactee denen oimace 335 SOES alt cera S E A EE A A E A AA EAT 336 o NE E E E E EE E A E E EE E E 336 9 10 SEnterning formulas d
368. ing modes FULL SEQUENCE and SINGLE BLOCK does not change until the tilting axes have reached their final position Effect M144 becomes effective at the start of the block M144 does not function in connection with M128 or a tilted working plane You can cancel M144 by programming M145 The machine geometry must be specified by the machine tool builder in the description of kinematics The machine tool builder determines the behavior In the automatic and manual operating modes Refer to your machine manual TNC 620 User s Manual 444 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 FUNCTION TCPM option 9 12 5 12 5 FUNCTION TCPM option 9 Function The machine geometry must be specified by the machine tool builder in the description of kinematics For tilted axes with Hirth coupling Only change the position of the tilted axis after retracting the tool Otherwise you might damage the contour when disengaging from the coupling Before positioning with M91 or M92 and before a TOOL CALL Reset TCPM FUNCTION To avoid contour gouging you must use only spherical cutters with TCPM FUNCTION The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the tool tip If TCPM FUNCTION is active the TNC shows the symbol TCPM in the position display TCPM FUNCTION is an improvement on the M128 function with which you can define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes In contrast to M128 with TCPM FUN
369. ings for screen display Sequence of displayed axes O to 7 Depends on available axes Type of position display in position window NOMINAL ACTUAL REFACTL REFNOML LAG ACTUAL DIST DIST M 118 Type of position display in status display NOMINAL ACTUAL REF ACTL REF NOML LAG ACTUAL DIST DIST M 118 Definition of decimal separation characters for position display Display of feed rate in Manual Operation mode at axis key Only show feed rate when axis direction key is pressed always minimum Always show feed rate Display of spindle position in the position display during closed loop Only show spindle position when spindle is in position control during closed loop and M5 Show spindle position when spindle is in position control and with M5 Show or hide Preset table soft key True Do not display Preset table soft key False Display Preset table soft key TNC 620 User s Manual 598 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Machine specific user parameters 18 1 Parameter settings DisplaySettings Display step for individual axes List of all available axes Display step for position display in mm or degrees 0 1 0 05 0 01 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 Option 23 0 00001 Option 23 Display step for position display in inches 0 005 0 001 0 0005 0 0001 0 00005 Option 23 0 00001 Option 23 DisplaySettings Definition of unit of measure valid for the display metric Use metric system inch Use inch
370. ining positions press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above gt TNC 620 User s Manual 268 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 DXF converter option 42 73 Rapid selection of hole positions with the mouse area F gt Select the mode for choosing a machining ia position The graphics window becomes active for position selection gt To select machining positions press the shift key and define an area with the left mouse button The TNC assumes all complete circles that are completely within the area as hole positions The TNC opens a window in which you can filter the holes by size gt Configure the filter settings see Filter settings page 271 and click the OK button to confirm The TNC loads the selected positions into the list view window displays a point symbol gt f necessary you can also deselect elements that you already selected by clicking the element in the graphics window again but this time while pressing the CTRL key Alternatively select the element in the list view window and press DEL If necessary you can also deselect elements that you already selected by dragging an area open again but this time while pressing the CTRL key save the selected machining positions to the clipboard of the TNC so that you can then insert them as a positioning block with cycle call in a plain language program or gt To save the selected machining positions to
371. int and end point The tool approaches the first contour point from the starting point The starting point must be Programmed without radius compensation Approachable without danger of collision Close to the first contour point Figure at right If you set the starting point in the dark gray area the contour will be damaged when the first contour element is approached First contour point You need to program a radius compensation for the tool movement to the first contour point Approaching the starting point in the spindle axis When the starting point is approached the tool must be moved to the working depth in the spindle axis If danger of collision exists approach the starting point in the spindle axis separately NC blocks 30 L Z 10 RO FMAX 31 L X 20 Y 30 RL F350 208 N 2 U 3 y A A iv 4 1 SS SS M a 4 1 eS SS iy N Y SYS DNN N D ki TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Approaching and departing a contour 6 3 End point The end point should be selected so that It Is Approachable without danger of collision Near to the last contour point m n order to make sure the contour will not be damaged the optimal ending point should lie on the extended tool path for machining the last contour element Figure at right If you set the ending point in the dark gray area the
372. ion is supported The tool is positioned above the last position that has been completely machined Last positioning block in the working plane does not necessarily need to contain both coordinates of the working plane Can cause problems with RND or CHF blocks Error message Is issued Error message is issued if a contour element with length O0 is located before the RND or CHF block Contour element with length 0 is Ignored if the contour element with length O is located after the RND or CHF block 647 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Function Circle programming with polar coordinates Tool radius compensation on circular arc or helix with angular length 0 Compensation of tool length in the position display Traverse movement in spacial arc SLII Cycles 20 to 24 Number of definable contour elements Define the working plane Position at end of SL cycle 648 TNC 620 The incremental rotation angle IPA and the direction of rotation DR must have the same sign Otherwise an error message will be issued The transition between the adjacent elements of the arc helix is generated Also the tool axis motion is executed right before this transition If the element is the first or last element to be corrected the next or previous element is dealt with in the same way as the first or last element to be corrected The values L and DL from the t
373. ional Programming 2 2015 TNC model software and features Changed functions 81760x 01 Now up to 4 functions are allowed in an NC block Fundamentals page 364 New soft keys for value transfer have been introduced in the pocket calculator Operation page 143 The distance to go display can now also be displayed in the input system Select the position display page 572 Cycle 241 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING was expanded by several inout parameters see User s Manual for Cycle Programming Cycle 404 was expanded by the parameter Q305 NUMBER IN TABLE see User s Manual tor Cycle Programming In the thread milling cycles 26x an approaching feed rate was introduced see User s Manual for Cycle Programming In Cycle 205 Universal Pecking you can now use parameter Q208 to define a feed rate for retraction see User s Manual for Cycle Programming TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 15 Fundamentals TNC model software and features New functions 81760x 02 Programs with HU and HC endings can be selected and processed in all operating modes The functions and have been added Calling any program as a subprogram page 281 New FEED DWELL function for programming repeating dwell times Dwell time FUNCTION FEED DWELL page 409 The FN 18 functions have been expanded FN 18 SYSREAD Reading system data page 316 USB data carriers can be locked with th
374. ioning Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Compensate sphere radius for pre positioning Copy rotational position in the plane Account for allowance in the sphere radius Shift datum to center of sphere 361 Programming Q parameters 9 13 Programming examples TNC 620 User s Manual 362 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 1 Entering miscellaneous functions M and STOP 10 1 Entering miscellaneous functions M and STOP Fundamentals With the TNC s miscellaneous functions also called M functions you can affect m the program run e g a program interruption the machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off m the path behavior of the tool The machine tool builder may add some M functions that are not described in this User s Manual Refer to a your machine manual You can enter up to four M functions at the end of a positioning block or in a separate block The TNC displays the following dialog question Miscellaneous function M You usually enter only the number of the M function in the programming dialog Some M functions can be programmed with additional parameters In this case the dialog is continued for the parameter Input In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes of operation the M functions are entered with the M soft key Please note that some M functions become effective at the sta
375. ions used Abbreviation POINTS X coordinate of 1st plane point X coordinate P1X of the 1st plane point see figure at top right Y coordinate of 1st plane point Y coordinate P1Y of the 1st plane point see figure at top right Z coordinate of 1st plane point Z coordinate P1Z of the 1st plane point see figure at top right X coordinate of 2nd plane point X coordinate P2X of the 2nd plane point see figure at center right Y coordinate of 2nd plane point Y coordinate P2Y of the 2nd plane point see figure at center right Z coordinate of 2nd plane point Z coordinate P2Z of the 2nd plane point see figure at center right X coordinate of 3rd plane point X coordinate P3X of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right Y coordinate of 3rd plane point Y coordinate P3Y of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right Z coordinate of 3rd plane point Z coordinate P3Z of the 3rd plane point see figure at bottom right Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 Meaning Points TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 425 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Defining the working plane via a single incremental spatial angle PLANE SPATIAL Application Use an incremental spatial angle when an already active ti
376. ip radius If probing from opposite orientations is possible the TNC calculates the center offset gt Checking the results gt Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect gt Press the END soft key to terminate the calibrating function The TNC logs the calibration process in TCHPRMAN html In order to be able to determine the ball tip center misalignment the TNC needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer Refer to your machine manual TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 507 Manual operation and setup 14 8 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 Displaying calibration values The TNC saves the effective length and effective radius of the aera gt touch probe in the tool table The TNC saves the ball tio center cee misalignment in the touch probe table in the CAL_OF 1 principal oe axis and CAL_OF2 minor axis columns You can display the values on the screen by pressing the TOUCH PROBE TABLE soft key During calibration the TNC automatically creates the TCHPRMAN html log file to which the calibration values are saved Make sure that you have activated the correct tool number before using the touch probe regardless of whether you wish to run the touch probe cycle in automatic mode or in the Manual Operation operating mode For more information about the touch probe table refer to the User s Manual for Cycle Pr
377. iple axis MachINIng ccccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseneceesanesaesaeeeesaueaeesaeseeesensanes 411 Programming Pallet CCItOl ccccccccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeaeeeeeseeesaaseeesaesaeesaaseneaaesanseeesaneseesanees 457 Manual operation and SCtup cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeceesaeeeesaeeaeesaaseeesaasenesaesaesaseneseesanssnenas 463 Positioning with Manual Data INput ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaneeaneeanseanseeeeseeeneneaens 529 Test run and program TUN sersssce cape sisaitearcca eeoteersinn oes apace saeco canoes oceninsneaaapeanencomeouenemeaennes 535 MOB Tg tio M erene E ee ne een a nae ee ee te eee ene eee eee 565 Tables and OVS Sica cs ctncestese stein decease rae anus saw onanodee destecanmceesaneessnasasenemenduswsununtasesersess 595 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 19 Contents TNC 620 User s Manual 20 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 alee OVERVICW omer ere E cera meet A cee taey E deere eae ets aetna renee en S rer dae eas eeece eee een ear 50 GZ ot VIAEINIME SWHEGI ON cates esce prance epeenore E aoe ur ane N 50 Acknowledging the power interruption and moving to the reference POINtS ccceececcseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 50 T3 Programming the Hirst panei creer ee terete eee ee eee ee toed a cen mreae secs E ame eeee ene 51 Selecting the consci operating TOUS is cccticndsnenturicetinedieaicusnsaussaiensn
378. irectly aea aoe aa a eet rae cheese eee acs Nace ee se Pre Bea EALS Ea A E AE 337 E a E E A E N EA E E A E E T AT N ree 337 PE FOG O e E E S 339 Programnining co cc 46 gt eerie eE on E N i 340 a E S EEEE E tees cates teeta cota Seuvermce ma saan ere peece tears erate teen waar carrteas 341 SUING FOC SSSI TMC OMS morener earen a E e teh scanned E NTT 341 Assigning Sting paranne lE S aseaine Ei T E aT Eai aa a a 342 Ghaininkag Sting Darant E cc eee nn cr ot een a meee ee ne ee eee ere 342 Converting a numerical value tO a string paramMeter s esisssusiiesrerr eretier rre rt sete erre re renerne rnern eree 343 Copying a substring tr mi a string parameter isssiviiisssiuriiinicieris iinne einen eiae AKTES EAE KA 344 Converting a string parameter to a numerical valUe s essssssrissrerirerisrit rrt seen eeeeeseeeeeseeeeaeeeanetaneennes 345 Checking a string paramMeter sssseisesrusiueri erit re rert erre rer r eeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeetaeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeneeenas 346 Finding the length of a string paramet ccscccncaeca2snnsnselscernovsedaecenevecaexanavnedausebiebyanceanboatioseuasaaeoenniauelas 347 Companng alohabetie SSCS CS cirinireki iia EE ia E Ea 348 Reading out machine parameterS s ss siusiusiesierierisrt rrt neers tiated niece pi ciae niet rigs ananatanmoecia 349 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 33 Contents 34 9 12 PreaSSIGMed Q parameters aa aa
379. is assigned to Q108 Q108 is calculated trom Tool radius R tool table or TOOL DEF block Delta value DR from the tool table Delta value DR trom the TOOL CALL block The TNC remembers the current tool radius even if the power Is Interrupted Tool axis Q109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis Tool axis Parameter value No tool axis defined Q109 1 X axis Q109 0 Y axis Q109 1 Z axis Q109 2 U axis Q109 6 V axis Q109 7 W axis Q109 8 352 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Preassigned Q parameters 9 12 Spindle status Q110 The value of the parameter Q110 depends on the M function last programmed for the spindle M function Parameter value No spindle status defined Q110 1 M3 Spindle ON clockwise Q110 0 M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise Q110 1 M5 after M3 Q110 2 M5 after M4 Q110 3 Coolant on off Q111 M function Parameter value M8 Coolant ON O111 1 M9 Coolant OFF O111 0 Overlap factor Q112 The overlap factor for pocket milling is assigned to Q112 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 During nesting with PGM CALL the value of the parameter Q113 depends on the dimensional data of the program from which the other programs are called Dimensional data of the main program Parameter value Metric system mm Q113 0 Inch system inches Q113 1 Tool length Q114 The current val
380. isalgnMent s sssisesrerirsrrrrrerrerrrrrrrrre 504 DEAN wer i el s ake Vae S oireina EEEE E NDERE OAA E EA EE EERE 508 14 9 Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe option 17 csssssssseeee 509 OEO eene AAEE A EEOAE E E EEE A EE E E EAE EAEE e Ee 509 ldentiying Dasi OCA OM cscs cess ea E REER AE an ede uadd ne Ea TEE ioa E aiea REEDE NAN 510 Savilnd a basic rotation IM the preset tablEkieorenireinnnn nineio enie aA NAANA EnO ANTERE RNa 510 Compensation of workpiece misalignment by rotating the table ssssesserresresrrerrerrrrrrerrerrerrerrrere gt 511 ES Pai a Daole TOLU O ecer E E E S ia 512 Canceling a Dacie rotationen iae a eaa ia aaia ien EE Eaa aeii 512 Measuring sD Dasic TOO ciran iE TE EA ETE E T SEEE EA 513 14 10 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe Option 17 cccccssccccssssseececsseeeceeeeseeeeeasseeeeeeaseeseeeasenessaas 515 Oy cote earners esas E ede pa ao o cin Grea E band anion N EE 515 Datum seing m any AX Oera N E EREE E EE EEEE ee 515 Cne aa ATN e E E E E A E A tenes teneaeees 516 CET aa a a E E E A ANN 517 Setting a center line as CATUIM 0 cece ceccc cece ccna eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeseeeeeeeeseseeeeaeeeaeseaeseneeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeas 519 Measuring workpieces with a 3 D touch Probe cece cccecc cece eeee eee cece cece eedeeeaeeeneeeeeeaeeeaeesneeaeennees 520 14 11 Tilting the working plane option 8 ccccccssssececeeessseseeeceeeaeseeeceeeeesseeeeceeeeassee
381. ith the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Read overlap factor as Q parameter Parameter settings in the configuration editor ChannelSettings CH_NC CfgGeoCycle pocketOverlap 14 DECLARE STRINGQS11 CH_NC 15 DECLARE STRINGQS12 CFGGEOCYCLE 16 DECLARE STRINGQS13 POCKETOVERLAP 17 Q50 CFGREAD KEY_QS11 TAG_QS12 ATR_QS13 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Assign string parameter for key Assign string parameter for entity Assign string parameter for parameter name Read out machine parameter 351 Programming Q parameters 9 12 Preassigned Q parameters 9 12 Preassigned Q parameters The Q parameters Q100 to Q199 are assigned values by the TNC The following types of information are assigned to Q parameters Values trom the PLC Jool and spindle data Data on operating status Results of measurements from touch probe cycles etc The TNC saves the values for the preassigned Q parameters Q108 Q114 and Q115 to Q117 in the unit of measure used by the active program Do not use preassigned Q parameters or OS parameters between Q100 and Q199 QS100 and QS199 as calculation parameters in NC programs Otherwise you might receive undesired results Values from the PLC Q100 to Q107 The TNC uses the parameters Q100 to Q107 to transfer values trom the PLC to an NC program Active tool radius Q108 The active value of the tool radius
382. ithout a mouse then you can activate and deactivate functions with the check box In the tool management use the GOTO soft key to search for the tool number or pocket number TNC 620 User s Manual 190 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Operating the Tool Manager The tool management can be operated by mouse or with the keys ao eee and soft keys Tool index Soft key Editing functions of tool management TaT r TP_NO PTYP 0 BEGIN Select the table start e Additional data Tool life data E LcuTs 15 TIME1 0 Te ANGLE 15 TIME2 0 PITCH 0 CUR TIME 0 T ANGLE 0 RTE Select the table end ne T LBREAK T RBREAK B cut DIRECT select the previous page in the table select the next page in the table ou FOR Call the form view of the marked tool Alternative function Press the ENT key Go to the next tab Tools Pockets Tooling list T usage order search function Find Here you can select the column to be searched and the search term via a list or by entering It 4 T 4 m oO H o 2 a Z a 5 o oO a Import tools IMPORT ss Export tools TOOL DELETE Delete marked tools MARKED TOOLS APPEND Add several lines at end of table N LINES UPDATE Update table view Show programmed tools column if Pockets tab is active Define the settings SORT COLUMN active Click the column header to sort the content
383. itted to copy the preset table into another directory for data backup Lines are also always write protected in the copied tables You therefore cannot edit them Never change the number of lines in the copied tables That could cause problems when you want to reactivate the table To activate the preset table copied to another directory you have to copy it back to the directory TNC table There are several methods for saving datums and or basic rotations in the preset table m Via touch probe cycles in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes Through the probing cycles 400 to 402 and 410 to 419 In automatic mode see User s Manual Cycles Chapters 14 and 15 Manual entry see description below Basic rotations from the preset table rotate the coordinate system about the preset which is shown in the same line as the basic rotation Remember to ensure that the position of the tilting axes matches the corresponding values of the 3 D ROT menu when setting the datum Therefore m If the Tilt working plane function is not active the position display for the rotary axes must be O zero the rotary axes if necessary If the Tilt working plane function is active the position displays for the rotary axes must match the angles entered in the 3 D ROT menu PLANE RESET does not reset the active 3D ROT The line O in the preset table is write protected In line 0 the TNC always saves the datum that you most
384. k whether the Tiles in the target directory should be overwritten gt To overwrite all files Existing files check box selected press the OK soft key or gt To leave the Tiles as they are press the CANCEL soft key If you wish to overwrite a protected Tile you need to select the Protected files check box or cancel the copying process TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 119 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Copying a table Importing lines to a table If you are copying a table into an existing table you can overwrite individual lines with the REPLACE FIELDS soft key Prerequisites The target table must already exist The file to be copied must only contain the lines you want to replace Both tables must have the same file extension The REPLACE FIELDS function is used to overwrite lines in the target table To avoid losing data create a backup copy of the original table Example With a tool presetter you have measured the length and radius of ten new tools The tool presetter then generates the TOOL_Import T tool table with 10 lines for the 10 tools gt Copy this table from the external data medium to any directory gt Copy the externally created table to the existing table TOOL T using the TNC Tile manager The TNC asks if you wish to overwrite the existing TOOL T tool table gt If you press the YES s
385. k with cycle call in a plain language program or To save the selected machining positions to a point file enter the target directory and any file name in the pop up window displayed by the TNC Default setting Name of the CAD file Alternately you can also select the file type Confirm the entry The TNC saves the contour program to the selected directory If you want to select more machining positions press the Cancel Selected Elements icon and select as described above TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 DXF converter option 42 Filter settings After you have used the quick selection function to mark hole positions a pop up window appears in which the smallest diameter found is to the left and the largest diameter to the right With the buttons just below the diameter display you can adjust the diameter so that you can load the hole diameters that you want The following buttons are available Filter setting of smallest diameter lt lt Display the smallest diameter found default setting Display the next smaller diameter found Display the next larger diameter found elE BE Display the largest diameter found The TNC sets the filter for the smallest diameter to the value set for the largest diameter Icon Filter setting of largest diameter lt lt Display the smallest diameter found The TNC sets the filter for the largest diameter to the value set for
386. key Only via the END soft key Comparison Differences in Program Run operation Function Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys within the rows Operating mode switchover after program run was interrupted by switching to the Single Block mode of operation and canceled by INTERNAL STOP GOTO is used to go to FK sequences after program run was interrupted there before switching the operating mode Entering with GOTO in the Program run single block Mid program startup Behavior after restoring the machine status Completing positioning for mid program startup Switching the screen layout for mid program startup Error messages Point patterns in single block TNC 620 User s Manual TNC 620 ITNC 530 Actual position capture by hard key Via the END soft key or the END hard key ITNC 530 Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys varies depending on the active screen layout When you return to the Program Run mode of operation Error message Selected block not addressed Use mid program Startup to select the point of interruption Error message FK programming Undefined starting position Function is only possible if the NC program was not yet started or after pressing the INTERNAL STOP soft keyINTERNAL STOP The menu for returning must be selected with the RESTORE POSITION soft key After position has been reached positioning mode must be exited with the RESTORE POSITION soft k
387. key or write the values to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 500 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 501 gt Terminate the probing function Press the END key TNC 620 User s Manual 494 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Using 3 D touch probes option 17 14 7 14 7 Using 3 D touch probes option 17 Overview The following touch probe cycles are available in the Manual Operation mode HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe Refer to your machine manual S Calibrating the 3 D touch probe 502 PROBING Measuring a 3 D basic rotation by 513 Be probing a plane Measuring a basic rotation using 510 a line eT Setting a datum in any axis b15 ee wa Setting a corner as datum 516 P led setting a circle center as datum 517 Ce ce mE Setting the centerline as datum 519 T CL oft key Function Page TS AZA 4 TCH PROBE Touch probe system data See User s TABLE 7 management Manual for Cycles af For more information about the touch probe table refer to the User s Manual for Cycle Programming TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 495 Manual operation and setup 14 7 Using 3 D touch p
388. kpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Retract the tool end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Shift datum to center of ellipse Account for rotational position in the plane Calculate angle increment Copy starting angle 357 Programming Q parameters 9 13 Programming examples TNC 620 User s Manual 358 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming examples 9 13 Example Concave cylinder machined with spherical cutter Program sequence This program functions only with a spherical cutter The tool length refers to the sphere center The contour of the cylinder is approximated by many short line segments defined in Q13 The more line segments you define the smoother the curve becomes The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts here parallel to the Y axis The milling direction is determined with the starting angle and end angle In space Machining direction clockwise Starting angle gt end angle Machining direction counterclockwise Starting angle lt end angle The tool radius is compensated automatically O BEGIN PGM CYLIN MM 1 FN 0 Q1 50 2 FN 0 Q2 0 3 FN 0 Q3 0 4 FN 0 Q4 90 5 FN 0 Q5 270 6 FN 0 Q6 40 7 FN 0 Q7 100 8 FN 0 Q8 0 9 FN 0 Q10 5 10 FN 0 Q11 250 11 FN 0 Q12 400 12 FN 0 Q13 90 13 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 50 14 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 15 TOOL CALL 1
389. kpiece into the desired position for machining by positioning the swivel head tor example with an L block The position of the transformed tool axis changes in relation to the machine based coordinate system Thus if you rotate the swivel head of your machine and therefore the tool in the B axis by 90 for example the coordinate system also rotates If you press the Z axis direction button in the Manual Operation mode the tool moves in X direction of the machine based coordinate system In calculating the transformed coordinate system the TNC considers both the mechanically influenced offsets of the particular swivel head the so called translational components and offsets caused by tilting of the tool 3 D tool length compensation The TNC only supports tilting the working plane with 524 spindle axis Z TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tilting the working plane option 8 14 11 Traversing reference points in tilted axes The TNC automatically activates the tilted working plane If this function was enabled when the control was switched off Then the TNC moves the axes in the tilted coordinate system when an axis direction key is pressed Position the tool in such a way that a collision is excluded during the subsequent crossing of the reference points To cross the reference points you have to deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function see To activate manual til
390. l HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Fundamentals TNC model software and features Software options The TNC 620 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions Additional Axis option 0 and option 1 Additional axis Additional control loops 1 and 2 Advanced Function Set 1 option 8 Expanded functions Group 1 Advanced Function Set 2 option 9 Expanded functions Group 2 Touch Probe Functions option 17 Touch probe functions Machining with rotary tables Cylindrical contours as If in two axes Feed rate in distance per minute Coordinate transformations Tilting the working plane Interpolation Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane spatial arc 3 D machining Motion control with minimum jerk 3 D tool compensation through surface normal vectors m Using the electronic handwheel to change the angle of the swivel head during program run without affecting the position of the tool point TCPM Tool Center Point Management m Keeping the tool normal to the contour ool radius compensation perpendicular to traversing direction and tool direction Interpolation Linear in 5 axes Subject to export permit Touch probe cycles Compensation of tool misalignment in automatic mode Datum setting in the Manual Operation mode Datum setting In automatic
391. l Siana the measuring dial This function only saves the preset in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window CORRECT Incrementally shift a preset already stored in mi the table This function only saves the preset in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired corrective value with the correct sign in the pop up window If inch display is active Enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 14 5 487 Manual operation and setup 14 5 Datum management with the preset table Soft key EDIT CURRENT FIELD SAVE PRESET 488 Function Directly enter the new preset without calculation of the kinematics axis specific Only use this function if your machine has a rotary table and you want to set the preset to the center of the rotary table by entering 0 This function only saves the preset in the axis which is currently highlighted Enter the desired value in the pop up window If inch display is active Enter the value in inches and the TNC will internally convert the entered values to mm Select the BASIC TRANSFORMATION AXIS OFFSET view The BASIC TRANSFORMATION view shows the X Y and Z columns Depending on the machine the SPA SPB and SPC columns are displayed additionally Here the TNC saves the basic rotation for the Z tool axis
392. l connection to the contour Approach and departure to an auxiliary point outside the contour on a tangentially connecting line TNC 620 User s Manual 210 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Approaching and departing a contour 6 3 Important positions for approach and departure Starting point Ps You program this position in the block before the APPR block Ps lies outside the contour and is approached without radius compensation R0 Auxiliary point Py some of the paths for approach and departure go through an auxiliary point Py that the TNC calculates from your input in the APPR or DEP block The TNC moves from the current position to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate last programmed If you have programmed FMAX positioning at rapid traverse in the OF last positioning block before the approach function the TNC also approaches the auxiliary point Py at rapid traverse First contour point Paand last contour point Pe You program the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The last contour point Pecan be programmed with any path function If the APPR block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in the working plane and then move it to the entered depth in the tool axis End point PN The position Py lies outside of the contour and results from your input in the DEP block If the DEP block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in th
393. l TNCguide Display all current error messages anes Show calculator Navigation keys Key Function Move highlight Go directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed Feed rate Spindle speed 100 100 OY E MWF Os 0 0 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Cycles subprograms and program section repeats Key Function Define touch probe cycles PROBE Define and call cycles DEF CALL LBL LBL Enter and call labels for SET CALL Subprogramming and program section repeats Enter program stop in a program Tool functions Key Function Define tool data in the program Call tool data CALL Programming path movements Key Function APPR Approach depart contour FK free contour programming Straight line a B cc 4 Circle center pole for polar coordinates Circular arc with center E Circle with radius is Circular arc with tangential connection CHF 9 RND 9 Chamfer Corner rounding TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Special functions Key Function Show special functions select the next tab in forms Up down one dialog box or button Entering and editing coordinate axes and numbers Key Function Select coordinate axes or enter them in a program 0 ER Numbers E Decimal point Reverse algebraic sign p P I Polar coordinate Input
394. l files or gt Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window SELECT gt Press the SELECT soft key or m gt Press the ENT key The TNC opens the selected file in the operating mode from which you called the file manager TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 117 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Creating a new directory gt Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you want to create a subdirectory gt Press the NEW DIRECTORY soft key gt Enter a directory name ENT gt Press the ENT key DIRECTORY i DIRECTORY CREATE NEW gt Press the OK soft key to confirm or gt abort with the CANCEL soft key CANCEL Creating a new file gt Select the directory in the left window in which you wish to create the new file gt Position the cursor in the right window NEW gt Press the NEW FILE soft key D gt Enter the file name with file extension sa gt Press the ENT key Copying a single file gt Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy gt Press the COPY soft key Select the copying function The TNC opens a pop up window gt Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your entry with the ENT key or the OK soft key The TNC copies the file into the active directory or into the selected target directory The original file is retained or FG gt Press the Target Di
395. l format 99 DEINE die ne BEE FA N aA EAE A E EE E AE 100 Opening a new part PFOGLAM cccccceccceccc neces eeeee rt rrer e rt seen eeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeegeseaeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeneeenaeeeas 102 Programming tool movements in CONVEISETIONG siiisieracsinveraanaevoinahians oeinion Manone Rieuiiiindateenw nti 103 ACT FO SEL ON IY E E E E eau enact ase eset da a a penta A E 105 mare WTA ters Wm Ee a mre E E E E E A E A EE E E EE E E E P eeeeee 106 TE WAG SOG ly MOC a e E E E EE E E N 109 3 3 File management Fundamentals ccccccccceseeeeeeeeeeceeeecaeeseeeceeeesaeeseeessanseaeesaneseaessanesanessnessnanags 111 BNR pera EE honey nator ato E AE E E TE eae estes tone 111 Displaying externally generated Tiles ON the TNC cecceeccee cece eeee esse eeeeeeeeeeseeeseeneesneseaeseaeeeanees Iia PEA ee BO AC T a TARA EEE TEN I EETA AT E A E AN E ETETE TA E A E E ET 113 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 23 Contents Overview Functions of the file manager Calling the file manager selecting drives directories and Tiles Creating a new directory Creating a new file Copying a single file Copying Tiles into another directory Copying a table Copying a directory Choosing one of the last files selected Deleting a file Deleting a directory Tagging files Renaming a Tile Sorting Tiles Additional functions Additional tools for management of external file types Data transfer to from an external d
396. l is smaller than the original tool undersize The TNC then compensates the tool position by the sum of the delta values trom the tool table and the tool call 3 D compensation without TCPM The TNC carries out a 3 D compensation for three dimensional machining operations if the NC program contains surface normal vectors In this case the RL RR radius compensation and TCPM or M128 must be inactive The TNC displaces the tool in the direction of the surface normal vectors by the sum of the delta values tool table and TOOL CALL Example Block format with surface normal vectors 1 LN X 31 737 Y 21 954 Z 33 165NX 0 2637581 NY 0 0078922 NZ 0 8764339 F1000 M3 LN Straight line with 3 D compensation X Y Z Compensated coordinates of the straight line end point NX NY NZ Components of the surface normal vector F Feed rate M Miscellaneous function 452 DL gt 0 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Three dimensional tool compensation option 9 12 6 Face milling 3D compensation with TCPM Face milling is a machining operation carried out with the front face of the tool A three dimensional compensation is carried out during five axis machining if the NC program contains surface normal vectors and TCPM or M128 is active In this case the RL RR radius compensation must not be active The TNC displaces the tool in the direction of the surface normal vectors by the sum of the delta
397. l table TOOL T directly without having to enter the number or name gt Working spindle axis X Y Z Enter the tool axis gt Spindle speed S Enter the spindle speed S in revolutions per minute rom Instead you can define the cutting speed Vc in meters per minute m min Press the VC soft key gt Feed rate F Enter feed rate F in millimeters per minute mm min Alternatively with the corresponding soft keys you can also define the feed rate in mm per revolution mm rev FU or in mm per tooth mm tooth FZ The teed rate is effective until you program a new feed rate ina positioning or TOOL CALL block gt Tool length oversize DL Enter the delta value for the tool length gt Tool radius oversize DR Enter the delta value for the tool radius gt Tool radius oversize DR2 Enter the delta value for the tool radius 2 TNC 620 User s Manual 182 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 If you open a pop up window for tool selection the TNC marks all tools available in the tool magazine green You can also search for a tool in the pop up window To do so press the GOTO or SEARCH soft key and enter the tool number or tool name With the OK soft key you can load the tool into the dialog box Example Tool call Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed 2500 rom and a feed rate of 350 mm min The tool length and tool radius 2 are to be programmed with an oversize of 0 2 and 0 05
398. lation Linear in 5 axes Subject to export permit TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Technical information 18 3 Touch Probe Functions option 17 Touch probe functions Touch probe cycles Compensation of tool misalignment in automatic mode Datum setting in the Manual Operation mode Datum setting in automatic mode Automatically measuring workpieces Tools can be measured automatically Advanced Programming Features option 19 Expanded programming functions FK free contour programming Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned tor NC Fixed cycles m Peck drilling reaming boring counterboring centering cycles 201 to 205 208 240 241 m Milling of internal and external threads cycles 262 to 265 267 Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets and studs cycles 212 to 215 251 to 257 Clearing level and oblique surfaces cycles 230 to 233 Straight slots and circular slots cycles 210 211 253 254 Linear and circular point patterns cycles 220 221 Contour train contour pocket also with contour parallel machining trochoidal slot cycles 20 to 25 275 Engraving cycle 225 OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can be integrated Advanced Graphic Features option 20 Expanded graphic functions Program verification graphics program run graphics m Plan view m Projecti
399. le Color Male Yellow White Brown Black Violet Gray White Green 9 Green 9 CO N or Bl W ND CO N OM OJ AJOJN Adapter block 363987 02 Female 1 CO N or AJOJN Male 1 Red 1 1 CO N OM or AJOJN Conn cable 366964 xx Female 1 CO N OM or Bl WIND Color Red Yellow White Brown Black Violet Gray White Green Green External Female 1 NJ CO HR OO OD NI O amp O Hsg External Hsg l i l Hsg shield TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 shield Hsg Hsg Hsg shield 609 Tables and overviews 18 2 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector layout of a non HEIDENHAIN device may substantially differ from that of a HEIDENHAIN device It depends on the unit and the type of data transfer The table below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block Adapter block 363987 02 Conn cable 366964 xx Female Male Female Color Female 1 Red 1 2 2 2 Yellow 3 3 3 3 White 2 4 4 4 Brown 6 o 5 5 Black 5 6 6 6 Violet 4 7 7 7 Gray g 8 8 8 White 7 Green 9 9 9 Green 9 Hsg Hsg Hsg Ext Hsg shield 610 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Connector pin layout and connection cables for data interfaces Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length Unshielded 100 m m Shiel
400. leared and written to again and so on To view the keystroke history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE ies gt Press the LOG FILES soft key POvErRORE gt Open the keystroke log file Press the KEYSTROKE Los LOG soft key See gt If you need the previous log file Press the FILE PREVIOUS FILE soft key CURRENT gt If you need the current log file Press the CURRENT FILE soft key The TNC saves each key pressed during operation in a keystroke log The oldest entry is at the beginning and the most recent entry is at the end of the file Overview of the keys and soft keys for viewing the logs Soft key Function Keys BEGIN Go to beginning of keystroke log A m Z Oo Go to end of keystroke log CURRENT Current keystroke log FILE PRENTOUR Previous keystroke log FILE Up down one line sE Return to main menu TNC 620 User s Manual 156 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Informational texts After a faulty operation such as pressing a key without function or entering a value outside of the valid range the TNC displays a green text in the header informing you that the operation was not correct The TNC clears this informational text upon the next valid Input Saving service files If necessary you can save the Current status of the TNC and make it available to a service technician for evaluation A group of service files is saved error and keystroke logs as well as
401. lected the TURN option PLANE function is to position the axes automatically without any compensating movement the following parameter must still be defined Feed rate F As an alternative to defining a feed rate F directly by numerical value you can also position with FMAX rapid traverse or FAUTO feed rate from the TOOL CALLT block TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 429 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 If you use PLANE together with STAY you have to position the rotary axes in a separate block after the PLANE function gt Dist tool tip center of rot incremental The TNC tilts the tool or table relative to the tool tip The DIST parameter shifts the center of rotation of the positioning movement relative to the current position of the tool tip Note t the tool is already at the given distance to the workpiece before positioning then relatively speaking the tool is at the same position after positioning see figure at center right 1 DIST If the tool is not at the given distance to the workpiece before positioning then relatively speaking the tool is offset from the original position after positioning see figure at bottom right 1 DIST gt Feed rate F Contour speed at which the tool should be positioned gt Retraction length in the tool axis Retraction path MB
402. les 129 Display SCr N ccccceceeeee eens 71 Downloading help Tiles 162 Dwell time 06 409 410 DXF converter 256 selecting hole positions CON a E E 270 Mouse area 269 SS Enter spindle speed 182 Error Messages 153 153 Help WIth 153 Ethernet interface 582 ConfigUrTINg eeeeeererren 582 Connecting and disconnecting Network dArIVeS ce 134 Connection options 582 HT OCUC WON iieiea seniri 582 External ACCESS 569 External data transfer ENC O S eee eera iian 133 EE D E E TE 574 FEL UNCU O escenaris 11 Feature Content Level 11 Feed ial eee ee i 479 AGUSE siainen ei 480 POUR OOS saat ctrancteatninmidandaeenn 104 On rotary axes M116 437 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 371 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 372 File EE EE E EE 118 File FUNCIONS 395 File Management 111 114 File Manager GIT CO E A T 116 File manager Copying files 118 Copying tables 120 Delete Tile srercasnoutotGuiontaiecictetes 122 Directo Snan 114 OY ETE ET 121 OE E EN 118 External data transfer 133 File E e EEEE 118 PIS YDE irrena e 111 File type External file types 113 FUNCTION OVErVIEW cce eee 115 Overwriting files 119 Protect Ereren 125 Rename file 124 124 Selecting leS arinaa 117 Tagging TES reesieireereritisi 123 File
403. les on the machine side PLANE SPATIAL is not permitted if Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE is active Parameter description for the positioning behavior see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 417 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Input parameters SPATIAL gt Spatial angle A Rotational angle SPA around the Na fixed machine axis X see figure at top right Input range trom 359 9999 to 359 9999 gt Spatial angle B Rotational angle SPB around the fixed machine axis Y see figure at top right Input range from 359 9999 to 359 9999 gt Spatial angle C Rotational angle SPC around the fixed machine axis Z see figure at center right Input range trom 359 9999 to 359 9999 gt Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning SPATIAL In space SPA Spatial A Rotation around the X axis SPB Spatial B Rotation around the Y axis SPC Spatial C Rotation around the Z axis NC block 5 PLANE SPATIAL SPA 27 SPB 0 SPC 45 TNC 620 User s Manual 418 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Defining the working plane with the
404. less handwheel HR 550 FS Shows the charge status of the rechargeable battery 6 bars fully charged A bar moves from the left to the right during recharging 4 ACTL Type of position display 5 Y 129 9788 Position of the selected axis 6 STIB control in operation program run has been started or axis is in motion 7 S0 Current spindle speed 8 FO Feed rate at which the selected axis is moving 9 E Error message 10 3D Tilted working plane function is active 11 2D Basic rotation function is active 12 RES 5 0 Active handwheel resolution Distance in mm rev rev for rotary axes that the selected axis moves for one handwheel revolution 13 STEP ON or OFF Incremental jog active or inactive If the function is active the TNC also displays the active jog increment 14 Soft key row Selection of various functions described in the following sections TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 471 Manual operation and setup 14 2 Moving the machine axes Special features of the HR 550 FS wireless handwheel 472 Due to various potential sources of interference a wireless connection Is not as reliable as a cable connection Before you use the wireless handwheel it must therefore be checked whether there are any other radio users in the surroundings of the machine This inspection for presence of radio frequencies or channels is recommended for all industrial radio systems When the H
405. librating the wireless TT 449 Cycle 484 DIN ISO G484 DIN ISO G484 Option 17 18 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Contents oO ON O OFF FP N e ot O N O Oh PF W N OC First steps with the TNC 620 cccccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeaneeaeeeeeseeeseenseeeseasesaeeeaeseeesaeesaeesaeesanees 49 igiigele Ui 1 0 tT ent een ee E A ee ee eee er er 69 Programming Fundamentals file ManageMen ccccsceeeceeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeenecaeeseeseeeseeeneeeaaes 93 Programming Programming AIG ccccceecceeeeeceeeceeeaeeesesenecaeeaeeeeesaeeeaesenesaesaneeeesansaeesaneneesas 137 OCR AINNONNINNC TOO Sana E E E O 165 Programming Programming CONTOUNS cccccecceeceseceeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeseneceesanessesaeseeesaneaeesaneseesans 201 Programming Data transfer from CAD fil S cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesaeesaeesaeesanesanenas 253 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats cccceceeeeeseeeseeceeeseeeeseesenenens 273 Programming Q Parametels cccsccceseccseeeseeecseeeceeeeeseeesneneseeeaneeeeeseaneneeneeasensaneneeeseenesaeessagees 293 Programming Miscellaneous fUNCtiONGS ccscccseccseecsecceeecueecueecueecueeceeeceeeueeeeeneeenenensnenseeees 363 Programming Special FUNCTIONS ccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeesenesenesenesanesaaeseesenesanenas 383 Programming Mult
406. lled with default values ma gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which INSERT the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle value outside of value range or Incorrect data format gt Database SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Row number is programmed directly 40 SQL UPDATEQ1 HANDLE Q5 INDEX5 Row number is transferred in a Q parameter 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z 20SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 40 SQL INSERTQ1 HANDLE Q5 335 Programming Q parameters 9 9 Accessing tables with SQL commands SQL COMMIT SQL COMMIT transfers all rows in the result set back to the table A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE is canceled The handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which COMMIT the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or equal entries In columns requiring unique entries gt Database SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT SOL ROLLBACK How SQL ROLLBACK is execu
407. lock 1 and end of program TNC 620 User s Manual 286 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming examples 38 6 3 6 Programming examples Example Milling a contour in several infeeds Program sequence Pre position the tool to the workpiece surface Enter the infeed depth in incremental values Contour milling Repeat infeed and contourmilling TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 287 8 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 6 Programming examples Example Groups of holes Program sequence Approach the groups of holes in the main program m Call the group of holes subprogram 1 in the main program Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 1 15 45 100 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming examples 38 6 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 289 290 Example Group of holes with several tools Program sequence Program the fixed cycles in the main program Call the complete hole pattern Subprogram 1 in the main program Approach the groups of holes subprogram 2 in subprogram 1 Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 2 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 6 Programming examples TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming examples 38 6 TNC 620
408. lock 39 3 Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62 End of Subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called 4 Subprogram 1 is called and executed from block 40 up to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program UPGMS 5 Main program UPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35 Return jump to block 1 and end of program TNC 620 User s Manual 284 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Nesting 8 5 Repeating program section repeats Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27 2 Program section between block 27 and block 20 is repeated twice 3 Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35 4 Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated once including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27 5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 Return jump to block 1 and end of program TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 285 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 5 Nesting Repeating a subprogram Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11 2 Subprogram 2 is called and executed 3 Program section between block 12 and block 10 is repeated twice This means that subprogram 2 is repeated twice 4 Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 up to block 19 Return jump to b
409. lock is effective only in that CHF block After the CHF block the previous feed rate becomes effective again TNC 620 User s Manual 220 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Cartesian coordinates 6 4 Corner rounding RND The RND function is used for rounding off corners The tool moves on an arc that Is tangentially connected to both the preceding and subsequent contour elements The rounding arc must be machinable with the called tool RND 9 gt Rounding radius Enter the radius of the arc and If necessary gt Feed rate F effective only in the RND block Example NC blocks 5 L X 10 Y 40 RL F300 M3 6 L X 40 Y 25 7 RND R5 F100 8 L X 10 Y 5 In the preceding and subsequent contour elements both coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc If you machine the contour without tool radius compensation you must program both coordinates in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not part of the contour A teed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only in that RND block After the RND block the previous feed rate becomes effective again You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 221 Programming Programming contours 6 4 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Circle center CC You can define a circle center for circles that you have p
410. lock scan gt Start mid program startup Press the machine START button gt Contour approach see following section Entering a program with the GOTO key If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a program neither the TNC nor the PLC will execute any functions that ensure a safe start If you use the GOTO block number key for going into a subprogram m the TNC will skip the end of the subprogram LBL 0 m the TNC will reset function M126 Shorterpath traverse of rotary axes In such cases you must always use the mid program Startup function TNC 620 User s Manual 560 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Program run 16 5 Returning to the contour With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns to the De gt PESTS workpiece contour in the following situations fae CE m Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a program interruption that was not performed with the INTERNAL STOP function Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS AT N for example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP Sey ET Depending on the machine if the position of an axis has wt changed after the control loop has been opened during a 38 240 Gil 0 000 program Interruption cere gt To select a return to contour Press the RESTORE POSITION soft key gt Restore machine status if required gt To move the axes in the sequence that the
411. lowed by an asterisk the tolerance in the tool table was exceeded TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Status displays EJP rogram run full sequence Gi P gram run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H 0 BEGIN PGM STAT1 MM Doc Tool 2 1 SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshi CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE z CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 CALL LBL 99 5 LBL 99 PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING Overview PGm LBL cyc m Pos Too TT TRANS opara 2 D4 2 4 B Programming CYCL DEF 17 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 17 2 DEPTH 1 10 CYCL DEF 17 3 PITCH 1 11 CC X 22 5 Y 35 75 0 000 Taz B2000 STATUS STATUS STATUS COORD OVERVIEW Pos STATUS TRANsF STATUS OF Q PARAM EQ Program run full sequence ti Progr run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H aT E 0 BEGIN PGM STAT1 MM DOC Tool 2 M 1 SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshi 2 CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE 3 CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 4 CALL LBL 99 5 LBL 99 6 PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 STAY 7 CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING 8 CYCL DEF 17 1 SET UP2 9 CYCL DEF 17 2 DEPTH 1 10 CYCL DEF 17 3 PITCH 1 11 CC X 22 5 Y 35 75 0 X Nm P1 T1 0 Y Nm moo i 95 000 Gi 10 000 Mode NOML F Omm min GJ Programming werview PGM LBL cyc m Pos TooL 17 TRANS aPaRA 0 000 0 000 Tue B s 2000
412. lted working plane Is to be tilted by another rotation Example machining a 45 chamfer on a tilted plane Before programming note the following The defined angle is always in effect in respect to the active working plane regardless of the function you have used to activate It You can program any number of PLANE RELATIVE functions in a row If you want to return to the working plane that was SPA SPB SPC active before the PLANE RELATIVE function define the PLANE RELATIVE function again with the same angle but with the opposite algebraic sign If you use the PLANE RELATIVE function In a non tilted working plane then you simply rotate the non tilted plane about the spatial angle defined in the PLANE function Parameter description for the positioning behavior see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 Input parameters REL SPA gt Incremental angle Spatial angle about which the We active machining plane is to be rotated additionally see figure at right Use a soft key to select the axis to be rotated about Input range 359 9999 to 359 9999 gt Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 Abbreviations used SPA SPB SPC Abbreviation Meaning RELATIVE Relative to NC block 5 PLANE RELATIV SPB 45 TNC 620 User s Manual 426 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015
413. m the diameter entry Thread pitch of the tool Used by tapping cycles Cycle 206 Cycle 207 and Cycle 209 A positive algebraic sign means a right hand thread Date and time that the tool was last inserted via TOOL CALL Activate or deactivate active chatter control for the respective tool page 387 Input range N inactive and Y active Dialog Tool type Tool comment PLC status Tooth length in the tool axis Tool type for pocket table Maximum shaft speed rpm Retraction permissible Yes ENT No NOENT Number of the touch probe point angle Tool thread pitch Date time of last tool call ACC active Yes ENT No NOENT TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tool table Tool data required for automatic tool measurement Abbr CUT LTOL RTOL R2TOL DIRECT R OFFS L OFFS LBREAK RBREAK For a description of the cycles for automatic tool measurement see the User s Manual for Cycle Programming Inputs Number of teeth 99 teeth maximum Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Inout range 0 to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Inout range O to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R2 for wear detection If the entered value is exceede
414. m call press the PGM CALL key a gt Press the CALL PROGRAM soft key for the TNC to start the dialog for defining the program to be called Enter the path name with the keyboard or are gt press the SELECT FILE soft key for the TNC to display a selection window in which you can select the program to be called Confirm with the END key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 281 Programming Subprograms and program section repeats 8 4 Any desired program as subprogram Call with SEL PGM and CALL SELECTED PGM Use the function SEL PGM to select any program as a subprogram and call it at another position in the program The control runs the called program from the position where it was called in the program with CALL SELECTED PGM The SEL PGM function is also permitted with string parameters so that you can dynamically control program calls To select the program proceed as follows gt To select the functions for program call press the PGM CALL key SELECT gt Press the SELECT PROGRAM soft key for the TNC PROGRAM to start the dialog for defining the program to be called a gt press the SELECT FILE soft key for the TNC to FILE display a selection window in which you can select the program to be called Confirm with the END key To call the selected program proceed as follows gt To select the functions for program call press the PGM CALL key CALL gt Press the CALL SELECTED PROG
415. mes begin to chatter This chattering places heavy strain on the machine and causes ugly marks on the workpiece surface The tool too is subject to heavy and irregular wear from chattering In extreme cases it can result in tool breakage To reduce the inclination to chattering HEIDENHAIN now offers an effective antidote with ACC Active Chatter Control The use of this control function is particularly advantageous during heavy cutting ACC makes substantially higher metal removal rates possible This makes it possible to increase your metal removal rate by up to 25 and more depending on the type of machine You reduce the mechanical load on the machine and increase the life of your tools at the same time Please note that ACC was developed especially for heavy cutting and is particularly effective in this area You need to conduct appropriate tests to ensure whether ACC is also advantageous during standard roughing When you use the ACC feature you must enter the number of tool cuts CUT for the corresponding tool in the TOOL T tool table TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 387 Programming Special functions 11 2 Active Chatter Control ACC option 145 Activating deactivating ACC To activate ACC for the respective tool in the tool table TOOL T you first need to set the column ACC to Y ENT key Y NO ENT key N To activate deactivate ACC for the machine mode gt
416. miscellaneous functions M and STOP cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeesseaeeeessaaaeeesseaaneeees 364 BM OM WMS Te aa gee geese costes eta ec E EAEE A eee E E N AE E 364 10 2 M functions for program run inspection spindle and COOlAaNt cccccscceseecseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaees 365 Oeste cas cosas sete nce ic ete ea ecient Seperate asc N EE PEEN TETA 365 10 3 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate Aata ccccccsccssseceeeeeeeeeseecaeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeaeeeaeeseeeseeeeanes 366 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 ccc ccccccccc cece eeeeeeeeeeeeueeeseeeeaeeeanenaneennes 366 Moving to positions in a non tilted coordinate system with a tilted working plane M130 0 368 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path DehaviOl ccsccccecccseccseecueecceeecaeecuseseeeecueecaseeaeeeeeeseaeesaeesees 369 Macnining small contour steps MI serseri irii duioisasih rAr AA EEA EENE E VEEE EEE ERA Neea 369 Machnio open contour comers MIG vasuiniindatcavnuceneddrsteavondacihatetudaieardtaasetenandoraloajendadansoreuddamysinnscencoanisnieneesseartnan 370 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 cece ceccceecc secs eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeaeeueeueetaetueenes 371 Feed rate in millimeters per spindle revolution M136 s esnesnsnsnunnerrerrsrrsrerrerrsrrsrrrerrerrerrnrerrerrerr SIZ Feed rate for circular arces M109 MT1I0 MI Il eciostesce anecimbstacndlnanutantosgnandamsan
417. mma separated value The CSV file format describes the structure of a text file for exchanging simply structured data The export file has the following structure Line 1 In the first line the TNC stores the column names of all the relevant tool data to be defined The column names are separated trom each other by commas Further lines All the other lines contain the data of the tools that you have exported The order of the data matches the order of the column names in Line 1 The data is separated by commas the TNC outputs decimal numbers with a decimal point Follow the steps outlined below for exporting gt n the tool management you use the arrow keys or mouse to mark the tool data that you wish to export gt Select the EXPORT TOOL soft key the TNC shows a pop up window specify the name for the CSV Tile confirm with the ENT key gt Press the START soft key to start the export process The TNC shows the status of the delete export process in a pop up window gt Terminate the export process by pressing the END key or soft key The TNC always stores the exported CSV file in the TNC system tooltab directory TNC 620 User s Manual 194 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Deleting marked tool data Using this function you can simply delete tool data that you no longer need Follow the steps outlined below for deleting gt n the tool management you use the arrow keys or mouse t
418. mode Automatically measuring workpieces Tools can be measured automatically HEIDENHAIN DNC option number 18 Communication with external PC applications over COM component Advanced Programming Features option 19 Expanded programming functions FK free contour programming Programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned tor NC TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC model software and features Advanced Programming Features option 19 Fixed cycles Advanced Graphic Features option 20 Expanded graphic functions Advanced Function Set 3 option 21 Expanded functions Group 3 Pallet Management option 22 Pallet management Display Step option 23 Display step DXF Converter option 42 DXF converter KinematicsOpt option 48 Optimizing the machine kinematics TNC 620 User s Manual Peck drilling reaming boring counterboring centering cycles 201 to 205 208 240 241 Milling of internal and external threads cycles 262 to 265 267 Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets and studs cycles 212 to 215 251 to 257 Clearing level and oblique surfaces cycles 230 to 233 Straight slots and circular slots cycles 210 211 253 254 Linear and circular point patterns cycles 220 221 Contour train contour pocket also with contourparallel machining trochoidal slot cycles 20 to 25 27
419. mplementation Miscellaneous functions M104 M105 M112 M114 M124 M134 M142 M150 M200 M204 from predecessor controls no longer generate ERROR blocks during import When simulating or running an NC program with these miscellaneous functions the control interrupts the NC program with an error message that helps you to find an alternative implementation Comparison Miscellaneous functions page 635 The maximum file size of files output with FN 16 FPRINT has been increased from 4 kB to 20 kB The Preset PR preset table is write protected in Programming operating mode Saving the datums in the preset table page 486 The input range of the Q parameter list for defining the QPARA tab on the status display consists of 132 input positions Displaying Q parameters QPARA tab page 82 Manual calibration of the touch probe with fewer pre positioning movements Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 page 502 The position display takes into account the DL oversizes programmed in the Tool Call block selectable as an oversize of the workpiece or tool Delta values for lengths and radii page 169 In single blocks the control executes each point individually with point pattern cycles and CYCL CALL PAT Program run page 551 Rebooting the control is no longer possible with the END key but with the soft key Switch oft page 466 The control displays the contouring feed rate in manual mode S
420. n option 9 12 6 Definition of a normalized vector A normalized vector is a mathematical quantity with a value of 1 and any direction The TNC requires up to two normalized vectors for LN blocks one to determine the direction of the surface normal vector and another optional to determine the tool orientation direction The direction of a surface normal vector is determined by the components NX NY and NZ With an end mill and a radius mill this direction is perpendicular from the workpiece surface to be machined to the tool datum PT and with a toroid cutter through PT or PT see figure The direction of the tool orientation is determined by the components IX TY and TZ The coordinates for the X Y Z positions and the surface normal components NX NY NZ as well as TX TY TZ must be in the same sequence in the NC block Always indicate all of the coordinates and all of the Surface normal vectors in an LN block even if the values have not changed from the previous block TX TY and TZ must always be defined with numerical values You cannot use Q parameters Calculate the normal vectors as exactly as possible and output them with a sufficient number of decimal places in order to avoid interruptions in the feed rate during machining 3 D compensation with surface normal vectors is only effective for coordinates in the main axes X Y Z If you insert a tool with oversize positive delta value the TNC outputs an error
421. n acon pees 536 ADDUCI eea E E E AA OAA A ES A AAE nace 536 DOCS Oi tie seng Eor TUN yaa cies anos tena sm usuacessmaanwsnaseeaannsisoedbeusia tan seauisnandaanie tact anubnsubeatalwuuaansesouaedsabeteien Dov OVER Wee Display MOOG neersien i eei e Ra E EE A a 538 POVE N eer EE A E ttc EE gn acl E EAE E AE EAE 539 E A EAN ES A E A E A E E EEE A E A A E A A T E E eerie 542 POS ON I LPNS 10 ANC e E E E E S 542 Repeating graphic siMuUlation sssnsisssissiusrusriusrrrrsrrtri tit rttr eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeeseetaeeeaaeeteeetaes 544 T a A EAA AEE E E E 544 Measurement ot machining UN Eseries eii biria iian iaai iiia 545 Showing the workpiece blank in the working space option 20 cccccssseeessssseeeeessseeeesaeees 546 PONG LOW A E tonto saieninn E E T EAE 546 Functions for program display eaaa a eRe aaa Aana aaa eE Aera ae AE AAEE rape tree anana ae Aaea Aae 547 ecni P ENE A AA A A E aetna 547 ESTIEU E A E E rer E tere E E A AE E E A mar nee eee 548 PT SOM Cet OIG iieo iona E EET cio eee EERE EAE EEE a ET NE EEOAE 548 Programynun Saa e E E E E E a A a Mir preter E E 551 A E E E E E E E E E 651 PUNNAGA naa cleat T dr EA EE a E EEA 552 Interrupt MACHINING viv saissecsiersmasvennsnst saoseunnasunarantmame niwxoiesageceoitadloervanmesmecsibiemnduawne eatiecweineatslaucisdinesd mmewnubentasytis 553 Moving the machine axes during an INTETUD TON wwinivasnsissvancsiauvinrssesaevsnedernadsavwed in aweannsdaiwiwess sauidnunba awe
422. n by the control as 0 000017 45 for example Very large or very small values are displayed by the control in exponential notation The result of Q1 COS 89 999 0 001 is shown by the control as 1 74532925e 08 whereby e 08 corresponds to the factor of 10 TNC 620 User s Manual 306 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Additional functions 9 8 9 8 Additional functions Overview Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys Soft key Function Page puta FN 14 ERROR 308 Display error messages ENE FN 16 F PRINT 312 Formatted output of texts or Q parameter values FN18 FN 18 SYSREAD 316 Te Read system data FN 19 PLC 325 PLC Transfer values to the PLC FN2 FN 20 WAIT FOR 325 aS NC and PLC synchronization a FN 29 PLC 326 Transter up to eight values to the PLC a FN 37 EXPORT 326 Export local Q parameters or QS parameters into a calling program FN26 FN 26 TABOPEN 406 A Open a freely definable table FN27 FN 27 TABWRITE 407 Bice Write to a freely definable table FN28 FN 28 TABREAD 408 ers Read trom a freely definable table TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 307 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions FN 14 ERROR Displaying error messages With the function FN 14 ERROR you can call messages under program control The messages are predefined by the machine tool build
423. n by the control as 0 000017 45 for example Very large or very small values are displayed by the control in exponential notation The result of Q1 COS 89 999 0 001 is shown by the control as 1 74532925e 08 whereby e 08 corresponds to the factor of 10 Program run full sequence Programming 11 c i Program run fu sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H S Datum table lo BEGIN PGM STATi MM 1 SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshi CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 CALL LBL 99 LBL 99 PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING CYCL DEF 17 1 SET UP2 CYCL DEF 17 2 DEPTH 1 10 CYCL DEF 17 3 PITCH 1 11 CC X 22 5 Y 35 75 S 2000 STATUS COORD OVERVIEW Pos STATUS TRANSF Q PARAM STATUS STATUS STATUS OF EJF rogram run full sequence BJ Programming th 11 sequence Program run fu TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H o BEGIN PGM STATI MM 1 SEL TABLE TNC table zeroshift d 2 CYCL DEF 32 0 TOLERANCE 3 CYCL DEF 32 1 T0 05 4 CALL LBL 99 5 LBL 99 6 PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 STAY 7 CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING 95 000 0 0 000 10 000 Mode NOML Bo Ties s 2000 G omm min Ovr 100 M 5 9 verview Pem LBL cyc m Pos Toot TT TRANS opara STATUS COORD OVERVIEW pos STATUS TRANS Q PARAM STATUS OF STATUS STATUS TOOL TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDEN
424. n call copy rename and erase files With the TNC you can manage and save files up to a total size of 2 GB Depending on the setting the TNC generates a backup file bak after editing and saving of NC programs This can reduce the memory space available to you TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 111 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 3 File management Fundamentals File names When you store programs tables and texts as files the TNC adds an extension to the file name separated by a point This extension indicates the file type File name File type PROG20 H File names should not exceed 24 characters otherwise the TNC cannot display the entire file name File names on the TNC must comply with this standard The Open Group Base Specifications Issue 6 IEEE Std 1003 1 2004 Edition PosixStandard Accordingly the file names may include the characters below ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZabcdefg hijklmnopgqrstuvwxyz0123456 789 _ You should not use any other characters in file names in order to prevent any file transfer problems The maximum limit for the path and file name together is 255 characters see Paths page 114 TNC 620 User s Manual 112 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 File management Fundamentals Displaying externally generated files on the TNC The TNC features several additional tools which you can use to display the fil
425. n ene ty ene eer en ene E en ee eee ee ore 575 PTE MONA AEE EIST EE TAE TA nacre tsi sdb an eld Ge acetone tse vie acon E TO N 579 DELHI the Ro 232 ISAC S serian AAAA ENE RENAE aE E TE 575 Seting he BAUD RATE baudRalE Senet enn ire Ea Ta ELE AE E 575 seng URIS Proloco FOO CO aitaa cteispo crenata ance eae naltesaci ents ness sedensiab bond cedaalbea da tataateeamewaasieauadabentuatces 5 6 Tey TN 1e els tits DE 8 ccc aaa er ee er eee ee ee ene rene eee er eae 576 Saee TUE gt E E E nip acta E E N E beter enantio 576 SeA the Stop HE STOO BIS oirionn Aaaa Eaa aaa EO aco E eiai 576 Setting hando Vet MO UO SOLON ccs ecectccsctearrt ance saseteaacttnscancitectetasternetesetcnstetrdeasieetn dd etna ante eaters tee eonddlveieneaatee 577 File system for file operations FIIESYSTEM cccccccc cece cece a ceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae sete eetaeseaneeaneenaes 577 BIOCK Check Chara ter DecAvoidetri ChaT lt stuscsasestceaasoow causa sedans atesena deat ieocads oai aa ea 577 ST of RI VES MOLON eiren EEE E EEEE 577 Define behavior after reception of ETX NOEOtATtErE tx cece cece cece cn eeeeeeeee esse eeen essen eeanessneetaeeeanees 578 Settings for data transfer with the TNCserver PC SOTtWALE cccccccccccccc cece eeeeeeeeeeueeeeseuseuaeeuestaeeneeens 578 Setting the operating mode of the external device TIIESYSTEM cece ccceccece eee eee eseaseueeeueetaeeeeeenes 579 I Ae E SO e E E EA ce ttc ta EAEE AA A T 580 T 582 OA
426. n mode the TNC does not switch off the spindle or coolant gt Do not interrupt program run or test run at blocks containing M1 Set soft key to OFF gt Interrupt program run or test run at blocks containing M1 Set soft key to ON TNC 620 User s Manual 564 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 17 MOD functions 17 1 MOD function 17 1 MOD function The MOD functions provide additional input possibilities and displays In addition you can enter code numbers to enable access to protected areas Selecting MOD functions Open the pop up window with the MOD functions gt To select the MOD functions press the MOD key The TNC opens a pop up window displaying the available MOD functions Changing the settings As well as with the mouse navigation with the keyboard is also possible in the MOD functions gt Switch trom the input area in the right window to the MOD function selections in the left window with the tab key gt Select MOD function gt Switch to the input field with the tab key or ENT key gt Enter value according to function and confirm with OK or make selection and confirm with Apply If more than one possibility is available for a particular setting you can superimpose a window listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key select the setting with the ENT key If you don t want to change the setting close the window again with the END key Exiting MOD functio
427. n the Test Run operating mode you can also use the 3 D line graphics The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined with a cylindrical end mill If a tool table is active the TNC also considers the entries in the LCUTS TANGLE and R2 columns The TNC will not show a graphic if m the current program has no valid workpiece blank definition m no program is selected if the BLK FORM block was not yet executed during the workpiece blank definition with the aid of a subprogram The simulation of programs with 5 axis machining or tilted machining might run at reduced speed With the MOD menu Graphic settings you and decrease the model quality and in that way increase the speed of simulation Graphics without Option 20 Advanced graphic features Without Option 20 no model is available in Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes and the Test Run operating mode The PROGRAM GRAPHICS and GRAPHICS soft keys are dimmed The line graphic in Programming operating mode also functions without Option 20 TNC 620 User s Manual 536 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Graphics option 20 16 1 Speed of the setting test runs The most recently set speed stays active until a power interruption After the control is switched on the speed is set to FMAX After you have started a program the TNC displays the following soft keys with which you can set the
428. n various SOL commands the column name is used for addressing Rows The number of rows is variable You can insert new rows There are no row numbers or other designators However you can select rows based on the contents of a column Rows can only be deleted in the table editor not by an NC program Cell The part of a column in a row Table entry Content of a cell Result set During a transaction the selected columns and rows are managed in the result set You can view the result set as a sort of intermediate memory which temporarily assumes the set of selected columns and rows Result set Synonym This term defines a name used for a table instead of its path and file name Synonyms are specified by the machine manufacturer in the configuration data TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 327 Programming Q parameters 9 9 Accessing tables with SQL commands A transaction In principle a transaction consists of the following actions Address the table file select rows and transfer them to the Tabelle SOL Select Result SQL Fetch 1234 ABC Be I set a result set Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows SQL Commit SQL Update Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the PE PE rows from the result set are placed in the table file Other actions are also necessary so that table entries can be edited sea S
429. nal Programming 2 2015 TNCguide context sensitive help system 4 9 Working with the TNCguide Calling the TNCguide There are several ways to start the TNCguide gt Press the HELP key if the TNC is not already showing an error message Benutzer Dokumentation zur TNC 128 im TNCguide navigieren Am einfachs k nnen r eigen gt Click the helo symbol at the lower right of the screen beforehand then click the appropriate soft keys gt Use the file manager to open a help file chm file The TNC can open any chm file even if it is not saved on the TNC s internal memory If one or more error messages are waiting for your attention the TNC shows the help directly associated with the error messages To start the TNCguide you first have to acknowledge all error messages When the help system is called on the programming station the TNC starts the internally defined standard browser For many soft keys there is a context sensitive call through which you can go directly to the description of the soft key s function This functionality requires using a mouse Proceed as follows gt Select the soft key row containing the desired soft key gt Click with the mouse on the helo symbol that the TNC displays just above the soft key row The mouse pointer turns into a question mark gt Move the question mark to the soft key for which you want an explanation and click The TNC opens the TNCguide If no specific
430. nce again without coordinate input M118 becomes effective at the start of block Example NC blocks You want to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move the tool in the working plane X Y by 1 mm and in the rotary axis B by 5 from the programmed value L X 0 Y 38 5 RL F125 M118 X1 Y1 B5 M118 is effective in a tilted coordinate system if you activate the tilted working plane function for the Manual Operation mode If the tilted working plane function is not active for the Manual Operation mode the original coordinate system is effective M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation TNC 620 User s Manual 376 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior 10 4 Virtual tool axis VT 7 Your machine tool builder must have prepared the TNC for this function Refer to your machine manual lt With the virtual tool axis you can also traverse in the direction of a sloping tool with the handwheel with machines with swivel heads To traverse in a virtual tool axis direction select the VT axis on the display of your handwheel see Traverse with electronic handwheels page 469 With an HR 5xx handwheel you can select the virtual axis directly with the orange VI axis key if required refer to your machine manual You can also carry out handwheel superimpositioning in the currently active tool axis direction with the M118 function F
431. ndow Use the appropriate screen layout for this The inserted structure items are managed by the TNC in a separate file extension SEC DEP This speeds navigation in the program structure window Displaying the program structure window Changing the active window PROGRAM gt Display the program structure window Select the PGM SECTS screen display mama gt Switch the active window Press the CHANGE WINDOW soft key Inserting a structuring block in the program window gt Select the block after which the structuring block is to be inserted gt Press the SPEC FCT key PROGRAM gt Press the PROGRAMMING AIDS soft key MING AIDS INSERT gt Press the INSERT SECTION soft key or the key SECTION on the external ASCII keyboard gt Enter the structuring text M If necessary change the structure depth with the soft key Selecting blocks in the program structure window If you are scrolling through the program structure window block by block the TNC at the same time automatically moves the corresponding NC blocks in the program window This way you can quickly skip large program sections TNC 620 User s Manual 42 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Calculator 4 5 4 5 Calculator Operation The TNC features an integrated calculator with the basic E3Positioning with ES Programming mathematical functions OETAN ENE gt Use t
432. ng 2 2015 593 17 MOD functions 17 14 Load machine configuration 17 14 Load machine configuration Application Caution Data loss The TNC overwrites your machine configuration when you load restore a backup The overwritten machine data will be lost in the process You can no longer undo this process Your machine tool builder can provide you a backup with a machine configuration After entering the keyword RESTORE you can load the backup on your machine or programming station Proceed as follows to load the backup gt Inthe MOD dialog enter the keyword RESTORE gt Inthe TNC s Tile manager select the backup file e g BKUP 2013 12 12_ zip The TNC opens a pop up window for the backup gt Press the emergency stop gt Press the OK soft key to start the backup process 594 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tables and overviews 18 1 Machine specific user parameters 18 1 Machine specific user parameters Application The parameter values are entered in the configuration editor To enable you to set machine specitic functions for users your machine tool builder can define which machine parameters are available as user parameters Furthermore your machine tool builder can integrate additional machine parameters which are not described in the following into the TNC Refer to your machine manual The machine parameters are grouped as parameter obj
433. ng Tools 5 2 Tool data Icon Tool type yj Side finisher MILL_FS MILL_FS T Face milling cutter MILL_FACE Calling the File Manager Expanded tool management bnc BJ Programming 320 The tool management call can differ as described p below Refer to your machine manual Toor gt Select the tool table Press the TOOL TABLE soft TEH key gt gt Scroll through the soft key row TYP T T E o Mm b 1 M oD 2 E p 3 E o 4 E o 5 Mm p 6 Mm p 7 o s Hm p 9 EZI PAGE m Q H i D38 END 4 T gt Select the TOOL MANAGEMENT soft key The TNC MANAGEMENT goes into the new table view see figure at right In the new view the TNC presents all tool information in the following four tabs Tools Tool specific information Pockets Pocket specific information Assembly list List of all tools in the NC program that is selected in the Program Run mode only if you have already created a tool usage Tile see Tool usage test page 186 T usage sequence List of the sequence of all tools that are inserted in the program selected in the Program Run mode only if you have already made a tool usage file see Tool usage test page 186 You can edit the tool data only in the form view which you can activate by pressing the FORM FOR TOOL soft key or the ENT key for the currently highlighted tool If you use tool management w
434. ng the working plane option 8 Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system After you have positioned the rotary axes set the preset in the same manner as for a non tilted system The behavior of the TNC during datum setting depends on the setting in machine parameter CfgPresetSettings chkTiltingAxes m chkTiltingAxes On With an active tilted working plane the TNC checks during datum setting in the X Y and Z axes whether the current coordinates of the rotary axes agree with the tilt angles that you defined 8 D ROT menu If the tilted working plane function is not active the TNC checks whether the rotary axes are at 0 actual positions If the positions do not agree the TNC will display an error message m chkTiltingAxes Off The TNC does not check whether the current coordinates of the rotary axes actual positions agree with the tilt angles that you defined Danger of collision Always set a reference point in all three reference axes TNC 620 User s Manual 528 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Positioning with Manual Data Input 15 1 Programming and executing simple machining operations 15 1 Programming and executing simple machining operations The Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation is particularly convenient for simple machining operations or to ore position the tool It enables you to write a short program in HEIDENHAIN conversational programming or in ISO format and
435. nge of traverse Spindle speed Error compensation Data interfaces Ambient temperature TNC 620 User s Manual Technical information 18 3 Operating panel TFT color flat panel display with soft keys 2 GB As fine as 0 1 um for linear axes As fine as 0 01 um for linear axes with option 23 Up to 0 0001 for rotary axes Up to 0 000 01 for rotary axes with option 23 Maximum 999 999 999 mm or 999 999 999 Linear in 4 axes Circular in 2 axes Helical superimposition of circular and straight paths 1 5 MS Position loop resolution Signal period of the position encoder 1024 Cycle time of position controller 3 ms Cycle time of speed controller 200 us Maximum 100 m 3937 inches Maximum 100 000 rom analog speed command signal Linear and nonlinear axis error backlash reversal peaks during circular movements thermal expansion Static friction One each RS 232 C V 24 max 115 kilobaud Expanded interface with LSV 2 protocol for external operation of the TNC over the interface with HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo Ethernet interface 1000 BaseT 5 x USB 1 x front USB 2 0 4 x rear USB 3 0 Operation 5 C to 45 C Storage 35 C to 65 C HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 615 Tables and overviews 18 3 Technical information Accessories Electronic Handwheels E Touch probes 2 Advanced Function Set 1 option 8 Expanded functions Group 1 Advanced Function Set 2 option 9 Exp
436. ngles in the working plane You can measure the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge or m the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 521 Manual operation and setup 14 10 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 Finding the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece edge PROBING gt Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key gt Rotation angle If you will need the current basic rotation later write down the value that appears under Rotation angle gt Make a basic rotation with workpiece edge to be compared see Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe option 17 page 509 gt Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle between the angle reference axis and the workpiece edge as the rotation angle gt Cancel the basic rotation or restore the previous basic rotation gt Set the rotation angle to the value that you previously wrote down Measuring the angle between two workpiece edges gt Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key gt Rotation angle If you need the current basic rotation later write down the displayed rotation angle gt Make a basic rotation with first workpiece edge see mW Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe option 17 page 509 gt P
437. ning all axis positions selected through the MOD function Features in the program run modes of operation You can use the following functions in the Program Run modes of operation NC start handwheel NC start key NC stop handwheel NC stop key After the NC stop key has been pressed Internal stop handwheel soft keys MOP and then STOP After the NC stop key has been pressed Manual axis traverse handwheel soft keys MOP and then MAN Returning to the contour after the axes were moved manually during a program interruption handwheel soft keys MOP and then REPO Operation is by handwheel soft keys which function similarly to the control screen soft keys see Returning to the contour page 561 On off switch for the Tilted Working Plane function handwheel soft keys MOP and then 3D 478 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M 14 3 14 3 Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M Application In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel operating modes you can enter the spindle speed S feed rate F and the miscellaneous functions M with soft keys The miscellaneous functions are described in page 364 The machine tool builder determines which miscellaneous functions M are available on your E control and what effects they have Entering values Spindle speed S miscellaneous function M s g
438. ning behavior see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 TNC 620 User s Manual 420 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Input parameters PROJECTED gt Rot angle of main coord plane Rotary angle Wee EULPR around the Z axis see figure at top right Please note m Input range 180 0000 to 180 0000 m The 0 axis is the X axis gt Swivel angle of tool axis Tilting angle EULNU of the coordinate system around the X axis shifted by the precession angle see figure at center right Please note nput range 0 to 180 0000 m The 0 axis is the Z axis gt ROT angle of tilted plane Rotation EULROT of the tilted coordinate system around the tilted Z axis corresponds to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION Use the rotation angle to simply define the direction of the X axis in the tilted machining plane see figure at bottom right Please note m Input range 0 to 360 0000 m The O axis is the X axis gt Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 NC block 5 PLANE EULER EULPR45 EULNU20 EULROT22 _EULROT TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 421 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Abbreviations us
439. ns To enter data in the pocket table TOOL_PTCH proceed as follows Display the tool table The TNC shows the tool gt gt Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of operation Working with the pocket table see Pocket table for tool changer page 179 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Setting up tools B 100 N Display the pocket table The TNC shows the Edit the pocket table Set the EDIT soft key to ON With the upward or downward arrow keys you can select the pocket number that you want to edit With the rightward or leftward arrow keys you can select the data that you want to edit Exit the pocket table press the END key First steps with the TNC 620 1 6 Workpiece setup 1 6 Workpiece setup Selecting the correct operating mode Workpieces are set up in the or mode gt Press the operating mode key The TNC switches to the Manual mode of operation Further information on this topic Operating mode see Moving the machine axes page 467 Clamping the workpiece Mount the workpiece with a fixture on the machine table If you have a 3 D touch probe on your machine then you do not need to clamp the workpiece parallel to the axes If you do not have a 3 D touch probe available you have to align the workpiece so that it is fixed with its edges parallel to the machine axes
440. ns gt Exit the MOD functions Press the END soft key or the END key 566 G Prooram run sing Programming TNC nc_prog PGM 333 H Q203 0 Q342 0 15 CY j USER CONFIG LICENSE DIAGNOSIS PARAMETER EDITOR INFO TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 06 41 2 CANCEL MOD function 171 Overview of MOD functions The following functions are available regardless of the selected Manual operation one BJ Programing ote operating mode Code number entry fe PE Code number Eo g Display settings a o r a Position displays SI ie m Unit of measurement mm inches for position display i aa m Program entry for MDI m on E m Show time of day ee 5 Show the info bar el ee Graphic settings Model type Model quality Machine settings Kinematics selection JTool usage file m External access system settings Set the system time Define the network connection Network IP configuration Diagnostic functions Bus diagnosis m Drive diagnosis HEROS information General information m Software version FCL information m License information Machine times TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 567 17 MOD functions 17 2 Graphic settings 17 2 Graphic settings With the MOD function Graphic settings you can select the model type and model quality select the graphic settings
441. ns of the machine table or tool Linear axes are usually equipped with linear encoders rotary tables and tilting axes with angle encoders When a machine axis moves the corresponding position encoder generates an electrical signal The TNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis If there is a power interruption the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position of the machine slide To recover this association incremental position encoders are provided with reference marks The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are crossed over From that signal the TNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine positions For linear encoders with distance coded reference marks the machine axes need to move by no more than 20 mm for angle encoders by no more than 20 With absolute encoders an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch on In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re established directly after switch on Reference system A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in space The position data are always referenced to a predetermined point and are described through coordinates The Cartesian coordinate system a rectangular coordinate system is based on the three coordin
442. nsertions and conclude the transaction f INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains in the result set All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction Is not concluded SQL COMMIT COMMIT Transfer table rows from the result set into the table and conclude the transaction om SQL UPDATE UPDATE Save data from the Q parameters in an existing table row in the result set ae SQL INSERT INSERT Save data from the Q parameters in a new table row in the result set TNC 620 User s Manual 330 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Accessing tables with SQL commands 9 9 SQL BIND SQL BIND binds a Q parameter to a table column The SQL commands Fetch Update and Insert evaluate this binding assignment during data transfer between the result set and the NC program An SQL BIND command without a table or column name cancels the binding Binding remains effective at most until the end of the NC program or Subprogram m You can program any number of bindings Read and write processes only take into account the columns that were entered in the Select command SQL BIND must be programmed before Fetch Update or Insert commands are programmed You can program a Select command without a preceding Bind command If in the Select command you include columns for which no binding is programmed an error occurs during read write processes program interrupt tL gt Parameter no f
443. o mark the tool data that you wish to delete gt Select the DELETE MARKED TOOLS soft key and the TNC shows a pop up window listing the tool data to be deleted gt Press the START soft key to start the delete process The TNC shows the status of the delete process In a pop up window gt Terminate the delete process by pressing the END key or soft key The TNC deletes all the data of all the tools selected Make sure that you really no longer need the tool data because there is no Undo function available m You cannot delete the tool data of tools still stored in the pocket table First remove the tool from the magazine TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 195 Programming Tools 5 3 Tool compensation 5 3 Tool compensation Introduction The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the spindle axis by the compensation value for the tool length In the working plane It compensates the tool radius If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC the tool radius compensation is effective only in the working plane The TNC accounts for the compensation value in up to five axes including the rotary axes Tool length compensation Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool is called To cancel length compensation call a tool with the length L 0 e g TOOL CALL 0 Danger of collision If you cancel a positive length compensation with TOOL CALL O
444. o ain EE i e A aert ene sipiaraans 452 Usma other 00s Dalta VARS Spates carrey sci sovaneyp atom Papasan as etapa ate a sda Dni rd NEERA ERNER 452 3D compensation Without TEP M biiccccouenseaniennesuecadnaiesescasudawawiesonteduiraciestedenscualoedubesaciapnasiadiceiyessn asebountiase 452 Face milling GO compensation with TCPM lesicussucei sus tudtiauneieamedacineacna i aaa NENE TENEAN 453 Peripheral milling 3 D radius compensation with TCPM and radius compensation RL RR 454 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 39 Contents 13 1 Pallet management option 22 ccccceseccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeseaseeeeeeaseeeseeaeeeesaaseessenaaeeesssseeees 458 ADDUCI ee a a parce AA OAA A EA E EA AAE ene nansetaadaatadt 458 PEEP I O E A E AE ect tenoasaecenowuasemeaen 460 aa ae PEET O ea E E 460 TERO ETN E SE PEA AEE E AE AEE E TA E E T T 460 TNC 620 User s Manual 40 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 Switch on SWITCH OM sige rece cier cece cedatee c ce cestaeeaastee reins rerascere Suse raeseraceaig EEA EEEa EEEE EEA A Eaa aE 464 EE I sete nection a ceca ec cpt botnet EA AA A 464 UO Wi E E E E E E E ance manda cs auaniecdencageaonactaaes 466 Moving theimachine axes secre a a a L E E A a E eoenecs 467 Een E A E E A E EE PEN A S 467 Moving the axis with the machine axis direction DUttONS snssnssusrnsiusrrrerrerrr
445. o block 1 CLEAR status display depending on machine parameter clearMode M3 Spindle ON clockwise E M4 Spindle ON counterclockwise m M5 Spindle STOP E M6 Tool change E Spindle STOP Program STOP M8 Coolant ON 2 M9 Coolant OFF m M13 Spindle ON clockwise E Coolant ON M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise H Coolant ON M30 Same as M2 m TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 365 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 3 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate data 10 3 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate data Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Scale reference point On the scale a reference mark indicates the position of the scale Kr reference point h A YQ Mi Machine datum The machine datum is required for the following tasks m Define the axis traverse limits software limit switches m Approach machine referenced positions such as tool change positions Seta workpiece datum The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the machine datum is defined by the machine tool builder in a machine parameter Standard behavior The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum see Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe page 493 Behavior with M91 Machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 If you program incremental coordinates in an M91 block en
446. o the TNC application so that you can operate the control when the TNCguide is open If the full screen is active the TNC reduces the window size automatically before the change of focus Exiting TNCguide TNCGUIDE QUIT TNCGUIDE EXIT Subject index The most important subjects in the Manual are listed in the subject index Index tab You can select them directly by mouse or with the arrow keys The left side is active gt Select the Index tab gt Activate the Keyword input field gt Enter the word for the desired subject and the TNC synchronizes the index and creates a list in which you can find the subject more easily or gt Use the arrow key to highlight the desired keyword gt Use the ENT key to call the information on the selected keyword Full text search In the Find tab you can search the entire TNCguide for a specific word The left side is active gt Select the Find tab gt Activate the Find input field gt Enter the desired word and confirm with the ENT key The TNC lists all sources containing the word gt Use the arrow key to highlight the desired source gt Press the ENT key to go to the selected source The full text search only works for single words If you activate the Search only in titles function by mouse or by selecting it and then pressing the space key the TNC searches only through headings and ignores the body text TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational
447. of the column MOVE COLUMN active The column can be moved by drag and drop RESET Reset the manually changed settings move SETTINGS a seach columns to original condition TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 191 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data In addition you can perform the following functions by mouse sorting function You can sort the data in ascending or descending order depending on the active setting by clicking a column of the table head Arrange columns You can arrange the columns In any sequence you want by clicking a column of the table head and then moving it with the mouse key pressed down The TNC does not save the current column sequence when you exit the tool management depending on the active setting Show miscellaneous information in the form view The TNC displays tool tipos when you leave the mouse pointer on an active input field for more than a second and when you have set the EDIT ON OFF soft key to ON If the form view Is active the following functions are available to OU lt Soft key Editing functions form view select the tool data of the previous tool 4 a O 2 Select the tool data of the next tool 4 a O 2 Select previous tool index only active if indexing is enabled select the next tool index only active if indexing is enabled CuS Discard all changes made since the form was last called CHANGES Undo function INSERT
448. of the program Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of operation page 73 Running programs see Program run page 551 Choosing the program you want to run gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC opens the file manager LAST gt Press the LAST FILES soft key The TNC opens a E pop up window with the most recently selected files gt If desired use the arrow keys to select the program that you want to run Load with the ENT key Further information on this topic a File Management see Working with the file manager page 114 Start the program gt Press the NC start key The TNC runs the active i program Further information on this topic m Running programs see Program run page 551 68 EJP rogram run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM 113 h i 4 Z 82000 0 FMAX M3 Y 4 0 POCKET MILLING SET UP2 4 2 DEPTH 10 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 4 4 X 30 Y 8 DR RADIUS8 0 Y Nm 13 43 X lt a 0 000 E Y 54 549 0 0 000 10 000 Mode Nom o Ovr 100 BEGIN l PAGE PAGE T 1 is TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Introduction 2 1 The TNC 620 2 1 The TNC 620 HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop oriented contouring controls that enable you to program conventional milling and drilling operations right at the machine In an easy to use conversational pr
449. oft key the TNC will completely overwrite the current TOOL T tool table After the copying process the new TOOL T table consists of 10 lines gt Or press the REPLACE FIELDS soft key for the TNC to overwrite the 10 lines in the TOOL T file The data of the other lines is not changed Extracting lines from a table You can select one or more lines in a table and save them in a separate table Open the table from which you want to copy lines Use the arrow keys to select the first line to be copied Press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Press the TAG soft key select additional lines if required Press the SAVE AS soft key Enter a name for the table in which the selected lines are to be saved v vV V V vV V Y TNC 620 User s Manual 120 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 Copying a directory gt Move the highlight in the right window onto the directory you want to copy gt Press the COPY soft key the TNC opens the window for selecting the target directory gt Select the target directory and confirm with ENT or the OK soft key The TNC copies the selected directory and all its subdirectories to the selected target directory Choosing one of the last files selected ee d Calling the File Manager manuar operation Programming gt To display the 10 files last selected Press the ras LAST FILES soft key Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to sel
450. oft key row active after a cycle definition FALSE Hide cycle soft key row after a cycle definition Confirmation request before block is deleted TRUE Display confirmation request before deleting an NC block FALSE Do not display confirmation request before deleting an NC block Line number up to which NC program is tested 100 to 50000 Program length for which geometry should be tested DIN ISO programming Block number increment 0 to 250 Increment for generating DIN ISO blocks in the program Define programmable axes TRUE Use defined axis configuration FALSE Use default axis configuration XYZABCUVW Behavior with paraxial positioning blocks TRUE Paraxial positioning blocks permitted FALSE Paraxial positioning blocks locked Line number up to which identical syntax elements are searched for 500 to 50000 Search for selected elements with up down arrow keys TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Machine specific user parameters 18 1 Parameter settings Settings for the file manager Display of dependent Tiles MANUAL Dependent files are displayed AUTOMATIC Dependent files are not displayed Path specifications for end users List with drives and or directories Drives and directories entered here are shown by the TNC in the file manager FN 16 output path for execution Path for FN 16 output if no path has been defined in the program FN 16 output path for Programming and Test Run operating modes
451. ogrammed feed rate unit of measure is mm min or 1 10 inch min With rotary axes the TNC interprets the feed rate in degrees min regardless of whether the program is written in mm or inches BIB Define the feed per revolution units in mm rev or inch rev Caution In inch programs FU cannot be combined with M136 7 7 N c Define the tooth feed units in mm tooth or inch tooth The number of teeth must be defined in the tool table in the CUT column A D lt Functions for conversational guidance Ignore the dialog question Mz ZO End the dialog immediately DEL Abort the dialog and erase the block TNC 620 User s Manual 104 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Opening programs and entering 3 2 Actual position capture The TNC enables you to transfer the current tool position into the program for example during Positioning block programming Cycle programming To transfer the correct position values proceed as follows gt Place the input box at the position in the block where you want to insert a position value i gt Select the actual position capture function In the gt lt t soft key row the TNC displays the axes whose positions can be transferred gt Select the axis The TNC writes the current position of the selected axis into the active input box In the working plane the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool center even though tool radius compen
452. ogramming TNC 620 User s Manual 508 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe 14 9 option 17 14 9 Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe option 17 Introduction HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of Y the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by computing a basic rotation For this purpose the TNC sets the rotation angle to the desired angle with respect to the reference axis in the working plane See A figure at right The TNC interprets the measured angle as rotation around the tool direction in the workpiece coordinate system and saves the values in the columns SPA SPB and SPC of the preset table To identify the basic rotation probe two points on the side of the workpiece The sequence in which you probe the points influences the calculated angle The measured angle goes from the first to the second probing point You can also identify the basic rotation by holes or studs Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle reference axis when measuring workpiece misalignment To ensure that the basic rotation is calculated correctly during program run program both coordinates of the working plane in the first positioning block You can also use a basic rotation in conjunction with the PLANE function In this case first activate the basic r
453. ogramming 2 2015 Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe 14 9 option 17 Compensation of workpiece misalignment by rotating the table gt To compensate the identified misalignment by a rotary table position press the ALIGN ROTARY TABLE soft key after the probing process Position all axes to avoid a collision before table rotation The TNC outputs an additional warning before table rotation gt If you want to set the datum in the rotary table axis press the SET TABLE ROTATION soft key gt You can also save the misalignment of the rotary table in any line of the Preset table Enter the line number and press the TABLEROT IN PRESETTAB soft key The TNC saves the angle in the offset column of the rotary table e g in the C_OFFS column with a C axis If necessary the view in the Preset table has to be changed with the BASIS TRANSFORM OFFSET soft key to display this column TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 511 512 Manual operation and setup 14 9 Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe option 17 Displaying a basic rotation When you select the PROBING ROT function the TNC displays vanua operation onc BJ Programing the active angle of basic rotation in the dialog Rotation angle The TNC also displays the rotation angle in the additional status display STATUS POS eae ma 5 In the status display a symbol is shown for a b
454. ogramming 2 2015 Configure HR 550 FS wireless handwheel Statistical data To display the statistical data proceed as follows Configuration of wireless handwheel gt Press the MOD key to select the MOD function commnn gt Select the Machine settings menu co T gt To select the configuration menu for the wireless handwheel h press the SET UP WIRELESS HANDWHEEL soft key The TNC HW in charger displays the configuration menu with the statistical data ne aE ra Under Statistics the TNC displays information about the Start handwheel End 17 13 0 00 0 00 transmission quality If the reception quality is poor so that a proper and safe stop of the axes cannot be ensured anymore an emergency stop reaction of the wireless handwheel is triggered The displayed value Max successive lost indicates whether reception quality is poor If the TNC repeatedly displays values greater than 2 during normal operation of the wireless handwheel within the desired range of use then there is a risk of an undesired disconnection This can be corrected by Increasing the transmitter power or by changing to another channel with less radio traffic If this occurs try to improve the transmission quality by selecting another channel see Setting the transmission channel page 592 or by increasing the transmitter power see Selecting the transmitter power page 592 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programmi
455. ogramming language They are designed for milling drilling and boring machines as well as machining centers with up to 5 axes You can also change the angular position of the spindle under program control Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the functions are fast and easy to use Programming In HEIDENHAIN conversational and DIN ISO The HEIDENHAIN conversational programming format is an especially easy method of writing programs Interactive graphics illustrate the individual machining steps for programming the contour If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC the FK tree contour programming feature performs the necessary calculations automatically Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated either during or before actual machining It is also possible to program in ISO format or DNC mode You can also enter and test one program while the control is running another Compatibility Machining programs created on HEIDENHAIN contouring controls starting from the TNC 150 B may not always run on the TNC 620 If NC blocks contain invalid elements the TNC will mark them as ERROR blocks or with error messages when the file is opened Please also note the detailed description of the differences between the ITNC 530 and the TNC 620 see Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 compared page 623 TNC 620 User s Manual 70 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Vis
456. ol change STOP program run depending on machine parameter 365 Spindle STOP M8 Coolant on 365 M9 Coolant off E M13 Spindle ON clockwise coolant ON B 365 M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise coolant on a M30 Same function as M2 E 365 M89 Vacant miscellaneous function or a Cycles cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter a Manual M91 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine E 366 datum TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 621 Tables and overviews 18 4 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M101 M102 M107 M108 M109 M110 M111 M116 M117 M118 M120 M126 M127 M128 M129 M130 M138 M140 M143 M144 M145 M141 M148 M149 622 Overview tables Effect Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce the rotary axis display to a value below 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired Reset M101 Suppress error message for replacement tools with oversize Reset M107 Constant contouring speed at cutting edge feed rate increase and reduction Constant contouring speed at cutting edge only feed rate reduction Reset M109 M110 Feed rate In mm min on rotary axes Reset M116 Superimpose handwheel positi
457. ol for machining without causing a collision Your machine tool builder can also define a tool change macro for the Test Run operating mode This macro will simulate the exact behavior of the machine Refer to your machine manual TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 16 4 549 Test run and program run 16 4 Test run Execute test run If the central tool file is active a tool table must be active status S to conduct a test run Select a tool table via the file manager in the Test Run mode of operation You can select any preset table status S for the test run After RESET START line O of the temporarily loaded preset table automatically displays the momentarily active datum from Preset pr execution Line O is selected when starting the test run until you define another datum in the NC program All datums from lines gt 0 are read by the control from the selected preset table of the test run With the BLANK IN WORK SPACE function you activate working space monitoring for the test run see Showing the workpiece blank in the working space option 20 page 546 gt Select the Test Run operating mode PGM gt Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and a select the file you wish to test The TNC then displays the following soft keys Soft key Functions RESET Reset the blank form and test the entire at program Test the entire program START START Te
458. ole or a pitch circle using the programmable probing function Soft key Function FN23 FN 23 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from o three points e g FN 23 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs of three points on a circle must be saved in Q30 and the following five parameters in this case up to Q35 The TNC then saves the circle center in the reference axis X if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q20 the circle center in the minor axis Y if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q21 and the circle radius in parameter Q22 Soft key Function FN24 FN 24 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from L four points e g FN 24 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs of four points on a circle must be saved in Q30 and the following seven parameters in this case up to Q37 The TNC then saves the circle center in the reference axis X if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q20 the circle center in the minor axis Y if spindle axis is Z in parameter Q21 and the circle radius in parameter Q22 Note that FN 23 and FN 24 automatically overwrite the resulting parameter and the two following parameters TNC 620 User s Manual 302 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 If then decisions with Q parameters 9 6 9 6 If then decisions with Q parameters Application The TNC can make logical if then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value If the condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the
459. ollowing dialog SYSTEM STARTUP gt TNC is started POWER INTERRUPTED gt INC message that the power was interrupted clear the message COMPILE A PLC PROGRAM gt The PLC program of the TNC is automatically compiled RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING gt Switch on external dc voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit MANUAL OPERATION TRAVERSE REFERENCE POINTS gt Cross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button or Xt gt Cross the reference points in any sequence Press and hold the machine axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed ft Y If your machine is equipped with absolute encoders you can leave out crossing the reference marks In such a case the TNC is ready for operation immediately after the machine control voltage is switched on The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode The reference points need only be crossed if the machine axes are to be moved If you intend only to write edit or test programs you can select the Programming or Test Run mode of operation immediately after switching on the control voltage You can cross the reference points later by pressing the PASS OVER REFERENCE soft key in the MANUAL OPERATION mode TNC 620 User s Manual 464 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Crossing the reference point in
460. omment is to be inserted gt Initiate the programming dialog with the semicolon key 3 on the alphabetic keyboard gt Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 139 140 Programming Programming aids 4 2 Adding comments Functions for editing of the comment Function Jump to beginning of comment Jump to end of comment Jump to the beginning of a word Words must be separated by a space Jump to the end of a word Words must be separated by a space Switch between paste and overwrite mode TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 4 3 Display of NC programs Syntax highlighting The TNC displays syntax elements with various colors according to their meaning Programs are made more legible and clear with colorhighlighting Color highlighting of syntax elements Use Standard color Display of comments Display of numerical values Block number Scrollbar You can move the screen content with the mouse via the scrollbar Color Black Green Blue Purple on the right edge of the program window In addition the size and position of the scrollbar indicates program length and cursor position TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Display of NC programs manuar operation B Programming TNC nc_prog EX11 H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
461. on Programming Equal to Not equal to lS Less than lt Less than or equal to lt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to Linking multiple conditions Logical AND AND Logical OR OR TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 333 Programming Q parameters 9 9 Accessing tables with SQL commands SQL FETCH SQL FETCH reads the row addressed with INDEX from the result set and places the table entries in the bound assigned Q parameters The result set is addressed with the HANDLE SQL FETCH takes into account all columns entered in the Select command SQL FETCH 334 gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or index too large Database SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Database Index to SQL result Line number within the result set The table entries of this row are read and are transferred into the bound Q parameters If you do not enter an index the first row is read n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index Row number is transferred in a Q parameter 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z Z0SQL Q5 S
462. on and El Handwheel modes of operation ag GP BEE Eee Dene 17 CYCL DEF 5 3 PLNGNG10 F333 you can use this function to move the tool via the external direction 0 X Nm P4 T5 keys or with the handwheel in the direction that the tool axis is D ume x e 0 000 currently pointed Use this function if 38 240 Gil 9 999 10 000 T m You want to retract the tool in the direction of the tool axis E 1 ACTIVE TOOL axis during program interrupt of a 5 axis machining program KS B You want to machine with an inclined tool using the handwheel or the external direction keys in the Manual Operation mode gt To select manual tilting Press the 3 D ROT soft LA key gt Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the Manual Operation menu item AXIS gt To activate the current tool axis direction as the gt active machining direction press the Tool Axis soft key TOOL END gt To conclude entry press the END key o3 To reset the tilting function set the Manual Operation menu item in the Tilt working plane menu to inactive The symbol appears in the status display when the Move in tool axis direction function is active This function is even available when you interrupt program run and want to move the axes manually TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 527 Manual operation and setup 14 11 Tilti
463. on in three planes m 3 D view Advanced Function Set 3 option 21 Expanded functions Group 3 Tool compensation M120 Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 blocks 3 D machining M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pallet Management option 22 Pallet management Display Step option 23 Display step Input resolution m Linear axes down to 0 01 um m Rotary axes to 0 00001 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 617 Tables and overviews 18 3 Technical information DXF Converter option 42 DXF converter m Supported DXF format AC1009 AutoCAD R12 Adoption of contours and point patterns Simple and convenient specification of reference points Select graphical features of contour sections from conversational programs KinematicsOpt option 48 Optimizing the machine m Backup restore active kinematics kinematics m Test active kinematics Optimize active kinematics Extended Tool Management option 93 Extended tool management Python based Spindle Synchronism option 131 Spindle synchronization synchronization of milling spindle and turning spindle Remote Desktop Manager option 133 Remote operation of external Windows on a separate computer unit computer units Incorporated in the TNC interface Cross Talk Compensation CTC option 141 Compensation of axis couplings Determination of dynamically caused position deviation through a
464. on using the TNC keyboard gt Press the navigation keys to go to the Input fields Use the arrow keys to navigate within an input field To open pop down menus press the GOTO key In a table that already has lines you cannot change the table properties Name and Column type Once you have deleted all lines you can change these properties If required create a backup copy of the table beforehand In a field of the TSTAMP column type you can reset an invalid value if you press the CE key and then the ENT key Exiting the structure editor gt Press the OK soft key The TNC closes the editor form and applies the changes All changes are discarded by pressing the CANCEL soft key Switching between table and form view All tables with the file extension TAB can be opened in either list view or form view gt Press the key for setting the screen layout Select the respective soft key for list view or form view form view with or without dialog texts EJP rogram run full Bae editing A Programming p Table editing In the form view the TNC lists the line numbers with the contents of the first column in the left half of the screen In the right half you can change the data gt Press the ENT key or the arrow key to move to the next input field gt To select another line press the green navigation key folder symbol This moves the cursor to the left window and you can select the desired line with t
465. onal Programming 2 2015 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 Labeling subprograms and program section repeats ccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeesaeesanesseessaeeaaes 274 E e Westen tee dee yates eeu cee penn ponents Leesan AEE AET A andes ton TT 274 Su uDprogram s a eee eat re ae eee roan ee eer Rn eee net peer Rn ae Nee ree en meena ee Settee 275 Sey SCS a asccnees ate asta T E E E EE R 2715 Programming OCS a ses sexscrnteensdonesuiesin aahnanssenntete steno ameter gad cationn cam DE aS Ea ER EENEN NAE ARANEA ESA ANO 275 Programimning a SU Oia ereis eiarc cra ccseang i iiei E NEEE 275 EER EE TE oE Aa EAEN EE E E EEA AAE A A AA E E E A E OT 276 Aneks lee a oIa LEs e eee are cee e ree ree se cac orca Seance erent snare eet aren ent ue een eereereo en cur euiraas 277 E ia verde ang ener A E E E A E S 277 D SSC EE E E ET T AEA EE E E E E EE EET 277 Programming NOTES mesnine iniaa i EERE A ENTAR A EE EARE EEOAE IEE 277 Programming a program section repeat s ss siusiusiesierrsrirrt rit rere rt rt rtre rP E EEP EEEEPEEPEEEEPrEErE rrr rr rrni 278 calling a progran Section TODE Renae ene nen nan aE omen nT ter tes Cite Tn ee noni REET AE A REN 278 Any desired program aS SUDPrograim cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeecaneeaeseeesaneeaesaeeseuesaneaeesseesaneseesoogs 279 OOS orte SON KOy ret tcp Een a tte en gnc Eo arn EEn aiia tian stator nactoea toon nits ne tad ena 279 COST a SS UCI CC asensi EE RTE EEEE E AEE 280 PE
466. oning during program run Pre calculate the radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Shorterpath traverse of rotary axes Reset M126 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM Reset M128 Within the positioning block Points are referenced to the untilted coordinate system Selection of tilted axes Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Delete basic rotation Compensating the machine s kinematic configuration tor ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block Reset M144 Suppress touch probe monitoring Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop Reset M148 Effective at block Start End Page 366 439 369 370 Cycles Manual 184 184 373 437 376 374 438 440 368 443 378 380 444 3 9 381 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the ITNC 530 compared 18 5 Comparison Specifications Function Axes Input resolution and display step m Linear axes Rotary axes Control loops for high frequency spindles and torque linear motors Display Memory media for NC PLC programs and system files Program memory for NC programs Block processing time HeROS operating system Interpolation Straight line m Circle m Helix m Spline Hardware Comparison Data interfaces Function Gigabit Ethe
467. ontains only one coordinate The TNC thus moves the tool parallel to the programmed axis Depending on the Individual machine tool the part program is executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on which the workpiece is clamped Nevertheless you always program path contours as if the tool were moving and the workpiece remaining stationary Example 50 L X 100 50 Block number L Path function straight line X 100 Coordinate of the end point The tool retains the Y and Z coordinates and moves to the position X 100 See figure Movement in the main planes The program block contains two coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in the programmed plane Example L X 70 Y 50 The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the position X 70 Y 50 see figure 204 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Fundamentals of path functions 6 2 Three dimensional movement The program block contains three coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in space to the programmed position Example L X 80 Y 0 Z 10 Circles and circular arcs The TNC moves two axes simultaneously on a circular path relative to the workpiece You can define a circular movement by entering the circle center CC When you program a circle the control assigns it to one of the main planes This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle axis during a TOOL CALL Spindle
468. onversational To program a block initiate the dialog by pressing a function key In the screen headline the TNC then asks you for all the information necessary to program the desired function M94 M103 wie M118 z M120 m Example of a positioning block gt Open block COORDINATES gt 10 Enter the target coordinate for the X axis gt 20 Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis gt Go to the next question with ENT RADIUS COMP RL RR NO COMP 7 gt Enter No radius compensation and go to the next question with ENT FEED RATE F F MAX ENT gt 100 Enter a feed rate of 100 mm min for this path contour a gt Go to the next question with ENT MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M gt Enter 3 miscellaneous function M3 Spindle ON gt With the END key the TNC ends this dialog The program block window displays the following line 3 L X 10 Y 5 RO F100 M3 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 103 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening programs and entering Possible feed rate input Soft key Functions for setting the feed rate Rapid traverse non modal Exception If defined before an APPR block FMAX is also in effect for moving to an auxiliary point see Important positions for approach and departure page 211 F MAX Traverse feed rate automatically calculated in TOOL CALL F AUTO Move at the pr
469. ool table and the value DL from the TOOL CALL are taken into account in the position display Error message Is issued m Max 16384 blocks in up to 12 Subcontours Tool axis in TOOL CALL block defines the working plane m With the posAfterContPocket parameter you can define whether the end position Is above the last programmed position or whether the tool moves only to clearance height ITNC 530 The algebraic sign of the direction of rotation is used if the sign defined for DR differs from the one defined for IPA The equidistant line of the arc helix is used for generating the tool path The values L and DL from the tool table are taken into account in the position display No restrictions m Max 8192 contour elements in up to 12 subcontours no restrictions for subcontour The axes of the first positioning block in the first subcontour define the working plane m With MP 420 you can define whether the end position Is above the last programmed position or whether the tool moves only to clearance height TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Function SLII Cycles 20 to 24 m Handling of islands which are not contained in pockets Set operations for SL cycles with complex contour formulas m Radius compensation is active during CYCL CALL m Paraxial positioning blocks in contour subprogram m Miscellan
470. or this purpose you must at least define the spindle axis with the permitted traverse range e g M118 Z5 in the M118 function and select the VT axis on the handwheel TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 377 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 Standard behavior In the program run modes Program run single block and Program run full sequence the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M140 With M140 MB move back you can enter a path in the direction of the tool axis for departure from the contour Input If you enter M140 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog and asks for the desired path of tool departure from the contour Enter the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the contour or press the MB MAX soft key to move to the limit of the traverse range In addition you can program the feed rate at which the tool traverses the entered path If you do not enter a feed rate the TNC moves the tool along the entered path at rapid traverse Effect M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M140 becomes effective at the start of block Example NC blocks Block 250 Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour Block 251 Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range 250 L X 0 Y 38 5 F125 M140 MB 50 F750
471. or result Q parameter that is BIND bound assigned to the table column gt Database Column name Enter the table name and column name separated by a period Table name Synonym or path and Tile name of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and file name are entered In single quotation marks Column designation Designation of the table column as given in the configuration data TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Bind a Q parameter to a table column 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z Cancel binding 91 SQL BIND Q881 92 SQL BIND Q882 93 SQL BIND Q883 94 SQL BIND Q884 331 Programming Q parameters 9 9 Accessing tables with SQL commands SQL SELECT SQL SELECT selects table rows and transfers them to the result set Select all table rows The SOL server places the data in the result set row by row The 11SQL BIND Q881 rows are numbered In ascending order starting from 0 This row TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO number called the INDEX is used in the SOL commands Fetch and 12SQL BIND Q882 Update TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X Enter the selection criteria in the SQL SELECT WHERE function 13SQL BIND Q883 This lets you restrict the number of rows to be transferred If you do TAB EXAMPLE MEAS Y not use this option all rows in the tabl
472. orresponds to X116 You can check this in the network settings in the Interfaces tab On main computer units with two Ethernet interfaces the DHCP server is active by default for the second non primary interface tor the machine network With this setting it is not possible to activate the firewall for eth1 because the firewall and the DHCP server exclude themselves mutually Report other Firewall active with high safety level All inhibited services except for the SSH are blocked packets Inhibit ICMP If this option is set the control no longer echo answer answers to a PING request Service This column contains the short names of the services that are configured with this dialog For the configuration it is not important here whether the services themselves have been started m LSV2 contains the functionality for TNCRemoNT and Teleservice as well as the HEIDENHAIN DNC interface ports 19000 to 19010 m SMB only refers to incoming SMB connections i e if a Windows release is made on the NC Outgoing SMB connections i e if a Windows release is connected to the NC cannot be prevented SSH stands for the Secure Shell protocol port 22 As of HEROS 504 the LSV2 can be executed safely tunneled via this SSH protocol VNC protocol means access to the screen contents If this service is blocked the screen content can no longer be accessed not even with the Teleservice programs from HEIDENHAIN e g screenshot I
473. ose tse aterm 153 Closing the error Oran vec ga caer ction try cn pt enaa torneo eres toh ates anger dense senceetadeense 153 Detailed error Message Sasiia iis a AE AAE TAAA A A aa aa sien 154 MERN ALJINE ISO E O E E E eo aia uielte ene ae peadasee estore 154 Aea E a e E E E E E ee ees 155 EOR WO eE E EA each peda EE E E E EE E E AA E AEE 155 EE E E E A AE N A A 156 ORO EA E E E E E E E 157 A OC Tile acca sacs tg scy teei NEDENE D EAE aE ENE a Ea tele EE EAEE A N eraa 157 Calling the WIN GCOS heln SS FeV ieirierrisarioiekiei i eei E E ATEST 157 TNCguide context sensitive help SYSt mM cccscccseeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeceeeeeeeeceeeseneseenseenesanessaeseanesnesees 158 AO ae E E E E EE E E E 158 MOI WiN Me TNG CU CG eere E EN 159 Downodading CURT SI Nep HNC renarena E ES E A A E e oad 162 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 5 1 5 2 5 3 Entenng toolrelated data aan a a a eee reece oe A E E A E E tee atee teers 166 FS TS Or EE E E O A A A E E A E E A EE 166 POI Fe era E AE 167 Ipero Ee e E E E E T T E S R S 168 Requirements for tool COMPENSATION ccccceccc cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseeeeeeaeceueeenesenaeeneeeeas 168 HOO UOC LOO NaN IC earne iie od aun tiga acticrthadeniys O E E E SE A EEn 168 TOQUE Ear E EE E 168 MOO Wa CMOS e E E A E E E A EE eset ir A A A E P EA E E E E E EE 168 Delta values for lengths and Lal cece cece ecceeece acces cece eeeeeeeee re rt
474. otation and then the PLANE function You can also activate a basic rotation without probing a workpiece For this purpose enter a value in the basic rotation menu and press the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key TNC 620 User s Manual 509 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Manual operation and setup 14 9 Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe option 17 Identifying basic rotation PROBING gt Select the probe function by pressing the we PROBING ROT soft key gt Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point gt Select the probe direction or probing routine by soft key gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point gt To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The TNC determines the basic rotation and displays the angle after the dialog Rotation angle gt Activate basic rotation Press the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key gt Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key The TNC logs the probing process in TCHPRMAN html Saving a basic rotation in the preset table gt After the probing process enter the preset number in which the TNC is to save the active basic rotation in the Number in table Input box gt Press the BASIC ROT IN PRESETTAB soft key to save the basic rotation in the preset table TNC 620 User s Manual 510 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Pr
475. other files that contain information about the current status of the machine and the machining operation If you repeat the Save service files function with the same file name the previously saved group of service data files is overwritten To avoid this use another Tile name when you repeat the function Saving service files gt Open the error window le gt Press the LOG FILES soft key SAVE gt Press the SAVE SERVICE FILES soft key The TNC pei opens a pop up window in which you can enter a name for the service file gt Save the service files Press the OK soft key Calling the TNCguide help system You can call the TNC s help system via soft key Immediately the help system shows you the same error explanation that you receive by pressing the HELP soft key If your machine manufacturer also provides a help system the TNC shows an additional MACHINE MANUFACTURER soft key with which you can call this separate help system There you will find further more detailed information on the error message concerned gt Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages Q MACHINE gt Call the help for HEIDENHAIN error messages if available TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Error messages 4 8 157 Programming Programming aids 4 9 TNCguide context sensitive help system 4 9 TNCguide context sensitive help system Application Before you can use the TNCguide you
476. our element plane is not equal to working plane scaling approach departure movements APPR DEP RND Approach departure with APPR DEP Approach departure with APPR DEP if contour elements with length O are defined 646 TNC 620 Effective in the active coordinate system which may also be rotated or tilted or in the machine based coordinate system depending on the setting in the 3 D ROT menu for manual operation If possible the blocks are executed in the defined contour element plane error message for APPRLN DEPLN APPRCT DEPCT Axis specific scaling factor is allowed radius is not scaled Error message if RO is programmed for APPR DEP LN or APPR DEP CT Contour elements with length O are ignored The approach departure movements are calculated for the first or last valid contour element ITNC 530 Effective in the machine based coordinate system If possible the blocks are executed in the defined working plane error message for APPRLN APPRLT APPRCT APPRLCT Error message Tool radius 0 and compensation direction RR are assumed An error message is issued if a contour element with length O0 is programmed after the APPR block relative to the first contour point programmed in the APPR block For a contour element with length O before a DEP block the TNC does not issue an error message but uses the last valid contour element to calculate the departure movement TNC 620 User s Manual
477. ours m LINE straight line CIRCLE complete circle ARC circular arc m POLYLINE Ellipses and splines can be used for intersections but cannot be selected If you select ellipses or splines these are displayed in red Element information In the element information window the TNC displays information about the contour element that you last selected via mouse click in the list view window or graphics window m Layer Indicates the layer you are currently on m Type Indicates the current element type e g line Coordinates Shows the starting point and end point of an element and circle center and radius where appropriate 264 ONENENSSEN o xexl x XX X 19090 70000 F NINININICIAIK TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 DXF converter option 42 73 gt Select the mode for choosing a contour The TNC P hides the layers shown in the list view window The graphics window is active for the contour selection gt To select a contour element Click the desired element with the mouse The TNC displays the machining sequence as a dashed straight line Position the mouse on the other side of the center point of an element to modify the machining sequence Select the element with the left mouse button The selected contour element turns blue If further contour elements in the selected machining sequence are selectable these elements turn green gt
478. out a three dimensional tool compensation 3 D compensation for straight line blocks Apart from the X Y and Z coordinates of the straight line end point these blocks must also contain the components NX NY and NZ of the surface normal vector see Definition of a normalized vector page 451 If you want to carry out a tool orientation these blocks need also a normalized vector with the components IX TY and TZ which determines the tool orientation see Definition of a normalized vector page 451 The straight line end point the components for the surface normal vector as well as those for the tool orientation must be calculated by a CAM system Application possibilities Use of tools with dimensions that do not correspond with the dimensions calculated by the CAM system 38 D compensation without definition of the tool orientation m Face milling compensation of the cutter geometry in the direction of the surface normal vector 3 D compensation with and without definition of the tool orientation Cutting is usually with the end face of the tool Peripheral milling compensation of the cutter radius perpendicular to the direction of movement and perpendicular to the tool direction 3D radius compensation with definition of the tool orientation Cutting is usually with the lateral surface of the tool TNC 620 User s Manual 450 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Three dimensional tool compensatio
479. over the TNC You can also start programs specitically under HeROS or display web pages of an external server The following connection options are available Windows Terminal Server RDP Displays the desktop of a remote Windows computer on the control Windows Terminal Server RemoteFX Displays the desktop of a remote Windows computer on the control m VNC Connection to an external computer e g HEIDENHAIN IPC Displays the desktop of a remote Windows or Unix computer on the control Switch off restart of a computer Available only to authorized specialists World Wide Web Available only to authorized specialists SSH Available only to authorized specialists XDMCP Available only to authorized specialists User defined connection Available only to authorized specialists HEIDENHAIN assures a functioning connection between HeROS 5 and the IPC 6341 HEIDENHAIN cannot guarantee the correct function of any other combinations or connections to external devices TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 85 Introduction 2 6 Remote Desktop Manager option 133 Configuring connections Windows Terminal Service Configuring an external computer You do not need additional software for your external computer for connecting to the Windows Terminal Service Proceed as follows to configure the external computer e g in the Windows 7 operating system gt After pressing
480. ow to use the Gnumeric function is provided under Help To exit Gnumeric proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the File menu item gt Select the menu item Close The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the Gnumeric additional tool gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The Gnumeric additional tool opens the File pull down menu gt Select the Close menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 User s Manual 128 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager Displaying Internet files To open Internet files with the extension htm or html directly on 3 4 the TNC proceed as follows gt Calling the File Manager gt Select the directory in which the Internet file is saved gt Move the highlight to the Internet file gt Press ENT The TNC opens the Internet Tile in its own application using the Mozilla Firefox additional tool return to the TNC user interface while leaving the PDF file open Alternatively you can also click the corresponding symbol in the task bar to switch back to the TNC interface If you position the mouse pointer over a button a brief tooltip explaining the function of this button With the key combination ALT TAB you can always will be displayed More information on how to use Mozilla Firefox is provided under Help
481. pindle on Move the tool at F MAX to a position above the hole 4 CYCL DEF 200 Define the DRILLING cycle Q200 5 sSET UP CLEARANCE Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Q201 15 DEPTH Hole depth algebraic sign working direction Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Feed rate for drilling Q202 5 Depth of each infeed before retraction Q210 0 DWELL TIME AT TOP Dwell time after every retraction in seconds Q203 10 SURFACE COORDINATE Coordinate of the workpiece surface Q204 20 32ND SET UP CLEARANCE Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Q211 0 2 sDWELL TIME AT DEPTH Dwell time in seconds at the hole bottom Q395 0 Depth referenced to the tool tip or the cylindrical part of the tool 5 CYCL CALL Call the DRILLING cycle 6 L Z 200 RO FMAX M2 Retract the tool 7 END PGM SMDI MM End of program Straight line function see Straight line L page 219 DRILLING cycle See User s Manual Cycles Cycle 200 DRILLING TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 531 Positioning with Manual Data Input 15 1 Programming and executing simple machining operations Example 2 Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines with rotary tables gt Use the 3 D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe option 17 gt Write down the rotation angle and cancel the basic rotation gt Select operating mode Positioning with MDI Select the rotary table axis
482. pindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M page 479 Deactivate tilting in manual mode is only possible via the 3D ROT menu To activate manual tilting page 526 The machine parameter maxLineGeoSearch has been increased to a maximum of 50000 Machine specific user parameters page 596 The names of Software Options 8 9 and 21 have been changed Software options page 8 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 17 Fundamentals TNC model software and features New and modified cycle functions 81760x 02 New cycle 239 for LAC Load Adapt Control load dependent adaptation of control parameters Option 143 see ASCERTAIN THE LOAD Cycle 239 DIN ISO G239 software option 143 Cycle 270 CONTOUR TRAIN DATA has been added Option 19 see CONTOUR TRAIN DATA Cycle 270 DIN ISO G270 software option 19 Cycle 39 has been added Option 1 see CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 39 DIN ISO G139 software option 1 The character set of machining cycle 225 has been expanded with the CE character B the character and system time see ENGRAVING Cycle 225 DIN ISO G225 Cycles 252 254 Option 19 have been expanded with the optional parameter 0439 Cycle 22 Option 19 has been expanded with the optional parameters 0401 0404 see ROUGHING Cycle 22 DIN ISO G122 software option 19 Cycle 484 Option 17 has been expanded with the optional parameter 0536 see Ca
483. played columns is Moved in front of this column You can use a connected mouse or the TNC keyboard to navigate in the form Navigation using the TNC keyboard gt Press the navigation keys to go to the Input fields Use the arrow keys to navigate within an input field To open pop down menus press the GOTO key With the Fix number of columns function you can define how many columns 0 3 are fixed to the left screen edge These columns are also displayed if you navigate in the table to the right TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 175 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Opening any other tool table gt Select the Programming mode of operation PGM gt Call the File Manager MGT gt Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key When you have opened the tool table you can edit the tool data by moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow keys or the soft keys You can overwrite the stored values or enter new values at any position Additional functions are illustrated in the table below Soft key Editing functions for tool tables BEGIN select beginning of table Select end of table select previous page in table select next page in table Find the text or number zZ O 5 BEGIN Move to beginning of line r H Z m Move to end of line HO 206 m Copy highlighted field FIELD
484. port USB devices with other file systems such as NTFS The TNC displays the USB TNC does not support device error message when such a device is connected If an error message is displayed when connecting a USB data medium check the setting in the SELinux security software SELinux security software page 90 The TNC also displays the USB TNC does not support device error message if you connect a USB hub In this case simply acknowledge the message with the CE key In theory you should be able to connect all USB devices with the Tile systems mentioned above to the TNC It may happen that a USB device is not identified correctly by the control In such cases use another USB device The USB devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree so you can use the Tile management functions described in the earlier chapters correspondingly Your machine tool builder can assign permanent names for USB devices Refer to your machine E manual TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 135 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager Remove the USB device To remove a USB device proceed as follows PGM gt To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key MGT gt Select the left window with the arrow key gt Use the arrow keys to select the USB device to be removed gt Scroll through the soft key row none gt Select additional function
485. probing procedure is completed the TNC displays the current coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR Setting the datum using multiple holes cylindrical studs A second soft key row provides a soft key for using multiple holes or cylindrical studs to set the datum You can set the intersection of two or more elements as datum Select the probing function for the intersection of holes cylindrical studs gt Select the touch probe function Press the PROBING CC soft key gt Hole is to be probed automatically Define by soft key e gt Circular stud is to be probed automatically Liz Define by soft key Preposition the touch probe approximately in the center of the hole or near the first touch point of the circular stud After you have pressed the NC Start key the TNC automatically probes the points on the circle Move the touch probe to the next hole repeat the probing operation and have the TNC repeat the probing procedure until all the holes have been probed to set the datum TNC 620 User s Manual 518 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 14 10 Setting the datum in the intersection of multiple holes gt Preposition the touch probe approximately in the center of the hole gt Hole is to be probed automatically Define by soft key gt To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The touch probe probes the circle automatically
486. program make sure that you save the file in ASCII format TNC 620 User s Manual 256 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 DXF converter option 42 73 Working with the DXF converter You cannot use the DXF converter without a mouse or touch pad All operating modes and functions as well as contours and machining positions can only be selected with the mouse or touch pad The DXF converter runs as a separate application on the third desktop of the TNC This enables you to use the screen switchover key to switch between the machine operating modes the programming modes and the DXF converter as desired This is especially useful if you want to insert contours or machining positions in a plain language program by copying through the clipboard TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 257 7 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 73 DXF converter option 42 Opening a DXF file gt Select the Programming mode of operation Select File functions v E Vv SELECT gt In order to see the soft key menu for selecting the bsi file type to be displayed press the SELECT TYPE soft key SHOW gt In order to show all CAD files press the SHOW Po i D D CAD soft key gt Select the directory in which the CAD file is saved gt Select the desired CAD file gt Load it with the ENT key The TNC starts the DXF converter and shows the contents of the file on the
487. ption 8 Input parameters gt Axis angle A Axis angle to which the A axis is to be tilted If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the A axis is to be tilted from its current position Inout range 99999 9999 to a 99999 9999 gt Axis angle B Axis angle to which the B axis S is to be tilted If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the B axis is to be tilted from its current position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Axis angle C Axis angle to which the C axis is to be tilted If entered incrementally it is the angle by which the C axis is to be tilted from its current position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Continue with the positioning properties see NC block Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE 5 PLANE AXIAL B 45 function page 429 Abbreviations used Abbreviation Meaning AXIAL In the axial direction TNC 620 User s Manual 428 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 12 2 Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function Overview Independently of which PLANE function you use to define the tilted machining plane the following functions are always available for the positioning behavior Automatic positioning Selection of alternate tilting possibilities not with PLANE AXIAL Selection of the type of transformation not with PLANE AXIA
488. py and erase text blocks of any size and insert them at other locations Before any of these actions you must first select the desired text block gt To select a text block Move the cursor to the first character of the text you wish to select gt Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key gt Move the cursor to the last character of the text you wish to select You can select whole lines by moving the cursor up or down directly with the arrow keys the selected text is shown in a different color After selecting the desired text block you can edit the text with the following soft keys Soft key Function CUT Delete the selected block and store temporarily ar a Store the selected block temporarily without BLOCK erasing copy If desired you can now insert the temporarily stored block at a different location gt Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the temporarily stored text block T gt Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key The text block is BLOCK inserted You can insert the temporarily stored text block as often as desired Transferring the selected block to a different file gt Select the text block as described previously ae gt Press the APPEND TO FILE soft key The TNC TO FILE displays the dialog prompt Destination file gt Enter the path and name of the destination file The TNC appends the selected text to the specified file If no target file with the specified name is found the TNC creates a n
489. r machine tool builder has defined additional special characters you can call them with the SPECIAL CHARACTER soft key and insert them To delete individual characters use the BACKSPACE soft key TNC 620 User s Manual 138 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Adding comments 4 2 4 2 Adding comments Application You can add comments to a part program to explain program steps or make general notes Depending on the lineBreak machine parameter the TNC displays comments that can no longer be completely displayed on the screen in several lines or the gt gt character appears on the screen The last character in a comment block must not have any tilde You have the following possibilities tor adding comments OVERWRITE Entering comments during programming gt Enter the data for a program block then press the semicolon key on the alphabetic keyboard the TNC displays the dialog prompt COMMENT gt Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END key Inserting comments after program entry gt Select the block to which a comment is to be added gt Select the last word in the block with the right arrow key then press the semicolon key The TNC displays the dialog prompt COMMENT gt Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END key Entering a comment in a separate block gt Select the block after which the c
490. r FUNCTION TCPM is active 76 EJF rogram run full sequence th Program run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM STAT1 H 0 BEGIN PGM STAT MM 4 CALL LBL 99 LBL 99 6 PLANE EULER EULPR 0 EULNUO EULROT25 7 CYCL DEF 17 0 RIGID TAPPING status COORD overview Pos STATUS transe O PARAM ss STATUS STATUS TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Status displays 2 4 Icon Meaning No active program Program run has started Program run is stopped x Program run is being aborted ACC The Active Chatter Control feature ACC Is active Option 145 CTC The CTC function is active Option 141 Additional status displays The additional status displays contain detailed information on the program run They can be called in all operating modes except for the Programming mode of operation To switch on the additional status display G gt Call the soft key row for screen layout PROGRAM gt Select the screen layout with additional status E display In the right half of the screen the TNC shows the OVERVIEW status form To select an additional status display e gt Switch the soft key rows until the STATUS soft keys appear EPN gt Either select the additional status display directly Pos by soft key e g positions and coordinates or R gt use the switch over soft keys to select th
491. r s Manual 516 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 14 10 Circle center as datum With this function you can set the datum at the center of bore holes circular pockets cylinders studs circular islands etc Inside circle The TNC probes the inside wall of a circle in all four coordinate axis y directions For incomplete circles circular arcs you can choose the appropriate probing direction gt Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the circle gt Select the touch probe function Press the PROBING CC soft key gt Select the probing direction or press the soft key for the automatic probing routine gt Probing Press the machine START button The touch probe probes the Inside wall of the circle in the selected direction If you are not using the automatic probing routine you need to repeat this procedure After the third probing operation you can have the TNC calculate the center four touch points are recommended gt Terminate the probing procedure and switch to the evaluation menu Press the EVALUATE soft key gt Datum In the menu window enter both coordinates of the circle center confirm with the SET DATUM soft key or write the values to a table see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 500 or see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 501
492. r that was entered with its name changes Its IP address you may have to restart the control or formally change the firewall configuration to ensure that the control uses the new IP address for a host name in the firewall Advanced These settings are only intended for your options network specialists Set standard Resets the settings to the default values values recommended by HEIDENHAIN TNC 620 User s Manual 590 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Configure HR 550 FS wireless handwheel 17 13 17 13 Configure HR 550 FS wireless handwheel Application Press the SET UP WIRELESS HANDWHEEL soft key to configure the HR 550 FS wireless handwheel The following functions are available Assigning the handwheel to a specific handwheel holder Setting the transmission channel m Analyzing the frequency spectrum for determining the optimum transmission channel Select transmitter power Statistical information on the transmission quality Assigning the handwheel to a specific handwheel holder gt Make sure that the handwheel holder is connected to the ee control hardware ICO raaa handwheel serial no 0037478964 Connect HW Data packets 5228 gt Place the wireless handwheel you want to assign to the handwheel holder in the handwheel holder Channelinuse 36 cRCenor f 0 00 gt Press the MOD key to select the MOD function gt Select the Machine settings menu tatus HANDWHEEL ONLINE Error code Stop HW St
493. r tool length DL Tool radius oversize DR Automatic TOOL CALL O Yes 1 No Tool radius oversize DR2 Tool index Active feed rate Tool number T Length Radius Index Tool data programmed in TOOL DEF 1 Yes 0 No Active radius Active length Rounding radius R2 319 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions Group name ID no Number Index Meaning Active transformations 210 1 Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION mode Programmed rotation with Cycle 10 Active mirrored axis 0 Mirroring not active 1 X axis mirrored 2 Y axis mirrored 4 Z axis mirrored 64 U axis mirrored 128 V axis mirrored 256 W axis mirrored Combinations Sum of individual axes _ Active scaling factor in X axis Active scaling factor in Y axis Active scaling factor in Z axis Active scaling factor in U axis Active scaling factor in V axis OO OO N WI N Active scaling factor in W axis 3 D ROT A axis 3 D ROT B axis 3 D ROT C axis Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 in a Program Run operating mode _ oloalalalA ATA ATA A NO 7 Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 in a Manual operating mode Active datum shift 220 2 X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis O CO N OO or BI OJIN TNC 620 User s Manual 320 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Additional functions 9 8 Group nam
494. rT NC E X m With ASCII editor m X directly editable X editable after conversion Position entry Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian E X m X coordinates m Nominal positions for lines and arcs in polar E X m X coordinates m ncremental or absolute dimensions X m X m Display and entry in mm or inches E X m X m Set the last tool position as pole empty CC block m X error message m X if pole transfer is ambiguous m Surface normal vectors LN m X m X m Spline blocks SPL x X with option 9 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 625 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Function TNC 620 ITNC 530 Tool compensation m n the working plane and tool length E X m X m Radius compensated contour look ahead for up to 99 m X with option 21 E X blocks Three Dimensional Tool Radius Compensation X with option 9 m X with option 9 Tool table Central storage of tool data X mE X Multiple tool tables with any number of tools X X Flexible management of tool types X x Filtered display of selectable tools X x Sorting function m X z Column names Sometimes with _ Sometimes with Copy function Overwriting relevant tool data X E X m Form view Switchover with Switchover by soft split screen layout key key m Exchange of tool table between TNC 620 and ITNC X Not possible 530
495. radius of each tool you are using Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with TOOL DEF or separately in a tool table In a tool table you can also enter additional data for the specific tool The TNC will consider all the data entered for the tool when executing the part program Tool number tool name Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 32767 If you are working with tool tables you can also enter a tool name for each tool Tool names can have up to 32 characters Permitted special characters amp 012345 6789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPOQRSTU VWXYZ_ Impermissible characters lt blank soace gt lt gt abcdefghljklmnopaqrstuv wxyz The tool number 0 is automatically defined as the zero tool with the length L 0 and the radius R 0 In tool tables tool TO should also be defined with L 0 and R 0 Tool length L You should always enter the tool length L as an absolute value based on the tool reference point The entire tool length is essential for the TNC in order to perform numerous functions Involving multi axis machining Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly 168 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Delta values for lengths and radii Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool A positive delta value describes a tool oversize DL DR DR2 gt 0 If you are programming th
496. ram block If you wish to define the circle center in polar coordinates you must use FPOL not CC to define the pole FPOL Is entered in Cartesian coordinates and remains in effect until the control encounters a block in which another FPOL is defined A circle center that was calculated or programmed conventionally is then no longer valid as a pole or circle center for the new FK contour If you enter conventional polar coordinates that refer to a pole from a CC block you have defined previously then you must enter the pole again in a CC block after the FK contour Soft keys Known data a Circle center in Cartesian coordinates wal P ccyv P cc cc Center point in polar coordinates oe o d DR DR Rotational direction of the arc m ma Radius of an arc Example NC blocks 10 FC CCX 20 CCY 15 DR R15 11 FPOL X 20 Y 15 12 FL AN 40 13 FC DR R15 CCPR 35 CCPA 40 TNC 620 User s Manual 244 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 6 6 Closed contours You can identify the beginning and end of a closed contour with the y CLSD soft key This reduces the number of possible solutions for the last contour element Enter CLSD as an addition to another contour data entry in the first and last blocks of an FK section Beginning of CLSD contour End of contour CLSD Example NC blocks TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Pro
497. ram run In Cycle 247 you simply define the number of the datum to be activated see User s Manual for Cycles Cycle 247 DATUM SETTING TNC 620 User s Manual 492 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe 14 6 14 6 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe Note setting the datum with a 3 D touch probe see Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 page 515 You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known position on the workpiece Preparation gt Clamp and align the workpiece gt Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle gt Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values Setting datum with an end mill Protective measure If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of known thickness d on It Then enter a tool axis datum value that Is larger than the desired datum by the value d gt Select the Manual Operation mode X gt Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface gt Select the axis DATUM SETTING Z o gt Zero tool in spindle axis Set the display to a known workpiece position e g 0 or enter the thickness d of the shim In the tool axis offset the tool radius Repeat the process for the remaining axes If you are using a preset tool set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the s
498. ransferred in Q parameters In the other direction the data is first prepared in the Q parameters and then transferred to the result set Specify with SQL BIND which table columns are mapped to which Q parameters The Q parameters are bound assigned to the columns Columns that are not bound to Q parameters are not included in the read write processes If a new table row is generated with SQL INSERT the columns not bound to Q parameters are filled with default values TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 329 Programming O parameters 9 9 Accessing tables with SQL commands Programming SQL commands This function can only be programmed if you have entered the code number 555343 Program SQL commands in the Programming mode SPEC gt Press the SPEC FCT key FCT Press the PROGRAM FUNCTIONS soft key PROGRAM FUNCTIONS gt Shift the sott key row g e gt To select the MOD functions press SQL gt Select an SOL command via soft key see overview or press the SQL EXECUTE soft key and program the SQL command Overview of the soft keys Soft key Function SQL BIND BIND Bind a Q parameter to a table column SQL SELECT SELECT select table rows m SQL EXECUTE EXECUTE Program a Select command A SQL FETCH FETCH Read table rows from the result set and save them in Q parameters m SQL ROLLBACK ROLLBACK m f INDEX is not programmed Discard any changes i
499. re the current block Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed after the current block Move from one block to the next Select individual words in a block To select a certain block press the GOTO key enter the desired block number and confirm with the ENT key Or Press the GOTO key enter the block number step and jump up or down the number of entered lines by pressing the N LINES soft key 8 r O g Y re TNC 620 User s Manual 106 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Opening programs and entering 3 2 Soft key key Function m Set the selected word to zero m Erase an Incorrect number Delete the clearable error message EI m Delete the selected word m Delete the selected block m Erase cycles and program sections INSERT Insert the block that you last edited or deleted LAST NC BLOCK Inserting blocks at any desired location gt Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and initiate the dialog Editing and inserting words gt Select a word in a block and overwrite it with the new one The plain language dialog is available while the word is highlighted gt To accept the change press the END key If you want to insert a word press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly until the desired dialog appears You can then enter the desired value Looking for the same words in diff
500. rection of the desired workpiece coordinate system Optionally inputting a datum angle enables you to define the nominal direction of the probed plane eae gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING BoA PL soft key The TNC then displays the current 3 D basic rotation gt Position the touch probe at a position near the first touch point gt Select the probe direction or probing routine by soft key gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt Position the touch probe at a position near the second touch point gt To probe the workpiece press the machine START button gt Position the touch probe near the third touch point gt Probing Press the machine START button The TNC measures the 3 D basic rotation and displays the values for SPA SPB and SPC related to the active workpiece coordinate system gt If required enter the datum angle Activate 3 D basic rotation SET gt Press the SET BASIC ROTATION soft key BASIC ROTATION Saving a 3 D basic rotation in the preset table BASIC ROT gt Press the BASIC ROT IN PRESET TABLE soft key IN PRESET TABLE TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 513 Manual operation and setup 14 9 Compensating workpiece misalignment with 3 D touch probe option 17 gt Terminate the probe function by pressing the END soft key The TNC saves the 3 D basic rotation in the columns SPA SPB or SPC of the pres
501. rectory soft key to call a pop ts up window in which you select the target directory by pressing the ENT key or the OK soft key the TNC copies the file to the selected directory The original file is retained When the copying process has been started with ENT or the OK soft key the TNC displays a pop up window with a progress indicator TNC 620 User s Manual 118 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 Copying files into another directory gt Select a screen layout with two equally sized windows gt To display directories in both windows press the PATH soft key In the right window gt Move the highlight to the directory into which you wish to copy the Tiles and display the Tiles in this directory with the ENT key In the left window gt Select the directory with the files that you wish to copy and oress the ENT key to display the Tiles in this directory gt Call the file tagging functions gt Move the highlight to the file you want to copy and tag it You can tag several files in this way if desired gt Copy the tagged Tiles into the target directory Further tagging functions see Tagging Tiles page 123 If you have tagged files in both the left and right windows the TNC copies from the directory in which the highlight is located Overwriting files If you copy files into a directory in which other files are stored under the same name the TNC will as
502. removed by authorized service personnel even if it is possible without any tools Ensure that the handwheel is plugged in before you switch on the machine If you wish to operate your machine without the handwheel disconnect the cable from the machine and secure the open socket with a cap Your machine tool builder can make additional functions of the HR 5xx available Refer to your machine manual A HR 5xx handwheel is recommended if you want to use the handwheel superimposition in virtual axis function Virtual tool axis VT The portable HR 5xx handwheels feature a display on which the TNC shows information In addition you can use the handwheel soft keys for important setup functions e g datum setting or entering and running M functions As soon as you have activated the handwheel with the handwheel activation key the operating panel is locked This is indicated by a pop up window on the TNC screen TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 zamant _ HEIDENHAIN ST __ 129 9789 30 FO ERLE S 5 00 STEP OF AX STEP MSF OPM 00000 XYZ WV LV t 9 Dgo 469 Manual operation and setup 14 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 470 2 Moving the machine axes EMERGENCY STOP button Handwheel display for status display and function selection for further information see Soft keys Axis selection keys can be exchanged by the machine AX STEP MSF O
503. rerequisites for FK programming must be observed The FK free contour programming feature can only be used for programming contour elements that lie in the working plane The working plane for FK programming is defined according to the following hierarchy m 1 By the plane defined in a FPOL block m 2 By the working plane pre defined in the TOOL CALL e g TOOL CALL 1 TOOL CALLZ X Y plane m 3 The standard X Y plane is active if none of these applies The display of the FK soft keys depends on the spindle axis in the workpiece blank definition If for example you enter spindle axis Z in the workpiece blank definition the TNC only shows FK soft keys for the X Y plane You must enter all available data for every contour element Even the data that does not change must be entered in every block otherwise It will not be recognized Q parameters are permissible in all FK elements except in elements with relative references e g RX or RAN i e elements that are referenced to other NC blocks If both FK blocks and conventional blocks are entered in a program the FK contour must be fully defined before you can return to conventional programming The TNC needs a fixed point from which it can calculate the contour elements Use the gray path function keys to program a position that contains both coordinates of the working plane immediately before programming the FK contour Do not enter any O parameters in this block
504. result parameter If the substring is found in more than one place the TNC returns the first place at which it finds the substring Example Search through QS10 for the text saved in parameter QS13 Begin the search at the third place 37 Q50 INSTR SRC_QS10 SEA_QS13 BEG2 TNC 620 User s Manual 346 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 String parameters 9 11 Finding the length of a string parameter The STRLEN function returns the length of the text saved in a selectable string parameter gt Select O parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the Q parameter in which the TNC is to save the ascertained string length Confirm with the ENT key shift the soft key row FORMULA gt Select the function for finding the text length of a string parameter gt Enter the number of the QS parameter whose length the TNC is to ascertain and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key STRLEN ye Example Find the length of QS15 37 Q52 STRLEN SRC_QS15 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 347 Programming Q parameters 9 11 String parameters Comparing alphabetic sequence The STRCOMP function compares string parameters for alphabetic priority gt Select Q parameter functions gt Select the FORMULA function gt Enter the number of
505. rkpiece blank page 102 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 1 3 100 53 First steps with the TNC 620 1 3 Programming the first part Program layout NC programs should be arranged consistently in a similar manner This makes it easier to find your place accelerates programming and reduces errors Recommended program layout for simple conventional contour machining 1 Call tool define tool axis 2 Retract the tool 3 Pre position the tool in the working plane near the contour starting point 4 Inthe tool axis position the tool above the workpiece or preposition immediately to workpiece depth If required switch on the spindle coolant Contour approach Contour machining Contour departure CO N O1 Retract the tool end program Further information on this topic Contour programming see Programming tool movements for workpiece machining page 204 Recommended program layout for simple cycle programs Call tool define tool axis Retract the tool Define the machining positions Define the fixed cycle Call the cycle switch on the spindle coolant O Oo A UU N gt Retract the tool end program Further information on this topic Cycle programming See User s Manual for Cycles Layout of contour machining programs 0 BEGIN PGM BSPCONT MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y Z 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X Y Z 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z S5000 4
506. rmal effect 2 Label jumped to if FN14 ERROR after the NC CANCEL reaction instead of aborting the program with an error The error number programmed in the FN14 command can be read under ID992 NR14 Value 0 FN14 has the normal effect 3 Label jumped to in the event of an internal server error SOL PLC CFG instead of aborting the program with an error message Value 0 Server error has the normal effect Machine status 20 1 Active tool number 2 Prepared tool number Active tool axis 0 X 1 Y 2 Z 6 U 7 V 8 W 4 Programmed spindle speed Active spindle condition 1 not defined 0 M3 active 1 M4 active 2 Mb5 after M3 3 Mb after M4 Gear range Coolant status O off 1 0n Active feed rate 10 Index of prepared tool 11 Index of active tool Channel data 25 1 Channel number TNC 620 User s Manual 316 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Group name ID no Number Cycle parameter 30 1 21 22 23 Modal condition 35 1 Data for SOL tables 40 1 Data from the tool table 50 1 CO NN OM or Bl OJN TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Index Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Additional functions 9 8 Meaning Set up clearance of active fixed cycle Drilling depth milling depth of active fixed cycle Plunging depth of active fixed cycle Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle 1st s
507. rnet 1000BaseT RS 232 C V 24 serial interface RS 422 V 11 serial interface USB interface TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC 620 6 maximum m 0 1um 0 01 um with option 23 m 0 001 0 00001 with option 23 With option 49 15 1 Inch TFT color flat panel display CompactFlash memory card 2 GB 1 5 MS yes 5 axes 3 axes yes NO Compact in operating panel or modular in electrical cabinet TNC 620 X X ITNC 530 18 maximum m 0 1 um m 0 0001 With option 49 19 inch TFT color flat panel display or 15 1 Inch TFT color flat panel display Hard disk or SSDR solid state disk gt 21GB 0 5 ms yes E 5 axes E 3 axes E yes m Yes with option 9 Modular in electrical cabinet ITNC 530 X X X X 623 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared Comparison Accessories Function Electronic handwheels HR 410 HR 420 HR 520 530 550 HR 130 HR 150 via HRA 110 Touch probes m TS 220 m S 440 m 1S 444 TS 449 TT 449 TS 640 TS 740 TT 1380 7 TT 140 Industrial PC IPC 61xx Comparison PC software Function Programming station software TNCremoNT for data transfer with TNCbackup for data backup TNCremoPlus data transfer software with live screen RemotTools SDK 1 2 Function library tor developing your own applications for communicating with HEIDENHAIN controls virtualTNC
508. robe the second edge as for a basic rotation but do not set the rotation angle to zero gt Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle PA between the workpiece edges as the rotation angle gt Cancel the basic rotation or restore the previous basic rotation by setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down previously TNC 620 User s Manual 522 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tilting the working plane option 8 14 11 14 11 Tilting the working plane option 8 Application function The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder With some swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder determines whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as angular components of a tilted plane Refer to your machine manual The TNC supports the tilting functions on machine tools with swivel heads and or tilting tables Typical applications are for example oblique holes or contours in an oblique plane The working plane is always tilted around the active datum The program is written as usual in a main plane such as the X Y plane but is executed in a plane that Is tilted relative to the main plane There are three functions available for tilting the working plane Manual tilting with the 3 D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode and Electronic Handwheel mode see To a
509. robes option 17 Functions in touch probe cycles soft keys that are used to select the probing direction or a probing routine are displayed in the manual touch probe cycles The soft keys displayed vary depending on the respective cycle Soft key Function select the probing direction Capture the actual position Probe hole inside circle automatically Probe stud outside circle automatically select axis parallel probing direction for automatic probing of holes or studs If you use a function for probing a circle automatically the TNC automatically positions the touch probe to the respective touch points Ensure that the positions can be approached without collision If you use a probing routine for probing a hole or a stud automatically the TNC opens a form with the required input fields Input fields in the Measure stud and Measure hole forms Input field Function Stud diameter or Diameter of probe contact optional for Hole diameter holes Safety clearance Distance to the probe contact in the plane Incr clearance Positioning of touch probe in spindle height axis direction starting from the current position Starting angle Angle for the first probing operation O Positive direction of principal axis i e In X for spindle axis Z All other probe angles result from the number of touch points Number of touch Number of probing operations 3 to 8 points Angular length Probing a f
510. robing procedure Press the machine START button The 3 D touch probe probes all required touch points in an automatic probing routine and calculates the effective ball tip radius If probing from opposite orientations is possible the TNC calculates the center offset gt Checking the results gt Press the OK soft key for the values to take effect gt Press the END soft key to terminate the calibrating function The TNC logs the calibration process in TCHPRMAN html In order to be able to determine the ball tip center misalignment the TNC needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer Refer to your machine manual TNC 620 User s Manual 506 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Calibrating a 3 D touch trigger probe option 17 14 8 Calibration using a calibration sphere Proceed as follows for manual calibration using a calibration sphere gt Inthe Manual Operation mode position the ball tip above the center of the calibration sphere gt Select the calibration function Press the CAL R soft key Enter the diameter of the sphere Enter the safety clearance Enter the start angle Enter the number of touch points select Length measurement If applicable Enter Datum for length if applicable vY vV V V V V Vv Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button The 3 D touch probe probes all required touch points in an automatic probing routine and calculates the effective ball t
511. rogrammed with the C key circular path C This is done in the following ways Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center in the working plane or Using the circle center defined in an earlier block or Capturing the coordinates with the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key gt Enter coordinates for the circle center or If you want to use the last programmed position enter no coordinates Example NC blocks 5 CC X 25 Y 25 Or 10 L X 25 Y 25 11 CC The program lines 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration Validity The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center is programmed Entering the circle center incrementally If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates you have programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool The only effect of CC is to define a position as a circle center the tool does not move to the position The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates TNC 620 User s Manual 222 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Cartesian coordinates 6 4 Circular path C around circle center CC Before programming a circular arc you must first enter the circle center CC The last programmed tool position will be the starting point of the arc gt Move the tool to the circle starting point CC 4 gt Enter the coordinates of the circle center gt Enter the coordinates of the arc end point and
512. rrrrrrrerrerrrrrrrerrererrerr 467 incremental WOO POSION eretan ea ea aaia aa aiaa a i 468 Traverse with electronic NandWwhNGElS aseriirsiiisiorisiinni dinorni ninin aE Ea A AEEA Ea i 469 Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeenenes 479 A E OW E E E EE E E T E E EEEE E E E E EA E 479 FES TN S ieena EAE E EE EEE EE EEEE T EE EEO E EE EEEE OEE ER 479 Adjusting spindle speed and feed Tat es miiriririiiiniriroets ianea ae en n ENANTA EA DAN 480 PSV et eedi ale IMAO erne RERA A TEE T aden oad td set KEEA EEE EENE a 480 Optional safety concept functional safety FS ccccssccccsseeccsseeceessececaseeecaeseeesseeeeasesenaeneeseass 481 BS CS A VSS race EEA EEE anata havea ET ee Rte bonito E E E 481 Explanation OT VEINS eenean ea a a ETEN EEA A e E TE Aaa EA a a 482 CHV Se hot E M1 INS A E A AE E A N A A EN E EA T 483 Activating feed rate IIMitation ccc ccccccccccee cece eeee cess erre eeu eeeeeeeeeeeee seen ecee setae eeaeeesneeeseeeeneesneeeneetaneeenees 483 Adadational status CNS OY S eesis i i reai 484 Datum management with the preset table cccccccssceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeeseeeaaeeseneseenseanesanesaeenes 485 POS cece ee ae edwards eee denna ade se E A acess A EEO ena eaeaetaesacate 485 Saving the datums IN the preset table siz sonecassancesycneatnasanssiceadeddsaninednuntsiesonccetenuamadaanieeiesSageanasaoevnnnds 486 PCT ANAC Me Aa T irre e
513. rt of a positioning block and others at the end regardless of their position in the NC block M functions come into effect in the block in which they are called some M functions are effective only in the block in which they are programmed Unless the M function is only effective blockwise either you must cancel it in a subsequent block with a separate M function or it is automatically canceled by the TNC at the end of the program Entering an M function in a STOP block If you program a STOP block the program run or test run Is interrupted at the block for example for tool inspection You can also enter an M function in a STOP block gt To program an interruption of program run press the STOP key gt Enter a miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks 87 STOP M6 364 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 M functions for program run inspection spindle and coolant 10 2 10 2 M functions for program run Inspection spindle and coolant Overview The machine tool builder can influence the behavior of the miscellaneous functions described below Refer to your machine manual M Effect Effective at block Start End MoO Program STOP Spindle STOP M1 Optional program STOP E Spindle STOP if necessary Coolant OFF if necessary not effective during Test Run function determined by the machine tool builder M2 STOP program run m Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Return jump t
514. rt rre seen eeseeeeaeetaeesneeeneeeanetaneeanes 169 Entenng tool data into the Dl OVE eciss evencie a N i iaai aeaa iia ia 169 Enter tool data MEO te TaDlE enini Raa AAAA E S aaa 170 Importing tool WN CS cco stare cesvsecsenaercenarieenaeres escen ncsacneteaae tee dena rre rr e nrt rE rAr EPEEEPrE EEO EEEEEEEEEPEEOEEEEEEEEEPEE EEEE EErEE Enn 177 Facket taole Tor OO Crea Oe eresie ER E ENEE EEEE EA ENa T oei 179 MTOA T a E E E E A 182 eie ESti e nE E E E E E E E eres a EE TEE E EE E E 184 TOU O TiS eA E A lai E E AA E A ENE E A EAEE E RE 186 Toolmanagermnent OOUON 9G xcotdetirncccmtinsnineacatamovasetediontnnctantitin i vaia oa aaa a aatra irad 188 TOOISCOMNDEMSALIOM eee scccncessesitercceeecetnenescateereeericaenenaeeancer cc ce sre an ccace ta tac arr ccerarame er antneteeeranertruncsuscaerecnen ins 196 Modu NO oerein aea tele ieee ciate evi Tio aioa Eai e SEO EEEE EEE 196 NOON EP CFOS A a O E REA E E R EEA ESEE EAEE ERTA 196 ool radius COMpensSation s sssssusrusrerierisrirrt rierren rrt renr t Prr Sr e EE ESrEOrEPEEPEEEEOEEOEEPEEPEPEEOEEPEEPEPEEOEE EEE EEEE 197 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 27 Contents 6 Vid Corel eae tina lt 0 Co peerereeepeneereneeperer rere rerrrr errr rarer errr rere crer rrr er errerrc Pree rrrre errr rere res ererrry crereerr rere rere 202 PUD CWO e ea cece E E a teen E T E AAE AA O A A EE 202 FK free contour programming TOMTOM TO arriere eiai 202 Miscell
515. rtain area Mark a zoom area by holding the left mouse button down After you release the left mouse button the TNC zooms in on the defined area gt To rapidly magnify or reduce any area Rotate the mouse wheel backwards or forwards gt To return to the standard display Press the shift key and simultaneously double click with the right mouse key The rotation angle is maintained if you only double click with the right mouse key 540 reducing The TNC displays the following soft keys TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Graphics option 20 16 1 3 D view in the Test Run mode of operation The Test Run operating mode additionally offers the following views Soft keys Function Volume view Volume view and tool paths Tool paths BR 00 00 10 30 BLANK WORKPIECE WORKPIECE TOOL WORKPIECE FRAME EDGES TRANSPAR l X i ON on OEE on W OFF EEREN _corors _ The Test Run operating mode additionally offers the following functions Soft keys Function Show workpiece blank frame Highlight workpiece edges Show a transparent workpiece 00 00 10 30 F MAX ao BLANK WORKPIECE WORKPIECE TOOL Ore FRAME EDGES TRANSPAR l DEF on 0 on o on A oP K af pray BLOCK NO i Show the end points of the tool paths Show the block numbers of the tool paths Show the workpiece in color Note that the range of func
516. run full sequence Tool table editing The machine tool builder adapts the features of the pocket table to the requirements of your machine TNC table tool t NAME Refer to your machine manual For automatic tool changing you need the a pocket table You manage the assignment of your tool changer in the pocket table The pocket table is in the TNC TABLE directory The machine tool builder can adapt the name path and content of the pocket table You can also select various layouts using soft keys in the TABLE FILTER menu Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode TOOL gt To select the tool table press the TOOL TABLE d iE soft key e gt Select the pocket table Press the POCKET TABLE TABLE soft key gt Set the EDIT soft key to ON On your machine this might not be necessary or even possible Refer to your machine manual TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 179 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Selecting a pocket table in the Programming mode of operation gt Call the File Manager gt Display the file types Press the SHOW ALL soft key gt Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key Abbr RSV ST DOC PLC Pis PO PTYP LOCKED_ABOVE LOCKED_BELOW LOCKED_LEFT LOCKED_RIGHT 180 Inputs Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine Tool
517. s F mm min rapid traverse FMAX FU feed per revolution mm rev m FZ tooth feed rate FT time in seconds for path FMAXT only for active rapid traverse pot time in seconds for path FK free contour programming Programming for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC programming Conversion of FK program to conversational dialog Program jumps Maximum number of label numbers Subprograms Nesting depth tor subprograms m Program section repeats m Any desired program as subroutine TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNC 620 X X X X option 8 m X option 8 m X option 8 m X option 8 m X Option 8 m X option 8 E X X X m X option 19 m 9999 ma X a X a X ITNC 530 X X X X option 8 m X option 8 m X option 8 m X option 8 m X option 8 m X option 8 m X FCL2 function m X option 44 E X X X X X 627 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Function Q parameter programming 628 Standard mathematical functions Formula entry string processing Local Q parameters QL Nonvolatile Q parameters QR Changing parameters during program interruption FN15 PRINT PN25 PRESET FN26 TABOPEN FN27 TABWRITE FN28 TABREAD FN29 PLC LIST FN31 RANGE SELECT FN32 PLC PRESET FN37 EXPORT FN38 SEND saving file externally with FN16 FN16 formatting Left aligne
518. s Incremental polar coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal position of the tool TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 97 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 1 Fundamentals Selecting the datum A production drawing identifies a certain form element of the workpiece usually a corner as the absolute datum When setting Z the datum you first align the workpiece along the machine axes and then move the tool in each axis to a defined position relative y MAX to the workpiece Set the display of the TNC either to zero or to a known position value for each position This establishes the reference system for the workpiece which will be used for the TNC display and your part program X If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates simply use the coordinate transformation cycles see User s Manual for Cycles Cycles for Coordinate Transformation If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC set the datum at a position or corner on the workpiece from which the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions can be most easily measured MIN The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3 D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN See Setting the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe in the Cycle Programming User s Manual Example The workpiece drawing shows holes 1 to 4 whose dimensions are shown with respect to an
519. s FUNCTIONS gt Scroll through the soft key row gt Select the function for removing USB devices The TNC removes the USB device from the directory tree and reports The USB device can be removed now gt Remove the USB device gt Quit the File Manager Bo cege In order to re establish a connection with a USB device that has been removed press the following soft key gt Select the function for reconnection of USB J devices TNC 620 User s Manual 136 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming Programming aids 4 1 Screen keyboard 4 1 Screen keyboard If you are using the compact version without an alphabetic keyboard TNC 620 you can enter letters and special characters with the screen keyboard or with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port Enter the text with the screen keyboard gt Press the GOTO key if you want to enter letters for example a program name or directory name using the screen keyboard gt The TNC opens a window in which the numeric entry field of the TNC is displayed with the corresponding letters assigned gt You can move the cursor to the desired character by repeatedly pressing the respective key gt Wait until the selected character is transferred to the input field before you enter the next character gt Use the OK soft key to load the text into the open dialog field Use the ABC ABC soft key to select upper or lower case If you
520. s PROBING gt Select the probing function Press the PROBING ies POS soft key gt Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point gt Use the soft keys to select the probe axis and direction in which you want to set the preset such as Z in direction Z gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt Datum Enter the nominal coordinate and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 500 gt To terminate the probe function press the END soft key the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 515 Manual operation and setup 14 10 Datum setting with 3 D touch probe option 17 Corner as datum PROBING gt Select the touch probe function Press the pp PROBING P soft key Y gt Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the first workpiece edge gt Select the probe direction by soft key gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine vet 5 START button gt Position the touch probe near the second touch _ X point on the same workpiece edge gt Start the probing procedure Press the machine START button gt Position the touch probe near the first touch point on the second workpiece edge gt Select the probe direction by soft key
521. s a numerical value Changing during program run You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed rate potentiometer F TNC 620 User s Manual 166 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Entering tool related data 5 1 Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rom in a TOOL CALL block tool call Instead you can also define the cutting speed Vc in meters per minute m min Programmed change In the part program you can change the spindle speed in a TOOL CALL block by entering the new spindle speed only gt Program a tool call Press the TOOL CALL key gt Ignore the dialog question for Tool number with the NO ENT key gt Ignore the dialog question for Working spindle axis X Y Z with the NO ENT key gt Enter the new spindle speed for the dialog question Spindle speed S and confirm with END or switch via the VC soft key to entry of the cutting speed Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed potentiometer S TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 167 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data 5 2 Tool data Requirements for tool compensation You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are dimensioned in the workpiece drawing To allow the TNC to calculate the tool center path i e the tool compensation you must also enter the length and
522. s the marked blocks in a different color You can end the marking function at any time by pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key Copy the selected program section Press the COPY BLOCK soft key Cut the selected program section Press the CUT BLOCK soft key The TNC stores the selected block Using the arrow keys select the block after which you wish to insert the copied cut program section M y To insert the section into another program select the corresponding program using the file manager and then mark the block after which you wish to insert the program section gt Insert the saved program section Press the INSERT BLOCK soft key gt To end the marking function press the CANCEL SELECTION soft key 108 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Opening programs and entering 3 2 The TNC search function The search function of the TNC enables you to search for any text within a program and replace it by a new text If required Finding any text gt Select the Search function The TNC Superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row gt Enter the text to be searched for e g TOOL Start the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for vanuar operation 3 Programming TNC nc_prog PGM 333 H BEGIN PCM 339 lal B
523. s to a rotation with Cycle 10 ROTATION The rotation angle is used to simply specify the direction of the principal axis of the working plane X for tool axis Z Z for tool axis Y see figure at bottom right Inout range 360 to 360 gt Continue with the positioning properties see Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE function page 429 NC block 5 PLANE PROJECTED PROPR 24 PROMIN 24 PROROT 30 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 PROMIN PROMIN 419 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 2 The PLANE function Tilting the working plane software option 8 Abbreviations used PROJECTED Projected PROPR Principle plane PROMIN Minor plane PROMIN Rotation Defining the working plane with the Euler angle PLANE EULER Application Euler angles define a machining plane through up to three rotations about the respectively tilted coordinate system he Swiss mathematician Leonhard Euler defined these angles When applied to the machine coordinate system they have the following meanings Precession angle Rotation of the coordinate system EULPR around the Z axis Nutation angle Rotation of the coordinate system EULNU around the X axis already shifted by the precession angle Rotation angle Rotation of the tilted machining plane EULROT around the tilted Z axis Before programming note the following Parameter description for the positio
524. s to be transferred Separate column names with a comma See examples O Table name defined with path and file parameters must be bound to all columns name entered here FROM table name Synonym or path and file name of this table The 20SQL Q5 SELECT synonym is entered directly the path name and MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM V TABLE TAB_EXAMPLE WHERE MEAS_NO lt 20 table name are entered In single quotation marks see examples of the SQL command names of the table columns to be transterred separate several columns by a comma see examples Q parameters must be bound to all columns entered here TNC 620 User s Manual 332 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Accessing tables with SQL commands 9 9 Optional WHERE selection criteria A selection criterion consists of a column name condition see table and comparator Link several selection criteria with logical AND or OR Program the comparative value directly or with a Q parameter A Q parameter is introduced with a colon and placed in single quotation marks see example Optional ORDER BY column name ASC for ascending sorting or ORDER BY column name DESC for descending sorting If you program neither ASC nor DESC ascending sorting is executed by default The TNC places the selected rows in the indicated column Optional FOR UPDATE keyword The selected rows are locked against write accesses from other processes Conditi
525. sation is active In the tool axis the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool tip and thus always takes the active tool length compensation into account The TNC keeps the soft key row for axis selection active until you deactivate it by pressing the actual position capture key again This behavior remains in effect even if you save the current block and open a new one with a path function key If you select a block element In which you must choose an input alternative via soft key e g for radius compensation then the TNC also closes the soft key row for axis selection The actual position capture function is not allowed if the tilted working plane function is active TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 105 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening programs and entering Editing a program You cannot edit a program while It is being run by the TNC in a machine operating mode While you are creating or editing a part program you can select any desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the arrow keys or the soft keys Soft key Function Go to previous page Go to next page A lt oO m 0 H Go to beginning of program gt m Z Oo Go to end of program I l Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed befo
526. sational Programming 2 2015 553 Test run and program run 16 5 Program run Moving the machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine axes during an interruption in the same way as in the Manual Operation mode Danger of collision If you interrupt program run while the working plane is tilted you can switch the coordinate system between tilted and non tilted as well as to the active tool axis direction by pressing the 3 D ROT soft key The functions of the axis direction buttons the electronic handwheel and the positioning logic for returning to the contour are then evaluated by the TNC When retracting the tool make sure the correct coordinate system is active and the angular values of the tilt axes are entered in the 3 D ROT menu if necessary Example Retracting the spindle after tool breakage gt Interrupt machining gt Enable the external direction keys Press the MANUAL TRAVERSE soft key gt Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons On some machines you may have to press the machine START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to enable the axis direction buttons Refer to your machine manual Resuming program run after an interruption If you cancel a program with INTERNAL STOP you have to start the program with the RESTORE POS AT N function or with GOTO 0 If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle the program must be resumed from the beginning
527. screen The TNC shows the layers in the list view window and the drawing in the graphics window TNC 620 User s Manual 258 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Basic settings The basic settings specified below are selected using the icons in the toolbar Icon DE tt EF WS 0 01 0 001 Setting Show or hide the list view window to enlarge the graphics window Display of the various layers Select the contour Select hole positions Set datum set the zoom to the largest possible view of the complete graphics Change the background color black or white Switch between 2 D and 3 D mode The active mode is colorhighlighted set the unit of measure mm or inches of the file The TNC then outputs the contour program and the machining positions in this unit of measure The active unit of measure is highlighted in red Set resolution The resolution specifies how many decimal places the TNC should use when generating the contour program Default setting 4 decimal places with mm and 5 decimal places with inch Switch between various perspectives in the drawing e g Top TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 DXF converter option 42 7 3 259 7 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 73 DXF converter option 42 The following icons are displayed by the TNC only in certain modes Icon Setting Contour assumption mode
528. ser s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 385 Programming Special functions 11 1 Overview of special functions Menu of various conversational functions can gt Select the menu for defining various o gt conversational functions 3 7 Cc zZ oO i H e uw TNC nc_prog 14 h BEGIN PGM 14 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 O uncon Description ee nn FUNCTION Define the positioning behavior page 445 AE unni Y 60 TCPM for rotary axes RCTI Define file functions page 395 FILE 19 L Z 100 RO FMAX M30 20 END PGM 14 MM iy Ca ee ETTOR Define the positioning behavior page 389 PARAX for parallel axes U V W ace ie STRING TRANSFORM FUNCTIONS ll m Define coordinate page 396 TRANSFORM i transformations TRINE Define string functions page 341 FUNCTIONS CAO Define dwell time page 409 FEED INSERT Add comments page 139 COMMENT TNC 620 User s Manual 386 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Active Chatter Control ACC option 145 11 2 11 2 Active Chatter Control ACC option 145 Application machine tool builder wo Refer to your machine manual Ld This feature must be enabled and adapted by the Strong milling forces come into play during roughing power milling Depending on the tool spindle speed the resonances in the machine tool and the chip volume metal removal rate during milling the tool can someti
529. set table 14 5 14 5 Datum management with the preset table Note vanua operation EBprogramming rn x a y he You should definitely use the preset table if m Your machine is equipped with rotary axes tilting table or swivel head and you work with the function for tilting the working plane ek iz me l lt ER 4 S 5 a m Your machine is equipped with a spindle head changing system 0 X Nm P1 T1 Up to now you have been working with older TNC som vin 14 20 controls with REF based datum tables You wish to machine identical workpieces that are fe differently aligned aiee SS PRESET J J The preset table can contain any number of lines datums To optimize the file size and the processing speed you should use only as many lines as you need for preset management For safety reasons new lines can be inserted only at the end of the preset table TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 485 Manual operation and setup 14 5 Datum management with the preset table Saving the datums in the preset table The preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table PRESET PR is editable in the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes only if the CHANGE PRESET soft key was pressed You can open the PRESET PR preset table in the Programming mode of operation but you cannot edit it It is perm
530. simulation speed Soft key Functions Perform the test run at the same speed at O which the program will be run programmed feed rates are taken into account LN Increase the simulation speed incrementally EEN Decrease the simulation speed incrementally an Test run at the maximum possible speed Q default setting You can also set the simulation speed before you start a program gt Select the function for setting the simulation speed gt Select the desired function by soft key e g incrementally increasing the simulation speed 9 O TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 537 Test run and program run 16 1 Graphics option 20 Overview Display modes In the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes as well as in the Test Run operating mode the TNC displays the following soft keys Soft key View im Plan view Projection in three planes Ei 3 D view The position of the soft keys depends on the selected operating mode The Test Run operating mode additionally offers the following views View Volume view Volume view and tool paths Tool paths Limitations during program run The result of the simulation can be faulty if the TNC s computer is overloaded with complicated processing tasks TNC 620 User s Manual 538 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Graphics option 20 16 1 3 D view Choose
531. smission 576 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Setting up data interfaces 17 10 Setting handshaking flowControl By handshaking two devices control data transfer between them A distinction is made between software handshaking and hardware handshaking No data flow checking NONE Handshaking is not active m Hardware handshaking RIS_CTS Transmission stop is active through RTS Software handshaking XON_XOFF Transmission stop is active through DC3 XOFF File system for file operations fileSystem In fileSystem you define the file system for the serial interface This machine parameter is not required if you don t need a special file system m EXT Minimum file system for printers or non HEIDENHAIN transmission software Corresponds to the EXT1 and EXT2 modes of earlier TNC controls FE1 Communication with the TNCserver PC software or an external floppy disk unit Block Check Character bccAvoidCtriChar With Block Check Character optional no control character you determine whether the checksum can correspond to a control character m TRUE The checksum does not correspond to a control character m FALSE The checksum can correspond to a control character Condition of RTS line rtsLow With Condition of RTS line optional you determine whether the low level is active in idle state m RUE Level is low in idle state m FALSE Level is not low
532. soft key row Pressing the key opens a soft key row as a Submenu To exit the submenu press the APPR DEP key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The respective soft key row remains selected when the Tile manager is exited Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The respective soft key row remains selected when the Tile manager is exited HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 iT NC 530 Permitted m Available m Available m Available m Available m Available m Synchronizes the cursor m Available m Available m Available m Slightly different Available Selection in a pop up window Pressing the key adds the soft key row as the last row To exit the menu press the SPEC FCT key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Pressing the key adds the soft key row as the last row To exit the menu press the APPR DEP key again then the TNC shows the last active soft key row Exits the respective menu Error message Key non functional Terminates the editing process and calls the file manager The basic soft key row is selected when the file manager is exited 639 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared Function Datum table Sorting function by values within an axis Rese
533. ssible to connect to the TNC and exchange data via a network or a serial connection e g with the TNCremo data transfer software Restricting external access In the MOD menu select the Machine settings group Select the External access menu Set the EXTERNAL ACCESS SOFT KEY TO OFF Press the OK soft key y v v Vy Entering traverse limits 7 The Traverse limits function must be enabled and adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual The MOD function Traverse limits enables you to limit the actually usable tool path within the maximum traverse range This enables you to define protection zones in each axis to protect a component from collision for example To enter traverse limits gt Inthe MOD menu select the Machine settings group gt Select the Traverse limits menu gt Enter the values of the desired axes as a reference value or load the momentary position with the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE soft key gt Press the APPLY soft key gt Press the OK soft key The protection zone becomes active automatically as soon as you set a limit in an axis Settings are kept even after restarting the control You can only deactivate the protection zone by deleting all values or pressing the CLEAR ALL soft key TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 569 MOD functions 17 3 Machine settings Tool usage file 7 The tool usage test fun
534. st each program block individually SINGLE Halt test run soft key only appears once you have started the test run STOP f E You can interrupt the test run and continue it again at any point even within a fixed cycle In order to continue the test the following actions must not be performed m Selecting another block with the arrow keys or the GOTO key Making changes to the program m Selecting a new program TNC 620 User s Manual 550 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 16 5 Program run Application In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to Its end or up to a program stop In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you must start each block separately by pressing the machine START button With point pattern cycles and CYCL CALL PAT the control stops after each point You can use the following TNC functions in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes Interrupt program run Start the program run from a certain block Optional block skip Edit the tool table TOOL T Checking and changing O parameters Superimposing handwheel positioning Functions for graphic simulation Additional status display TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Program run EJP rogram run full sequence TNC nc_prog PGM 113 h BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 2Z 0 TO
535. string parameter This enables you to chain numerical values with string variables gt Show the soft key row with special functions PROCRAH gt Open the function menu FUNCTIONS eye gt Select string functions FUNCTIONS select the STRING FORMULA function STRING FORMULA gt Select the function for converting a numerical TOCHAR E value to a string parameter M gt Enter the number or the desired Q parameter to be converted and confirm with the ENT key gt If desired enter the number of decimal places that the TNC should convert and confirm with the ENT key gt Close the parenthetical expression with the ENT key and confirm your entry with the END key Example Convert parameter Q50 to string parameter QS11 use 3 decimal places 37 QS11 TOCHAR DAT Q50 DECIMALS3 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 343 Programming Q parameters 9 11 String parameters Copying a substring from a string parameter The SUBSTR function copies a definable range from a string parameter SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions OR gt Open the function menu FUNCTIONS NG gt Select string functions FUNCTIONS STRING gt Select the STRING FORMULA function FORMULA gt Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the copied string Confirm with the ENT key gt Select the function for cutting out a substring gt Ent
536. support while another program is being run Automatic calculation of spindle speed cutting speed feed per tooth and feed per revolution 2 Motion control with minimum jerk 3 D tool compensation through surface normal vectors Using the electronic handwheel to change the angle of the swivel head during program run without affecting the position of the tool point TCPM Tool Center Point Management Keeping the tool normal to the contour Tool radius compensation perpendicular to traversing and tool direction Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes Feed rate in distance per minute Straight line Chamfer Circular path Circle center Circle radius Tangentially connected arc Corner rounding TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 User functions Approaching and departing the contour Free contour programming FK Program jumps Fixed cycles Coordinate transformation Q parameters Programming with variables Programming aids Teach In Program verification graphics TNC 620 User s Manual x X X X x X X X X Technical information 18 3 Via straight line tangential or perpendicular Via circular arc FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Subprograms Program section repeats Any desired program as subprogram Cycles for drilling and conventional and rigid
537. system DisplaySettings Format of NC programs and display of cycles Program input in HEIDENHAIN conversational text or in DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN Program input in BA MDI in conversational text dialog ISO Program input in Positioning with MDI mode of operation in DIN ISO TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 599 Tables and overviews 18 1 Machine specific user parameters Parameter settings DisplaySettings setting the NC and PLC dialog language NC dialog language ENGLISH GERMAN CZECH FRENCH ITALIAN SPANISH PORTUGUESE SWEDISH DANISH FINNISH DUTCH POLISH HUNGARIAN RUSSIAN CHINESE CHINESE TRAD SLOVENIAN KOREAN NORWEGIAN ROMANIAN SLOVAK TURKISH PLC dialog language See NC dialog language PLC error message language See NC dialog language Help language See NC dialog language TNC 620 User s Manual 600 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Machine specific user parameters 18 1 Parameter settings DisplaySettings Behavior with control start up Acknowledge Power interrupted message TRUE Control start up is not continued until the message has been acknowledged FALSE Power interrupted message not displayed DisplaySettings Display mode for time display selection for display mode in the time display Analog Digital Logo Analog and Logo Digital and Logo Analog on Logo Digital on Logo DisplaySettings Link row On Oft Display setting for link row OFF Deactiv
538. t M116 is effective in the working plane To reset M116 enter M117 M116 is also canceled at the end of the program M116 becomes effective at the start of block TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 437 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 4 Miscellaneous functions for rotary axes Shortest path traverse of rotary axes M126 Standard behavior L The behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes depends on the machine tool Refer to your E machine manual The standard behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose display has been reduced to values less than 360 is dependent on machine parameter shortestDistance 300401 This machine parameter defines whether the TNC should consider the difference between nominal and actual position or whether it should always even without M126 choose the shortest path to the programmed position Examples Actual position Nominal position Traverse 350 10 340 10 340 330 Behavior with M126 With M126 the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse for rotary axes whose display is reduced to values less than 360 Examples Actual position Nominal position Traverse 350 10 20 10 340 30 Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M126 enter M127 At the end of program M126 is automatically canceled TNC 620 User s Manual 438 HEIDENHAIN Conversational
539. t Enter the spindle speed Press the S soft key SPINDLE SPEED S gt Enter 1000 spindle speed and confirm your entry with the machine START button fl The spindle speed S with the entered rom is started with a miscellaneous function M Proceed in the same way to enter a miscellaneous function M Feed rate F After entering a feed rate F confirm your entry with the ENT key The following is valid for feed rate F f you enter F 0 then the lowest feed rate from the machine parameter manualFeed is effective m f the feed rate entered exceeds the value defined in the machine parameter maxFeed then the parameter value is effective F is not lost during a power interruption The control displays the feed rate TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 479 Manual operation and setup 14 3 Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M Adjusting spindle speed and feed rate With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed rate F from 0 to 150 of the set value 100 O BB 2 The override knob for spindle speed is only functional on machines with infinitely variable spindle drive 0 O gt DEE E lt iajial a 2 Activating feed rate limitation The feed rate limit depends on the machine Refer to your machine manual When the F LIMITED soft key is set to ON the TNC limits the maximum permissible axis speed to the safely limited
540. t Select datum shifting with TRANS DATUM RESET gt Select the soft key DATUM 398 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Creating text files 11 6 11 6 Creating text files Application You can use the TNC s text editor to write and edit texts Typical applications m Recording test results Documenting working procedures Creating formula collections Text files are type A files ASCII files If you want to edit other types of Tiles you must first convert them into type A Tiles Opening and exiting text files Vv select the Programming mode of operation To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key Display type A files Press the SELECT TYPE and then the SHOW A soft keys select a file and open it with the SELECT soft key or ENT key or create a new Tile by entering the new file name and confirming your entry with the ENT key vv Vv To leave the text editor call the file manager and select a file of a different file type for example a part program Soft key Cursor movements 2 lt m Move cursor one word to the right Z O a oO Move cursor one word to the left e oo aA lt om Go to next screen page Go to previous screen page EN oO m 0 H Go to beginning of file gt m o Go to end of file le TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 399 Programming Special functions 11 6 Cr
541. t file contents on the screen together by selecting the screen layout Lahey PROGRAM PALLET During execution the TNC then shows program blocks to the left and the pallet to the right To check the i program contents before execution proceed as follows gt Select a pallet table EJP rogram run single block A Progra single block gt With the arrow keys choose the program you would like to 0 X Nm T4 check 0 Y Nm 09 21 E EE 0 000 gt Press the OPEN PGM soft key the TNC displays the selected lal 2200 000 M 0 000 program on the screen You can now page through the program a Mose ro B o O o Bea i with the arrow keys es ee gt To return to the pallet table Press the OPEN PROGRAM soft key again Eeron sun aerate bioak TNC nc_prog P380 P a rom mo 7 D 7 a x 7 100 100 8 0 000 go all 200 000 0 0 000 m 240 000 i z mme _ oa 100 in Be E Sc cm nae mca TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 461 Manual operation and setup 14 1 Switch on switch off 14 1 Switch on switch off Switch on 7 Switch on and crossing over the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool lt gt Refer to your machine manual Switch on the power supply for TNC and machine The TNC then displays the f
542. t key F3 OK Datum setting gt Press the handwheel soft key F3 MSF gt Press the handwheel soft key F4 PRS gt If required select the axis in which the datum is to be set gt Reset the axis with the handwheel soft key F3 OK or with F1 and F2 set the desired value and then confirm with F3 OK By also pressing the CTRL key you can increase the counting increment to 10 Changing modes of operation With the handwheel soft key F4 OPM you can use the handwheel to switch the mode of operation provided that the current status of the control allows a mode change gt Press the handwheel soft key F4 OPM gt Select the desired operating mode by handwheel soft key MAN Manual Operation MDI Positioning with manual data input SGL Program run single block RUN Program run full sequence TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 477 Manual operation and setup 14 2 Moving the machine axes Generating a complete traversing block 7 Your machine tool builder can assign any function to the Generate NC block handwheel key Refer to your machine manual gt Select the Positioning with MDI operating mode gt If required use the arrow keys on the TNC keyboard to select the NC block after which the new traversing block is to be inserted gt Activate the handwheel gt Press the Generate NC block handwheel key The TNC inserts a complete traversing block contai
543. t run m aN E 550 Test Run OVET VIEW epee eee 547 test run Setting SHEE ecacasnenmii 537 JEKE File ccccceccsecseeeeeeeeen es 399 Text file Delete functions c ee 400 Finding text sections 402 Opening and exiting 399 Text variables 341 TIED AXES ccccccc cece eeeeeee en 440 Tilting the Working Plane 413 414 23 Tilting the working plane Manual onedsseteus ontaadionstebaamoncauttian 523 Tilting without rotary axes 434 TNCQUICe 0 cceeecec cece eeee eres 158 TNCTEM O eee eer ene 580 TNCremoON Mewtargtcesattasctucentncents 580 TOO CANO ainiai 184 Tool compensation 06 196 ESTO EEEE 196 Tool Compensation Bic 0 U e ene ene ere ea ee 197 Tool compensation Three dimensional 0 450 MOON CLAVE eorna Enn 168 62 eee eee re er ee 182 Delta ValU sS cccceeeeeeeeees 169 Entering into the program 169 Enter into the table 170 Tool data DIVER EI G A ts atnonent eastern 176 TOO NETO asicercixniartinsentindansebais 168 Tool management 188 Tool measurement 173 TOO NAE oiraseinaksnininriresanes 168 TOO NUMIDET cesacioscencsaieieeianp esas 168 TOOL WAC S orcas catnisetinieesietnetanccntteds 168 TOOLTADIE arisera ENEE 170 Edit POI aensteqateintasnesereecaceennt 174 Editing functions 176 191 192 INPUt OD TONS vcscennicescswatonatncsucne 170 Tool usage Til 0 186 570 TOO
544. t setting 4 decimal places with mm and 5 decimal places with inch switch between various perspectives in the drawing e g Top TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 255 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 73 DXF converter option 42 7 3 DXF converter option 42 Application DXF files can be opened directly by the TNC in order to extract contours or machining positions and save them as conversational programs or as point files Conversational programs acquired in this manner can also be run by older TNC controls since these contour programs contain only L and CC C blocks If you process DXF files in the Programming operating mode the TNC generates contour programs with the file extension H and point files with the extension PNT by default However you can choose the desired Tile type in the saving dialog Furthermore you can also save the selected contour or the selected machining positions to the clipboard of the TNC and then insert them directly in an NC program The file to be processed must be stored on the hard disk of your TNC Before loading the Tile to the TNC ensure that the name of the file does not contain any blank spaces or illegal special characters see File names page 112 The TNC supports the most common DXF format R12 equivalent to AC1009 The TNC does not support binary DXF format When generating the DXF file from a CAD or drawing
545. t the desired file Press the SHOW FILES soft key gt Use the arrow keys to select the file gt Transfer a single file Press the COPY soft key gt Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key A status window appears on the TNC informing about the copying progress or gt Stop transfer Press the WINDOW soft key The TNC displays the standard file manager window again TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 133 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 4 Working with the file manager The TNC in a network Wanuai operation Programing To connect the Ethernet card to your network see Ethernet interface page 582 oO aipae lt F Oo gelas The TNC logs error messages during network operation see Ethernet interface page 582 Mount Ano Type Drive D Server Share User Password Ask tor password Options If the TNC is connected to a network the left directory window displays additional drives see figure All the functions described above selecting a drive copying Tiles etc also apply to network drives provided that you have been granted the corresponding rights Ok Apply Cancel Mount Auto Connecting and disconnecting a network drive gt To select the program management Press the PGM MGT key If necessary press the WINDOW soft key to set up the screen as it is shown at the upper right gt To select the network settings Press the
546. t variable d Format for integer Separation character between output format and parameter End of block character n Line break 312 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Additional functions 9 8 The following functions allow you to include the following additional information in the protocol log file Keyword CALL_PATH M_CLOSE M_APPEND M_APPEND_MAX M_TRUNCATE L_ENGLISH L_GERMAN L CZECH L_FRENCH L_ITALIAN L_SPANISH L_SWEDISH L_DANISH L_FINNISH L_DUTCH L_POLISH L_PORTUGUE L_HUNGARIA L_ SLOVENIAN L_ALL TNC 620 User s Manual Function Indicates the path for the NC program where you will find the FN16 function Example Measuring program 5 CALL_PATH Closes the file to which you are writing with FN16 Example M_CLOSE Upon renewed output appends the log to the existing log Example M_APPEND Upon renewed output appends the log to the existing log until the maximum specified file size in kilobytes is exceeded Example M_APPEND_MAX20 Overwrites the log upon renewed output Example M_TRUNCATE Outputs text only for English conversational language Outputs text only for German conversational language Outputs text only for Czech conversational language Outputs text only for French conversational language Outputs text only for Italian conversational language Outputs text only for Spanish conversational language O
547. tapping Roughing of rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for pecking reaming boring and counterboring Cycles for milling internal and external threads Finishing of rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for clearing level and inclined surfaces Cycles for milling linear and circular slots Cartesian and polar point patterns Contour parallel contour pocket Contour train OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can also be integrated Datum shift rotation mirroring Scaling factor axis specific Tilting the working plane Advanced Function Set 1 Mathematical functions roots Logical operations lt gt Calculating with parentheses sin da cos a tan a arc sin arc cos arc tan a e In log absolute value of a number constant T negation truncation of digits before or after the decimal point Functions for calculation of circles String param Calculator Complete list of all current error messages Context sensitive help function for error messages TNCguide The integrated help system Graphic support for the programming of cycles Comment and structure blocks in the NC program Actual positions can be transferred directly into the NC program Graphic simulation before program run even while another program is being run HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 613 Tables and overviews 18 3 Technical information User functions Display modes X
548. tarting point of the second The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first Central angle CCA and arc radius R The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four arcs of the same radius Smaller arc CCA lt 180 Enter the radius with a positive sign R gt 0 Larger arc CCA gt 180 Enter the radius with a negative sign R lt 0 The direction of rotation determines whether the arc is curving outward convex or curving Inward concave Convex Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Concave Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL The distance trom the starting and end points of the arc diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc The maximum radius is 99 9999 m You can also enter rotary axes A B and C TNC 620 User s Manual 224 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Cartesian coordinates 6 4 Example NC blocks O O TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 225 Programming Programming contours 6 4 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Circle CT with tangential connection The tool moves on an arc that starts tangentially to the previously programmed contour element A transition between two contour elements Is called tangential when there Is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two contours the transition is smooth The conto
549. tches to that mode Sore RSTO Rie d Manua te pera tion Test run danera i ce Arteta AEE antares a ee as a oe Further information on this topic Operating modes of the TNC see Modes of operation page 73 esting programs see Test run page 548 Selecting the tool table for the test run You only need to execute this step if you have not activated a tool table in the Test Run mode PGM gt Press the PGM MGT key The TNC opens the file manager SELECT gt Press the SELECT TYPE soft key The TNC shows a soft key menu for selection of the file type to be displayed Press the DEFAULT soft key The TNC shows all hice saved files in the right window gt Move the highlight to the left onto the directories gt Move the highlight to the TNC table directory gt Move the highlight to the right onto the files gt Move the highlight to the file TOOL T active tool table and load with the ENT key TOOL T receives the status S and is therefore active for the test run END gt Press the END key Exit the file manager E v Further information on this topic m oo management see Enter tool data into the table page 170 m esting programs see lest run page 548 TNC 620 User s Manual 60 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Graphically testing the first part Advanced Graphic Features 1 4 software option Choosing the program you want to test gt Press the PGM MGT ke
550. te Name of the machine displaySpindleErr parameter Index List index of a machine O parameter if assigned If you are in the configuration editor for the user parameters you can change the display of the existing parameters In the default setting the parameters are displayed with short explanatory texts To display the actual system names of the parameters press the key for the screen layout key and then the SHOW SYSTEM NAME soft key Follow the same procedure to return to the standard display Each time you want to interrogate a machine parameter with the CFGREAD function you must first define a QS parameter with attribute entity and key The following parameters are read in the CFGREAD function s dialog m KEY_QS Group name key of the machine parameter TAG_QS Object name entity of the machine parameter ATR_QS Name attribute of the machine parameter m IDX Index of the machine parameter TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 349 Programming O parameters 9 11 String parameters Reading a string of a machine parameter In order to store the content of a machine parameter as a string in a OS parameter a gt Press the Q key gt Select the STRING FORMULA function gt Enter the number of the string parameter in which the TNC is to save the machine parameter Confirm with the ENT key gt Select the CFGREAD function gt Enter the numbers of the strin
551. ted axis changes in the program the resulting offset in the linear axes must be calculated and traversed in a positioning block Behavior with M128 TCPM Tool Center Point Management The machine geometry must be specified by the machine tool builder in the description of kinematics lt If the position of a controlled tilted axis changes in the program the position of the tool tip to the workpiece remains the same Caution Danger to the workpiece For tilted axes with Hirth coupling Do not change the position of the tilted axis until after retracting the tool Otherwise you might damage the contour when disengaging from the coupling After M128 you can program another feed rate at which the TNC will carry out the compensation movements in the linear axes If you wish to use the handwheel to change the position of the tilted axis during program run use M128 in conjunction with M118 Superimposing handwheel positioning is implemented with active M128 depending on the setting in the 3D ROT menu of the Manual Operation mode of operation in the active coordinate system or in the machine based coordinate system Before positioning with M91 or M92 and before a TOOL CALL RESET M128 To avoid contour gouging you must use only spherical cutters with M128 The tool length must refer to the spherical center of the tool tip If M128 is active the TNC shows the TCPM symbol in the status display TNC 620 Us
552. ted depends on whether INDEX is programmed m f INDEX is not programmed The result set is not written back to the table any changes insertions are discarded The transaction is closed and the handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses Its validity Typical application Ending a transaction solely containing read accesses f INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE remains for the indexed row For all other rows It is reset a gt Parameter no for result Q parameter in which ROLLBACK the SQL server has reported the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle gt Database SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT gt Database Index to SQL result Line that is to remain in the result set Either enter the row number directly or program the O parameter containing the index 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Y 14SQL BIND Q884 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_Z Z0SQL Q5 SELECT MEAS_NO MEAS_X MEAS_Y MEAS_Z FROM TAB_EXAMPLE 30 SQL FETCH Q1HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 40 SQL UPDATEQ1 HANDLE Q5 INDEX Q2 50 SQL COMMITQ1 HANDLE Q5 11SQL BIND Q881 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_NO 12SQL BIND Q882 TAB_EXAMPLE MEAS_X 13SQL BIND Q883 TAB_EXAM
553. ter them with respect to the last programmed M91 position If no M91 position is programmed in the active NC block then enter the coordinates with respect to the current tool position The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the machine datum Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF see Status displays page 76 X Z Y TNC 620 User s Manual 366 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Miscellaneous functions for coordinate data 10 3 Behavior with M92 Additional machine datum In addition to the machine datum the machine tool builder can also define an additional machine based position as a reference point For each axis the machine tool builder defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum Refer to your machine manual If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 Radius compensation remains the same in blocks that are programmed with M91 or M92 The tool length however is not compensated Effect M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are programmed M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block Workpiece datum If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the SET D
554. th the ENT key TNC 620 User s Manual 278 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Any desired program as subprogram 8 4 8 4 Any desired program as subprogram Overview of the soft keys If the PGM CALL key is pressed the TNC displays the following soft keys Soft key Function N Call a program with PGM CALL PROGRAM SELECT Select a datum table with SEL TABLE SELECT select a point table with SEL PATTERN POINT TABLE SELECT Select a contour program with SEL CONTOUR CONTOUR SELECT Select a program with SEL PGM PROGRAM CALL Select last selected file with CALL SELECTED PGM SELECTED PROGRAM TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 279 1 280 Operating sequence The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which another program is called with CALL PGM Then the other part program is run from beginning to end The TNC then resumes the first part program i e the calling program with the block after the program call If you want to program variable program calls in connection with string parameters use the SEL PGM function Programming notes The TNC does not need any labels to call any part program The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions M2 or M30 If you have defined subprograms with labels in the called part program you then need to replace M2 or M30 with the FN 9 IF 0 EQU 0 GOTO LBL 99 jump function to for
555. the BT Here you define the number of NC blocks 1 100 by which the automatic tool change may be delayed The resulting time period by which the tool change is delayed depends on the content of the NC blocks e g feed rate path If you do not define BT the TNC uses the value 1 or if applicable a default value defined by the machine manufacturer The more you increase the value of BT the smaller will be the effect of an extended program duration through M101 Please note that this will delay the automatic tool change To calculate a suitable output value for BT use the formula BT 10 Average machining time of an NC block in seconds Round up to the next odd integer If the calculated result is greater than 100 use the maximum input value of 100 If you want to reset the current age of a tool e g after changing the indexable inserts enter the value O in the CUR_TIME column Prerequisites for NC blocks with surface normal vectors and 3 D compensation The active radius R DR of the replacement tool must not differ from the radius of the original tool You can enter the delta values DR either in the tool table or in the TOOL CALL block If there are any deviations the TNC displays an error message and does not replace the tool You can suppress this message with the M function M107 and reactivate it with M108 See also Three dimensional tool compensation option 9 page 450 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAI
556. the TNC Configuring the TNC Configure the TNC as follows gt Select the Remote Desktop Manager menu item via the task bar gt Press the New connection button in the Remote Desktop Manager window gt Select the VNC menu item gt Specify the required connection information in the Edit connection window Setting Connection name Restarting after end of connection Automatic starting upon login Add to favorites Move to the following workspace Release USB mass memory Computer Password 88 Meaning Name of the connection in the Remote Desktop Manager Behavior with terminated connection Always restart m Never restart m Always after an error Ask after an error Connection automatically established during control powerup Connection icon in the task bar m Double click with left mouse button The control starts the connection m Single click with left mouse button The control changes to the desktop of the connection m Single click with right mouse button The control displays the connection menu Number of desktop for the connection whereby desktops 0 and 1 are reserved for the NC software Permit access to connected USB mass memory Host name or IP address of the external computer Password for connecting to the VNC server Input Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2
557. the Windows start button select the menu item System control via the task bar select the System menu item select the Advanced system settings menu item select the Remote tab v v v V In the Remote support area activate the function Permit remote support connection with this computer gt Inthe Remote desktop area activate the function Permit connections from computers on which any version of remote desktop is installed gt Confirm the settings via the OK button Configuring the TNC Depending on the operating system of your external computer and the protocol used In accordance with this select either Windows Terminal Service RDP or Windows Terminal Service RemoteFX Configure the TNC as follows gt After pressing the green HEIDENHAIN button select the menu item Remote Desktop Manager via the task bar gt Press the New connection button in the Remote Desktop Manager window gt Select the menu item Windows Terminal Service RDP or Windows Terminal Service RemoteF X gt Specify the required connection information in the Edit connection window TNC 620 User s Manual 86 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Setting Connection name Restarting after end of connection Automatic starting upon login Add to favorites Move to the following workspace Release USB mass memory Computer User name Password Windows domain Full screen mode or user defined window size Entries in the
558. the distance between tool and workpiece will be reduced After TOOL CALL the path of the tool in the spindle axis aS entered in the part program is adjusted by the difference between the length of the previous tool and that of the new one For tool length compensation the control takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value L DL tooL caLL DL Tap with L Tool length L trom TOOL DEF block or tool table DL tooL caL Oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL block DL yap Oversize for length DL in the tool table TNC 620 User s Manual 196 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tool compensation 5 3 Tool radius compensation The block for programming a tool movement contains RL or RR for radius compensation RO if there is no radius compensation The radius compensation is effective as soon as a tool is called and traversed with a straight line block In the working plane with RLor RR if yOu The TNC automatically cancels radius compensation mE program a Straight line block with RO m depart the contour with the DEP function program a PGM CALL m Select a new program with PGM MGT For radius compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value R DRyoo cary DR ag with R Tool radius R from TOOL DEF block or tool table DR T00L Oversize for radius DR
559. the page downward or upward if texts or graphics are not shown completely If the table of contents at left is active Open up the table of contents m f the text window at right is active No function If the table of contents at left is active Close the table of contents m f the text window at right is active No function m fthe table of contents at left is active Use the cursor key to show the selected page m t the text window at right is active If the cursor is on a link jump to the linked page If the table of contents at left is active switch the tab between the display of the table of contents display of the subject index and the full text search function and switching to the screen half at right m m f the text window at right is active Jump back to the window at left m fthe table of contents at left is active Select the entry above it or below it m f the text window at right is active Jump to next link Select the page last shown Page forward if you have used the select page last shown function Move up by one page Move down by one page a aig S S TNC 620 User s Manual 160 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 TNCguide context sensitive help system Function Display or hide table of contents Switch between full screen display and reduced display With the reduced display you can see some of the rest of the TNC window The focus is switched internally t
560. the tilted axes the status display shows the J symbol If you activate the Tilt working plane function for the Program Run operating mode the tilt angle entered in the menu becomes active in the first block of the part program If you use Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE or the PLANE function in the part program the angle values defined there are in effect Angle values entered in the menu will be overwritten To deactivate manual tilting To reset the tilting function set the desired operating modes in the menu Tilt working plane to inactive A programmed PLANE RESET only resets tilting in the Program Run not in manual operation 526 vanuar operation Position display MODE NOML X 0 000 Manual operation inactive M Z 0 B pe l amp o B 00 mm 0 3 0 X Nm P4 T5 0 Y Nm 08 03 CONFIRM OK CANCEL VALUE TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tilting the working plane option 8 14 11 Setting the current tool axis direction as the active machining direction EJF rogram run full sequence B Tane editing th Program run full sequence TNC nc_prog 113 H 7 This function must be enabled by your machine manufacturer Refer to your machine manual 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG10 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 111 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUS8 113 L Z 2 RO FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET 15 CYCL DEF 5 1 SET UP2 In the Manual Operati
561. the tool table In the CUR_TIME column the TNC enters the current tool life If the current tool life is higher than the value entered in the TIME2 column a replacement tool will be inserted at the next possible point in the program no later than one minute after expiration of the tool life The change is made only after the NC block has been completed The TNC performs the automatic tool change at a suitable point in the program The automatic tool change is not performed m During execution of machining cycles While radius compensation RR RL is active Directly after an approach function APPR Directly before a departure function DEP Directly before and after CHF and RND During execution of macros During execution of a tool change Directly after a TOOL CALL or TOOL DEF During execution of SL cycles Caution Danger to the workpiece and tool Switch off the automatic tool change with M102 if you are working with special tools e g side mill cutter because the TNC at first always moves the tool away from the workpiece in tool axis direction TNC 620 User s Manual 184 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Depending on the NC program the machining time can increase as a result of the tool life verification and calculation of the automatic tool change You can influence this with the optional input element BT block tolerance If you enter the M101 function the TNC continues the dialog by requesting
562. ting page 526 Danger of collision Be sure that the function for tilting the working plane is active in the Manual Operation mode and that the angle values entered in the menu match the actual angles of the tilted axis Deactivate the Tilt Working Plane function before you cross the reference points Take care that there is no collision Retract the tool trom the current position first If necessary Position display in a tilted system The positions displayed in the status window ACTL and NOML are referenced to the tilted coordinate system Limitations on working with the tilting function The actual position capture function is not allowed if the tilted working plane function is active PLC positioning determined by the machine tool builder is not possible TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 525 Manual operation and setup 14 11 Tilting the working plane option 8 To activate manual tilting gt To select manual tilting press the 3 D ROT soft key gt Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the Manual Operation menu item gt Enter the tilt angle END oO gt To activate manual tilting press the ACTIVE soft key gt Use the arrow keys to position the highlight on the desired rotary axis gt To conclude entry press the END key If the tilted working plane function is active and the TNC moves the machine axes in accordance with
563. tion mode can be ended If necessary follow the dialog gt Answer the confirmation request If the tool was not correctly retracted press the NO soft key If the tool was correctly retracted press the YES soft key The TNC hides the retraction dialog gt Initialize the machine if required scan the reference points gt Establish the desired machine condition if required reset the tilted working plane TNC 620 User s Manual 558 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Program run 16 5 Any entry into program mid program startup EQ Program zun TUE sequence Egtest run The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled and GA adapted by the machine tool builder Refer to your mo machine manual With the RESTORE POS AT N feature block scan you can start a part program at any block you desire The TNC scans the program n blocks up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated See If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP the 2200 00 2 008 TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid program oe Startup Mid program startup must not begin in a Subprogram All necessary programs tables and pallet files must be selected in the Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence operating modes status M If the program contains a programmed interruption before the startup block the block scan is interrupted Press the m
564. tions 11 8 Dwell time FUNCTION FEED DWELL Resetting dwell time NC block 18 FUNCTION FEED DWELL RESET Reset to the dwell time immediately following the machining with chip breaking Use FUNCTION FEED DWELL RESET to reset the recurring dwell time Proceed as follows for the definition gt Show the soft key row with special functions ae gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions ora gt Select the FUNCTION FEED soft key FEED RESET gt Select the RESET FEED DWELL soft key FEED DWELL You can also reset the dwell time by entering D TIME O The TNC automatically resets the FUNCTION FEED DWELL function at the end of a program TNC 620 User s Manual 410 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming Multiple axis machining 12 1 Functions for multiple axis machining 12 1 Functions for multiple axis machining The TNC functions for multiple axis machining are described in this chapter TNC function Description Page PLANE Define machining in the tilted working plane 413 M116 Feed rate of rotary axes 437 PLANE M128 Inclined tool machining 435 FUNCTION TCPM Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes 445 improvement of M128 M126 Shortest path traverse of rotary axes 438 M94 Reduce display value of rotary axes 439 M128 Define the behavior of the TNC when positioning the rotary axes 440 M138 selection of tilted axes 443 M144 Calculat
565. tions depends on the model quality selected You can select the model quality in the MOD function Graphic settings BR 00 00 10 30 F MAX BLANK WORKPIECE WORKPIECE TOOL FRAME EDGES TRANSPAR 1 i DEF on GFF on o on AH T bee aLock No By showing the tool paths you can depict the programmed paths of the TNC in three dimensions A powerful zoom function is available for recognizing details quickly In particular you can use the tool paths display to inspect programs created externally for irregularities before machining This can help you to avoid undesirable traces of the machining process on the workpiece Such traces of machining can occur when points are output incorrectly by the postprocessor The TNC shows traverse movements In rapid traverse in red TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 541 Test run and program run 16 1 Graphics option 20 Plan view Select the plan view in the Test Run operating mode gt Press the FURTHER VIEW OPTIONS soft key FURTHER VIEW OPTIONS gt Press the plan view soft key T elect the plan view in the Program Run Single Block and rogram Run Full Sequence operating modes gt Press the GRAPHICS soft key UW gt Press the plan view soft key will Projection in three planes The simulation shows three sectional planes and a 3 D model similar to a technical drawing Select projection in thr
566. tions for contour and point machining MENU si wccusctausoassauveteiwereenentevdeivenucradarnivecetsaaiodecietenteieers 385 Menu of various conversational TUNCTONS ccinstesceutstisuinsitivarlantndtos adisantonn ndawsndii nl saduibiasaswdosibonnawestiiwailaicebin 386 Active Chatter Control ACC Option 145 cccccssseccccssseeeccsseeeeecaseeeeecuseeeeeeaseeeeeueseeseeasseeseeaaess 387 PONG TO Eee EE EEE EEE E si E Meena a pied EA A E EE 387 Acade C TATTA E arar E E EE mens E eaten 388 Working with the parallel axes U V and W cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaessaeeesaanesaneessnees 389 VETI N E A E E E yseseimaevolsaunieeacuse 389 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP DISPLAY setscicsntcmsadoacntiontnsarcnsintnsueaiinantdaslentasetnnas hata dsanssinaraslonnpdpuiioslanensndinetnsaleoetesiats 390 FUNGTION PABAXCOMP MOVE sirere enire octane reseed ate ache esis a ai e 390 Deactivatino FUNCTION PARAXGCOMIP erideiten ete nde E n Ea i aa EEA DEE EEA e a Wei 391 FUNCTION PARAXMODE eeeneensnsnnennerrrrrnsrnsrrerrnrrrsrrarrsrr strt r rtr uote sadeaiiertataunsem sa monusaitasmamaccatdoowecbemomen 392 De activatno FUNCTION PARAXMOD as cence tera eel aE Ea a TA Aaaa a O 393 Example Drilling in the Vy aX Sieisen a A a aean iE E E Eni 394 aCA ea E E E E E tren ea toamenoee eine cst trecenenes 395 POMC 1110 DIISTER 399 OSR E TOO a A E E E E 395 DetinitiOn Of a datums NMa aa a E a A A a we see a A 396 OVT certs E E A EE E E E A A EA AE 396 TRANG DA
567. to be satme O interface integrated in your company network Only active if a second optional Ethernet interface is available on the control hardware Computer Name displayed for the TNC in your company wee gt name network A wthonzaton S Host file Only required for special applications Ai te ue cou Name of a file in which the assignments of IP addresses to computer names is defined gt Select the Interfaces tab to enter the interface settings 09 26 Setting Meaning BO lost foune LTNC nc_prog PGM H 1 OXF SA nc_prog Network settings BO demo Computername interfaces Intemet PingRousng NFS UIDIGID DHCP server 0O PGM 2 Actwe Name Connectors Conhguraton FH PGM3 X e0 X26 DHCP LAN Interface list List of the active Ethernet interfaces Select one of the listed interfaces via mouse or arrow keys Activate button Activate the selected interface an X appears in the Active column Deactivate button Deactivate the selected interface in the Active column Configuration button Open the configuration menu Allow IP This function must be kept deactivated forwarding Only activate this function if external access via the second optional Ethernet interface of the TNC is necessary for diagnostic purposes Only do so after instruction by our service Department TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 583 17 MOD functions 17 11 Ethernet int
568. ton will be displayed More information on how to use the Xarchiver function is provided under Help Please note that the TNC does not carry out any binary to ASCII conversion or vice versa when compressing or decompressing NC programs and NC tables When such files are transferred to TNC controls using other software versions the TNC may not be able to read them To exit Xarchiver proceed as follows gt Use the mouse to select the Archive menu item gt Select the menu item Quit The TNC returns to the file manager If you are not using a mouse proceed as follows to close the Xarchiver gt gt Press the key for switching the soft keys The Xarchiver opens the Archive pull down menu gt Select the Quit menu item and confirm with the ENT key The TNC returns to the file manager TNC 620 User s Manual 130 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the file manager 3 4 Displaying and editing text files To open and edit text files ASCII files e g with the extension txt en tx Search Optons Help use the internal text editor Proceed as follows Dapiac ares axe Tapzed e A peeciaion pe wig sro ove Tong pa Ain ticsOpt is an i rtant sores that heips you to rea uiti these c ex requirements A tol gt he r e you rej oa ay of a T ae ey ear the atts ra f veal ble ca x foe F gt Calling the File Manager rT BT a e su lution that you defi ne In the eyele I a EL the apa ayy MGT X
569. too small 1029 Pocket too small 1030 Q202 not defined 1031 Q205 not defined 1032 Q218 must be greater than Q219 1033 CYCL 210 not permitted 1034 CYCL 211 not permitted 1035 Q220 too large 1036 Q222 must be greater than Q223 1037 Q244 must be greater than 0 1038 Q245 must not equal Q246 1039 Angle range must be under 360 1040 Q223 must be greater than Q222 1041 Q214 0 not permitted 1042 Traverse direction not defined 1043 No datum table active 1044 Position error center in axis 1 1045 Position error center in axis 2 1046 Hole diameter too small 1047 Hole diameter too large 1048 Stud diameter too small 1049 Stud diameter too large 1050 Pocket too small rework axis 1 1051 Pocket too small rework axis 2 1052 Pocket too large scrap axis 1 1053 Pocket too large scrap axis 2 1054 Stud too small scrap axis 1 1055 Stud too small scrap axis 2 1056 Stud too large rework axis 1 1057 Stud too large rework axis 2 1058 TCHPROBE 425 length exceeds max 1059 TCHPROBE 425 length below min 1060 TCHPROBE 426 length exceeds max 1061 TCHPROBE 426 length below min 1062 TCHPROBE 430 diameter too large 1063 TCHPROBE 430 diameter too small TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 309 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions Error number 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086
570. tool radius gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LN soft key gt LEN Enter the distance of the end point Py Remember always enter LEN as a positive value Example NC blocks 23 L Y 20 RR F100 Last contour element PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LN LEN 20 F100 Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN 20 mm 25 L Z 100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z return to block 1 end program TNC 620 User s Manual 216 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Approaching and departing a contour 6 3 Departing on a circular path with tangential connection DEP CT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to the end point Py The circular arc connects tangentially to the last contour element gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP CT soft key gt Center angle CCA of the arc gt Radius R of the circular arc f the tool should depart the workpiece in the direction opposite to the radius compensation Enter R as a positive value f the tool should depart the workpiece in the direction opposite to the radius compensation Enter R as a negative value Example NC blocks 23 L Y 20 RR F100 Last contour element PE with radius compensation 24 DEP CT CCA 180 R 8 F100 Center angle 180 arc radius 8 mm 25 L Z 100
571. traversed with the F soft key see Spindle speed S feed rate F and miscellaneous function M page 479 If a traverse task is active on the machine the control displays the control in operation symbol TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 467 Manual operation and setup 14 2 Moving the machine axes Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a preset distance gt Select the Manual Operation or El Handwheel mode of operation gt Shift the sott key row gt Select incremental jog positioning Switch the INCREMENT soft key to ON JOG INCREMENT gt Enter the jog increment in mm and confirm with the ENT key gt Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired The maximum permissible value for infeed is 10 mm 468 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Moving the machine axes 14 2 Traverse with electronic handwheels The TNC supports traversing with the following new electronic handwheels m HR 520 Handwheel compatible for connection to HR 420 with display data transfer per cable m HR 550 FS Handwheel with display radio data transmission In addition to this the TNC continues to support the cable handwheels HR 410 without display and HR 420 with display Caution Danger to the operator and handwheel All of the handwheel connectors may only be
572. tside corners Behavior at circular arcs with M110 The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside contours only At outside contours the teed rate is not adjusted If you define M109 or M110 before calling a machining cycle with a number greater than 200 the adjusted feed rate is also effective for circular arcs within these machining cycles The initial state Is restored after finishing or aborting a machining cycle Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block To cancel M109 or M110 enter M111 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 373 Programming Miscellaneous functions 10 4 Miscellaneous functions for path behavior Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Miscellaneous Functions software option Standard behavior If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined with radius compensation the TNC interrupts program run and generates an error message M97 see Machining small contour steps M97 page 369 Inhibits the error message but this results In dwell marks and will also move the corner If the programmed contour contains undercut features the tool may damage the contour Behavior with M120 The TNC checks radius compensated paths for contour undercuts and tool path intersections and calculates the tool path in advance from the current block Areas of the contour that might
573. tting the table m Hiding axes that are not present Switching the list form view m Inserting individual line Transfer of actual position values in individual axis to the datum table per keystroke Transfer of actual position values in all active axes to the datum table per keystroke m Using a key to capture the last positions measured by TS FK free contour programming m Programming of parallel axes Automatic correction of relative references 640 TNC 620 m Available m Available m Available Switchover via split screen key m Allowed everywhere renumbering possible after request Empty line is inserted must be filled with zeros manually m Not available m Not available m Not available m With X Y coordinates independent of machine type switchover with FUNCTION PARAXMODE Relative references in contour subprograms are not corrected automatically ITNC 530 Not available m Not available m Available Switchover by toggle soft key Only allowed at end of table Line with value O in all columns is Inserted m Available m Available m Available m Machine dependent with the existing parallel axes All relative references are corrected automatically TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iTNC 530 compared 18 5 Function Handling of error messages Helo with error messages
574. ual display unit and operating panel 2 2 2 2 Visual display unit and operating panel Display screen The TNC is available either as a compact version or with a separate display unit and operating panel Both TNC variants come with a 15 inch TFT color flat panel display 1 Header When the TNC is on the selected operating modes are shown in the screen header the machining mode at the left and the programming mode at right The currently active operating mode is displayed in the larger box where the dialog prompts and TNC messages also appear unless the TNC is showing only graphics 2 Soft keys In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft key row You can select these functions by pressing the keys immediately below them The thin bars immediately above the sott key row indicate the number of soft key rows that can be called with the keys to the right and left that are used to switch the soft keys The bar representing the active soft key row Is highlighted 3 Soft key selection keys 4 Keys for switching the soft keys 5 Setting the screen layout 6 Shift key for switchover between machining and programming modes 7 Soft key selection keys tor machine tool builders 8 Keys for switching the soft keys for machine tool builders 9 USB connection gt D 208 0 I0 0o TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 71 Introduction 2 2 Visual display unit and operating p
575. ue for the tool length is assigned to Q114 The TNC remembers the current tool length even if the power Is Interrupted TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 353 Programming Q parameters 9 12 Preassigned Q parameters Coordinates after probing during program run The parameters Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindle position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement with the 3 D touch probe The coordinates refer to the datum point that is active in the Manual Operation mode The length of the stylus and the radius of the ball tip are not compensated in these coordinates Coordinate axis Parameter value X axis Q115 Y axis Q116 Z axis Q117 4th axis Q118 Machine dependent 5th axis Q119 Machine dependent Deviation between actual value and nominal value during automatic tool measurement with the TT 130 Deviation of actual from nominal value Parameter value Tool length Q115 Tool radius Q116 Tilting the working plane with mathematical angles rotary axis coordinates calculated by the TNC Coordinates Parameter value A axis Q120 B axis Q121 C axis 0122 TNC 620 User s Manual 354 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Preassigned Q parameters 9 12 Measurement results from touch probe cycles see also User s Manual for Cycle Programming Measured actual values Angle of a straight line Center in reference axis Center in minor axis
576. ull circle 860 or a circle segment angular length lt 360 TNC 620 User s Manual 496 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Using 3 D touch probes option 17 14 7 Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the hole inside circle or near the first touch point on the stud outside circle and select the soft key for the first probing direction Once you press the machine START button to start the touch probe cycle the TNC automatically performs all prepositioning movements and probing operations The TNC positions the touch probe to the individual touch points taking the safety clearance into account If a clearance height has been detined the TNC positions the touch probe to clearance height in the spindle axis beforehand The TNC approaches the position at the feed rate FMAX defined in the touch probe table The defined probing feed rate F is used for the actual probing operation Before starting the automatic probing routine you need to preposition the touch probe near the first touch point Offset the touch probe by approximately the safety clearance value trom touch probe table value from input form opposite to the probing direction For an inside circle with a large diameter the TNC can also preposition the touch probe on a circular arc at the positioning feed rate FMAX This requires that you enter a safety clearance for prepositioning and the hole diameter in the input form Position
577. um Z L d The TNC automatically saves the datum set with the axis keys in line O of the preset table TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 493 Manual operation and setup 14 6 Datum setting without a 3 D touch probe Using touch probe functions with mechanical probes or measuring dials If you do not have an electronic 3 D touch probe on your machine you can also use all the previously described manual touch probe functions exception calibration function with mechanical probes or by simply touching the workpiece with the tool see page 495 In place of the electronic signal generated automatically by a 3 D touch probe during probing you can manually initiate the trigger signal for capturing the probing position by pressing a key Proceed as follows PROBING gt Select any touch probe function by soft key POS ie gt Move the mechanical probe to the first position to be captured by the TNC Confirm the position Press the actual position capture soft key for the TNC to save the current position gt Move the mechanical probe to the next position to be captured by the TNC gt Confirm the position Press the actual position Ki capture soft key for the TNC to save the current position gt If required move to additional positions and capture as described previously gt Datum In the menu window enter the coordinates of the new datum confirm with the SET DATUM soft
578. umsats santeescarte aaeaeentenranacetesceracentirnertneetenmeraacnetacameeetie 90 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes and electronic handwheel 2 ccsccsessseeeeeees 91 3 D touch probes Touch Probe Functions software OPTION cccccccceceseceeeceee cess eeee ects eceaeeeaneeeneetanenanes 91 PA ee UI PLS Sls eeii A oN ENE a a ARNE fe dnsean iced ian ERA EE NE SEE 92 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 3 P MRUMGAMENTAIS tere conics eter cen cers corn ntecn tans ce anc ounastcosiec ines cer er ee tear scers orver acess A ceeetiereeca 94 POSITION CNCOGETS ANG reference TANKS fences win itairautsmizscserdlnccabaceseeenitte vines a AT Eaa aa Tiaa 94 FS TSS 59 E E areca cw uourociens bua ew saa se E 94 Reference system on milling Machines j ncotscssnasutareadeacs aanietienaeadunin n i a A 95 Designation of the axes on milling MACHINGS cccccccc cece cecec cece eeeeeeeeneeee estan seen eesneseseeeeneesaeeeneetaneeaness 95 PAT ee 016 NO enn en ee te ne ee ee re ee a eee eee er ee 96 Absolute and incremental workpiece POSITIONS cccccccc cece cee eececeee eee eee e cece eeeeeea seen eeseeeeeeneeeneeaneeneeeneeas 97 Selecting the CATUM cece ccc cecceecceeeee eee eee ce rrente rrt rt eee n estan sean eeeneeea estan eeaneeea estan eesnesegeseaeseaneesnestneseanees 98 3 2 Opening programs and entenng n a aaa a e E A 99 Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN conversationa
579. un functionality Function Test Run up to block N Entering a program with the GOTO key Calculation of machining time single block TNC 620 Function not available Function only possible if the START SINGLE soft key was not pressed Each time the simulation is repeated by pressing the START soft key the machining time is totaled With point pattern cycles and CYCL CALL PAT the control stops after each point Comparison Differences in Test Run operation Function Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys within the rows Zoom function Machine specitic miscellaneous functions M Displaying editing the tool table 3 D view Displays a transparent workpiece 3 D view Displays a transparent tool 3 D view Displays tool paths Adjustable model quality TNC 620 iT NC 530 Function available Function also possible after START SINGLE Each time the simulation Is repeated by pressing the START soft key time calculation starts at O Point pattern cycles and CYCL CALL PAT are handled by the control as a single block ITNC 530 Arrangement of soft key rows and soft keys varies depending on the active screen layout Each sectional plane can be selected by individual soft keys Lead to error messages if they are not integrated in the PLC Function available via soft key Available Available Available Available Comparison Differences in Manual Operation functionality Function Jog
580. unction Refer to your machine manual lt To prevent data from being lost at switch off you need to shut down the operating system of the TNC as follows gt Select the Manual Operation mode E l Select the function for shutting down gt Confirm with the SHUT DOWN soft key aa gt When the TNC displays the message Now you can switch off the TNC in a pop up window you may cut off the power supply to the TNC Caution Data may be lost Inappropriate switch off of the TNC can lead to data loss The control restarts after pressing the RESTART soft key Switch off during a restart can also result in data loss TNC 620 User s Manual 466 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Moving the machine axes 14 2 14 2 Moving the machine axes Note Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons can vary depending on the machine tool Refer to your machine manual Moving the axis with the machine axis direction buttons gt Select the Manual Operation mode Xt gt Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as long as you wish the axis to move or X gt Move the axis continuously Press and hold the machine axis direction button then press the machine START button ral gt Stop the axis Press the machine STOP button You can move several axes at a time with these two methods The control then shows the feed rate You can change the feed rate at which the axes are
581. ur element to which the tangential arc connects must be programmed immediately before the CT block This requires at least two positioning blocks ct p gt Coordinates of the arc end point and if necessary gt Feed rate F gt Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks 7 L X 0 Y 25 RL F300 M3 8 L X 25 Y 30 9 CT X 45 Y 20 10 L Y 0 A tangential arc is a two dimensional operation the coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element preceding it must be in the same plane of the arc TNC 620 User s Manual 226 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Cartesian coordinates 6 4 Example Linear movements and chamfers with Cartesian coordinates TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 227 Programming Programming contours 6 4 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Example Circular movements with Cartesian coordinates 5 30 40 70 J5 TNC 620 User s Manual 228 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Path contours Cartesian coordinates 6 4 Example Full circle with Cartesian coordinates TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 229 Programming Programming contours 6 5 Path contours Polar coordinates 6 5 Path contours Polar coordinates Overview With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of its angle PA and its distance PR relative to a previously detined pole CC
582. ure a wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as soon as the stylus is deflected This signal is transmitted to the control which stores the current position of the stylus as the actual value TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement The TT 140 is a triggering 3 D touch probe for tool measurement and inspection The TNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with which you can measure the tool length and radius either with the spindle rotating or stopped The TT 140 features a particularly rugged design and a high degree of protection which make it insensitive to coolants and swarf The triggering signal is generated by a wearresistant and highly reliable optical switch TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 91 Introduction 2 8 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes and electronic handwheels HR electronic handwheels Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 panel mounted handwheels HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel TNC 620 User s Manual 92 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 1 Fundamentals 3 1 Fundamentals Position encoders and reference marks The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register the positio
583. urity software package based on Mandatory Access Control MAC and protects the system against the running of unauthorized processes or functions and therefore protects against viruses and other malware MAC means that each action must be specifically permitted otherwise the TNC will not run it The software is intended as protection in addition to the normal access restriction in Linux Certain processes and actions can only be executed if the standard functions and access control of SELinux permit it The SELinux installation of the TNC is prepared to permit running of only those programs installed with the HEIDENHAIN NC software Other programs cannot be run with the standard installation The access control of SELinux under HEROS 5 is regulated as follows The TNC runs only those applications installed with the HEIDENHAIN NC software Files in connection with the security of the software SELinux system files HEROS 5 boot files etc may only be changed by programs that are selected explicitly New files generated by other programs must never be executed USB data carriers cannot be deselected There are only two processes that are permitted to execute new tiles Starting a software update A software update trom HEIDENHAIN can replace or change system files Starting the SELinux configuration The configuration of SELinux is usually password protected by your machine tool builder Refer here to the relevant
584. us R Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters only for 3 D radius compensation or graphical representation of a machining operation with spherical cutters Delta value for tool length L Delta value for tool radius R Delta value for tool radius R2 Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge cut in Cycles 22 and 208 Set tool lock TL for Tool Locked Number of a replacement tool if available as replacement tool RT for Replacement Tool also see TIME2 An empty field or input O means no replacement tool has been defined Maximum tool life in minutes This function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL If the current tool life reaches or exceeds this value the TNC changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see also CUR_TIME Current age of the tool in minutes The TNC automatically counts the current tool lite CUR_TIME for CURrent TIME A starting value can be entered for used tools TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Tooldata 5 2 Dialog Tool name Tool length Tool radius Tool radius 2 Tool length oversize Tool radius oversize Tool radius oversize 2 Maximum plunge angle Tool locked Yes ENT No NO ENT Replacement tool Maximum tool age Max tool age for TOOL CALL Current tool age 171 Programming Tools 5 2 A
585. ut This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing BJ Positioning with manl data input onc Bsta e movements such as for face milling or prepositioning Overview POM LBL CYO M POS TOOL TT TRANS QOPARA M C 0 BEGIN PGM SMDI MM Soft keys for selecting the screen layout l Toon oaut s 2 eseon Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE f Q201 20 DEPTH t R Soft key Window ance russe en aie sap a aaoo HIMAL Te Ar oe duct 2N0 lt UP CL Cc Pa i Program ie eee E rT 3 reheat sae ae ee J o LBL Os X Mm P4 T i f 7 7 os vim 13 48 PGM CALL icon PROGRAM Left program right status displa x Sao 0 000 p prog rg Play 54 549 0 0 000 SE STATUS 10 000 ee AW Mode NOML Po T 4 Bs 2000 fore ON F Omm min Ovr 100 M 6 9 o s T iQ atati inrait TOOL STATUS status oF p POSITION Left program right collision object Pera an E TE etn ea KINEMATICS TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 73 Introduction 2 3 Modes of operation Programming In this mode of operation you can write your part programs The FK free programming feature the various cycles and the Q parameter functions help you with programming and add necessary information If desired you can have the programming graphics show the programmed paths of traverse Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Soft key Window Program PROGRAM Left program right program structure ce PROGRAM
586. ut TNCremo 9 B io TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 579 MOD functions 17 10 Setting up data interfaces Data transfer software For transfer of files to and from the TNC we recommend using the HEIDENHAIN TNCremo data transfer software With TNCremo data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial interface or the Ethernet interface You can download the current version of TNCremo free of charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase www helidenhain de lt Documentation and Information gt lt Software gt lt Download area gt lt PC Software gt lt INCremo gt system requirements for TNCremo PC with 486 processor or higher Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 operating system 16 MB RAM 5 MB free memory space on your hard disk m An available serial interface or connection to the TCP IP network Installation under Windows gt Start the SETUPREXE installation program with the file manager Explorer gt Follow the setup program instructions Starting TNCremo under Windows gt Click on lt Start gt lt Programs gt lt HEIDENHAIN Applications gt lt TNCremo gt When you start TNCremo for the first time TNCremo automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC 580 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Setting up data interfaces 17 10 Data transfer between the TNC and TNCr
587. utputs text only for Swedish conversational language Outputs text only for Danish conversational language Outputs text only for Finnish conversational language Outputs text only for Dutch conversational language Outputs text only for Polish conversational language Outputs text only for Portuguese conversational language Outputs text only for Hungarian conversational language Outputs text only for Slovenian conversational language Display text independently of the conversational language HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 313 Programming Q parameters 9 8 Additional functions Keyword Function HOUR Number of hours trom the real time clock MIN Number of minutes from the real time clock gt Number of seconds from the real time clock DAY Day trom the real time clock MONTH Month as a number from the real time clock STR MONTH Month as a string abbreviation from the real time clock YEAR2 Two digit year from the real time clock YEAR4 Fourdigit year trom the real time clock In the part program program FN 16 F PRINT to activate the output 96 FN 16 F PRINT TNC MASKE MASKE1 A TNC PROT1 TXT The TNC then creates the file PROT1 TXT MEASURING LOG OF IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATE 27 09 2014 TIME 8 56 34 AM NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 X1 149 360 Y1 25 509 Z1 37 000 If you output the same Tile more than once in the program the TNC appends all texts to the end of the texts alrea
588. ve value gt Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks 7 L X 40 Y 10 RO FMAX M3 Approach PS without radius compensation 8 APPR LCT X 10 Y 20 Z 10 R10 RR F100 PA with radius compensation RR radius R 10 9 L X 20 Y 35 End point of the first contour element 10L Next contour element TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 215 Programming Programming contours 6 3 Approaching and departing a contour Departing in a straight line with tangential connection DEP LT The tool moves on a Straight line from the last contour point Pg to the end point Py The line lies on the extension of the last contour element Py is separated from Pe by the distance LEN gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LT soft key gt LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element Pe to the end point Py Example NC blocks 23 L Y 20 RR F100 Last contour element PE with radius compensation 24 DEP LT LEN12 5 F100 Depart contour by LEN 12 5 mm 25 L Z 100 FMAX M2 Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Departing in a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN The tool moves on a Straight line from the last contour point Pg to the end point Py The line departs on a perpendicular path from the last contour point Pe PN is separated from Pe by the distance LEN plus the
589. ve axis blinks gt Select the desired axis with the handwheel soft keys F1 gt or F2 lt and confirm with the handwheel soft key F3 OK Setting the handwheel sensitivity The handwheel sensitivity specifies the distance an axis moves per handwheel revolution The sensitivity levels are pre defined and are selectable with the handwheel arrow keys only when incremental Jog Is not active Selectable sensitivity levels 0 01 0 02 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 5 1 2 5 10 20 mm revolution or degrees revolution TNC 620 User s Manual 474 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Moving the machine axes 14 2 Moving the axes gt To activate the handwheel press the handwheel button on the HR 5xx You can now only operate the TNC via the HR 5xx and the TNC displays a pop up window with text on the TNC screen gt Select the desired operating mode via the OPM soft key if necessary gt If required press and hold the permissive button Use the handwheel to select the axis to be moved Select the additional axes via soft key If required gt Move the active axis in the positive direction or gt Move the active axis in the negative direction gt To deactivate the handwheel press the handwheel key on the HR 5xx Now you can operate the TNC again via the operating panel On E IE Vv Potentiometer settings The potentiometers of the machine operating panel continue to be active after you have activated the handwheel
590. versational Programming 2 2015 TNC 620 X X X X XI X XI X X recommended Cycle 247 ITNC 530 X X X X XI X XI X gt X lt 635 Tables and overviews 18 5 Functions of the TNC 620 and the iITNC 530 compared M112 M113 M114 M115 M116 M117 M118 M120 M124 M126 M127 M128 M129 M130 M134 M135 M136 M137 M138 M140 M141 M142 M143 M144 M145 M148 M149 M150 M197 M200 M204 636 Effect Enter contour transition between two contour elements Reset M112 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes Reset M114 Feed rate on rotary tables in mm min Reset M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate the radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Contour filter Shorterpath traverse of rotary axes Reset M126 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM Reset M128 Within the positioning block Points are referenced to the untilted coordinate system Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes Reset M134 Feed rate F in millimeters per spindle revolution Reset M136 selection of tilted axes Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Suppress touch probe monitoring Delete modal program information Delete basic rotation Compensating the machine s kinematic configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at en
591. w with the CSV files stored in the TNC systems tooltab directory gt Use the arrow keys or mouse to select the file to be imported and confirm with the ENT key The TNC shows the content of the CSV file in a pop up window gt Start import procedure with START soft key The CSV file to be imported must be stored in the TNC system tooltab directory If you import the tool data of tools whose numbers are in the pocket table the TNC issues an error message You can then decide whether you want to skip this data record or insert a new tool The TNC inserts a new tool into the first empty line of the tool table Make sure that the column designations are specified correctly see Enter tool data into the table page 170 You can import any tool data the associated data record does not have to contain all the columns or data of the tool table The column names can be in any order the data must be defined in the corresponding order TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 193 Programming Tools 5 2 Tool data Sample import file T L R DL DR Line 1 with column names 4 125 995 7 995 0 0 Line 2 with tool data 9 25 06 12 01 0 0 Line 3 with tool data 28 196 981 35 0 0 Line 4 with tool data Exporting tool data Using this function you can simply export tool data to read It into the tool database of your CAM system for example The TNC stores the exported Tile in the CSV format co
592. wer 27 3 Calculation 100 27 73 Distributive law Law of distribution with parentheses calculation a b c a bt a c TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 339 Programming O parameters 9 10 Entering formulas directly Programming example Calculate an angle with the arc tangent trom the opposite side Q12 and adjacent side Q13 then store in Q25 gt Select the formula entering function Press the C Q key and the FORMULA soft key or use the shortcut gt Press the Q key on the ASCII keyboard b eB PARAMETER NUMBER FOR RESULT gt Enter parameter number 25 and press the ENT key gt Shift the soft key row and select the arc tangent function gt Shift the soft key row and open the parentheses gt Enter Q parameter number 12 gt Select division gt Enter Q parameter number 13 gt Close parentheses and conclude formula entry NID O Example NC block 37 Q25 ATAN Q12 Q13 TNC 620 User s Manual 340 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 String parameters 9 11 String parameters String processing functions You can use the QS parameters to create variable character strings You can output such character strings for example through the FN 16 F PRINT function to create variable logs You can assign a linear sequence of characters letters numbers special characters and spaces up to a length of 255 characters to a string
593. with two vectors PLANE VECTOR j 0 ccc cccccccecceecceeeeeee seen eeea estan eeaneeenes 422 Defining the working plane via three points PLANE POINTS ccc cceccceccee cece esse este estan eeenesenenes 424 Defining the working plane via a single incremental spatial angle PLANE SPA IAL 426 Tilting the working plane through axis angle PLANE AXIAL 0cccccccecce cece eeeeeee nessun seen eeeneetaeseanees 427 Specifying the positioning behavior of the PLANE TUNCTION cece cece eeceeeceee este eee eeeaeeeaeeeaeeenaeeeas 429 Tilt the working plane without rotary GX CS ui fvasdniecivasiedla iuwiciwjesteurnslvnnovin ouinndeaslentiowblueskrkaanedind rt AantSaownfiatotarhsivanoeanddoaieniaa 434 12 3 Inclined tool machining in a tilted plane option Q ccccceseseeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeaseeeesaaseeessaaeeeees 435 ESE E eae ei E O A A E T E A EE A dies 435 Inclined tool machining via incremental traverse of a rotary AXIS cccceccc cece eeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeens 435 Inclined tool machining via normal vectorS essssiessusriesrerrrert etit trt r rrer e rE rE EEEE EEPEEPEEPEEEEEEEEE EE rrn 436 12 4 Miscellaneous functions for rotary AXES ccccceseeeeseeeseeceeeeeeeeeaseeaseseeeeeaneeeeeseeeeeneseeeseenseseesenenes 437 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 option 8 0 cecccecccecce acess seen seen eeeaeeeaeeean seen es 437 Shortest path traverse of rotary axes M
594. work configuration Setting Meaning DHCP server P addresses from Define the IP address as of which the TNC is to derive the pool of dynamic IP addresses The TNC transters the values that appear dimmed from the static IP address of the defined Ethernet interface these values cannot be edited IP addresses to Define the IP address up to which the TNC is to derive the pool of dynamic IP addresses m Lease Time hours Time within which the dynamic IP address is to remain reserved for a client If a client logs on within this time the TNC reassigns the same dynamic IP address Domain name Here you can define a name for the machine network if required This is necessary if the same names are assigned in the machine network and in the external network for example Forward DNS externally If IP Forwarding is active Interfaces tab and the option is active you can specify that the name resolution for devices in the machine network can also be used by the external network Forward DNS from outside f IP Forwarding is active Interfaces tab and the option is active you can specify that the TNC is to forward DNS inquiries trom devices within the machine network to the name server of the external network if the DNS server of the MC cannot answer the inquiry Status button Call an overview of the devices that are provided with a dynamic IP address in the machine network You can also select settings for
595. xes and rotary axes to the main axes Designation of the axes on milling machines The X Y and Z axes on your milling machine are also referred to as tool axis principal axis 1st axis and secondary axis 2nd axis The assignment of the tool axis is decisive for the assignment of the principal and secondary axes Tool axis Principal axis Secondary axis X Y Z Y Z X Z X Y TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 95 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 1 Fundamentals Polar coordinates If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates you also write the NC program using Cartesian coordinates For parts containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the dimensions in polar coordinates While the Cartesian coordinates X Y and Z are three dimensional and can describe points In space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a circle center CC or pole A position in a plane can be clearly defined by the Polar Radius the distance from the circle center CC to the position and the Polar Angle the value of the angle between the angle reference axis and the line that connects the circle center CC with the position Setting the pole and the angle reference axis The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes These coordinates also set the re
596. xis m RI Inside radius for a hollow cylinder The DIST and RI parameters are optional and do not need to be programmed TNC 620 User s Manual 100 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Opening programs and entering 3 2 Example Display the BLK FORM CYLINDER in the NC program Rotationally symmetric blank of any shape You define the contour of the rotationally symmetric blank in a subprogram Use X Y or Z as the rotation axis In the workpiece blank definition you refer to the contour description DIM_D DIM R Diameter or radius of the rotationally symmetrical blank form LBL Subprogram with the contour description The contour description may contain negative values in the rotation axis but only positive values in the reference axis The contour must be closed i e the contour beginning corresponds to the contour end The subprogram can be designated with a number an alphanumeric name or a OS parameter Example Display the BLK FORM ROTATION in the NC program TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 101 Programming Fundamentals file management 3 2 Opening programs and entering Opening a new part program You always enter a part program in the Programming mode of operation An example of program initiation gt Select the Programming mode of operation gt To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key select the directory
597. xis acceleration Compensation of TCP Tool Center Point Position Adaptive Control PAC option 142 Adaptive position control Changing of the control parameters depending on the position of the axes In the working space Changing of the control parameters depending on the speed or acceleration of an axis Load Adaptive Control LAC option 143 Adaptive load control Automatic determination of workpiece weight and frictional forces Changing of control parameters depending on the actual mass of the workpiece Active Chatter Control ACC option 145 Active chatter control Fully automatic function for chatter control during machining TNC 620 User s Manual 618 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Input format and unit of TNC functions Positions coordinates circle radii chamfer lengths Tool numbers Tool names Delta values for tool compensation Spindle speeds Feed rates Dwell time in Cycle 9 Thread pitch in various cycles Angle of spindle orientation Angle for polar coordinates rotation tilting the working plane Polar coordinate angle for helical interpolation CP Datum numbers in Cycle 7 Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26 Miscellaneous functions M Q parameter numbers Q parameter values Labels LBL for program jumps Labels LBL for program jumps Number of program section repeats REP Error number with Q parameter function FN14 TNC 620 User s Manual HEI
598. xis by performing a compensation movement in the associated principal axis For example if a parallel axis moves in the negative VV axis direction the principal axis Z simultaneously moves in the positive direction by the same value The relative distance from the tool to the workpiece remains the same Application in gantry type milling machine Retract the spindle sleeve to move the cross beam down simultaneously Proceed as follows for the definition SPEC gt Show the soft key row with special functions FCT TT gt Select the menu for defining various plain language FUNCTIONS functions Select FUNCTION PARAX FUNCTION PARAX v er gt Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP FUNCTION gt Select FUNCTION PARAXCOMP MOVE MOVE gt Define the parallel axis TNC 620 User s Manual 390 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Working with the parallel axes U V and W 11 3 Deactivating FUNCTION PARAXCOMP NC blocks 13 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF 13 FUNCTION PARAXCOMP OFF W After the TNC is started up the standard configuration is always effective The parallel axis function PARAXCOMP is automatically reset by the TNC with the following functions m Selection of a program PARAXCOMP OFF You must deactivate the parallel axis functions before switching the machine kinematics Use the PARAXCOMP OFF function to switch off the parallel axis functions PARAXCOMP DISPLAY and PARAXCOMP MOVE Proceed as follows for the definition
599. y The TNC opens the file manager Last gt Press the LAST FILES soft key The TNC opens a E pop up window with the most recently selected files gt Use the arrow keys to select the program that you want to test Load with the ENT key Further information on this topic m Selecting a program see Working with the file manager page 114 Selecting the screen layout and the view E gt Press the key for selecting the screen layout The TNC shows all available alternatives in the soft key row PROGRAM gt Press the PROGRAM GRAPHICS soft key In E the left half of the screen the TNC shows the program in the right half it shows the workpiece blank FURTHER gt Press the FURTHER VIEW OPTIONS soft key gt gt Shift the soft key row and select the desired view by soft key The TNC features the following views Soft keys Function Volume view Volume view and tool paths Tool paths Further information on this topic m Graphic functions see Graphics option 20 page 536 m Running a test run see Test run page 548 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 61 First steps with the TNC 620 1 4 Graphically testing the first part Advanced Graphic Features software option Starting the test run RESET gt Press the RESET START soft key The TNC ne simulates the active program up to a programmed break or to the program end gt While the simulation is running you c
600. y NOML commanded by the TNC Actual position current tool position ACTL Reference position the actual position relative REF ACTL to the machine datum Reference position the nominal position REF NOML relative to the machine datum servo lag difference between nominal and LAG actual positions following error Distance remaining to the programmed ACTDST position in the input system difference between actual and target positions Distance remaining to the programmed REFDST position with reference to the machine datum difference between reference and target positions Traverses that were carried out with M118 handwheel superimpositioning M118 With the MOD function Position display 1 you can select the position display in the status display With the MOD function Position display 2 you can select the position display in the additional status display 572 TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Displaying operating times 17 7 17 6 Setting the unit of measure Application This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or inches Metric system e g X 15 789 mm the value is displayed to 3 decimal places m Inch system e g X 0 6216 inches value is displayed to 4 decimal places If you would like to activate the inch display the TNC shows the feed rate in inch min In an inch program you must enter the feed rate
601. y obligatory The entry MA indicates that the machine is loaded with a pallet or fixture that can be machined The TNC only machines pallets or fixtures identified by MA To enter MA press the ENT key Press the NO ENT key to remove the entry LOCK entry optional Lock execution of a pallet line Press the ENT key to mark the execution of a pallet line as locked the affected line will be identified by Press the NO ENT key to cancel the lock You can lock the execution for individual programs fixtures or entire pallets Non locked lines e g PGM of a locked pallet will also not be executed TNC 620 User s Manual 458 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Pallet management option 22 13 1 Soft key Editing function select beginning of table oO m rg H 2 Select end of table select previous page in table select next page in table ane Insert as last line in the table LINE oc Delete the last line in the table LINE APPEND Add the number of lines that can be entered at N LINES the end of the table copy Copy highlighted field FIELD PASTE Insert copied field FIELD DODDOS BEGIN Select beginning of line r H Z m Select end of line HO 26 m COPY Copy the current value FIELD PASTE Insert the current value FIELD Dik EDIT Edit the current field CURRENT FIELD sort by content of column SORT MORE Additional functions e g saving FUNCTIONS T
602. y to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FLT soft key gt To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key gt To initiate the dialog press the FLT soft key gt Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 6 6 241 Programming Programming contours 6 6 Path contours FK free contour programming option 19 Free circular path programming Circular arc without tangential connection gt To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key gt To initiate the dialog for free programming of circular arcs press the FC soft key The TNC displays soft keys with which you can directly enter data on the circular arc or the circle center gt Enter all known data In the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data is entered If the entered data describes several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see FK programming graphics page 239 Circular arc with tangential connection If the circular arc connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FCT soft key gt To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key FCT gt To initiate the dialog press the FCT soft key gt Enter all known data in the block by using t
603. you want to select more contours press the TNC 620 User s Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 265 7 Programming Data transfer from CAD files 73 DXF converter option 42 The TNC also transfers two workpiece blank definitions BLK FORM to the contour program The first definition contains the dimensions of the entire DFX file The second one which is the active one contains only the selected contour elements so that an optimized size of the workpiece blank results The TNC only saves elements that have actually been selected blue elements which means that they have been given a check mark in the left window Dividing extending and shortening contour elements Proceed as follows to modify contour elements P gt The graphics window is active for the contour c Prog pleuel conrod DXF 2 dxf Jomi opta aa Ao amp GT 0 001 sa xe me 5 NINN amp selection x x x en gt To select the starting point Select an element or the intersection between two elements with the shift key A red star is shown as the starting point gt To select the next contour element Click the desired element with the mouse The TNC displays the machining sequence as a dashed Straight line When the element is selected the TNC displays it in blue If the elements cannot be connected the TNC displays the selected element in gray gt If further contour elements in the selected machining sequence
604. ystem REF coordinates press the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE SOFT KEY see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table page 501 With the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key the TNC can write the values measured during a touch probe cycle in a datum table gt Select any probe function gt Enter the desired coordinates of the datum in the appropriate input boxes depends on the touch probe cycle being run gt Enter the datum number in the Number in table input box gt Press the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE soft key The TNC saves the datum in the Indicated datum table under the entered number TNC 620 User s Manual 500 HEIDENHAIN Conversational Programming 2 2015 Using 3 D touch probes option 17 14 7 Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in the preset table Use this function if you want to save measured values in the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates If you want to save measured values in the workpiece coordinate system use the ENTER IN DATUM TABLE SOFT KEY see Writing measured values from the touch probe cycles in a datum table page 500 With the ENTER IN PRESET TABLE soft key the TNC can write the values measured during a probe cycle in the preset table The measured values are then stored referenced to the machine based coordinate system REF coordinates The preset table has the name PRESET PR and is saved in the directory TNC table gt

1096883-21 - heidenhain

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents